Manual de Servicio CLIA 900

CL-900i Series
Chemiluminescence Immunoassay
Analyzer
Service Manual
IVD Global Technical Support Dept
Preface
1
Product Instructions
Thank you for purchasing the CL-900i/CL-920i/CL-960i/CL-980i chemiluminescence

immunoassay analyzer.
Read this manual carefully before use, so as to use the product correctly. Keep this manual
properly for future reference.
Product name: chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzer

Model: CL-900i/CL-920i/CL-960i/CL-980i
Product structure and composition: The chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzer consists
of the analyzing unit, operation unit, output unit, accessories, and consumables. The analyzing
unit is composed of the sample handling system, reagent handling system, cuvette load and
transport system, sampling system, reaction liquid mixing system, dispersion system, substrate
system, optical measurement and reaction system. The operation unit is composed of a
computer, a display, a handheld bar code reader, and analyzer software (version: 08.00). The
output unit is a printer. Accessories and consumables include disposable cuvettes and the solid
waste container.
This product adopts the indirect chemiluminescence method based on the AMPPD and alkaline
phosphatase and is used in combination with associated test reagents. This product is clinically
used in the qualitative or quantitative testing of analytes in serum and plasma samples from
human bodies, including hormone, diabetes, myocardial markers, tumor markers, and items
relevant to infectious diseases.
The analyzer is used in conjunction with chemiluminescence immunoassay reagent bottles
produced by Mindray.
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Production address: No. 1203, Nanhuan Avenue, Guangming New Area, Shenzhen
Registrant name: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Domicile: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, High-tech Industrial Park, Nanshan,
Shenzhen 518057, P.R.China.
Production date: See product label
Service life: See product label
Preparation date of the manual: July 2021
Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)
owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may
refer to information protected by copyright or patents and does not convey any license under
the patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of others.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure
of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.
2
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other
derivative work of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.
, , , , BeneView, WATO,
BeneHeart, are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in China and other
countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for informational or
editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective owners.
3
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for
errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product, only
if:
 all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product
are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
 the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and
local requirements; and
 the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
WARNING
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment
to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan.
Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or personal injury.
NOTE
 This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical
professionals.
4
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other
charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the
improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by
Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.
 Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.
 Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or

unauthorized service people.
 Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.
 Others not caused by instrument or part itself.
Customer service department

Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, High-tech industrial
park, Nanshan, Shenzhen 518057,P.R.China
Website: www.mindray.com
E-mail Address: service@mindray.com
Tel: +86 755 81888998
Fax: +86 755 26582680
EC - Representative
EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)
Address: Eiffestraβe 80, 20537 Hamburg, Germany
Tel: 0049-40-2513175
Fax: 0049-40-255726
5
This manual contains the instructions necessary to operate the product safely and in
accordance with its function and intended use. Please read this manual thoroughly before using
the product. This manual is based on the maximum configuration and therefore some contents
may not apply to your product. If you have any questions, please contact us.
Observance of this manual is a prerequisite for proper performance and correct operation, and
it ensures patient’s and operator’s safety. All graphics including screens and printouts in this
manual are for illustration purpose only and must not be used for any other purposes. The
screens and printouts on the product should prevail.
6
Intellectual Properties
The intellectual properties of this manual and relevant products belong to Shenzhen Mindray
Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. (hereinafter referred to as "Mindray").
© 2018-2021 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved
No person or organization may copy, alter, or translate any part of this manual without written
consent of Mindray.
, , , , , , ,
, RealTF, TrackWB, TrueTCR, Q-pick, AutoOLC, iVision, DBF, DRF, RDA, DRA, DFS,
SyncNavi, GQ-Ana, One-touchIP, Holo-IS, Opt-VRA, SuperVE-Cine, NFP-DSC, iTouch,

iStation, BeneView, and SmarTemp are registered trademarks or trademarks of Mindray.
Statement
Mindray reserves the right to the final interpretation of this service manual.
Mindray is responsible for the safety, reliability, and performance of the product only when
all the following requirements are met:
The assembly operation, expansion, readjustment, improvement, and
repair are performed by professional personnel approved by Mindray.
All components used for replacement in the repair as well as supporting
accessories and consumables are from Mindray (original packaging) or
approved by Mindray.
Relevant electric equipment complies with national standards and
requirements in this service manual.
Product operations are performed in accordance with this service manual.
7
Warranty and Maintenance Service

The warranty period of purchased products is subject to sales contracts. Consumables refer to
disposable consumable materials that need to be replaced after each use or wearing parts that
need to be replaced regularly. There is no warranty for consumables.
The warranty period starts from the "installation date" written on the Equipment Warranty Card
delivered with the product. Equipment Warranty Card is the only voucher for determining
the warranty period. In order to safeguard your rights and interests, fill in the Equipment
Warranty Card after the equipment installation is completed, and provide the second copy of
the Equipment Warranty Card (retained by Mindray) to the installation personnel or mail it back
to Mindray Customer Service Department.
The following cases are not within the warranty scope:
A customer fails to complete or return the Equipment Warranty Card
within 30 days after the completion of equipment installation and
acceptance.
The equipment serial number provided by a customer is incorrect
(Mindray checks the warranty scope based on the equipment serial
number).
Free after-sales service is provided for products in the warranty period. However, if a product
needs to be repaired due to any of the following causes, Mindray will charge for the
maintenance service even within the warranty period, and you need to pay the maintenance
fee and accessories fee:
Man-made damage
Misoperation
The grid voltage is out of the specified range of the product
Irresistible natural disasters
Components or accessories not approved by Mindray are used for
replacement or used, or the maintenance is performed by personnel not
authorized by Mindray.
8
Faults not caused by the product itself
Equipment faults caused by the usage of consumables not approved by Mindray are not within
the maintenance scope of Mindray.
Mindray may provide charged maintenance service after the warranty period expires.
If you fail to pay for or delay paying for the charged maintenance service, Mindray will suspend
the maintenance service till you pay the fees.
After-sales Service Unit

Unit name: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, High-tech Industrial Park, Nanshan,
Shenzhen 518057, P.R.China.
Postal Code: 518057
Website: www.mindray.com
Service hotline: 4007005652
Tel: +86 755 81888998
Fax: +86 755 26582680
WARNING
This instrument can be operated and used only by test professionals, doctors,
or laboratory technicians trained by Mindray or Mindray agents.
NOTE
This service manual is intended for the following laboratory technicians:
 Personnel who carry out the daily operations of the system

 Personnel who carry out system maintenance and troubleshooting
 Personnel who learn system operations
9
Safety Information
This chapter provides you with safety symbols used in this manual and their meanings,
summarizes the safety hazards and operating precautions that should be considered seriously
when the instrument is being operated, and lists the labels and silkscreen that have been
applied to the instrument and their indications.
Safety Symbols
Safety symbols are used in this manual in order to remind you of the instructions necessary to
operate the product safely and in accordance with its function and intended use. The following
table lists the symbols used and their descriptions:
Symbol Description
Caution, risk of danger
Biohazard
10
Summary of Hazards
Introduction:
Observe the following safety precautions when using the product. Ignoring any of these safety
precautions may lead to personal injury or equipment damage.
WARNING
If the product is used in a manner not specified by our company, the
protection provided by the product may be impaired.
Electric Shock Hazards

Observe the following instructions to prevent electric shock.
WARNING
 When the POWER is turned on, users other than the servicing
personnel authorized by our company must not open the rear cover or
side cover.
 Spillage of reagent or sample on the product may cause equipment
failure and even electric shock. Do not place sample or reagent on the
panel of the analyzer. In case of spillage, switch off the power
immediately, remove the spillage and contact our Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.
Moving Parts Hazards

Observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by moving parts.
WARNING
 When the system is in operation, do not touch such moving parts as
probe, gripper, reagent carousel, incubation module, cuvette loader,
aspirate station and sample transportation part.
 Do not put your finger or hand into any open part when the system is
in operation.
11
Sample, Calibrator and Control Hazards
Observe the following instructions to protect against the biohazardous infection by samples,
calibrators and control samples.
BIOHAZARD
 Inappropriate handling of samples may lead to biohazardous infection.
Do not touch the samples, control samples, calibrators, substrate, wash
buffer, mixtures or waste with your bare hands. Wear gloves and lab coat,
if necessary, goggles.
 In case your skin contacts the sample, control or calibrator, follow the
standard laboratory safety procedure and consult a doctor.
Reagent and Wash Solution Hazards

Observe the following instructions to protect against the biohazardous infection by reagents
and wash solution.
WARNING
Reagents and concentrated wash buffers are corrosive to human skins.
Exercise caution when using reagents and concentrated wash buffer. In
case your skin or clothes contact them, wash them off with clean water. If
reagents or wash solution spills into your eyes, rinse it with water and
consult an oculist.
Waste Hazards
Observe the following instructions to prevent environmental pollution and personal injury
caused by waste.
BIOHAZARD
 Some substances contained in reagent, control, calibrator, substrate,
wash buffer and waste are subject to regulations of contamination and
disposal. Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national
rule for biohazard waste disposal and consult Mindray Customer Service
Department for details.
 Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
System Disposal Hazards

Observe the following instructions to dispose of the waste analyzer.
WARNING
Materials of the analyzer are subject to contamination regulations. Dispose
of the waste analyzer in accordance with your local or national rule for
waste disposal.
12
Fire and Explosion Hazards
Observe the following instructions to prevent fire and explosion.
WARNING
Ethanol is flammable. Please exercise caution while using ethanol around
the instrument in order to prevent fire and explosion.
Removal of Analyzer from Use for Repair or Disposal

To minimize or eliminate the hazards involved in repair, transportation, disposal process, please
observe
the following instruction:
WARNING
When the analyzer is not in use, for example, in repair, transportation or
disposal process, please clean and sterilize the parts (the probe, etc.) or
surfaces that may cause biohazdards and remind the person who handles
the device of the related hazards.
Changing Waste Tank
WARNING
When the waste tanks are used to hold the liquid waste, please empty the
waste tank before and after the test in order to avoid overflowing of the
liquid.
When changing the waste tank, please quickly place the waste tubing into
the empty one in order to prevent the waste liquid from dropping.
Electromagnetic Noise Precautions
CAUTION
The electromagnetic environment should be evaluated prior to operation of
the device.
Do not use this device in close proximity to sources of strong
electromagnetic radiation (e.g. mobile phones or radio transmitters), as
these may interfere with the proper operation.
This product meets the emission and immunity requirements specified in
GB/T 18268.1 and GB/T 18268.26.
The equipment is designed and tested as Class A equipment specified in
GB 4824. This device may cause radio interference in a domestic
environment , in which case, you may need to take measures to mitigate
the interference.
13
Do not install devices generating excessive electromagnetic noise around
the system. Do not use such devices as radio transmitters in the room
housing the system. Do not use other display monitors around the system.
Electromagnetic noise may interfere with operations of the system.
Do not use other medical instruments around the system that may generate
electromagnetic noise to interfere with their operations.
WARNING
It is the manufacturer's responsibility to provide equipment electromagnetic
compatibility information to the customer or user.
It is the user's responsibility to ensure that a compatible electromagnetic
environment for the equipment can be maintained in order that it will
perform as intended.
14
Precautions on Use
Introduction:
To use the product safely and efficiently, pay attention to the following operating precautions.
Installation Precautions
CAUTION
Evaluate the electromagnetic environment prior to operating the system.
Please install and operate the system in an environment specified by this
manual. Installing and operating the system in other environment may lead
to unreliable results and even equipment damage.
To relocate the system, please contact our Customer Service Department
or your local distributor.
Operating Precautions
CAUTION
 Analysis results only have reference values to doctors, and they cannot
be used to directly diagnose diseases. Take the clinical symptoms or
other test results of the patient into considerations when making a
diagnosis based on the measuring results produced by the system.
 Operate the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate

use of the system may lead to unreliable test results or even equipment
damage or personal injury.
 When using the system for the first time, first run calibrations, and then
QC tests to make sure the system is in proper state.
 Be sure to run QC tests every time when you use the system, otherwise
the result may be unreliable.
 Do not uncover the reagent carousel when the system is in operation.

 Keep the reagent carousel cover closed.
 The operation unit is a personal computer with the operating software
installed. Installing other software or hardware on the computer may
interfere with the system operation. Do not run other software when the
system is working.
 Computer virus may destroy the operating software or test data. Do not
use the computer for other purposes or connect it to the Internet. If the
computer is infected by virus, please install anti-virus software to check
for and clear virus.
 Do not touch the display, mouse or keyboard with wet hands or hands
with chemicals.
15
 Do not place the MAIN POWER to ON again within 10 seconds since
placing it to OFF; otherwise the system may enter the protection status.
If it does so, place the MAIN POWER to OFF and place it to ON again.
System Home
CAUTION
 Please do not pull out the drawer structures during Home process.
Maintenance and Servicing Precautions
CAUTION
 Maintain the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate
maintenance may lead to unreliable results, equipment damage or
personal injury.
 To wipe off dust from the system surface, use a soft, clean and wet (not
too wet) cloth soaked with soap water if necessary. After cleaning, wipe
the surface and dry with dry cloth.
 Switch off all the powers and disconnect the power plug before cleaning.
Take necessary measures to prevent liquid ingression; otherwise,
equipment damage or personal injury may be caused.
 Replacement of such major parts as probe and syringe assembly must
be followed by a calibration.
 The nominal service life of button batteries is five years. Replace the
batteries after an alarm indicating the battery expiration is generated.
 The aging and failure of some key components (optical measurement
assembly and optical coupler) may cause the deterioration of the
equipment performance and a fault alarm may be reported. Contact
customer service personnel for a check and replacement.
 The aging and failure of some key components (self-made two-way
valve, three-way valve, and syringe) may result in the failure of the
equipment to work properly. Contact customer service personnel for
replacement after the equipment has been used for five years.
 If the system fails and needs servicing, contact our Customer Service
Department or your local distributor. The system may need to be stopped
or transported during servicing, which will probably cause biohazards,
electric shock hazards and moving part hazards. Exercise caution when
preparing the system for servicing.
 Check the equipment status after repair. Make sure the equipment is
safe before offering it to users.
Sample Precautions
16
CAUTION
 Use samples that are completely free of insoluble substances like fibrin
or suspended matter; otherwise the probe may be blocked.
 Medicines, anticoagulants or preservative in the samples may lead to
unreliable results.
 Hemolysis may affect sample test result. Avoid using such samples or
re-collect the sample.
 Store the samples properly. Improper storage may change the
compositions of samples and lead to unreliable results.
 Do not leave the sample open for a long period. Sample volatilization
may lead to unreliable results.
 The system has a specific requirement on the sample volume. Refer to
this manual for proper sample volume.
 Load samples to correct positions on the sample carousel before the

analysis begins; otherwise reliable results may not be obtained. ;
 If liquids such as the reagent and sample are accidentally splashed

onto the surface of the equipment, clean the surface of the equipment in
accordance with the laboratory safety operation regulations. If a large
amount of liquid enters the equipment, contact Mindray Customer
Service Department or the local distributor for handling.
 Do not use a cleaning agent or disinfectant that may chemically react

with parts and components of the equipment or materials contained in
the equipment and cause hazards. For example, disinfection at a high
temperature (over 80 degrees centigrade) or using strong acid or strong
alkali for disinfection may cause damage.
 If you have doubts about the compatibility between the disinfectant or
cleaning agent and the parts and components of equipment or materials
contained in the equipment, consult the manufacturer or its agent.
17
Reagent, Calibrator and Control Precautions
CAUTION
 Use proper reagents, calibrators and controls on the system.
 Select appropriate reagents supplied by Mindray according to the
performance characteristics of the system. Consult our company or our
authorized distributor for details. Based on the reaction principle and
applicable scope of the reagents supplied by Mindray, other
chemiluminescence immunoassays can be performed on this instrument
as well.
 Store and use the reagents, calibrators and controls strictly as
instructed by our company; otherwise, reliable results or best
performance of the system may not be obtained.
 Improper storage of reagents, calibrators and controls may lead to
unreliable results and bad performance of the system even in validity
period.
 Perform calibration and QC test after changing the reagents, otherwise
reliable results may not be obtained.
Sample Handling System
BIOHAZARD
Do not take away the sample carousel from the feeder system during test
running to prevent skin damage or infection due to contact with the moving
parts.
CAUTION
Do not push sample carousel in the lane during test running. Beware of
pinching.
NOTE
When programming samples in non-bar code mode, please confirm that
the program information matches the sample ID, so as to avoid result error
due to sample being omitted or too many samples being placed on the
rack.
Data Archiving Precautions
18
NOTE
The system automatically stores the data to the built-in hard disk. Data
loss, however, is still possible due to mis-deletion or physical damage of
the hard disk. You are recommended to regularly archive the data to such
medium as CDs.
To avoid data loss caused by unexpected power failure, a UPS
(uninterrupted power supply) is recommended.
External Equipment Precautions
WARNING
For operating instructions and precautions of the computer and printer,
please refer to their operation manuals. External equipment connected to
the analogue and digital interfaces must be complied with relevant safety
and EMC standards (e.g., IEC 60950 Safety of Information Technology
Equipment Standard and CISPR 22 EMC of Information Technology
Equipment Standard (CLASS B)). Any person, who connects additional
equipment to the signal input or output ports and configures an IVD system,
is responsible for ensuring that the system works normally and complies
with the safety and EMC requirements. If you have any questions, consult
the technical services department of your local representative.
Tube and Liquid Container Precautions
WARNING
When the tube or the part that contains liquid becomes aged or damaged,
please stop its use immediately and contact our customer service
department or your local distributor to check and replace it.
Loading Cuvette
NOTE
Before loading the cuvettes, please use a pair of new gloves and do not
use the gloves which have contacted with the reagent bottle or sample.
Please do not remove the package of the cuvettes until you are about to
load them.
Human scurf may affect the test results. Please avoid dropping the scurf
into the cuvettes when loading them.
19
Instrument Labels and Silkscreen

Introduction:
The following non-warning and warning labels and silkscreen are used on the product for
system identification and operating instruction.
Check the labels regularly for cleanliness and integrity. If any of the labels becomes vague or
peels off, contact our Customer Service Department or your local distributor for replacement.
Non-Warning Labels and Silkscreen

Serial Number
This symbol, contained in the product label which is attached to the rear cover of the system,
indicates the production serial number of the product.
Date of Manufacture
indicates the manufacture date of the product.
In Vitro Diagnostic Equipment

indicates that the product is in vitro diagnostic equipment.
Environment-friendly Use Period

indicates that the product will neither cause serious pollution to the environment nor incur
serious damage to persons or properties for a period of 20 years under normal operating
conditions.
20
CE Mark
indicates that the product has passed the CE safety certification.
Power supply requirements

This symbol located above the power socket indicates the power supply requirements.
Power Switch
This symbol is located on the right side of the power switch. When the power switch is turned
upward, the power supply is turned on and the equipment starts running. When the power
switch is turned downward, the power supply is turned off.
Network Interface
This symbol located on the right side of the network interface indicates the connection between
the analyzer and the operation unit.
Electrical Ground
This symbol indicates an electrical ground.
Service Label
This symbol located on the right side of the equipment contains the equipment serial number,
serial number QR code, official account, service hotline, and Mindray official website.
21
Scan QR code to
request repair service
For more services, please follow our
WeChat official account: Mindray
Customer Service Center.
Serial No.: RJ-36102421

Service hotline:
400 700 5652
Cloud Service Label

This symbol located at the rear side of the equipment indicates that the equipment supports
Mindray cloud service.
Mindray cloud service
Reagent Usage Description

This label located near the reagent carousel indicates the reagent loading/unloading method.
Substrate Label
This label located near the substrate loading area indicates the correct substrate
loading/unloading method. Do not remove the cover after placing a substrate bottle. Loosen
the cover for about half a turn. Tighten the cover before taking out the substrate bottle.
Interfaces for fluid connection

This label located on the fluid connection interfaces indicates the connection of fluid tubing.
The fluidic interfaces for standard configuration are shown as follows:
22
Wash buffer 1 Waste sensor Waste 1
Wash buffer 2 Waste 2
Warning Labels
BIOHAZARD
This label indicating the risk of biohazardous infection is located in the following positions:
Analyzer Waste Outlet
Near Cuvette Waste Container
Moving Parts Warning

This symbol and text indicating the hazardous moving parts are located in the following
positions: (please do not touch the identified moving parts while the system is running)
Beside Gripper
WARNING
Do not touch any moving
part when the system is
running.
Probe Collision Warning

This symbol and text located on the lower left corner of the reagent carousel remind you of not
opening the carousel cover and track cover to prevent from damaging the sample probe.
NOTE
Probe collision warning. Do
not open the carousel cover
while the system is in
operation.
Shielding Cover Warning

This symbol and text located on the X-axis housing of gripper, reminds you of keeping the
shielding cover closed while the system is running tests to prevent injury caused by probes and
various liquids.
NOTE
Keep the shielding cover closed while the
system is running.
Electric Shock Warning

This symbol and text indicating electric shock hazards are located in the metal sheet of the
power box.
23
WARNING
Electric Shock
Hazards
Electric Shock Warning (Wire Label)

This symbol and text indicating electric shock hazards are located in:
Each of the AC input wire of the power assembly
Power input wire of the system (inside the equipment)
Incubation block AC wire
WARNING: Electric
Shock Hazards!
Laser Warning
This symbol and text indicating laser radiation from Class 2 laser product are located on the
panel of the reagent carousel.
WARNING
Laser beams. Do not
look directly at the
Class 2 laser product.
1.0 mW 650nm
Classification standard: GB7247.1-2012
Date of release: December 31, 2012
24
Names and Content Identification of Hazardous Substances or
Elements
Item Hazardous Substance or Element
Lead Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Polybrominated Polybrominated

(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) Chromium Biphenyl Diphenyl
(Cr(VI)) (PBB) Ethers
Incubation Module Assembly ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Reagent carousel assembly ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Dispensing assembly ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Syringe assembly ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Rack ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○
Metal shell ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○
Plastic shell ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Pump, valve ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Liquid tubing and connector ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Hydropneumatic subsystem ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Heater ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Refrigerate refrigeration ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
assembly
Fan ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
PCB × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Switch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Motor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Wire ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Optical detection system ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
Optical disc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ indicates that the content of the hazardous substance in all the homogeneous materials used in the
component is lower than the limit stipulated in SJ/T11363-2006.
x indicates that the content of the hazardous substance in at least one of the homogeneous materials
used in the component exceeds the limit stipulated in SJ/T11363-2006.
25
Permissions and SN
User Permissions
 Engineer username: serviceuser Password: #BS8A#SEU
Note: After logging into the analyzer using the engineer on a client, remember to switch
back to the account of engineer.
26
Table of Contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................... 1
Product Instructions ............................................................................................................ 2
Safety Information ............................................................................................................ 10
Summary of Hazards ......................................................................................................... 11
Precautions on Use .......................................................................................................... 15
Instrument Labels and Silkscreen ............................................................................. 20
Non-Warning Labels and Silkscreen ......................................................................... 20
Warning Labels ......................................................................................................... 23
Names and Content Identification of Hazardous Substances or Elements .............. 25
Permissions and SN ................................................................................................................ 26
Table of Contents ..................................................................................................................... 27
1 System Description .......................................................................................................... 39
1.1 Overview................................................................................................ 39
1.2 Analyzing Unit ....................................................................................... 40
1.3 Hardware structure ................................................................................ 41
1.3.1 System Overview ............................................................................................. 41
1.4 System specification .............................................................................. 43
1.4.1 Common Indices .............................................................................................. 43
1.4.2 Sample Indices ................................................................................................. 44
1.4.3 Reagent Indices ............................................................................................... 46
1.4.4 Reaction Indices ............................................................................................... 46
1.4.5 Operating Indices ............................................................................................. 47
1.4.6 Environment ..................................................................................................... 47
1.4.7 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Unpacking ..................................... 48
1.4.8 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Installation .................................... 48
1.4.9 Power and Noise .............................................................................................. 48
1.4.10 Drainage Check (if draining water through a sewer) ..................................... 49
1.4.11 Recommended PC Configuration .................................................................. 49
1.4.12 Configuration Check....................................................................................... 50
1.4.13 Optional modules ........................................................................................... 50
1.5 Test Procedure ...................................................................................... 50
1.5.1 Operating Procedure ........................................................................................ 51
1.5.2 Working mode .................................................................................................. 51
1.6 Analysis Mode ....................................................................................... 52
1.6.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 52
1.6.2 One-Step Method ............................................................................................. 53
1.6.3 Two-step Method .............................................................................................. 53
1.7 Operation procedure ............................................................................. 55
1.7.1 Startup .............................................................................................................. 55
1.7.2 Shutdown ......................................................................................................... 56
1.7.3 Exception Handling .......................................................................................... 57
27
1.7.4 Emergency Stop............................................................................................... 57
1.7.5 Before Test ....................................................................................................... 58
1.7.6 After Test .......................................................................................................... 59
1.7.7 Home ................................................................................................................ 60
2 Analyzer system ............................................................................................................... 62
2.1 Whole Unit ............................................................................................. 62
2.1.1 Component Locations and FRU Details........................................................... 63
2.1.2 Cleaning Dust Screens at the Bottom of the Whole Unit ................................. 63
2.2 Shells Assembly .................................................................................... 63
2.2.1 Module Functions and Composition Introduction ............................................. 63
2.2.3 Removing the Transparent Cover .................................................................... 65
2.2.4 Disassembling the Front Vertical Plate ............................................................ 65
2.2.5 Disassembling the Top Cover .......................................................................... 67
2.2.6 Disassembling the Right Front Cover Substrate Silk Screen (BM50) ............. 68
2.2.7 Disassembling the Desktop Shells Assembly .................................................. 69
2.2.8 Disassembling the Lower Right Cover ............................................................. 70
2.2.9 Disassembling the Lower Left Cover ............................................................... 71
2.2.10 Disassembling the Rear Panel ....................................................................... 72
2.2.11 Replacing the Front Left Door and Door Hinge .............................................. 72
2.2.12 Replacing Indicator Board of Front Vertical Plate BM50 and Reflective Optical
coupler....................................................................................................................... 74
2.2.13 Replacing the Dust Screen of Rear Panel ..................................................... 75
2.3 Frame Assembly .................................................................................... 76
2.3.1 Module Functions ............................................................................................. 76
2.3.3 Replacing the Spikes of Substrate Assembly .................................................. 78
2.3.4 Replacing the Substrate Assembly .................................................................. 80
2.3.5 Replacing the Power Assembly ....................................................................... 81
2.3.6 Replacing the Board Assembly ........................................................................ 82
2.3.7 Replacing the Hot-End Fan .............................................................................. 83
2.3.8 Replacing the Door Latch ................................................................................ 84
2.3.9 Replacing the Network Interface Conversion Board PCBA ............................. 85
2.4 Sample Liquid Mixing System ............................................................... 87
2.4.1 Mixing Assembly Position and FRU Details ..................................................... 87
2.4.2 Replacing Mixing and Washing Assemblies .................................................... 88
2.4.3 Replacing the Correlative Optical Coupler Connection Line at the Initial Position
of Mixing .................................................................................................................... 89
2.5 Sampling System .................................................................................. 91
2.5.1 System Composition and Introduction ............................................................. 91
2.5.2 Sample probe drive assembly .......................................................................... 91
2.5.3 Replacing the Spring Guide Post and Anti-Collision Spring ............................ 93
2.5.4 Replacing the Swab D2 ................................................................................... 94
2.5.5 Replacing the Level Sense Board .................................................................... 95
28
2.5.6 Replacing the Sample Probe Assembly ........................................................... 98
2.5.7 Replacing the Vertical Optical coupler ............................................................. 99
2.5.8 Replacing the Vertical Engaged Pulley .......................................................... 100
2.5.9 Replacing the Vertical Synchronous Belt ....................................................... 102
2.5.10 Replacing the Vertical Motor Assembly........................................................ 104
2.5.11 Replacing the Damping Plate ....................................................................... 105
2.5.12 Replacing the Optical coupler of Horizontal Code Disk ............................... 107
2.5.13 Replacing the Optical coupler on Horizontal Home Position ....................... 108
2.5.14 Replacing the Horizontal Engaged Pulley ................................................... 109
2.5.15 Replacing the Horizontal Synchronous Belt ................................................. 110
2.5.16 Replacing the Horizontal Motor Assembly .................................................... 111
2.6 Sample Reagent Handling System ...................................................... 114
2.6.1 System Composition and Introduction ............................................................ 114
2.6.2 Sample Reagent Carousel Assembly ............................................................. 114
2.6.3 Component Positions of Desktop Shells and FRU Details ............................ 120
2.6.4 Replacing Built-in Bar Code Reader .............................................................. 120
2.6.5 Replacing the Sample Carousel Optical coupler ........................................... 122
2.6.6 Replacing the sensor for opening and closing cover ..................................... 123
2.6.7 Replacing the cold-end fan assembly ............................................................ 124
2.6.8 Replacing the Cold-End Temperature Sensor ............................................... 127
2.6.9 Replacing the Reagent Pot Code Disk Optical coupler ................................. 128
2.6.10 Replacing the Motor Pulley Assembly.......................................................... 129
2.6.11 Replacing the Synchronous Belt .................................................................. 131
2.6.12 Replacing the Reagent Carousel Home Position Optical coupler ............... 132
2.6.13 Replacing the Sample Carousel Motor Assembly and Damping Plate ........ 134
2.6.14 Replacing the Deep Groove Ball BearingФ20XФ32X7 ................................ 135
2.6.15 Replacing the Deep Groove Ball Bearing 60X78X10 .................................. 137
2.6.16 Replacing the Sample Carousel Teeth and Sample Carousel Guide Shaft
Assembly ................................................................................................................. 140
2.6.17 Replacing the Sample Carousel Assembly .................................................. 141
2.6.18 Replacing the Scanning Window Assembly ................................................. 142
2.7 Cuvette loading system ....................................................................... 144
2.7.1 Function Module Introduction ......................................................................... 144
2.7.2 Gripper Module .............................................................................................. 144
2.7.3 Replacing Correlative Optical Coupler (S) ..................................................... 145
2.7.4 Replacing the Y-Axis Engaged Pulley ............................................................ 147
2.7.5 Replacing the Y-FPC Connecting Plate PCBA .............................................. 147
2.7.6 Replacing the Y-Axis Motor Pulley ................................................................. 148
2.7.7 Replacing the X-FPC Connecting Plate PCBA .............................................. 150
2.7.8 Replacing the Track Switching Motor Pulley .................................................. 151
2.7.9 Replacing the X-Axis Engaged Pulley ........................................................... 153
2.7.10 Replacing the BM10 Optical Coupler Conversion Board with Socket ......... 154
2.7.11 Replacing the Z-Axis Relieving Spring ......................................................... 156
2.7.12 Replacing the Z-FPC Connecting Plate PCBA ............................................ 157
29
2.7.13 Replacing the Vertical Anti-Collision Spring ................................................. 158
2.7.14 Replacing the First Gripper Assembly.......................................................... 160
2.7.15 Replacing the Finger Clamping Spring ........................................................ 161
2.7.16 Replacing the BM10 Double Optical Coupler Conversion Board PCBA ..... 162
2.7.17 Replacing the Empty Gripping Optical Coupler Conversion Board PCBA of the
BM10 First Gripper .................................................................................................. 164
2.7.18 Replacing the Finger Positioning Spring ...................................................... 165
2.7.19 Cuvette loading module ............................................................................... 166
2.7.20 Replacing the Drawer Slide ......................................................................... 166
2.7.21 Replacing the Optical coupler ...................................................................... 168
2.7.22 Replacing the Electromagnet ....................................................................... 169
2.7.23 Replacing the Drawer Stopper Plate Button Switch and Reflective Optical
Coupler .................................................................................................................... 170
2.8 Dispersion system ............................................................................... 172
2.8.1 Dispersion Mechanical Module ...................................................................... 172
2.8.2 Replacing the Aspirate Positioning Correlative Optical Coupler Conversion
Line/Correlative Optical Coupler Conversion Line (S) ............................................ 174
2.8.3 Replacing the Correlative Optical Coupler Conversion Line/Correlative Optical
Coupler Conversion Line (S) of Dispersion Chamber And Drive Assembly ........... 175
2.8.4 Replacing the Motor Pulley and Synchronous Belt ........................................ 177
2.8.5 Replacing the Deep Groove Ball Bearing ...................................................... 179
2.8.6 Replacing the Dispersion Aspirate Probe/Dispense Probe Locking
Nut/Pretightening Spring ......................................................................................... 181
2.8.7 Replacing the Dispersion Lifting Motor .......................................................... 182
2.8.8 Replacing the Dispersion Dispense Probe/Dispense Syringe ....................... 183
2.8.9 Replacing the Swab ....................................................................................... 184
2.8.10 Replacing the Screw Nut Group .................................................................. 185
2.9 Incubation Photometric System........................................................... 187
2.9.1 Overview of the Incubation Photometer System ............................................ 187
2.9.2 Incubation Module Assembly ......................................................................... 188
2.9.3 Replacing the Incubation Module Assembly .................................................. 189
2.9.4 Replacing the Heat Insulation Ring of Photometer ........................................ 191
2.9.5 Replacing the Optical Assembly .................................................................... 192
2.9.6 Photometer Diagnosis .................................................................................... 194
2.9.7 Dark Count Diagnosis .................................................................................... 195
2.9.8 Photometric Count Diagnosis ........................................................................ 195
2.9.9 DCF Diagnosis ............................................................................................... 196
2.9.10 Waste Drainage Mechanical Module ........................................................... 197
2.9.11 Replacing the Optical coupler ...................................................................... 199
2.9.12 Replacing the Waste Drainage Motor Assembly.......................................... 200
2.9.13 Replacing the Synchronous Belt .................................................................. 201
2.9.14 Replacing the Waste Discharge Probe ........................................................ 203
3 Temperature Control System ......................................................................................... 205
3.1 Temperature Control of Incubation Photometric Module ..................... 205
30
3.1.2 Assembly Locations and FRU Details ............................................................ 206
3.1.3 Block Diagram of Incubation Block Temperature Control .............................. 207
3.1.4 Replacing the Incubation Module Assembly .................................................. 207
3.2 Reagent Refrigeration Unit .................................................................. 208
3.2.2 Assembly Locations and FRU Details ............................................................ 209
3.2.3 Block Diagram of Reagent Refrigeration Control ........................................... 210
3.2.4 Replacing the Radiator................................................................................... 210
4 Hardware system ........................................................................................................... 213
4.1 Overview.............................................................................................. 213
4.2 Summary of Hazards ........................................................................... 213
4.3 PCB ..................................................................................................... 213
4.3.1 PCB ID and function overview list .................................................................. 213
4.4 PCB position ........................................................................................ 215
4.5 Removing the PCB .............................................................................. 215
4.6 Hardware Function Block Diagram ..................................................... 216
4.7 PCB functions ...................................................................................... 217
4.7.1 Main control board ......................................................................................... 217
4.7.2 Main control interface board .......................................................................... 222
4.7.3 Power supply conversion board ..................................................................... 228
4.7.4 Indicator Board ............................................................................................... 231
4.7.5 Level sense board .......................................................................................... 232
4.7.6 Liquid check board ......................................................................................... 234
4.7.7 Network interface conversion board .............................................................. 235
4.7.8 FPC conversion board ................................................................................... 237
4.7.9 BM20 optical coupler conversion board ......................................................... 245
4.8 Connection Diagram of the Whole Unit ............................................... 249
5 Fluidics system............................................................................................................... 257
5.1 Overview.............................................................................................. 257
5.2 Principles of Hydropneumatic System ................................................ 257
5.2.1 Sampling Fluidic Module ................................................................................ 257
5.2.2 Dispersion fluidic module ............................................................................... 259
5.2.3 Substrate Dispensing Module ........................................................................ 260
5.2.4 Liquid Check Module...................................................................................... 261
5.2.5 Introduction of Fluidic Actions ........................................................................ 262
5.2.6 Re-Installing the Sampling Fluidic Module ..................................................... 265
5.2.7 Re-Installing the Dispersion Fluidic Module ................................................... 278
5.2.8 Replacement of the Substrate Dispensing Module ........................................ 280
5.2.9 Replacing the Constant Delivery Pump of Substrate ..................................... 281
5.2.10 Replacing the LVM Valve Assembly ............................................................. 283
5.2.11 Re-installing the Liquid Check Module ......................................................... 284
5.2.12 Syringe List .................................................................................................. 287
5.2.13 Valve Pump List ........................................................................................... 287
31
5.2.14 Sensor list .................................................................................................... 289
5.2.15 Catheter Joint List ........................................................................................ 289
5.2.16 Hydropneumatic System Diagram ............................................................... 290
6 Software ......................................................................................................................... 292
6.1 Software Installation ............................................................................ 292
6.1.1 Introduction to Software Package Files ......................................................... 292
6.1.2 System Check Before Complete Installation of Operating Software ............. 293
6.1.3 Complete Installation Steps of Operating Software ....................................... 299
6.2 Backup and Restore the parameters and the database ..................... 302
6.2.1 Backing up the Parameters ............................................................................ 302
6.2.2 Restoring the Parameters .............................................................................. 302
6.2.3 Modifying Parameters .................................................................................... 303
6.2.4 Data Backup................................................................................................... 305
6.3 Software Upgrade ............................................................................... 305
6.3.1 Operating Software Upgrade ......................................................................... 305
6.3.2 Upgrading Control Software of Analyzer ........................................................ 307
6.4 Software Description ............................................................................ 311
6.4.1 Folder Structure .............................................................................................. 311
6.4.2 Log Files ......................................................................................................... 313
6.4.3 Alignment Tool File ......................................................................................... 313
6.4.4 Software Auto Start ........................................................................................ 313
6.4.5 Software Running Parameters ....................................................................... 314
6.4.6 Normal Software Startup Process .................................................................. 315
6.4.7 Log Copy Path ............................................................................................... 316
6.4.8 Backing up and recovering the database....................................................... 316
6.5 Software Uninstallation ........................................................................ 316
6.5.1 Uninstalling CL-900i Software: ....................................................................... 316
6.5.2 Uninstalling SQL Database ............................................................................ 316
6.6 Demo Software Setup ......................................................................... 317
6.6.1 Startup and Shutdown of Demo Software ..................................................... 317
6.6.2 Use of Demo Software ................................................................................... 319
6.7 Comparison of User Permissions ........................................................ 324
7 Alignment Guideline ....................................................................................................... 326
7.1 Tools/Auxiliary Materials ...................................................................... 326
7.1.1 Scope ............................................................................................................. 326
7.1.2 List of Equipment Tools .................................................................................. 326
7.1.3 Fixture Diagram .............................................................................................. 327
7.1.4 Excipient List .................................................................................................. 327
7.2 Flow Block Diagram of Alignment Procedure ...................................... 328
7.3 Preparations ........................................................................................ 329
7.3.1 Alignment Precautions ................................................................................... 329
7.3.2 Powering on the Analyzer .............................................................................. 329
7.3.3 Installing the Operation Software(Optional) ................................................... 330
7.3.4 Screen Description ......................................................................................... 330
32
7.3.5 Process Alignment Screen ............................................................................. 331
7.4 Backup and Restore of Parameters .................................................... 333
7.5 Dispersion System Alignment.............................................................. 333
7.5.1 Carousel Rotary Position Compensation ....................................................... 334
7.5.2 Probe Position Compensation When Aspirating ............................................ 336
7.5.3 Extreme Position Inspection of Aspirating Vertical Mechanism ..................... 337
7.6 Incubation Module Temperature Alignment ......................................... 338
7.6.1 Incubation module temp. calibration .............................................................. 338
7.6.2 Attachment - Instructions for use of FLUKE thermometer 1524: ................... 340
7.7 Photometer System Alignment ............................................................ 342
7.7.1 Vertical position of the shielding cover ........................................................... 343
7.7.2 PMT Parameter Setup ................................................................................... 345
7.7.3 PMT Initialiation .............................................................................................. 345
7.8 Dispensing System Alignment ............................................................. 346
7.8.1 Checking the Probe........................................................................................ 349
7.8.2 Coplanar Alignment of the Probe and the Mixer ............................................ 350
7.8.3 HP of Probe Mixing Position 1 ....................................................................... 351
7.8.4 HP of Probe Mixing Position 2 ....................................................................... 351
7.8.5 HP of Probe Wash Well .................................................................................. 352
7.8.6 HP of Probe Disk Ra Position ........................................................................ 352
7.8.7 HP of Probe Disk Rb Position ........................................................................ 354
7.8.8 HP of Probe Disk Rc Position ........................................................................ 354
7.8.9 HP of Probe Disk Rd Position ........................................................................ 354
7.8.10 HP of Probe Sample Position ...................................................................... 355
7.8.11 Bar code scanner initialization...................................................................... 356
7.8.12 Bar Code Scanner Position Alignment ......................................................... 356
7.8.13 Reagent Carousel Bar Code Scanning Check ............................................ 356
7.8.14 Sample Carousel Bar Code Scanning Check .............................................. 357
7.8.15 Vertical home position of the probe .............................................................. 358
7.8.16 VLP of Probe to Reagent Carousel .............................................................. 359
7.8.17 VLP of Probe to Sample Position ................................................................. 360
7.9 Transport System Alignment ............................................................... 361
7.9.1 Electromagnet check for cuvette box ............................................................. 363
7.9.2 Finger’s Home Position .................................................................................. 363
7.9.3 HP of Discarding Position .............................................................................. 364
7.9.4 HP of the right cuvette box ............................................................................. 365
7.9.5 HP of the left cuvette box ............................................................................... 365
7.9.6 HP of Incubation Module ................................................................................ 366
7.9.7 HP of Dispersion Carousel IO Outlet ............................................................. 367
7.9.8 HP of Mixing Position 1 .................................................................................. 367
7.9.9 HP of Mixing Position 2 .................................................................................. 368
7.9.10 HP of Substrate Mixing Position .................................................................. 368
7.9.11 HP of Waste Drainage Position .................................................................... 368
7.9.12 HP of Photometer Position ........................................................................... 369
33
7.9.13 VP of right cuvette box position ................................................................... 370
7.9.14 VP of left cuvette box position ...................................................................... 371
7.9.15 VP of Incubation Module .............................................................................. 371
7.9.16 VP of Dispersion IO Outlet ........................................................................... 371
7.9.17 Vertical position of the mixing position ......................................................... 372
7.10 HydroSystem ....................................................................................... 372
7.10.1 Preparations for Fluidics Alignment ............................................................. 372
7.10.2 Cleaning and Priming Substrate Tubes ....................................................... 373
7.10.3 Floater Check ............................................................................................... 383
7.10.4 Vacuum Pressure Check.............................................................................. 383
7.10.5 Waste Drainage Tube Check ....................................................................... 384
7.10.6 Sample Probe Wash Tube Check ................................................................ 386
7.10.7 Check Hydraulic Pressure on Sample Probe Aspirating and Draining ........ 389
7.10.8 Dispersion Aspirate Tube Check .................................................................. 391
7.10.9 Check dispersion wash tube ........................................................................ 393
7.10.10 Check dispersion dispensing tube ............................................................. 397
7.10.11 Prime wash buffer tubes ............................................................................. 400
7.11 Mechanical Position Alignment............................................................ 405
7.11.1 VLP of probe to mixing position 1 ................................................................ 405
7.11.2 VLP of probe to mixing position 2 ................................................................ 406
7.12 Disassembly and Assembly of Cover, Shell and Components ........... 407
7.12.1 Disassembly and Assembly of Transparent Shielding Cover ...................... 407
7.12.2 Disassembly and Assembly of Front Vertical panel Assembly .................... 408
7.12.3 Disassembly and Assembly of Reagent Aspirating Plate ............................ 409
7.13 Other Checks....................................................................................... 409
7.13.1 Mechanical Reset of the Whole Unit ............................................................ 409
7.13.2 Indicator Check ............................................................................................ 409
7.13.3 Optical couplers Check ................................................................................. 411
7.13.4 Whole Unit Discarding Cuvette .................................................................... 412
7.13.5 Linked Cuvette Gripping .............................................................................. 413
7.13.6 Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Check ................................................. 414
8 Installation Guide ........................................................................................................... 415
8.1 Before Installation ................................................................................ 415
8.1.1 Environment ................................................................................................... 415
8.1.2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Unpacking ................................... 415
8.1.3 Configuration Check....................................................................................... 418
8.2 Instrument Installation ......................................................................... 418
8.2.1 Tools ............................................................................................................... 418
8.2.2 Installation Procedure .................................................................................... 419
8.3 Power on and alignment...................................................................... 433
8.3.1 Preparation for Powering On ......................................................................... 433
8.4 Initial Startup........................................................................................ 434
8.5 Fluidic Prime ........................................................................................ 435
8.6 Original Parameter Backup ................................................................. 437
34
8.7 Main Unit Position Confirmation and Alignment .................................. 438
8.8 Clean and prime substrate tubes ........................................................ 443
8.8.1 Clean substrate tube ...................................................................................... 443
8.8.2 Prime substrate tubes .................................................................................... 443
8.9 Setting up ............................................................................................ 443
8.9.1 Load and check the consumables ................................................................. 443
8.9.2 Importing and Configuring Chemistry Parameters ......................................... 445
8.10 System Performance Test ................................................................... 447
8.10.1 DCF Diagnosis ............................................................................................. 447
8.10.2 Substrate Background detection .................................................................. 447
8.10.3 System Repeatability ................................................................................... 448
8.10.4 Repeatability Test ......................................................................................... 448
8.11 LIS and Remote Help .......................................................................... 449
8.12 LIS Connection .................................................................................... 449
9 Maintenance Guide ........................................................................................................ 450
9.1 Overview.............................................................................................. 450
9.1.1 Introduction: ................................................................................................... 450
9.1.2 Maintenance Materials and Tools List ............................................................ 450
9.2 Routine Maintenance .......................................................................... 450
9.2.1 Cleaning the Cap of the Wash Buffer Tank .................................................... 453
9.2.2 Cleaning the dust screen ............................................................................... 454
9.2.3 Cleaning the Gripper ...................................................................................... 455
9.2.4 Cleaning the Probe/Dispersion Swab ............................................................ 456
9.2.5 Cleaning the Outer Wall of the Dispersion Aspirate Probe ............................ 458
9.2.6 Cleaning Waste Drainage Probe.................................................................... 459
9.2.7 Cleaning Vortexer Hole .................................................................................. 459
9.2.8 Cleaning Incubation, Photometer and Waste Drainage Hole ........................ 460
9.3 Check and Maintenance ...................................................................... 461
9.3.1 Checking the Probe........................................................................................ 461
9.3.2 Probe Special Wash ....................................................................................... 462
9.3.3 Aspirate Probe Wash ..................................................................................... 463
9.3.4 Waste Tubing Wash ....................................................................................... 463
9.3.5 Prime and Drain ............................................................................................. 464
9.4 Maintenance setup .............................................................................. 466
9.4.1 Replacing the spring of the gripper ................................................................ 466
9.4.2 Remove crystal on the swab .......................................................................... 467
10 Alarms and Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 469
10.1 Introduction .......................................................................................... 469
10.2 Error alarms ......................................................................................... 471
10.3 Data alarm ........................................................................................... 472
10.3.1 Data Alarm Type ........................................................................................... 472
10.3.2 Principles and Handling of Data Alarms....................................................... 472
10.4 Common Software Error Alarms and Handling ................................... 473
10.4.1 Database Initializing Failed .......................................................................... 473
35
10.4.2 Database backup failed ............................................................................... 474
10.4.3 Database version is higher than the software version ................................. 474
10.4.4 Unmatched software version. ...................................................................... 476
10.4.5 Software Getting Stuck ................................................................................ 476
10.4.6 Configuring key parameters failed. .............................................................. 476
10.5 Common Hardware Error Alarms ........................................................ 477
10.5.1 Substrate Background Test Failed ............................................................... 477
10.5.2 Photometer Problem Handling and Analysis ............................................... 479
10.1 Flags and Fault list .............................................................................. 484
10.1.1 Result Flags ................................................................................................. 484
10.1.2 Fault List ....................................................................................................... 490
10.1.3 Software Environment Fault ......................................................................... 490
10.1.4 LIS-Related Fault ......................................................................................... 492
10.1.5 Consumables-Related Fault ........................................................................ 495
10.1.6 Sample and QR abnormal ........................................................................... 498
10.1.7 Reagent Bar Code-Related Fault................................................................. 500
10.1.8 Effect Detection ............................................................................................ 501
10.1.9 Shielding Cover Warning ............................................................................. 502
10.2 Instrument Fault List ............................................................................ 502
10.2.1 Sample carousel fault .................................................................................. 502
10.2.2 Reagent carousel fault ................................................................................. 503
10.2.3 Sampling probe fault .................................................................................... 505
10.2.4 Light shield fault ........................................................................................... 514
10.2.5 Photometer fault ........................................................................................... 516
10.2.6 Gripper fault ................................................................................................. 517
10.2.7 Dispersion fault ............................................................................................ 523
10.2.8 Hydropneumatic system fault ....................................................................... 526
10.2.9 Temperature Control & Voltage & Current Fault .......................................... 531
10.2.10 Communication fault .................................................................................. 534
10.2.11 Other fault ................................................................................................... 535
11 Assembly Exploded Views ............................................................................................. 536
11.1 Overview.............................................................................................. 536
11.2 Instrument Panels Exploded ............................................................... 536
11.2.1 The Base of Adjust Foot ............................................................................... 536
11.2.2 Front Panels ................................................................................................. 537
11.2.3 Back Panels ................................................................................................. 538
11.2.4 Left Side Panels ........................................................................................... 539
11.2.5 Right Side Panels ......................................................................................... 540
11.2.6 Top Panels .................................................................................................... 541
11.2.7 Front display ofasm ...................................................................................... 542
11.2.8 Front panel assembly ................................................................................... 543
11.3 Front Assembly Exploded .................................................................... 545
11.3.1 The Drawer Cover Assembly........................................................................ 545
11.3.2 Cuvette Loader Unit ..................................................................................... 546
36
11.3.3 Mechanical Arm ............................................................................................ 548
11.3.4 Reagent/sample Disk Assembly ................................................................... 553
11.3.5 Sampling probe drive assembly ................................................................... 557
11.3.6 Mixing And Washing Unit ............................................................................. 562
11.3.7 Reaction Module And PMT........................................................................... 563
11.3.8 Drain Waste Assembly ................................................................................. 564
11.3.9 Magnetic Separation Assembly .................................................................... 566
11.3.10 Substrate Detector Assembly ..................................................................... 569
11.4 Left Assembly Explode ........................................................................ 570
11.4.1 Wash Buffer Detector Assembly ................................................................... 570
11.4.2 Liquid Board Assembly................................................................................. 571
11.5 Back Assembly Explod ........................................................................ 572
11.5.1 PCB UNIT ..................................................................................................... 572
11.5.2 Vacuum Assembly ........................................................................................ 574
11.5.3 Sample Syringe Board ................................................................................. 575
11.5.4 Fans .............................................................................................................. 577
11.5.5 The Interface for Power ................................................................................ 578
11.5.6 Power Unit .................................................................................................... 579
12 LIS Connection Configuration ................................................................................ 581
12.1 Overview.............................................................................................. 581
12.2 Network Connection and LIS-related Parameter Setting .................... 581
12.2.1 Adapter Status Query ................................................................................... 582
12.2.2 Network Status Check.................................................................................. 584
12.3 LIS-related Parameter Settings ........................................................... 589
12.3.1 Protocol Introduction .................................................................................... 589
12.3.2 Parameter Settings on the Workstation of the Analyzer .............................. 589
12.3.3 Basic Concepts of Unidirectional/Bidirectional LIS Communication ............ 591
12.3.4 Channel ID Setting ....................................................................................... 593
12.4 Usage Guide of the Test Tool .............................................................. 594
12.4.1 Steps of Using the Test Tool......................................................................... 595
12.5 Common Problems and Handling Methods ........................................ 600
12.5.1 LIS Connection Failed .................................................................................. 600
12.5.2 Intermittent Interruption of LIS Communication ........................................... 600
12.5.3 Firewall Problem .......................................................................................... 602
12.5.4 Invalid LIS Response ................................................................................... 602
12.5.5 Slow Transmission of LIS Communication Results ..................................... 605
12.5.6 Loss of Some Chemistry Results During LIS Communication..................... 605
12.6 Logs of Bidirectional LIS Communication Interaction ......................... 605
12.7 Functions of the Parsing Tool .............................................................. 608
13 Host Emptying and Relocation ............................................................................... 613
13.1 Procedure of Emptying Whole Unit ..................................................... 613
13.1.1 Empty Whole Unit ........................................................................................ 613
13.2 Whole Unit Emptying and Data Emptying Methods ............................ 615
13.2.1 Refrigeration Off ........................................................................................... 615
37
13.2.2 Clean and Empty Substrate Tubes .............................................................. 615
13.2.3 Empty Wash Buffer from Wash Buffer Tubes .............................................. 619
13.2.4 Cleaning Wash Buffer Tubes with Ultra-Pure Water .................................... 626
13.2.5 Emptying Ultra-Pure Water from the Wash Waste Tubes ............................ 630
13.2.6 Cleaning and Emptying Waste Drain Tubes ................................................ 631
13.2.7 Confirming Analyzer Model and SN ............................................................. 633
13.2.8 Emptying Cuvettes ....................................................................................... 633
13.2.9 Checking Overflowing of the Dispersion Carousel ...................................... 633
13.2.10 Checking the Dispersion Carousel Tubes and Moving the Vertical Mechanism
to the Bottom ........................................................................................................... 634
13.2.11 Empty and Clean ........................................................................................ 637
13.2.12 Check the Incubation Module .................................................................... 638
13.2.13 Checking the Mixing Module ...................................................................... 638
13.2.14 Checking and Restoring after Emptying .................................................... 639
13.2.15 Check the Silk Screen of Sample Carousel ............................................... 639
13.2.16 Fixing the Dust Screen ............................................................................... 639
13.2.17 Sealing the Opening of Working Position .................................................. 639
13.3 Packing Instrument .............................................................................. 642
13.3.1 Checklist Before Packing ............................................................................. 642
13.3.2 Flowchart of Instrument Packing .................................................................. 643
13.3.3 Checking That the Dispersion Vertical Mechanism Moves to the Bottom ... 643
13.3.4 Fixing Sample Probe .................................................................................... 643
13.3.5 Fixing Gripper and Cuvette Box ................................................................... 645
13.3.6 Fixing Waste Drainage Assembly ................................................................ 647
13.3.7 Fixing Transparent Cover and Desktop ....................................................... 648
13.3.8 Fixing Main Unit ........................................................................................... 650
13.3.9 Wrapping Main Unit with Stretch Film .......................................................... 651
13.3.10 Packaging Whole Unit and Accessories .................................................... 652
13.3.11 Sealing and Labeling .................................................................................. 653
13.3.12 Packaging Computer Mainframe and Display ........................................... 653
13.4 Instrument Relocation ......................................................................... 654
13.4.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 654
13.4.2 Preparations ................................................................................................. 654
13.4.3 Instrument Relocation Procedure ................................................................ 656
14 Appendix ................................................................................................................. 657
14.1 Prepare Installation Reagent Pack ...................................................... 657
38
1 System Description
This chapter describes the system from the hardware structure and specifications perspectives,
including:
 Hardware structure
 Technical specifications
This service manual applies to the CL-900i, CL-920i, CL-960i, and CL-980i chemiluminescence
immunoassay analyzers.
Since CL-920i, CL-960i and CL-980i differ from CL-900i only in functional configuration, this
manual only describes the CL-900i chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzer.
1.1 Overview
The chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzer consists of analyzing unit , operation unit,
output, accessories and consumables.
The analyzing unit is composed of the sample handling system, reagent handling system,
cuvette load and transport system, sampling system, reaction liquid mixing system, dispersion
system, substrate system, and optical measurement and reaction system. It includes the
following assemblies: probe, gripper, reagent carousel, incubation optical measurement module,
dispersion module, sample transport module, optional sample bar code (selected by default),
and reagent bar code system.
The operation unit is composed of a computer, a display (a touch-screen display is optional),
a handheld bar code reader, and analyzer software.
The output unit is a printer used to print out test results and other data.
Accessories and consumables: disposable cuvette and waste container
Figure 1-1 Analyzer
39
1.2 Analyzing Unit

The analyzing unit is composed of the sample handling system, reagent handling system,
cuvette load and transport system, sampling system, reaction liquid mixing system, dispersion
system, substrate system, and optical measurement and reaction system. It includes the
following assemblies: probe, gripper, reagent carousel, incubation optical measurement module,
dispersion module, sample transport module, optional sample bar code (selected by default),
and reagent bar code system.
Board Dispersion Mixing Sampling Power

assembly Assembly assembly assembly assembly
Waste
drainage
assembly
Sample
Reagent
Carousel
Incubation Assembly
Photometric
Module
Solid Waste
Container
Cuvette Gripper Substrate

Substrate box
Box assembly detection
assembly
Assembly assembly
Figure 1-2 Overview
40
(1) Power and network port (2) Dust screen (3) Fluid connection
1.3 Hardware structure

1.3.1 System Overview
The chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzer consists of analyzing unit , operation unit,
output unit (printer, optional), accessories and consumables.
The analyzing unit: The analyzer, determines various clinical chemistries in samples and
displays the test results. The analyzing unit is mainly composed of the following systems:
 Shells Assembly and Frame Assembly
 Waste Drainage Shielding Sub-system
 Sampling System
 Reagent handling system
 Cuvette loading system
 Dispersion system
 Incubation Photometric System
 Pyrological System
 Hardware System
 Hydropneumatic System
The operation unit: It is a computer equipped with Chemiluminescence Immunoassay
Analyzer operating software to complete test application, test, reaction process monitoring,
result calculation, and data input, storage and query, etc., which is composed of computer and
display (touch screen display and monitor stand are optional), handheld bar code reader, and
analyzer software;
The output unit is a printer used to print out test results and other data.
41
Consumables include disposable cuvettes, concentrated wash buffer, wash buffer, etc.
Table 1-1 Main Functions of Each Unit
Unit Name Function

Shells Assembly and The shells assembly is an appearance piece, and the frame
Frame Assembly assembly provides mounting positions for each component to
form a complete machine.
Sample Liquid Mixing The sample liquid mixing system provides the cuvette
System carrying position and is driven by a single motor. The main
function is to complete the mixing of the sample reagents and
the mixing of the substrates.
Sampling System This system features with loading sample and reagent,
cleaning sample probe, and realizing regular actions:
Reagent handling system It is used for sample delivery, reagent loading, reagent
mixing, reagent refrigeration and reagent feeding, and works
together with the sample probe to complete the reagent
component aspiration.
Cuvette loading system It is used for loading, transporting and disposing the
disposable cuvettes. It is composed of drawer assembly,
gripper assembly and waste container.
Dispersion system It consists of the dispersion pot, drive assembly and
dispersion aspirate assembly. The dispersion assembly is used
to bear the cuvette, complete mixing and separation of the
reaction liquid and magnetic beads, enable the cuvette to
reach the designated position, and work together with the
gripper to take/place the cuvette from/in the dispersion
carousel.
Incubation Photometric It includes the incubation module assembly and optical
System assembly. The luminous intensity of the reaction liquid of the
sample to be tested is checked to check the material
composition in the sample and its content.
Pyrological System The incubation module is heated, the temperature sensor
senses the temperature, and the output of the heater is
controlled by software and hardware to provide a constant
temperature system for the reaction liquid.
The reagent carousel is cooled. The temperature sensor
senses the temperature, controls the radiator switch through
software and hardware, and provides the reagent with a
uniform storage environment of 2°C to 8°C.
Hardware System It completes control of the entire measurement process of
the instrument. It drives the gripper motor, sample probe
motor, pump, valve, syringe, heating film, radiator, PMT, and
other parts, and collects and monitors atmospheric pressure,
hydraulic pressure, temperature, voltage, current, and other
signals.
42
Hydropneumatic System Sampling fluidic module: used to realize quantitative
sampling of the probe and clean the interior and exterior of
probe
Substrate dispensing module: dispensing the substrate and
switching the substrate bottles.
Dispersion module: wash buffer inlet for the dispersion wash
and waste discharge.
Liquid check module: checking the wash buffer entering the
whole unit and the waste in the waste tank outside the unit
1.4 System specification

1.4.1 Common Indices
System Fully automatic, desktop, random optional Chemiluminescence
Immunoassay Analyzer
System structure The chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzer consists of the

analyzing unit , operation unit (computer system), output unit
(printer, optional), accessories and consumables.
Sample type Serum, plasma and other body fluids.
Maximum number 15
of simultaneously-
analyzed
chemistries
Throughput Maximum 180 tests/hour
Analysis mode One-step method, two-step format with one dispersion, and two-
step format with two dispersions. It supports auto sample dilution
and sample pretreatment.
Reaction time One-step method: 1 to 30 minutes as reaction time; two-step

method: 1 to 20 minutes as reaction time for the first step and 1 to
20 minutes as reaction time for the second step.
Incubation Module
37±0.3℃
Temp.
Test categories Thyroid function, tumor, hormone, infectious disease,

myocardium, diabetes, and anemia bone metabolism.
Pre-dilution It supports sample dilution factors ranging from 2 to 80, with

cuvette as dilution tank.
Operating mode Tests are defined one by one via the operating software; panels
and calculation tests are supported.
43
Math model The system provides the following two calibration math models:
Quantitative (4PLC): The system utilizes 1-3 point calibration to
adjust calibration master curve to obtain calibration results.
According to the calibration results, sample RLU is converted to
the value of concentration.
Qualitative (COI): The system utilizes 1-2 point calibration, to
convert calibrator RLU to Cutoff value according to the formula set
in advance. Determine if sample is positive or negative by
comparing sample RLU and Cutoff value.
Quality control Westguard multi-rule control, Cumulative sum check

(Accumulation and Control), Twin plot.
Data processing Store and output various types of data and charts, and calculate
between chemistries.
Dimensions 860 mm (length) × 740 mm (depth) × 560 mm (height).
Weight Weight: ≤ 140kg
STAT sample STAT samples can be inserted at any time.
Networking mode Support the LIS networking system.
1.4.2 Sample Indices

Sample setting method
Sample carousel injection method
Sample tube specifications
 Microtube: Φ14×25 mm, 0.5 ml (Beckman sample cup); Φ14×25 mm, 2 ml (Beckman
sample cup); Φ12×37 mm, 2 ml (Hitachi standard cup).
 Primary tube: Φ12×68.5 mm, Φ12×99 mm, Φ12.7×75 mm, Φ12.7×100 mm, Φ13×75 mm,
Φ13×95 mm, Φ13×100 mm;
 Plastic tube: Φ12×68.5 mm, Φ12×99 mm, Φ12.7×75 mm, Φ12.7×100 mm, Φ13×75 mm,
Φ13×95 mm, Φ13×100 mm.
 Some sample positions (≥ 25) support Φ16.5×92 mm, Φ16×75 mm, and Φ16×100 mm
 The sample carousel supports the tubes with the diameters of 13-16 mm.
Table 1-2 Dead Volume
Sample Container Specification Dead Volume

Sample cup Φ14×25 mm, 0.5 ml (Beckman sample 100ul
cup)
Sample cup Φ14×25 mm, 2ml (Beckman sample 150ul

cup)
44
Sample cup Φ12×37 mm, 2 ml (Hitachi standard 100ul
cup)
Primary tube/Plastic Φ12×68.5 mm 8 mm higher than the

tube unacceptable sample level
Primary tube/Plastic Φ12×99 mm 8 mm higher than the

Primary tube/Plastic Φ12.7×75 mm 8 mm higher than the


 Sample carousel
50 sample positions and 1 concentrated wash position.
 STAT sample
STAT samples can be inserted at any time.
 Dispense volume
10-200μl, with increment of 1μl
 Probe
Featuring level detection, horizontal/vertical bump detection, clog detection and tracking by
volume.
 Probe wash
Interior and exterior wash.
 Sample input mode (bar code, etc)
Table 1-3 Sample Bar Code Specifications
Parameter Description
Symbology Codabar, ITF, Code128, Code39, UPC/EAN, and Code93
Minimum bar code density 0.19 mm

Length 3-27 digits
Format and content Support Codabar, ITF, Code128, Code39, UPC/EAN, and
Code93 by default. It is not necessary to set them.
Maximum width 80mm
45
Minimum height 10mm
Maximum inclination angle ±5°
Print quality No less than Class C according to the ISO/IEC 15416
Width and narrowness 2.5-3.0:1
1.4.3 Reagent Indices

 Reagent bar code
Support the built-in reagent bar code reader;

Support Mindray reagent encryption bar code, including such reagent information as chemistry
code (resolved as reagent chemistry name), reagent lot No., reagent bottle No., reagent
expiration date and test cycles;
Bar code quality requirements: ANSI Print Quality Specification class A according to ANSI
MH10.8M standard.
 Reagent refrigeration
Reagent refrigeration temperature: 2-8 Celsius.
 Reagent loading method
Accurate sample loading by injector, liquid level detection, reagent residue detection.
 Number of reagents supported
4 bottles at most.
 Reagent Vol
20μl-135μl, with increment of 1μl.
 Reagent carousel and reagent position
One reagent carousel holds 15 reagent positions, with magnetic bead reagent mixing function.
 Reagent pack volume
Support 100 tests/pack and 50 tests/pack.
 Probe
One probe is shared with samples, featuring level detection, and horizontal/vertical bump
detection.
 Probe wash
Interior and exterior wash, exterior wash only for two-component aspiration.
1.4.4 Reaction Indices

 Cuvette material
Disposable plastic cuvettes.
 Mixing mode
Non-contact vortexer for mixing samples and diluent, samples and reagents, magnetic beads
46
and reagents.
 Reaction liquid volume
Max 350 μl.
 Dispersion
Dispersion unit uses wash buffer for 3-phase dispersion.
 Substrate dispensing
Preheating before substrate dispensing, with substrate dispensing amount of 200 ul.
 Optical system method
The detector is a photomultiplier photon counter that operates in photon counting mode. The
LED reference module is used as a calibration optical source.
1.4.5 Operating Indices

 Display monitor
17” and above LCD display（1280*1024）.
 Operating system
Microsoft Win10 Professional 1903 (OS Build:18362.175).
 Communication interface
TCP/IP network with static IP address.
 Printer
It supports inkjet printer, laser printer and stylus printer.
 Data input
Keyboard, mouse, 17-inch display screen, bar code reader, remote maintenance system
(TCP/IP network interface using static IP address), LIS: HL7, ASTM1394 (TCP/IP network or
serial interface using static IP address).
 Data output
Display, printer, remote maintenance system (TCP/IP network interface using static IP address),
LIS system.
 Data record
Hard disk, USB port.
1.4.6 Environment
 Altitude: -400-3,000m.
 The system is for indoor use only.
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be level (with gradient less than 1/200).
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be able to support at least 150Kg weight.
 The installation site should be well ventilated.
47
 The installation site should be free of dust.
 The installation side should not be in direct sun.
 The installation site should be kept away from a heat or draft source.
 The installation site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be free of vibration.
 Operating temperature: 15°C-30°C with fluctuation <2°C/H. Provide air conditioning
equipment if the room temperature does not meet the requirements.
 Relative humidity: 35%-85% RH, without condensation.
1.4.7 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Unpacking

 Dimensions of whole unit after packing: 1130 mm (length) × 910 mm (depth) × 760 mm
(height)
 Unpacking space requirement: After putting down the instrument with the packing box, the
distance from the wall is ≥ 0.5 m for unpacking operation.
1.4.8 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Installation

 Dimensions of whole unit before packing: 860mm (length) × 740 mm (depth) × 560mm
(height).
5417m
5279m
m
m Circuit breaker
Power line
≥700mm
Communication
Waste tube line
Waste tank
2782m
2474m
operation
m
LIS host
UPS
PC for
≥500mm
m
CL-900i ≥350mm
 Space and accessibility requirements for installation of the CL-900i
1.4.9 Power and Noise

Power supply: 100V-240V~ 50Hz, 100V/240V~ 60Hz. Voltage fluctuation: +/-10%. Line
frequency: +/-1Hz. Three-wire power cord with good grounding performance.
WARNING
Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Incorrect grounding
48
may lead to electric shock or equipment damage.
Check if the power socket outputs voltage meeting the specified
requirements and has a proper fuse installed.
 Rated input power of analyzer: 500VA. The instrument should be connected to a power
socket with load no less than 2.5A.
 The ground voltage should be <5V.
 If the user is going to use a UPS to power the instrument, make sure that the UPS can
provide power supply greater than or equal to 1500VA (analyzer + computer + printer).
 The installation site should be kept away from big noise and power supply interference.
 Keep the system away from brush-type motors and electrical contact devices that are
frequently switched on and off.
 Do not use such devices as mobile phones and radio transmitters near the system.
1.4.10 Drainage Check (if draining water through a sewer)

 The chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzer can directly discharge the waste liquid to
the sewer. The length of the waste tube is less than 5 m and greater than 1 m.
 The waste outlet should be no less than 8mm wide.
 The waste outlet should be lower than sewer for at least 0.5m.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of liquid waste according to the local regulations.
1.4.11 Recommended PC Configuration

Item Description
CPU 3.1GHz
Random access memory
At least 4GB
(RAM)
The computer is connected to the analyzer through a network
adapter. If you are going to connect the computer with the LIS or
Network adapter
Internet, you should prepare another network adapter (Intel gigabit
network adapter)
At least 500GB, with SATA interface.
Install the operating system in the C drive and the operating
software of the instrument in the D drive.
Hard disk defragment
Make sure that the C drive is over 100G, E drive over 50G, and the
remaining space for D drive, and the disk file system is of NTFS
format.
49
Item Description
Deselect the two options at the bottom of the disk properties
window: “Compress drive to save disk space” and “Allow Indexing
Service to index this disk for fast file searching”.
The operating system installed on the computer must be an activated
Operating system
Microsoft Win10 Professional 1903 (OS Build:18362.175)
Except for the operating system, other application software must not
be installed or reserved on the computer. If an anti-virus application
Application software
has been installed, then remove the automatic scheduled scanning
and add the operating software and BSLOG to the trust list.
Screen saver and system Turn off the screen saver and BS Special Power Policy power scheme,
standby and then disable the hibernation option.
17” touchscreen monitor or above, 16:9 or 4:3 with resolution of
Screen display properties
1280×1024.
Automatic synchronization Disable the Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server
with Internet time server option.
Automatic updates Turn off the automatic updates.
If you are going to use the auto startup function, perform necessary
Auto startup setup settings for BIOS and network adapters while referring to their
operation manuals.
1.4.12 Configuration Check
Table 1-4 Configuration list
CL-900i/CL-920i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer 1
Accessory kit 1
Computer (Self-prepare) 1
Display monitor (Self-prepare) 1
Waste tank 2
1.4.13 Optional modules

Printer 1
1.5 Test Procedure
This chapter mainly contains the following contents:

 Operating Procedure
 Working mode
 Startup/Shutdown
50
1.5.1 Operating Procedure

Two-step format with
Discard cuvette after reaction ends

Add first-step reagent and sample,
Chemiluminescence incubation
one dispersion
Power-on initialization
reagent, and mix them
Photon Counting
Add second-step
Add substrate
and mix them
Dispersion
Incubation
Incubation
Power on
Sample Dilution Factor
Dispersion
at s
o rm sion
f
p per
ste is
o- o d
Tw tw
ith
w
One-step method
Sample Pretreatment
1.5.2 Working mode

S R Dispersion A
One-step Incubation carousel Incubation
method Photometric
Dispersion
Two-step
format with S First-step R Second-step R Dispersion A
one First incubation Second incubation carousel Incubation
dispersion Photometric
Dispersion
Two-step
Second-step R
format with S First-step R Dispersion A
two First incubation Dispersion Second incubation carousel Incubation
dispersions Photometric
Dispersion
Sample pre-
S diluted reagent
Sample
Pre-dilution S’R A
Incubating... Incubation
Photometric
Sample pretreat
S reagent
Sample
Pretreatment Incubation
S’R A
Incubating... Incubation
Photometric
The analyzer supports the following five reaction modes, and the first three of which are defined
as regular modes.
1. One-step method
Add the sample and then add up to 3 reagents. Then, mix them well. Incubate the sample-
reagent mixture in the incubation carousel, and after the reaction is completed, perform the
dispersion. After the dispersion is completed, add the substrate and mix them well to re-
suspend the magnetic beads connected to the final reaction product and distribute the beads
uniformly in the substrate. Measure the RLU after incubation.
51
2. Two-step format with one dispersion
reagent mixture for the first time in the incubation carousel. After the first incubation, add the
second step reagent. The second step reagent can be up to 3 components, but the total number
of reagent components added in the two steps cannot exceed 4. Perform second incubation
after adding the second step reagent, and after the incubation is completed, perform dispersion,
add the substrate, mix the substrate, incubate the substrate, and measure the RLU.
3. Two-step format with two dispersions

reagent mixture for the first time in the incubation carousel. After the first incubation, perform
the first dispersion. After the first dispersion is completed, add the second step reagent. The
second step reagent can be up to 2 components, but the total number of reagent components
added in the two steps cannot exceed 4. Perform second incubation after adding the second
step reagent, perform the second dispersion, add the substrate, mix the substrate, and measure
the RLU as described in the two-step format with one dispersion.
4. Auto sample pre-dilution

Generally, to extend the linearity range, the sample to be tested is automatically diluted and
tested. Add the sample and sample dilution to the cuvette, mix them to be used as a diluted
sample (the maximum volume of the diluted sample is 400 ul).
Aspirate the diluted sample from the above cuvette, add it to a new cuvette, add the appropriate
reagent, and mix them. The subsequent test procedure is the same as one-step and two-step
methods.
5. Sample pretreatment
For some small molecule analytes, the sample needs to be pretreated (such as extracted)
before testing. Add the sample and pretreatment reagent (up to three components) to the
cuvette and mix them, and then incubate the reaction cuvette at a constant temperature for a
certain period of time (any time between 1 and 20 minutes).
Aspirate the pretreated sample from the above cuvette, add it to a new cuvette, add the
appropriate reagent, and mix them. The subsequent test procedure is the same as one-step
and two-step methods.
1.6 Analysis Mode

1.6.1 Introduction
The system performs measurement mainly with one-step method and two-step method. The
major difference lies in steps necessary for the measurement. One-step method includes one-
time incubation and one-time dispersion, while two-step method includes two times of
incubation and one or two times of dispersion.
52
1.6.2 One-Step Method

One-step method proceeds as follows: adding specimen, adding labeled antibody (antigen),
incubating for reaction, dispersion, adding substrate, and optical measurement. Generally
speaking, competitive method belongs to one-step method, while some double-antibody
sandwich methods also belong to one-step method. One-step method is illustrated in the
following figure:
Specimen Labeled antibody

or antigen
Cuvette
Incubation
Remove unbound reactants

with dispersion
Incubation
Substrate
Analyzer
detection
Figure 1-3 One-Step Method Procedure
1.6.3 Two-step Method

According to counts of dispersion, two-step method is divided into two-step format with one
dispersion and two-step format with two dispersions.
Two-step format with one dispersion proceeds as follows: adding sample, labeling antibody
(antigen), incubating, adding labeled antibody (antigen), incubating, dispersion, adding
substrate, and optical measurement. Two-step format with one dispersion procedure is
illustrated in the following figure:
53

or antigen
Cuvette
Incubation
Labeled antibody
or antigen
Incubation

with dispersion
Incubation
Substrate
Analyzer
detection
Figure 1-4 Two-Step Format with One Dispersion
Two-step format with two dispersions proceeds as follows: adding specimen, labeling antibody
(antigen), incubating, dispersion, adding labeled antibody (antigen), incubating, dispersion,
adding substrate, and optical measurement. Two-step format with two dispersions procedure
is illustrated in following figure:
54

or antigen
Cuvette
Incubation

with dispersion
Labeled antibody
or antigen
Incubation

with dispersion
Incubation
Substrate
Analyzer
detection
Figure 1-5 Two-Step Format with Two Dispersions
1.7 Operation procedure

1.7.1 Startup
The startup procedure means that the instrument completes a series of initialization actions
under the control of the operating software, so that the instrument gets ready to start testing.
The operations are as follows:
1) Handshake;
2) Query the consumables and control the display of LED indicator panel;
3) Query the status of the solid waste container
a) If there is no solid waste container, the procedure ends;
b) If it is full, system prompts user to empty it and system ends the procedure.
c) If it is not full, the system continues the procedure.
4) Query the status of the waste container
a) If it is full, the procedure ends;
b) If it is not full, the system perform the next step:
5) The system restores.
If the system fails in any step of the above operations, it will enter the failure status directly, and
55
the subsequent steps will not continue.
Start
Handshake
Query the Control the

Query the
status of the display of
status of waste
solid waste LED indicator
tank
container panel
Home
End
Figure 1-6 Startup
1.7.2 Shutdown
The shutdown procedure can be performed as follows:
1) Turn off the temperature control of the incubation block;
2) Turn off the reagent refrigeration;
3) Turn off the PMT power;
4) Soak the sample probe for protection;
5) Turn off the shielding cover;
6) Drain the reagent carousel condensate water
Start
Turn off the Drain the

Turn off the
temperature Soak the Turn off the reagent
refrigeration Turn off the
control of the sample probe shielding carousel
of reagent PMT power
incubation for protection cover condensate
carousel;
block water
End
Figure 1-7 Shutdown
56
1.7.3 Exception Handling

The exception handling can be performed as follows:
1) Turn off the corresponding pump & valve;
2) Reset the corresponding mechanical moving parts;
Note: The exception handling refers to the procedure executed when the timing execution fails.
Start
Turn off the

corresponding
pump & valve
Reset the
corresponding
mechanical
moving parts
End
Figure 1-8Exception Handling
1.7.4 Emergency Stop

The emergency stop procedure is used for emergency stop in special situations and performed
as follows:
1) Emergency stop of mechanical moving parts;
2) Turn off the PMT power;
3) Turn off all pumps & valves;
4) Relieve pressure in the vacuum chamber.
57
Start
Emergency stop
Turn off all Turn off the
of mechanical
pumps & valves PMT power
moving parts
Relieve
pressure in the
vacuum
chamber
End
Figure 1-9 Emergency Stop
1.7.5 Before Test

The actions that need to be performed before each lot to be tested:
1) Perform PMT calibration;
2) Detect cuvette on the tray;
3) Remove air bubbles from the hydropneumatic system of the whole unit;
4) Read the sample bar code;
5) Mix the reagent;
6) Build pressure in the vacuum chamber;
7) Clean the sample probe;
8) Turn on the shielding cover;
9) The gripper moves to the ready position;
58
Start
Remove air
Detect cuvette bubbles from the
PMT check
on reaction hydropneumatic
cuvette tray system of the
whole unit;
Sample disk bar
code scanning
PMT calibration
Sample probe
set up
Long time
mixing on the
reagent carousel
Gripper moves Dispersion
Open shielding
to the ready system set up
cover
position
Run to the 0
position of
dispersion
carousel
End
Figure 1-10 Before Test
1.7.6 After Test

The actions that need to be performed after each lot is tested:
1) Clean the waste discharge probe;
2) Clean the sample probe;
3) Clean the dispersion aspirate probe;
4) Relief pressure in the vacuum chamber;
5) Turn off the shielding cover;
6) The gripper moves to the standby position;
7) Soak the sample probe for protection.
59
Start
Clean the waste

discharge probe
Auto wash
maintenance
Clean the The gripper

Clean the Turn off the
dispersion moves to the
sample probe shielding cover
aspirate probe standby position
Soak the
sample probe
for protection
End
Figure 1-11 After Test
1.7.7 Home
Home the system as follows:
1) Initialize the sample mechanisms (including sample probe, sample carousel and reagent
carousel);
2) Initialize the sample hydropneumatic subsystem;
3) Initialize the dispersion mechanisms;
4) Initialize the dispersion hydropneumatic subsystem;
5) Initialize the gripper;
6) Initialize the photometer assembly;
7) Build pressure for the waste drainage;
8) Calibrate the level detection;
9) Detect the volume of the probe detergent;
10) Scan the reagent carousel bar code;
11) Mix the reagent in the reagent carousel;
12) Discard the cuvette at the photometric position;
13) Discard the cuvette at the mixing position;
14) Discard the cuvette during dispersion;
60
15) Discard the cuvette in the incubation block;
16) Discard the cuvette at the buffer position;
17) Perform PMT calibration;
18) Detect cuvette on the tray;
19) Relief pressure for the waste drainage;
20) The gripper moves to the standby position;
21) Turn on the temperature control of the incubation block;
22) Turn on the refrigeration for reagent carousel;
Start
Initialize the
sample
mechanisms
Turn on the Initialize the

Turn on the dispersion
temperature Initialize the
refrigeration of hydropneumatic
control of the gripper
reagent carousel subsystem
incubation block
Initialize the Initialize the

Initialize the optical
Initialize the Build pressure for hydropneumatic Scan the reagent
dispersion measurement
mixer the waste drainage subsystem of carousel bar code
mechanisms assembly sample probe
Discard the cuvette Calibrate the level

at the photometric detection
position
Discard the cuvette Detect the volume

at the mixing of the probe
position detergent
Discard the cuvette

during dispersion
Discard the cuvette

in the incubation
block
Long time mixing

on the reagent
carousel
Discard the cuvette
at the buffer
position
Detect cuvette on Relief pressure for

PMT calibration
reaction cuvette tray the waste drainage
The gripper moves to

the standby position
End
Figure 1-12 Home
61
2 Analyzer system
2.1 Whole Unit
Figure 2-1 Overview of Whole Unit
62
2.1.1 Component Locations and FRU Details
Figure 2-2 Exploded View of Whole Unit
(1) Whole Unit (3) Dust screen cover

(2) Dust screen (4) handle hole cover(DS193)
2.1.2 Cleaning Dust Screens at the Bottom of the Whole Unit

When to do
Clean dust screens regularly.
Steps
1) Open the dust screen cover by hand;
2) Grasp the dust screen handle by hand and pull the dust screen to the right;
3) To install the dust screen, follow the above steps in a reverse order.
2.2 Shells Assembly

2.2.1 Module Functions and Composition Introduction
The shells assembly indicates the apparent structures of the whole analyzer and is designed
for protecting the internal assemblies. It provides external interfaces for each module, and is
also a representation of industrial design.
63
Figure 2-3 Exploded View of Shells Assembly
(1) Front vertical plate (10) Left front panel

(2) Sample cover assembly (11) Lower left cover
(3) Lower right cover (12) Left panel
(4) Transparent cover (13) Rubber cover(DS193)
(5) Desktop shells assembly (14) Rear panel
(6) Right front cover substrate silk screen (15) Dust screen(BM20)
(BM50)
(7) Lock head (16) Stainless steel cross recessed
pan head screw assembly GB9074.4
M4X8
(8) Small cross recessed pan head screw (17) Top cover
assembly GB/T9074.8 M3X8
(9) Front left door (18) Cross recessed pan head screw
GB/T818-2000 M4X20
(19)Standard spring washer GB/T93-
1987 4
64
2.2.3 Removing the Transparent Cover
Figure 2-4 Removing the Transparent Cover
When to do
Tools
Parameter Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
1) Cut off the power of the analyzer to ensure all the moving assemblies are not in working
status;
2) Open the front left door, pull out the two drawers, and use a hexagon wrench to unscrew
the M3X12 hex fastening screws (with spring pad);
3) Press the middle position at the bottom of the transparent cover, lift it up, and remove the
transparent cover;
4) To reinstall the transparent shielding cover, follow the steps mentioned above in a reverse
order.
Alignment and confirmation
The transparent cover has been snapped onto the left front panel.
2.2.4 Disassembling the Front Vertical Plate

When to do
65
The indicator board is damaged.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cross screwdriver / 1 piece
Steps
1) Perform steps in section 5.2.3 to remove the transparent cover;
(1) D5 spring washer (2) M5X10 screws
Figure 2-5 Removing the Fastening Screws in the Front Vertical Plate
 Press both sides, loosen slowly when hearing the sound of "crack", and the front vertical
panel assembly will automatically pop out (note: hold the front side of the front vertical
panel assembly gently to avoid damage).
66
Figure 2-6 Disassembling the Front Vertical Plate
1) Unplug the cables in the front vertical panel and remove the front vertical panel assembly.
2) To reinstall the front vertical panel assembly, follow the steps mentioned above in a reverse
order.
The wires in the front vertical plate have been connected.
2.2.5 Disassembling the Top Cover
Figure 2-7 Removing the Fastening Screws in the Top Cover
(1) Rubber cover (3) Top cover

(2) M4 screw assembly
67
When to do
Each panel needs to be replaced, or the internal parts need to be replaced and repaired.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
1) Perform steps in section 5.2.4 to remove the front vertical plate;
2) Unplug the two rubber caps in the middle on both sides of the instrument and remove the
M4 screw assemblies on both sides and rear;
3) Remove the top cover from the bottom up;
4) To reinstall the top cover, follow the steps mentioned above in a reverse order.
2.2.6 Disassembling the Right Front Cover Substrate Silk
Screen (BM50)
When to do
Each panel needs to be replaced, or the internal parts need to be replaced and repaired.
Tools
Steps
1) Unplug the two rubber caps on top of the desktop and remove the two M4 screw
assemblies from the desktop;
2) Open the front left door and remove the two front M4 screw assemblies;
3) Take out the right front cover substrate silk screen (BM50);
4) To reinstall the right front cover substrate silk screen (BM50), follow the steps mentioned
above in a reverse order.
68
Figure 2-8 Disassembling the Right Front Cover Substrate Silk Screen (BM50)
(1) Rubber cover (3) Right front cover substrate silk screen (BM50)
(2) M4 screw assembly
2.2.7 Disassembling the Desktop Shells Assembly
Figure 2-9 Disassembling the Desktop Shells Assembly
(1) Reagent pot cap assembly (4) Left front panel

(2) Desktop shells assembly (5) M4 screw assembly
(3) Sample cover assembly (6) Rubber cover
69
Steps
1) Remove the reagent pot cap assembly and the sample cap assembly;
2) Perform steps in section 5.2.5 to remove the top cover;
3) Perform steps in section 5.2.6 to remove the right front cover substrate silk screen (BM50);
4) Unplug the four rubber caps above the desktop and remove the six M4 screw assemblies
above the desktop;
5) Remove the left front panel;
6) Unplug the connecting cables of desktop shells assembly and remove the desktop shells
assembly;
7) To reinstall the desktop shells assembly, follow the steps mentioned above in a reverse
order.
2.2.8 Disassembling the Lower Right Cover
Figure 2-10 Disassembling the Lower Right Cover
(1) Lower right cover (2) Dust screen cover
Steps
2) Perform steps in section 5.2.6 to remove the right front cover substrate silk screen (BM50);
3) Remove the outlet cover of the dust screen, remove the six M4 screw assemblies on the
front, rear, top and right sides, and remove the right lower cover from the right side.
70
2.2.9 Disassembling the Lower Left Cover
Figure 2-11 Diagram of Disassembling Lower Left Cover
(1) Rubber cover (3) Lower left cover

(2) Left front panel (4) Front left door
Steps
2) Unplug the rubber caps, remove the two M4X8 screw assemblies, and remove the front
left panel;
3) Open the front left door, remove the five M4X8 screw assemblies from the front, rear, and
left sides, and remove the lower left cover.
71
2.2.10 Disassembling the Rear Panel

Remove the 10 M4X8 screw assemblies, and remove the rear panel.
Figure 2-12 Diagram of Disassembling Rear Panel
2.2.11 Replacing the Front Left Door and Door Hinge

When to do
The front door and hinge are severely deformed by abnormal external forces, which affects use.
The lock is damaged.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
72
Figure 2-13 Diagram of Disassembling Front Left Door and Door Hinge
(1) Door hinge B (3) Front left door

(2) Door hinge A
73
Steps
1) Open the front left door, first remove the three M4 hex socket screws from the door hinge,
and remove door hinge B;
2) Remove the three M4 hex socket screws from the lower door hinge, and remove the front
left door and door hinge A;
3) Replace the parts that are damaged and install the front door and hinges in the reverse
order.
After the front door or hinge is replaced, check whether the gap between the front door and the
right panel is uniform. If the gap is uneven, you can adjust the upper door hinge and the lower
door hinge to make the gap uniform.
Adjust the lock ball head to the upper, lower, left and right extreme positions. The door is opened
and closed several times, and the door can be normally locked; besides, there is no collision
sound during the closing process.
NOTE
When removing the shells, exercise caution to avoid scratching the paint.
2.2.12 Replacing Indicator Board of Front Vertical Plate BM50
and Reflective Optical coupler

When to do
The front door indicator cover is damaged or worn.
The LED board of front panel (PCBA) is damaged.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Wrench / 1 piece
Figure 2-14 Diagram of Front Vertical Plate

74
(1) Front cover silk screen (BM50) (7) Touch panel press plate
(2) Bracket of the front vertical plate (8) Lock head
(3) Shading cotton of indicator (9) Reflective optical coupler OH-217-A5
(4) Light guide bar of indicator board (10) Hexagon nut tapered locking
washer assembly M3
(5) BM50 indicator board (11) Small cross recessed pan head
screw assembly GB/T9074.8 M3X8
(6)Cross recessed small pan head screw (12)Cross recessed pan head screw
assembly M3X6 GB/T819.1-2000 M3X8
Replacing the BM50 indicator board

2) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the four M3 screw assemblies on the touch panel press
plate and remove the touch panel press plate.
3) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the four M3 screw assemblies on the BM50 indicator
board and remove the BM50 indicator board.
Replacing the reflective optical coupler
2) Remove the M3 nut and remove the reflective optical coupler.
After the replacement, install the front vertical plate back into the instrument and check if the
function is normal.
NOTE
When removing the front door assembly, exercise caution to avoid
scratching the paint.
When removing the front door assembly, take care not to break the wire of
the front panel LED board PCBA.
2.2.13 Replacing the Dust Screen of Rear Panel

When to do
The dust screen is to be cleaned.
Tools
75
Figure 2-15 Diagram of Disassembling Dust Screen of Rear Panel
Steps
1) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the rear panel;
2) Take out the dust screen by hand and replace it.
Alignment not required.
NOTE
When removing the left back plate, exercise caution to avoid scratching
the paint
2.3 Frame Assembly

2.3.1 Module Functions
The frame assembly mainly supports the installation of the hydro devices and the hardware
boards, and the installation of the shells assembly.
76
77
Figure 2-16 Main Unit
(1) Sample/reagent carousel (15) Mixing and Wash Assembly

(2) Whole unit frame (16) Sample probe drive assembly
(3) Substrate assembly (17) Power assembly
(4) Substrate detection assembly (18) Buckle adjustment plate
(5) Door latch support assembly (19) Network Interface Board
(6) Drawer stopper plate (20) Air outlet sponge
(7) Cuvette loading assembly (21) 60 power cooling fan
(8) Door hinge B (22) Sample syringe assembly
(9) Door hinge A (23)Interface board for
hydropneumatics system connection
(10) Wash buffer detection assembly (24) Vacuum container assembly
(11) Fluid separator assembly (25) Board assembly
(12) Waste drainage shielding assembly (26) Gripper assembly
(13) Incubation detection assembly (27) Lock M3-37
(14) Dispersion Assembly
2.3.3 Replacing the Spikes of Substrate Assembly

When to do
The spike is damaged.
Tools
78
Figure 2-17 Substrate assembly
(1) Plastic bracket for substrate bottle (3) Spike

(2) Sealing ring
Steps
1) Perform steps in section 5.2.7 to remove the desktop shells assembly;
2) Unscrew the two fastening screws of the plastic bracket of the substrate bottle, and then
remove the plastic bracket of the substrate bottle and the spike;
3) Rotate the spike to remove it, and unscrew the joint;
4) Screw the clean spike onto the joint just removed, and rotate the spike in the reverse
direction onto the bracket of the substrate bottle;
5) Install the bracket assembly of the substrate bottler and the cover plate in reverse order;
The replacement of the substrate and the spike may cause contamination of the substrate tubes.
Therefore, after the replacement is completed, the substrate tubes cleaning procedure and the
substrate background test procedure are required.
NOTE
When removing the plastic bracket of the substrate bottle and the spike,
be careful not to break the tubes.
The tube connections should not be contaminated, be careful that the
sealing rings are dropped.
When removing the plastic bracket of the substrate bottle, be careful to
79
straighten the tubes and not bend them.
2.3.4 Replacing the Substrate Assembly
Figure 2-18 Exploded View of Substrate Detection Assembly
(1) Substrate detection mounting plate (silk screen) (4) Optical coupler OJ-431-30
(2) Optical coupler mount (5) 200uL substrate metering pump
(3) LVM valve assembly
When to do
The substrate is abnormal or peristaltic pump goes wrong.
Tools
Steps
1) Switch off the main power of the whole unit;
3) Use a cross screwdriver to unscrew the two M4 screw assemblies on the substrate
detection mounting board, unplug the tubes and cables of the assembly, and remove the
assembly;
4) Use a cross screwdriver to disassemble each device to be replaced.
WARNING
During maintenance, protect the tubes from being cut by sheet metal
parts.
80
2.3.5 Replacing the Power Assembly
Figure 2-19 Exploded View of Power Assembly
(1) 12V/300W AC-DC power (5) Cross recessed small pan head
screw assembly M3X8
(2) 24V/300W AC-DC power (6) BM50 power supply conversion
board PCBA
(3) Power mounting plate (7) Upper cover of power board
(4) Cross recessed pan head screw assembly
M4X8
When to do
The power module malfunctions.
Tools
Steps
3) Remove the four M3 screw assemblies, and remove the upper cover of power board;
4) Unplug the cable of the power board, remove the six M3 screw assemblies, and remove
the BM50 power supply conversion board PCBA;
5) Perform steps in section 5.2.10 to remove the rear panel;
81
6) Remove the two M4 screw assemblies of the power assembly that are fixed to the frame,
and remove the power assembly from the rear;
7) Remove the screws on both sides of the 12V and 24V power supplies and remove the 12V
and 24V power supplies.
2.3.6 Replacing the Board Assembly
Figure 2-20 Exploded View of Board Assembly
(1) Board mounting plate (3) BM50 main control board

(2) BM50 main control interface board PCBA
When to do
When the PCBA function of the BM50 main control interface board is abnormal.
Tools
Steps
3) Perform steps in section 5.2.10 to remove the rear panel;
4) Unplug the power cable and the network port cable, pull the upper end buckle to the sides
and remove the BM50 main control board;
5) Unplug the cable from the BM50 main control interface board PCBA, remove the fastening
screws with a cross screwdriver, and remove the BM50 main control interface board PCBA.
82
2.3.7 Replacing the Hot-End Fan
Figure 2-21 Exploded View of Hot-End Fan
(1) Air outlet and sponge (3) Sample syringe assembly

(2) 60 power cooling fan
When to do
The fan malfunctions.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
2) Unplug the power cable and network cable;
3) Perform steps in section 5.2.8 to remove the lower right cover;
4) Perform steps in section 5.2.10 and remove the rear panel.
Use a cross screwdriver to remove the fastening screw (1) of the sample syringe mounting
assembly and open the sample syringe mounting assembly;
83
1) Unplug the fan cable (be sure to protect the connector to prevent the wire from being short-
circuited that may damage to the wiring and main control board), use a cross screwdriver
to remove the three M3 screw assemblies on the left, right, and upside of the air outlet,
and remove the air outlet and sponge;
2) Remove the corresponding fastening screws of the fan and remove the corresponding fan.
2.3.8 Replacing the Door Latch
Figure 2-22 Exploded View of Door Latch Support Assembly
When to do
The front door latch malfunctions.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Exploded view for installation
See the exploded view of door latch support assembly
Steps
84
1) Perform steps in section 5.2.3 to remove the transparent cover.
2) Open the front left door.
3) Remove the left front panel.
4) Remove four screws in the front and one M4X8 screw that secure the drawer stopper plate
inside the instrument, and remove the drawer stopper plate.
5) Remove the OK button on the drawer stopper plate and the cables of the detector.
Figure 2-23 Door Latch Support
(1) Front left door (3) Drawer stopper plate

(2) Left front panel
Use a hexagon wrench to loosen the upper and lower screws on the door latch support
assembly, remove the assembly, and then use a cross screwdriver to loosen the door latch
screws to replace the door latch;
2.3.9 Replacing the Network Interface Conversion Board
PCBA
85
Figure 2-24 Exploded View of Network Interface Board
(1) Power interface board (5) Power switch press plate

(2) Power plug anti-off hook (6) Switch breaker 250V 13A, fixed by
screws
(3) Filter power 250VAC 10A panel mount (7) Open retaining ring SB-1822A
(4) Cross recessed pan head screw M3X8 (8) Network interface conversion
board PCBA
(9) Cross recessed small pan head
screw assembly M3X8
See the exploded view of network interface board assembly.
Steps
1) Disassemble the lower right cover;
2) Disassemble the rear panel;
3) Remove the three M3X8 screw assemblies that fix the network interface board assembly
and remove the network interface board assembly (without pulling the cable);
4) Disassemble the network interface conversion board PCBA and replace it with a new one;
5) Follow the steps mentioned above in a reverse order.
86
2.4 Sample Liquid Mixing System

2.4.1 Mixing Assembly Position and FRU Details
Figure 2-25 Position of the mixing assembly in the whole unit
(1) Mixing assembly
87
Figure 2-26 Exploded View of the Mixing Assembly
(1) Mixing and Wash Assembly (2) Correlative optical coupler wire (S)
2.4.2 Replacing Mixing and Washing Assemblies

When to do
There is a motion error of the mixing assembly or motor error.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Medical rubber gloves / 1 pair
Steps of Replacing Mixing and Washing Assemblies

See Figure 2-26 Exploded View of the Mixing Assembly
2) Remove the transparent cover by referring to section 5.2.3;
3) Remove the mixing motor connection line and sensor connection line;
88
4) Remove the four M4X10 socket head cap screws with the spring washers and flat gaskets
(No. 1) connecting the support column, and replace the mixing and washing assemblies.
5) Connect the mixing motor connection line and sensor connection line, and pre-tighten the
four M4X10 socket head cap screws, spring washers and flat gaskets (No. 1).
Enter the software alignment interface to perform operations: 1) coplanar alignment of the probe
and the mixer
NOTE
When adjusting the tensioning force of belt, note that the middle threaded
hole of the left mixing crankshaft faces to the mixing block side.
2.4.3 Replacing the Correlative Optical Coupler Connection
Line at the Initial Position of Mixing

When to do
The mixing sensor fails.
Tools
Figure 2-27 Exploded View of Installing the Correlative Optical Coupler Connection
Line at the Initial Position of Mixing
89
Steps
2) Remove the transparent cover by referring to section 5.2.3;
3) Disconnect the connection line of the optical coupler sensor (No. 2) at the initial position
of mixing;
4) Remove the M3X8 cross recessed pan head screw assembly (No. 1) at the sensor bracket,
and remove the sensor and bracket;
5) Remove the M3X8 cross recessed pan head screw assembly (No. 3), and replace the
optical coupler sensor with a new one;
6) Install the sensor bracket, optical coupler sensor connection line and transparent cover in
turn according to the reverse order of the above steps.
Enter the software alignment interface to perform operations: 1) coplanar alignment of the probe
and the mixer
NOTE
Handle the shell gently when removing it, lest paint would fall off; avoid
touching the retaining plate of initial position when installing the sensor
assembly.
90
2.5 Sampling System

This chapter introduces the structure and the modules of the sampling system.
2.5.1 System Composition and Introduction

Introduction to System Composition
This system features with loading sample and reagent , cleaning sample probe, and realizing
regular actions:
Aspirating the sample from a specific position, dispensing samples in the mixing position,
cleaning the inner and outer walls of the probe in the wash well, aspirating the reagent from the
reagent position of the reagent carousel, dispensing the reagent in the mixing position, cleaning
the inner and outer walls of the probe in the wash well, and starting mixing the sample with
reagent.
The system consists of the following parts:
 Sample probe drive module The module drives the probe in the horizontal and vertical
directions when the probe moves to a specific aspirating position, sampling position
and cleaning position, and has the functions of horizontal anti-collision, vertical anti-
collision, and vertical direction power failure maintenance.
 Sample-reagent sampling module This module is used to complete the
aspirating/dispensing action of the sample probe to the specified position. The module
mainly includes a sample probe assembly, a syringe assembly, a level sense board
and a clog detection assembly; and has the functions of level detection, clog detection
and spike aspiration.
 Sample probe wash module This module is used to clean the inner and outer walls of
the probe and clean the outer wall only. The module mainly includes assemblies such
as wash well, inner wall wash syringe, outer wall wash syringe, cleaning valve and
vacuum waste pump.
2.5.2 Sample probe drive assembly

Module Functions
The sample probe drive assembly is located above the rear of the whole unit, including the
sample probe component, the vertical drive component and the horizontal drive component. Its
functions are mainly: collecting, adding and cleaning samples and reagents according to the
action flow required by the whole unit.
Component Locations and FRU Details
91
Dispersion Reagent
carousel carousel
assembly Sample probe Rack assembly
drive assembly
Figure 2-28 Component Locations
11 12 13 14
10
1
8
2
5
3
Figure 2-29 Structure of Components
92
(1) Horizontal motor component (8) Anti-collision spring
(2) Correlative optical coupler wire (S) (9) Engaged pulley
(3)Synchronous belt HTUN405S3M60 polyurethane (10) Spring Guide Post
(4) Swab D2 (11) BM50 Level detection board
PCBA
(5) Z-axis engaged pulley (12) Damping plate
(6)Synchronous belt. HTUN405S3M60 polyurethane (13) Vertical motor component
(7) Probe assembly (14) Motor position sensor
component
2.5.3 Replacing the Spring Guide Post and Anti-Collision
Spring
When to do
The anti-collision spring fails or rusts, and the spring guide post rusts.
Tools
Flathead screwdriver / 1 piece
Figure 2-30 Exploded View for Installation of Spring Guide Post and Anti-Collision
Spring
（1）the spring guide post （3）the guide seat
93
（2）the anti-collision spring
Steps
2) Open the front vertical panel;
3) Unscrew the spring guide post (No. 1) and take out the spring guide post and the anti-
collision spring (No. 2);
4) Replace the spring guide post with a new one and put on a new anti-collision spring to
tighten it on the guide seat (No. 3);
5) Cover the front vertical panel.
None
2.5.4 Replacing the Swab D2

When to do
The swab is damaged or leaking.
Tools
Flathead screwdriver / 1
Figure 2-31 Exploded View for Installation of Swab
（1）the spring guide post （4）the sample probe assembly
94
（2）the anti-collision spring （5）the upper surface of swab D2
（3）the probe mount （6）the swab mount
Steps
4) Unplug the sample probe assembly (No. 4) and the connection line of the level sense
board;
5) Push the sample probe up until probe tip is higher than the upper surface of swab D2 (No.
5);
6) Slide swab D2 to the left to push it out of the swab mount (No. 6), and remove swab D2;
7) Unplug the two tubes connected to the swab;
8) Replace it with a new swab D2, and securely insert the two tubes connected to the swab
onto the new swab D2. Pay attention to the corresponding relationship between the tubes
and the swab interfaces;
9) Push the sample probe up until the probe tip is above the height of the upper surface of
the swab, push the new swab D2 into the swab mount, and the probe tip falls into the
center hole of the swab;
10) Tighten the spring guide post with the anti-collision spring;
11) Connect the connection line between sample probe and level sense board;
12) Move the sample probe to the open area between the mixing position and the sample
position; pull the rail mount (No. 3) up and down with your hand to check whether the
sample probe moves up and down smoothly; Note that the sample probe cannot touch
other parts when moving up and down; be sure to protect the sample probe. After the
inspection, raise the sample probe to the height of the probe tip without exposing the swab;
13) Close the front vertical panel.
After replacing the swab, align the horizontal working position and vertical position of the
sample probe. For the alignment steps, see 7.8 Dispensing System Alignment
NOTE
Do not bend the tubes during the process of disassembling the tubes.
After the swab is installed, make sure that the tubes are laid smoothly
without being pushed, and the swab cannot be pulled.
2.5.5 Replacing the Level Sense Board

When to do
The level sense board fails or the anti-collision optical coupler is damaged or fails.
Tools
95
（1）the level sense board （3）the anti-collision baffle

（2）the vertical mounting seat （4）the level sense board
Figure 2-32 Exploded View for Installation of Level Sense Board
Steps
3) Unscrew the two M3 screws on the front of the level sense board (No. 1);
4) Unplug the wiring on the level sense board and remove the level sense board (No. 4);
5) Replace it with the new level sense board. Note that the lower surface of the level
sense board is opposite to the upper surface of the vertical mounting seat (No. 2)
during installation. The anti-collision baffle (No. 3) is located in the middle of the optical
coupler on the level sense board. Then, lock with two M3 screws;
6) Re-plug the electrical wiring;
None
96
97
2.5.6 Replacing the Sample Probe Assembly

When to do
The sample probe assembly is bent, rusted, etc..
Tools
Diagonal pliers / 1 piece
2
7
3
6 4
Figure 2-33 Exploded View for Installation of Sample Probe Assembly
(1) the two screws (7) the vertical mounting seat

(2) the level sense board (5) the sample probe
(3) the spring guide post (6) the guide seat
(4) the anti-collision spring
Steps
4) Unscrew the two screws (No. 1) on the level sense board (No. 2), and unplug the
connection line between the sample probe (No. 5) and the level sense board;
98
5) Cut off the cable tie at the probe and pull out the tube connected to the probe;
6) Remove the sample probe assembly; take care not to let the liquid on probe touch the
inner wall of the guide seat (No. 6) and the level sense board No. 2);
7) Place the new probe assembly into the guide seat;
8) Tighten the spring guide post with the anti-collision spring;
9) Insert the tube connected to the sample probe into the sample probe and fasten it at the
probe hole with the cable tie;
10) Screw the two screws that fix the level sense board. Make sure that the lower surface of
the level sense board is against the upper surface of the vertical mounting seat (No. 7)
before installing the screws. The anti-collision baffle of the sample probe assembly is
located in the middle of the optical coupler on the level sense board;
11) Connect the connection line between sample probe and level sense board;
12) Pull the sample probe up and down with your hand to check whether the sample probe
moves up and down smoothly;
After replacing the probe, align the following positions: 1) The vertical initial position of the probe,
see 7.8.15 ; 2) The vertical limit position of the probe in the reagent carousel, sample position,
mixing position 1, and mixing position 2, see 7.8.16 ,7.8.17 ; 3) The horizontal position of the
probe at each working position. See 7.8.2 -7.8.10 for details.
NOTE
When the tube is removed, a small amount of wash buffer will flow out
from the probe tip and the tube, prevent the wash buffer from flowing to
the corrodible parts.
2.5.7 Replacing the Vertical Optical coupler

When to do
The vertical zero position optical coupler is damaged or fails.
Tools
99
2 1
Figure 2-34 Exploded View for Installation of Zero Position Optical coupler
(1) the two M3 screws (2) the vertical zero position optical coupler
Steps
3) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the two M3 screws (No. 1), unplug the optical coupler
cable, and take out the vertical zero position optical coupler (No. 2);
4) Replace it with the new optical coupler, connect the optical coupler cable, and then tighten
the screws;
After replacing the vertical optocoupler, align the height of the sample probe in the vertical
position: 1) The vertical initial position of the probe, see 7.8.15 ; 2) Align the vertical limit position
of the probe in the reagent carousel, sample position, mixing position 1, and mixing position 2,
see 7.8.16 ,7.8.17 ,7.11 ;
2.5.8 Replacing the Vertical Engaged Pulley

When to do
The vertical zero position optical coupler is damaged or fails.
Tools
100
Hexagon wrench / 1
5 6
4
Figure 2-35 Exploded View for Installation of Z-axis Engaged Pulley
(1) the Z-axis engaged pulley assembly (4)the two M3 screws

(2) the tension plate (5) spring washer
(3) the M3 synchronous belt tensioning screw (6) flat washer
Steps
3) Use a hexagon wrench to remove the M3 synchronous belt tensioning screw (No. 3)
through the tension plate (No. 2);
4) Use a hexagon wrench to remove the two M3 screws (No. 4), spring washer (No. 5), and
flat washer (No. 6) fixed at the back of the Z-axis engaged pulley assembly (No. 1), and
take out the Z-axis engaged pulley assembly;
5) Replace it with the new Z-axis engaged pulley assembly, adjust the tension of the
synchronous belt, and tighten the synchronous belt tensioning screws and the engaged
pulley fastening screws;
After the Z-axis engaged pulley assembly is installed, verify that there is no abnormal noise
when the sample probe moves vertically.
After replacing the vertical engaged pulley, align the following positions: 1) The vertical initial
position of the probe, see 7.8.15 ; 2) The vertical limit position of the probe in the reagent
carousel, sample position, mixing position 1, and mixing position 2, see 7.8.16 ,7.8.17 ,7.11 .
101
2.5.9 Replacing the Vertical Synchronous Belt

When to do
The teeth of the vertical synchronous belt are severely worn or the synchronous belt breaks.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
1 2
8
9
14
3 10
13
7 4
5
12
6 11
Figure 2-36 Exploded View for Installation of Vertical Synchronous Belt
(1) the level sense board (8) the four M3 hex socket screws
(2) the two fastening screws (9) the Z-axis baffle
(3) the crimp terminal (10) the vertical synchronous belt
(4) crimp terminal 1 (11) the M3hex socket screws
(5) the sample probe assembly (12) the engaged pulley
(6) the swab (13) the two M3 hex socket screws
(7) the vertical drive assembly (14) the belt press plate
Steps
1) Ensure that the power of the whole unit has been turned off;
3) Unscrew the two fastening screws (No. 2) on the level sense board (No. 1), and unplug
102
the connector, remove the level sense board and keep it properly;
4) Remove the sample probe assembly (No. 5) and keep it properly. For the methods and
steps, see section 2.5.6 ;
5) Unplug the cable of vertical motor and the connector of the vertical zero position optical
coupler;
6) Remove the crimp terminal (No. 3) and crimp terminal 1 (No. 4) so that one end of the
vertical harness is in a free state. Be careful not to bend the tube or cable during the
disassembly process;
7) Remove the swab (No. 6) and the tube connected to the swab from the swab mount;
8) Use a hexagon wrench to remove the four M3 hex socket screws (No. 8) that secure the
vertical drive assembly (No. 7) and remove the vertical drive assembly;
9) Use a cross screwdriver to unscrew the two M3 screws that fix the Z-axis baffle (No. 9),
and remove the Z-axis baffle;
10) Use a cross screwdriver to unscrew the two M3 screws that fix the belt press plate (No.
14), and remove the belt press plate;
11) Use a hexagon wrench to remove the M3hex socket screws (No. 11) that secure the
synchronous belt under the vertical drive assembly;
12) Use a hexagon wrench to remove the two M3 hex socket screws (No. 13) that secure the
engaged pulley (No. 12) at the back of the vertical drive assembly;
13) Remove the vertical synchronous belt (No. 10);
14) Replace it with the new synchronous belt, adjust the tension of the synchronous belt, and
tighten the synchronous belt tensioning screws and the engaged pulley fastening screws;
15) Install the belt press plate;
16) Install the Z-axis baffle. The relative position of the baffle and the vertical zero optical
coupler is suitable;
17) Install the vertical drive assembly and tighten the fastening screws;
18) Refer to the Alignment section to align the verticality of the sample probe;
19) Refer to the Alignment section to align the horizontal working position of the sample probe;
20) Install the swab and the tubes connected to the swab;
21) Install the sample probe assembly;
22) Install the wires and tubes, press the vertical wires with the crimp terminal and crimp
terminal 1, connect the tube to the connector of the sample probe assembly, and connect
the vertical anti-collision optical coupler wire and the vertical motor connector;
23) Install the level sense board, and connect the joint of the board;
24) Install the spring guide post and the anti-collision spring. Hold the outer sleeve of the
sample probe assembly by hand and push the sample probe up and down to confirm that
the sample probe assembly can rebound reliably and the relative position of the baffle and
the vertical anti-collision optical coupler of the level sense board is appropriate;
25) Refer to the Alignment section to align the height of the sample probe in the vertical
direction;
During the installation and replacement process, adjust the verticality, the horizontal working
position, and the height of the sample probe in the vertical direction: 1) The vertical initial
103
carousel, sample position, mixing position 1, and mixing position 2, see section 7.8.16 7.8.17
7.11 ; 3) The horizontal position of the probe at each working position. See 7.8.2 -7.8.10 for
details.
NOTE
Do not bend the tubes during disassembly.
2.5.10 Replacing the Vertical Motor Assembly

When to do
The vertical motor fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
1
5
Figure 2-37 Exploded View for Installation of Vertical Motor Assembly
(1) the sample probe assembly (5)the belt

(2) the M3 hex socket screws (6) the vertical motor assembly
(3) the engaged pulley (7) the two M4 screws
(4) the two M3 hex socket screws
104
Steps
4) Use a hexagon wrench to remove the M3 hex socket screws (No. 2) that secure the
synchronous belt under the vertical drive assembly.
5) Use a hexagon wrench to unscrew the two M3 hex socket screws (No. 4) that secure the
engaged pulley (No. 3) at the back of the vertical drive assembly, so that the vertical
synchronous belt is relaxed;
6) Unplug the cable of vertical motor;
7) Use a hexagon wrench to remove the two M4 screws (No. 7) that secure the vertical motor
assembly (No. 6) and remove the vertical motor assembly;
8) Replace it with the new vertical motor assembly, put the vertical synchronous belt into the
pulley on the vertical motor assembly and tighten the screws;
9) Adjust the tension of the synchronous belt, and tighten the synchronous belt tensioning
screws and the engaged pulley fastening screws;
10) Install the sample probe assembly and connect the tubes and the cables of the probe and
the level sense board;
After the sample probe assembly is installed, verify that there is no abnormal noise when the
sample probe moves vertically.
After replacing the vertical motor assembly, align the height of the sample probe in the vertical
position: 1) The vertical initial position of the probe, see 7.8.15 ; 2) The vertical limit position of
the probe in the reagent carousel, sample position, mixing position 1, and mixing position 2,
see section 7.8.16 7.8.17 7.11 ;.
NOTE
Protect the sample probe during the disassembly process.
2.5.11 Replacing the Damping Plate

When to do
The damping plate is cracked or broken.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
105
4
3
2
Figure 2-38 Exploded View for Installation of Damping Plate
(1) the sample probe assembly (3) the two M4 screws

(2) the damping plate
Steps
4) Remove the vertical motor assembly; the methods and steps are described in section
1.2.10;
5) Use a cross screwdriver to unscrew the two M4 screws (No. 3) that fix the damping plate
(No. 2), and remove the damping plate;
6) Replace it with the new damping plate. When installing, install the non-threaded hole
surface of the shock absorbing pad onto the vertical drive assembly;
7) Install the vertical motor assembly, the methods and steps are described in section 1.2.10;
8) Install the sample probe assembly and connect the tubes and the cables of the probe and
the level sense board;
After the sample probe assembly is installed, verify that there is no abnormal noise when the
106
sample probe moves vertically.
10) After replacing the damping plate, align the following positions: 1) The vertical initial
carousel, sample position, mixing position 1, and mixing position 2, see section 7.8.16
7.8.17 7.11 ;.
NOTE
Protect the sample probe during the disassembly process.
2.5.12 Replacing the Optical coupler of Horizontal Code Disk

When to do
The optical coupler is damaged or fails.
Tools
5
4
Figure 2-39 Exploded View for Installation of Optical coupler of Horizontal Code Disk
(1) the horizontal code disk (4) the sample probe drive assembly
(2) the optical coupler frame (5) the cross recessed pan head screws
(3) the optical coupler frame
Steps
3) Push the moving part of the sample probe horizontally away from the end of the horizontal
code disk (No. 1);
4) Unplug the connector of optical coupler cable and the adapter cable on the back of the
sample probe drive assembly (No. 4);
107
5) Unscrew the cross recessed pan head screws that fix the optical coupler frame (No. 2);
take care not to damage the code disk;
6) Unscrew the cross recessed pan head screws (No. 5) that fix the optical coupler frame
(No. 3);
7) Install the new optical coupler onto the optical coupler frame;
8) Install and fix the optical coupler onto the horizontal mounting plate. When installing and
fixing it, pay attention to the code disk gear located between the two sensor arms of the
optical coupler. Be careful not to damage the sensing area of the optical coupler;
9) Pass one end of the new optical coupler connect from the through hole above the optical
coupler frame to the back of the assembly, connect the optical coupler to the adapter, and
hold the wire with cable tie.
After replacing the optical coupler of horizontal code disk, align: the horizontal position of the
probe at each working position, See 7.8.2 -7.8.10 for details.
2.5.13 Replacing the Optical coupler on Horizontal Home
Position
When to do
Tools
3
4
Figure 2-40 Exploded View for Installation of Optical coupler on Horizontal Home
Position
(1) the power supply cover (4) the screws

(2) the optical coupler (5) the power assembly
(3) the cross recessed pan head screws (6) the power supply conversion board
108
Steps
2) Remove the rear panel;
3) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the power supply cover (No. 1) of the power assembly
(No. 5);
4) Unplug the connector on the power supply conversion board (No. 6) of the power assembly;
5) Unscrew the screws (No. 4) that fix the power assembly, and remove the power assembly;
6) Unplug the connector of the optical coupler (No. 2) on the horizontal home position and
the cable;
7) Unscrew the cross recessed pan head screws (No. 3) of the optical coupler on the
horizontal home position;
8) Install the new optical coupler onto the optical coupler position at the back of the sample
probe drive assembly;
9) Connect the connector of the optical coupler and the adapter cable, and hold the wire with
cable tie;
10) Install the power assembly;
11) Connect the connector on the power supply conversion board of the power assembly and
arrange the cable;
12) Install the upper cover of power board;
13) Install the rear panel.
After replacing the optical coupler on the horizontal home position, align: the horizontal position
of the probe at each working position, See 7.8.2 -7.8.10 for details..
2.5.14 Replacing the Horizontal Engaged Pulley

When to do
The engaged pulley is damaged or makes strange noises.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
2 1
109
Figure 2-41 Exploded View for Installation of Optical coupler of Horizontal Code Disk
(1) the horizontal engaged pulley (2) the M3 synchronous belt tensioning screw
Steps
3) Push the moving part of the sample probe horizontally away from the end of the horizontal
engaged pulley (No. 1);
4) Use a hexagon wrench to remove the M3 synchronous belt tensioning screw (No. 2)
through the tension plate;
5) Use a hexagon wrench to remove the two M4 screws (No. 3), spring washer, and flat
washer fixed at the back of the engaged pulley. Take out the engaged pulley, and be careful
not to damage the sensing area of the optical coupler;
6) Replace it with the new horizontal engaged pulley, adjust the tension of the synchronous
belt, and tighten the synchronous belt tensioning screws and the engaged pulley fastening
screws;
After replacing the horizontal engaged pulley, align: the horizontal position of the probe at each
working position, See 7.8.2 -7.8.10 for details.
2.5.15 Replacing the Horizontal Synchronous Belt

When to do
The teeth of horizontal synchronous belt are severely worn or the synchronous belt breaks.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
3 2 1
Figure 2-42 Exploded View for Installation of Horizontal Synchronous Belt
110
(1) the sample probe assembly (4) the horizontal synchronous belt
(2) the horizontal belt presser (5) the horizontal engaged pulley
(3) the crimp terminal
Steps
1) Ensure that the power of the whole unit has been turned off and unplug the power cable
of the whole unit;
4) Loosen the tensioning screws of the horizontal synchronous belt (No. 4) and the fastening
screws of the horizontal engaged pulley (No. 5). For details, see section 2.5.14
5) Use a cross screwdriver to unscrew the two M3 screws that fix the crimp terminal (No. 3),
and remove the crimp terminal;
6) Use a cross screwdriver to unscrew the two M3 screws that fix the link damper (No. 1),
and remove the link damper;
7) Use a Hexagon wrench to unscrew the two M3 screws that fix the horizontal belt presser
(No. 2), and remove the horizontal belt presser; take care not to pull the tube;
8) Take out the horizontal synchronous belt;
9) Put one end of the new synchronous belt onto the engaged pulley, and put the other end
onto the motor pulley through the back of the vertical drive assembly;
10) Adjust the tension of the synchronous belt, and tighten the tensioning screws of the
synchronous belt and the fastening screws of the engaged pulley;
11) Install the horizontal belt press plate to press the synchronous belt;
12) Install the link damper, use the swabs to connect the tubes and vertical harness,
respectively, place them in the left and right grooves of the link damper, and note that the
tubes and cables are smooth and not winding;
13) Install the crimp terminal, and take care not to squeeze the tubes and cables;
14) Install the sample probe assembly and connect the tubes and the cables of probe and the
level sense board;
After replacing the horizontal synchronous belt, align: the horizontal position of the probe at
each working position, See 7.8.2 -7.8.10 for details.
NOTE
Make sure that the power cord of the whole unit is unplugged during
assembly and disassembly.
2.5.16 Replacing the Horizontal Motor Assembly

When to do
If the horizontal motor fails, the horizontal motor assembly must be replaced.
Tools
111
Hexagon wrench / 1
1 2
6
4
Figure 2-43 Diagram of Disassembling Horizontal Motor Assembly
(1) the M3 synchronous belt tensioning screw (4) the horizontal motor assembly
(2) the horizontal belt (5) the power assembly
(3) the horizontal engaged pulley (6) the four M4 screws
Steps
1) Switch off the main power of the whole unit. Unplug the power cable of the whole unit;
3) Use a hexagon wrench to remove the M3 synchronous belt tensioning screw (No. 1) at the
leftmost of the sample probe drive assembly that passes through the tension plate;
4) Use a hexagon wrench to unscrew the two M4 screws that secure the horizontal engaged
pulley (No. 3) at the back of the sample probe drive assembly, so that the horizontal belt
(No. 2) is relaxed;
112
6) Install the power assembly (No. 5), the methods and steps are described in section 1.2.13;
7) Unplug the cable of the horizontal motor assembly and unscrew the four M4 screws (No.
6) that secure the horizontal motor assembly (No. 4).
8) Remove the horizontal motor assembly, replace it with the new motor assembly, tighten
the fastening screws, and insert the motor cable;
9) On the front of the instrument, carefully put the synchronous belt onto the motor pulley;
10) Adjust the appropriate tension of the synchronous belt;
11) Tighten the tensioning screws of synchronous belt and the two fastening screws of the
horizontal engaged pulley;
12) Install the power assembly at the back of the whole unit;
13) Connect the connector on the power supply conversion board of the power assembly and
arrange the cable;
14) Install the upper cover of power board;
15) Install the rear panel;
After replacing the horizontal motor assembly, align: the horizontal position of the probe at each
working position, See 7.8.2 -7.8.10 for details.
NOTE
Make sure that the power cord of the whole unit is unplugged during
replacement.
113
2.6 Sample Reagent Handling System

This section introduces the reagent handling system, which includes:
1) Structure of reagent handling system
2) Assembly and disassembly of reagent handling system
3) Disassembly of rack feeder system
2.6.1 System Composition and Introduction

The sample-reagent handling system is used for sample delivery, reagent loading, reagent
mixing, reagent refrigeration and reagent feeding, and works together with the sample probe to
complete the reagent component aspiration.
The system consists of the following parts:
1) Sample carousel module The module is mainly composed of a large gear, a sample
carousel, a grounding spring and a detergent box, and completes the functions of loading,
grounding, rack feeding, and loading and feeding of the sample probe wash buffer. There
are 50 sample positions.
2) Reagent pot module The module consists of three main parts: reagent carousel, fixed large
gear and reagent pot body. It completes the functions of reagent bottle reloading, reagent
mixing and reagent positioning and feeding. There are 15 reagent positions on the reagent
carousel.
3) Reagent carousel cover module The front part of the reagent carousel cover can be
removed when you change and view the reagents. The opening of the cover is facing the
operator, and the reagent carousel cover has a knob for the user to open the cover. There
is a detection sensor on the carousel cover. During the normal test of the instrument, you
can detect the opening and closing of the carousel cover to ensure that the instrument is
closed during normal test.
4) Reagent refrigeration module This module realizes the function of constant refrigeration
24 hours a day with the temperature ranging from 2℃ to 8℃.
5) Reagent bar code reader assembly This optional assembly is not available for standard
models. When loading reagents, you need to use a handheld bar code reader to scan the
reagents. For optional models equipped with the reagent bar code reader assembly,
automatic reagent bar code scanning and sample bar code scanning are supported.
6) Test tube anti-collision treatment The module is mounted on the desktop shells to detect
the height of the loaded test tube, and the sample carousel stops rotating if the test tube
is higher than the carousel.
7) Rapid treatment of samples or reagents The module is mounted on the desktop shells for
manual feeding of the sample or reagent. Press the knob; the sample or the reagent
carousel will rotate left or right to facilitate manual access to the sample or reagent bottle.
2.6.2 Sample Reagent Carousel Assembly

Module Functions
The sample reagent carousel assembly, located on the right side of the whole unit, includes the
sample carousel module, reagent carousel module and refrigeration module. The sample
114
carousel module is used to store and transfer the sample; the reagent carousel is used to store,
mix and position the reagent; the refrigeration module, located at the bottom of the reagent pot,
is used to realize the refrigeration temperature required for the reagent storage.
The sample reagent carousel assembly is mainly used for: sample transfer, reagent storage,
mixing, aspiration and positioning. When a certain amount of sample or reagent bottle is
manually put in, the reagent carousel bar code reader scans the sample or the reagent bottle.
After the whole unit analyzes and treats the sample or reagent, it positions the aspiration of the
sample probe and mixes the reagent as required.
Figure 2-44 Position of Sample Reagent Carousel Assembly in the Whole Unit
(1) Sample Reagent Carousel Assembly (3) Sample cover assembly

(2) Reagent pot cap assembly (4) Desktop shells assembly
115
Component Positions of Sample Reagent Carousel Assembly and FRU Details
116
117
118
Figure 2-45 Exploded View of Sample Reagent Carousel Assembly
(1) Dispensing window (28) Hot-end thermal pad

(2) Reagent carousel big cover assembly (29) Hot-end waterproof strip
(3) Mixing gear (30)Radiator 51W 39.7*4.16mm cable length
510 mm with terminal
(4) Reagent carousel (BM50) (31) Thermal pad
(5) Probe detergent box cover (32) Thermal insulation board
(6) Seal ring (33) Cross recessed small pan head screw
M3X12
(7) Sample Carousel Assembly (1-10) (34) Scanning window assembly
(8) Sample Carousel Assembly 1 (11-20) (35) Correlative optical coupler wire (S)
(9) Sample Carousel Assembly 2 (21-30) (36) Reagent carousel gear fixed shaft
(10) Sample Carousel Assembly 3 (31-40) (37) 84 teeth S5M pulley
(11) Sample Carousel Assembly 4 (41-50) (38) Cross recessed small pan head screw
assembly M3X6
(12) Sample conductive brush (39) Reagent pot sensor holder
(13) Cross recessed small pan head screw (40) Synchronous belt 780S5M100 rubber
assembly M3X8
(14)Reader fixing plate (41) Stainless steel hex socket screw M4X16
(15)Built-in reagent bar code reader (42) Motor pulley assembly
(16)Stainless steel hex socket screw M4X10 (43) Reagent pot home position sensor
holder
(17)Stainless steel hex socket screw M3X12 (44) Reagent carousel code disk
(18)Stainless steel cross recessed pan head (45) Reagent pot spindle
119
screw assembly M4X12
(19)Stainless steel cross recessed pan head (46) Sample carousel column
screw assembly M3X8
(20)Cold-end fan assembly (47) Sample carousel gear
(21)Sensor temperature 5Kohm B3470K with (48) Reagent pot mounting plate
threads
(22)Cold-end radiator (BM50) (49) Sample carousel guide shaft assembly
(23)Cold-end waterproof strip (50) Bearing support plate
(24)Reagent carousel fixed cover (51) Damping plate
(25)Deep groove ball bearing.Ф20XФ32X7/6804ZZ (52) Sample carousel motor assembly
(26)Deep groove ball bearing.60X78X10/ 6812ZZ (53) Sample carousel code disk sensor
holder
(27)Hot-end radiator (54) Sample carousel optical coupler baffle
2.6.3 Component Positions of Desktop Shells and FRU
Details
Figure 2-46 Exploded View of Desktop Shells Assembly
(1) PROXIMITY SENSOR, 200VDC, normally (6)Button switch (green light

open _φ22mm_AC/DC24V)
(2) Desktop shells (7)Right-handed optical coupler seat assembly
(3) Substrate cover (8) Press plate
(4) Button switch, φ16mm, with yellow light, (9) Cross recessed small pan head screw
AC/DC24V assembly M3X8
(5) Left-handed optical coupler seat assembly
2.6.4 Replacing Built-in Bar Code Reader

When to do
The built-in bar code reader fails and it is confirmed to be damaged after inspection.
Tools
120
Hexagon wrench / 1
(1) Reader mounting bracket

(2) Reader
(3) sample syringe mounting assembly
Steps
3) Remove the screws of built-in sample syringe mounting assembly and open the sample
syringe mounting assembly (No. 3);
4) Unplug the wiring associated with the laser scanner;
5) Remove the two M3X8 screw assemblies connected to the reader fixing plate and the
reagent pot mounting plate, and remove the reader fixing plate (No. 1) and the reader (No.
2);
6) Remove the two M3 screw assemblies that hold the reader, remove the screws and the
reader, and place them properly;
7) Replace it with a new reader, and fix the two M3 screw assemblies connected to the reader
and the reader adjustment plate;
8) Remove the two M3 screw assemblies connected to the reader fixing plate and the reagent
pot mounting plate, and connect the cables;
9) Power on the whole unit, start the software, and enter the reader alignment program; adjust
the reader fixing plate so that the reader light falls into the groove of the reader window
surface;
121
Groove of reader window
1) Exit the software and power off the whole unit;

2) Install the whole unit in a reverse order of disassembly.
Scan the barcodes of reagents and samples to confirm scan reliability.
WARNING
When the main power supply is turned on during the replacement of the
reader, do not touch other circuits. During the alignment process, the
equipment has a reset motion, do not touch the motion mechanism.
2.6.5 Replacing the Sample Carousel Optical coupler

When to do
If the sample carousel optical coupler fails and the optical coupler is found damaged through
inspection, replace the sample carousel optical coupler.
Tools
Needle-nose pliers / 1
122
(1) Sample carousel code disk sensor holder

Steps
3) Remove the M4 screw assemblies of built-in sample syringe mounting assembly and open
the sample syringe mounting assembly;
4) Unplug the wiring associated with the optical coupler;
5) Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to remove the wire buckle from the sample carousel code
disk sensor holder;
6) Remove the two M3 screw assemblies on the built in sample carousel code disk sensor
holder, and remove the sample carousel code disk sensor holder and the optical coupler
(No. 1);
7) Remove the two M3 screw assemblies that fix the optical coupler, and remove the optical
coupler;
8) Replace it with a new optical coupler;
9) Install the whole unit in a reverse order of disassembly. ;

After replacing the sample carousel optical coupler and the code disk position optical coupler,
check them to see if they work normally.
NOTE
Install the optical coupler according to the identifications on the cables.
2.6.6 Replacing the sensor for opening and closing cover

When to do
The sensor for opening and closing cover fails and the sensor is found damaged through
123
inspection.
Tools
Cross screwdriver / 1
(1)M4 screws (3)PROXIMITY SENSOR

(2)Press plate
Steps
3) Unplug the adapter wiring with the sensor;
4) Remove the press plate (No. 2);
5) Remove the sensor for opening and closing cover, and replace it with a new one (No. 3);
After replacing the sensor for opening and closing cover, check if it works normally.
NOTE
2.6.7 Replacing the cold-end fan assembly

When to do
In the Utility → Status → Power Status Query screen, check whether there is an alarm in the
fan bar of the reagent cooling unit. If there is, the cold end fan fails and should be replaced.
124
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
(1) Cold-end fan bracket (4) Ф3 spring washer

(2) Fan (5) M3X20 screws
(3) Ф3 flat gasket
Steps
3) Push the vertical assembly of the sampling module to the leftmost;
4) Remove the five M4X12 screw assemblies, and remove the large cover assembly of the
reagent carousel;
5) Remove the three M3X12 hex socket screws and remove the mixing gear;
6) Remove the six M4X10 hex socket screws, and remove the reagent carousel (BM50);
7) Remove the three stainless steel M3 screw assemblies, unplug the connector of fan
connection cable (be sure to protect the connector to prevent the wire from being short-
circuited that may damage to the wiring and main control board), and remove the cold-end
fan assembly;
8) Remove the four M3X20 hex socket screws (No. 5) and remove the cold-end fan assembly
(No. 2);

After installing the fan, fold the cable between the fan bracket and the fan.
Place the fan connector in the receiving groove of the reagent pot.
125
After replacing the fan, power it on to confirm that the fan is running normally.
NOTE
When installing the cold-end fan assembly, avoid compression of the
cold-end sensor cable. Place the cable connector of the cold-end sensor
in the receiving groove of the reagent pot.
126
2.6.8 Replacing the Cold-End Temperature Sensor

When to do
The cold-end temperature sensor fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Wrench / 1 piece
(1) M3 stainless steel screw (3) Temperature sensor

(2) Cold-end fan assembly
Steps
3) Push the vertical assembly of the sampling module to the leftmost;
reagent carousel;
6) Remove the six M4X10 hex socket screws, and remove the reagent carousel (BM50);
7) Remove the three stainless steel M3 screw assemblies and place the cold-end fan
assembly (No. 2) to the right;
127
8) Unplug the cable connector of the cold-end temperature sensor and use a wrench to
unscrew the temperature sensor (No. 3).

Place the sensor cable into the gap between the radiator and the wall of the pot, dock the 2PIN
connector onto the adapter cable, and place the adapter into the receiving space at the bottom
of the reagent pot;
Place the fan connector and the sensor connector into the receiving groove of the reagent pot.
Receiving groove
of the reagent pot.
After replacing the sensor, power it on to confirm that the sensor is running normally.
NOTE
When installing the cold-end fan assembly, avoid compression of the
cold-end sensor cable. Place the cable connector of the cold-end sensor
in the receiving groove of the reagent pot.
2.6.9 Replacing the Reagent Pot Code Disk Optical coupler

When to do
The reagent pot code disk optical coupler fails and the optical coupler is found damaged
through inspection.
Tools
128
Steps
3) Unplug the cable connector, remove the two M3 screws from the right side, and remove
the code disk optical coupler (No. 1).
4) Replace it with a new optical coupler and tighten the fastening screws;
After replacing the optical coupler, power it on to confirm that the optical coupler is running
normally..
NOTE
2.6.10 Replacing the Motor Pulley Assembly

When to do
The motor pulley assembly fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
129
(1) Motor pulley assembly (3) Reagent pot sensor holder and optical
coupler
(2) Turntable motor adjustment board
Steps
4) Remove the M4 screw assemblies that fix the rear panel, and remove the rear panel.
5) Remove the M4 screw assemblies of built-in sample syringe mounting assembly and open
the sample syringe mounting assembly;
6) Unplug the cables and tubes that are connected to the sample reagent carousel;
7) Push the vertical component of the sampling assembly to the leftmost, remove the four M5
hex socket screws, and take out the sample reagent carousel;
8) Loosen the belt tensioning screws M4X16;
9) Remove the four M3 screw assemblies that fix the reagent pot sensor holder, and remove
the reagent pot sensor holder and the optical coupler (No. 3);
10) Remove the four M4X10 hex socket screws, and remove the turntable motor adjustment
board (No. 2) and the motor pulley assembly (No. 1);
11) Replace it with the new motor pulley assembly and pre-tighten the four M4X10 hex socket
screws;
12) Adjust the tension of the synchronous belt by adjusting the synchronous belt tensioning
screws, and tighten the four M4X10 hex socket screws that fix the motor pulley assembly;
13) Insert the reagent pot sensor holder and the optical coupler into the reagent pot mounting
plate;
14) Install the reagent pot assembly into the whole unit and tighten the four M5X10 hex socket
screws;
15) Power on the whole unit, start the software, and enter the alignment program; Remove the
130
dispensing window and align the positions of the sample probe and the sample reagent
carousel;
16) Install the dispensing window, execute the sampling timing, and confirm that the
dispensing window is not in contact with the sample probe;
After replacing the motor pulley assembly, confirm that the motor pulley is running normally,
without abnormal noise.
Re-adjust the position of the reagent probe at the sample injection port of the reagent pot.
NOTE
Connect the cables according to the identifications on the cables.
After the synchronous belt is replaced, align and confirm the tension of
synchronous belt.
2.6.11 Replacing the Synchronous Belt

When to do
The synchronous belt fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 2-47 Synchronous Belt

131
(1) Reagent pot home position sensor holder (3) Motor pulley assembly
and optical coupler and adjustment board
(2) Reagent pot sensor holder and optical (4) Synchronous belt
coupler
Steps
2) Perform steps 1 to 9 in section 8.2.8, and remove the reagent pot sensor holder and optical
coupler (No. 2);
3) Loosen the four M4X10 hex socket screws that fix the adjustment board, and push the
motor pulley assembly (No. 3) to the middle;
4) Remove the seven M3X8 screw assemblies , and remove the home position sensor holder
of the reagent pot and the optical coupler (No. 1);
5) Replace it with a new synchronous belt (No. 4);
6) Adjust the tension of the synchronous belt by adjusting the synchronous belt tensioning
screws, and tighten the four M4X10 hex socket screws that fix the motor pulley assembly;
7) Insert the reagent pot sensor holder and the optical coupler into the reagent pot mounting
plate;
screws;
carousel;
After reinstalling the reagent pot assembly, re-adjust the position of the reagent probe at the
sample injection port of the reagent pot.
NOTE
After the synchronous belt is replaced, align and confirm the tension of
synchronous belt.
2.6.12 Replacing the Reagent Carousel Home Position Optical
coupler
When to do
132
The reagent carousel home position optical coupler fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
2) Perform steps 1 to 7 in section 8.2.8, and remove the sample reagent carousel;
3) Remove the two M3X6 screw assemblies of the reagent pot home position sensor holder
that fix the optical coupler and remove the optical coupler (No. 1);
4) Replace it with a new optical coupler;
screws;
carousel;
NOTE
133
2.6.13 Replacing the Sample Carousel Motor Assembly and
Damping Plate
When to do
The sample motor assembly fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
(1) Sample carousel motor assembly (2) Damping plate
Steps
2) Perform steps 1 to 7 in section 8.2.8, and remove the sample reagent pot;
3) Remove the two M4X10 hex socket screws, and remove the sample carousel motor
assembly (No. 1);
4) Remove the two M3X20 hex socket screws and remove the damping plate (No. 2);
5) Replace it with a new sample carousel motor assembly or a damping plate;
134
screws;
carousel;
NOTE
2.6.14 Replacing the Deep Groove Ball BearingФ20XФ32X7

When to do
The rotational resistance of the reagent carousel is large and the rust of the deep groove ball
bearing is confirmed.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
135
(1) Reagent pot sensor holder and reagent (3) Mixing gear
carousel gear fixed shaft assembly
(2) Deep Groove Ball BearingФ20XФ32X7 (4) Reagent carousel big cover
assembly
Steps
reagent carousel (No. 4);
4) Remove the three M3X12 hex socket screws and remove the mixing gear (No. 3);
the reagent pot sensor holder and reagent carousel gear fixed shaft assembly (No. 1);
6) Remove the deep groove ball bearing (No. 2) from both sides of the reagent pot and
replace it with a new deep groove ball bearing;
7) Install the sample reagent carousel assembly in reverse order;
8) Install the sample reagent carousel assembly into the whole unit and tighten the four
M5X10 hex socket screws;
136
carousel;
After reinstalling the reagent carousel, re-adjust the position of the reagent probe at the sample
injection port of the reagent pot.
NOTE
2.6.15 Replacing the Deep Groove Ball Bearing 60X78X10

When to do
The rotational resistance of the reagent carousel is large and the rust of the deep groove ball
bearing is confirmed.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
(1) Deep groove ball bearing 60X78X10 (2) Pot support shaft
137
Steps
reagent carousel;
5) Remove the four M4X10 hex socket screws, and remove the reagent carousel (BM50) and
reagent carousel fixed cover assembly;
the reagent pot sensor holder and reagent carousel gear fixed shaft assembly;
7) Loosen the four M4X10 hex socket screws that fix the motor pulley assembly, loosen the
pulley tensioning screws, and push the motor pulley assembly to the middle;
8) Pull out the 84-teeth S5M pulley and the reagent carousel code disk assembly;
9) Remove the four M4X12 screw assemblies, and remove the hot-end radiator.
10) Unscrew the four M4X10 hex socket screws and four MX12 countersunk screws, and
remove the sample carousel assembly;
(1) M4X10 hex socket screw (2)MX12 countersunk screw
Remove the three M4X10 hex socket screws, and remove the pot support shaft;
138
(1) Deep groove ball bearing 60X78X10 (2) Pot support shaft
1) Remove the deep groove ball bearings (No. 1) from both sides of the pot support shaft
(No. 2) and replace them with new deep groove ball bearings;
carousel;
7) Install the whole unit in a reverse order of disassembly. (When installing the hot-end
radiator, remove the original hot-end thermal pad and then replace it with a new hot-end
thermal pad).
NOTE
139
2.6.16 Replacing the Sample Carousel Teeth and Sample
Carousel Guide Shaft Assembly

When to do
The sample carousel does not move smoothly, and the sample carousel gear is found damaged
or the sample carousel guide shaft assembly is worn.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
(1) Sample carousel guide shaft assembly (2) Bearing support plate
(3) Sample carousel column (4) Sample carousel gear
(5) Reagent pot mounting plate
Steps
2) Perform steps 1 to 11 in section 8.2.13, and remove the sample carousel assembly;
3) Remove the M4X10 hex socket screws that fix the sample carousel guide shaft assembly
(No. 1), remove the sample carousel column (No. 3) and remove the sample carousel gear
(No. 4);
4) Replace them with new parts.
140
carousel;
thermal pad).
NOTE
2.6.17 Replacing the Sample Carousel Assembly

When to do
The sample carousel is damaged.
Tools
(1) M4 screw assembly (2) Sample Carousel Assembly

Steps
1) Open the sample cover assembly;
141
2) Unscrew the M4X12 screw assembly (No.1) from the sample window with a cross
screwdriver and remove the sample carousel assembly (No. 2);
3) Replace it with a new sample carousel assembly.
2.6.18 Replacing the Scanning Window Assembly

When to do
The scanning window assembly gets wet or its glass breaks.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 2-48 Scanning Window
(1) Scanning window (4) Glass upper press plate

(2) Rubber pad (5) Cross recessed small pan head screw assembly
M3X6
(3) Glass window
Steps
3) Remove the four M4X12 screw assemblies, and remove the hot-end radiator.
4) Unscrew the two M3X8 screws and remove the scanning window assembly;
142
5) Remove the four M3X6 screw assemblies (No. 5), and remove the glass (No. 3);
6) Replace it with new glass;
carousel;
thermal pad).

NOTE
143
2.7 Cuvette loading system

2.7.1 Function Module Introduction
The cuvette loading assembly is located at the left front of the whole unit. It includes the auxiliary
parts such as the drawer assembly, X-axis of gripper, Y-axis of gripper, Z-axis of gripper, and
the waste container.
The drawer assembly is the interaction point for adding a new cuvette box and taking away the
old cuvette box.
The gripper is used to transport the cuvette between the cuvette box, photometer position,
waste drainage position, mixing position, incubation position, dispersion and waste container.
The waste container is the collection point of discarded cuvettes, and will be emptied manually
when it is full.
Figure 2-49 Position of the Cuvette Loading Assembly in the Whole Unit
(1) Drawer stopper plate (3) Cuvette loading assembly

(2) Gripper assembly
2.7.2 Gripper Module

Assembly Locations and FRU Details
144
Figure 2-50 Exploded View of Gripper Assembly
(1) Y-axis motor pulley (10) BM20 gripping mechanism Y-

FPC connecting plate PCBA
(2) Correlative optical coupler wire (S) (11) Finger clamping spring
(3) Y axis engaged pulley (12) Finger positioning spring
(4) BM10 optical coupler conversion board (13) BM10 empty gripping optical
PCBA with socket coupler conversion board of the first
gripper PCBA
(5) X-axis housing (14) First Gripper Assembly
(6) X axis engaged pulley (15) Z-axis relieving spring
(7) Z-axis housing (16) BM20 gripping mechanism Z-
FPC connecting plate PCBA
(8) BM20 gripping mechanism X-FPC (17) Vertical anti-collision spring
connecting plate PCBA
(9) Track switching motor pulley
2.7.3 Replacing Correlative Optical Coupler (S)

When to do
The optical coupler is damaged or fails. (There are two correlative optical couplers in the gripper
assembly, which are located in the Y-axis assembly respectively.)
Tools
145
Figure 2-51 Position Diagram in the Y-Axis Assembly of Correlative Optical Coupler
(1) Code disk gear position optical coupler (3) Zero position optical coupler
(2) M3X6 screws
Steps of replacing the zero position optical coupler in the Y axis assembly
2) Perform steps in section 5.2.9, and remove the left lower cover;
3) Remove the gripper assembly;
4) Disconnect the optical coupler cable;
5) Use a cross screwdriver to unscrew the two M3X6 cross recessed pan head screws that
fix the optical coupler, and remove the optical coupler (No. 3);
6) Install the new optical coupler, and use two M3X6 cross recessed pan head screws to fix
it;
7) Restore the machine in turn according to the reverse order of the above steps.
Steps of replacing the code disk gear position optical coupler in the Y-axis assembly
2) Remove the transparent cover, open the front door and remove the drawer stopper plate;
3) Disconnect the optical coupler cable.;
4) Use a cross screwdriver to unscrew one M3X6 cross recessed pan head combination
screw that fix the optical coupler rack, and remove the optical coupler (No. 1);
5) Install the new optical coupler in the optical coupler rack, and use one M3X6 cross
recessed pan head screws to fix it;
6) Install the optical coupler rack, insert the optical coupler cable, install the drawer stopper
plate and transparent cover, and close the front door in turn according to the reverse order
of the above steps.
N/A
146
2.7.4 Replacing the Y-Axis Engaged Pulley

When to do
The Y-axis engaged pulley fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Y-axis engaged pulley

115-028540-00
Synchronous belt
M3X10 hex socket screw with

spring washer and flat gasket
M3X20 hex socket screw with

spring washer
Figure 2-52 Exploded View of Installing the Y-Axis Engaged Pulley
Steps
4) Check the tightness of the belt before replacement, record the belt tensioning state, and
use a hexagon wrench to unscrew the M3X20 hexagon socket head cap screw;
5) Use a hexagon wrench to unscrew the M3X10 hexagon socket head cap screw;
6) Take the Y-axis engaged pulley out from the synchronous belt;
7) Place the new Y-axis engaged pulley, and put the synchronous belt on the pulley;
8) Adjust the tensioning screw, and measure if the belt force value is consistent with that at
the time of removing;
9) Restore the machine in turn according to the reverse order of the above steps.
N/A
2.7.5 Replacing the Y-FPC Connecting Plate PCBA

When to do
147
The Y-FPC connecting plate PCBA fails.
Tools
X-FPC M3X8 cross recessed Cushion ring
pan head screw
M3X4 cross recessed
pan head screw
Stiffened powder
injection screw (M3X6)
X axis housing
Cable stopper plate
M3X6 cross recessed pan

head screw assembly

head screw
M3X6 cross recessed pan Y-FPC

Y-FPC press plate
head screw assembly 051-001874-00
Figure 2-53 Exploded View for Installing the Y-FPC Connecting Plate PCBA
Steps
2) Remove the transparent cover;
3) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the six stiffened powder injection screws (M3X6), and
take away the X-axis housing;
4) Use a cross screwdriver to remove two M3X6 cross recessed pan head screw assemblies,
and take away the cable stopper plate;
5) Remove the cable connector plugs at two ends of Y-FPC;
6) Use a cross screwdriver to remove one M3X8 cross recessed pan head screw, take out
the cushion ring, and remove the X-FPC connector plug;
7) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the M3X6 cross recessed pan head screw assembly,
and remove the Y-FPC press plate;
8) Use a cross screwdriver to remove five M3X4 cross recessed pan head screws at two
ends of Y-FPC, and take out the Y-FPC;
9) Install the new Y-FPC and Y-FPC press plate, insert the X-FPC, install the cushion ring
fastening screw, insert the cable at two ends, install the cable stopper plate and X-axis
housing, and restore the machine in turn according to the reverse order of the above steps.
None
2.7.6 Replacing the Y-Axis Motor Pulley

When to do
The Y-axis motor fails.
Tools
148
Hexagon wrench / 1
Synchronous belt
Y-axis motor pulley

115-028539-00
M4X12 hex socket screw

with spring washer
Figure 2-54 Exploded View of Installing the Y-Axis Motor Pulley
Steps
4) Unplug the motor cable;
5) Use a hexagon wrench to remove the four M4X12 hexagon socket head cap screws and
spring washers that fix the Y-axis motor pulley, and remove the pulley from the
synchronous belt;
6) Install the new motor pulley assembly, put the pulley into the synchronous belt, and then
tighten the screws;
7) Connect the motor cable and restore the machine in turn according to the reverse order of
the above steps.
N/A
149
2.7.7 Replacing the X-FPC Connecting Plate PCBA

When to do
The X-FPC connecting plate PCBA fails.
Tools
Monkey wrench / 1 piece
Z-axis housing
Stiffened powder injection screw (M3X6)
M3X6 cross recessed pan head screw

M3X8 cross recessed pan Y-FPC cover plate
head screw Cushion ring X axis housing
X-FPC fixing plate
Stud screw M3X10+8-8
Y-FPC M2.5X4 cross recessed M2.5X4 cross
pan head screw recessed pan
X-FPC Cushion ring head screw
051-001875-00 X-FPC press
plate
Figure 2-55 Exploded View for Installing the X-FPC Connecting Plate PCBA
Steps
3) Remove the six stiffened powder injection screws (M3X6), remove the X-axis housing,
three stiffened powder injection screws (M3X6) and the Z-axis housing;
4) Remove the three M2.5X4 cross recessed pan head screws that fix the X-FPC fixing plate,
and remove the X-FPC fixing plate;
5) Remove one M3X8 cross recessed pan head screw, remove the cushion ring, and unplug
the X-FPC from the socket of Y-FPC;
6) Remove the three M3X6 cross recessed pan head screws that fix the Y-FPC cover plate,
and remove the Y-FPC cover plate;
7) Remove the M2.5X4 cross recessed pan head screw that fix the X-FPC press plate, and
remove the X-FPC press plate;
8) Remove the three stud screws M3X10+8-8, and remove the three cushion rings;
9) Unplug the cable inserted into the X-FPC and the Z-FPC;
10) Put the new X-FPC, and install it according to the reverse order of the above steps.
150
N/A
NOTE
Avoid damaging the socket when X-FPC and Z-FPC are inserted, and sort
the X-FPC after X-FPC and Y-FPC are inserted.
2.7.8 Replacing the Track Switching Motor Pulley

When to do
The track switching motor pulley fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
M3X6 cross recessed M3X6 cross recessed pan head screw
countersunk head screw X-FPC support plate
Y-FPC
M3X6 cross recessed pan head screw assembly
Track switching motor pulley

115-011981-00
M4X10 hex socket screw with M2.5X4 cross recessed pan head screw
spring washer and flat gasket
X-FPC fixing plate
X-axis motor rack
X-FPC
M3X6 cross recessed
countersunk head screw
head screw
Cushion ring
X axis housing
Stiffened powder injection

screw (M3X6)
Figure 2-56 Exploded View for Installing the Track Switching Motor Pulley in the X-
Axis Assembly
Steps
3) Remove the six stiffened powder injection screws (M3X6), and remove the X-axis housing;
4) Remove the three M2.5X4 cross recessed pan head screws that fix the X-FPC fixing plate,
and remove the X-FPC fixing plate;
5) Remove one M3X8 cross recessed pan head screw, remove the cushion ring, and unplug
the X-FPC from the socket of Y-FPC;
6) Remove the two M3X6 cross recessed pan head screw assemblies, one M3X6 cross
recessed countersunk head screw and one M3X6 cross recessed pan head screw that fix
the X-FPC support plate, and remove the X-FPC support plate;
7) Unplug the motor cable from the Y-FPC socket;
151
8) Remove the two M4X10 hexagon socket head cap screws, spring washers and flat gaskets
that fix the X-axis motor rack, remove the synchronous belt from the pulley, and remove
the X-axis motor rack with motor assembly;
9) Remove the four M3X6 cross recessed countersunk head screws that fix the motor pulley,
and remove the track switching motor pulley;
10) Place the new track switching motor pulley, and install it according to the reverse order of
the above steps.
N/A
Stiffened powder injection screw
Z-axis housing (M3X6)
M3X8 hex socket screw with spring
M3X6 cross recessed pan head screw washer and flat gasket
Y-FPC cover plate Z-axis relieving spring and
X axis Track switching motor pulley M2.5X8 cross
hanging sleeve
housing 115-011981-00 recessed pan head
screw
Upper shield of
the Z-axis belt
M3X6 cross
recessed
countersunk head
screw
M2X4 cross
recessed
countersunk head
Stopper plate
screw
Figure 2-57Exploded View for Installing the Track Switching Motor Pulley in the Z-Axis
Assembly
Steps
2) Open the transparent shielding cover, and remove the transparent cover;
5) Remove the two M2X4 cross recessed countersunk head screws that fix the stopper plate,
and remove the stopper plate;
6) Remove the two M2.5X8 cross recessed pan head screws that fix the Z-axis relieving
spring and hanging sleeve, and remove the Z-axis relieving spring and hanging sleeve;
7) Remove the two M3X6 cross recessed countersunk head screws that fix the upper shield
of the Z-axis belt, and remove the upper shield of the Z-axis belt;
8) Unplug the motor cable from the X-FPC socket;
9) Remove the three M3X8 hexagon socket head cap screws, spring washers and flat
gaskets that fix the track switching motor pulley, remove the synchronous belt from the
pulley, and remove the X-axis motor rack with motor assembly;
10) Place the new track switching motor pulley, and install it according to the reverse order of
the above steps.
N/A
152
2.7.9 Replacing the X-Axis Engaged Pulley

When to do
The X-axis engaged pulley fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
X axis housing
Stiffened powder
injection screw
(M3X6)
M3X8 hex socket screw

Synchronous belt X axis engaged pulley M3X20 hex socket screw
with spring washer and
115-028542-00 with spring washer
flat gasket
Figure 2-58 Exploded View of Installing the X-Axis Engaged Pulley
Steps
2) Open the transparent shielding cover, and remove the transparent cover;
4) Check the tightness of the belt before replacement, record the belt tensioning state, and
use a hexagon wrench to unscrew the M3X20 hexagon socket head cap screw and spring
washer;
5) Use a hexagon wrench to unscrew the two M3X8 hexagon socket head cap screws, spring
washers and flat gaskets that fix the X-axis engaged pulley, remove the synchronous belt
from the pulley, and take out the X-axis engaged pulley;
6) Place the new Y-axis engaged pulley, and put the synchronous belt on the pulley;
7) Follow the steps mentioned above in a reverse order to complete the installation. Note to
keep a proper tightness of the synchronous belt.
N/A
153
2.7.10 Replacing the BM10 Optical Coupler Conversion Board
with Socket
When to do
The BM10 optical coupler conversion board with socket fails.
Tools
(big)
(small)
Tweezers / 1 piece
X-FPC support plate
M2.5X6 cross recessed pan

head screw with spring M2.5X4 cross recessed pan head screw
washer and flat gasket Optical coupler (zero position)
X optical coupler rack 051-001034-00
M2.5X4 cross recessed Optical coupler (code disk

X axis housing
pan head screw gear position)
Stiffened powder injection screw (M3X6) 051-001034-00
Figure 2-59 Exploded View of Installing the BM10 Optical Coupler Conversion Board
with Socket in the X-Axis Assembly
Steps of replacing the zero position optical coupler in the X-axis assembly
4) Unplug the optical coupler insertion cable;
5) Move the Z-axis assembly, use a small cross screwdriver to remove the M2.5X4 cross
recessed pan head screw that fix the optical coupler from the upper hole of the X-FPC
support plate, and take out the optical coupler;
6) Place the new optical coupler, and install it according to the reverse order of the above
steps.
Steps of replacing the code disk gear position optical coupler in the X-xis assembly
154
4) Unplug the optical coupler insertion cable;
5) Use a small cross screwdriver to remove the two M2.5X6 cross recessed pan head screws,
spring washers and flat gaskets that fix the X optical coupler rack, and move to take out
the X optical coupler rack with optical coupler from the pulley position;
6) Use a small cross screwdriver to remove the M2.5X4 cross recessed pan head screw that
fixes the optical coupler, and take out the optical coupler;
steps.
N/A
Z-axis housing
M3X6 cross recessed pan head screw
Y-FPC cover plate

Stiffened powder
(M3X6)
injection screw (M3X6)
M2X4 cross recessed X-FPC press plate
countersunk head screw Stopper
X axis housing
plate
M2.5X4 cross
recessed pan
head screw
M2.5X4 cross recessed pan

head screw
Optical coupler (zero position)
051-001034-00
Optical coupler (middle position)

051-001034-00
Figure 2-60 Exploded View of Installing the BM10 Optical Coupler Switching Board
with Socket in the Z-Axis Assembly
Steps of replacing the optical coupler in the Z-axis assembly

2) Remove the transparent cover above the cuvette loading assembly;
4) When replacing the middle position optical coupler as shown in the figure, just use a small
cross screwdriver to remove the M2.5X4 cross recessed pan head screw that fixes the
optical coupler, remove the optical coupler, and unplug the cable for replacement and
installation. When replacing the zero position optical coupler as shown in the figure,
proceed with the following steps;
155
5) Remove the three stiffened powder injection screws (M3X6), and remove the Z-axis
housing;
7) Remove the two M2X4 cross recessed countersunk head screws that fix the stopper plate,
and remove the stopper plate;
8) Remove the M2.5X4 cross recessed pan head screw that fix the X-FPC press plate, and
remove the X-FPC press plate;
9) Use a small cross screwdriver to remove the M2.5X4 cross recessed pan head screw that
fixes the optical coupler, remove the optical coupler, and unplug and plug the cable;
steps.
2.7.11 Replacing the Z-Axis Relieving Spring

When to do
The Z-axis relieving spring fails.
Tools
Small and big cross / One for each
screwdrivers
Z-axis housing

screw (M3X6)
M2.5X8 cross recessed

pan head screw
Z-axis relieving spring

033-000161-00
Hanging sleeve
M2.5X8 cross recessed pan head screw
156
Figure 2-61 Exploded View of Installing the Z-Axis Relieving Spring
Steps
housing;
5) Take the two hanging sleeves out of the hooks at two ends of the spring;
6) Place the new Z axis relieving spring, and install it according to the reverse order of the
above steps.
N/A
2.7.12 Replacing the Z-FPC Connecting Plate PCBA

When to do
The Z-FPC connecting plate fails.
Tools
screwdrivers
Small monkey wrench / 1 piece
Z-axis housing M3X6 cross recessed pan head screw
screw (M3X6)
screw (M3X6)
X axis housing
Y-FPC cover
plate
pan head screw
and hanging sleeve
Z-FPC Stud screw M3X10+8-8
051-001873-00 X-FPC
Cushion ring
head screw assembly
Z-FPC fixing plate
M3X6 cross recessed

countersunk head screw
Z-FPC press plate

Upper shield of
the Z-axis belt
head screw assembly
Gripper assembly
M3X8 cross recessed pan head
Lower shield of screw assembly
the Z-axis belt M3X6 cross recessed countersunk head screw
Figure 2-62 Exploded View for Installing the Z-FPC Connecting Plate
157
Steps
5) Remove the stud screw M3X10+8-8 close to the Z-FPC, and remove one cushion ring
(note: the three stud screws and cushion rings can all be removed when necessary);
7) Remove the two M3X6 cross recessed countersunk head screws that fix the upper shield
of the Z-axis belt, and remove the upper shield of the Z-axis belt;
8) Remove the two M3X6 cross recessed countersunk head screws that fix the lower shield
of the Z-axis belt, and remove the lower shield of the Z-axis belt;
9) Remove the two M3X6 cross recessed pan head screw assemblies that fix the Z-FPC
press plate, remove the Z-FPC press plate, and unplug the cable connector plug out of the
socket completely;
10) Remove the three M3X8 cross recessed pan head screw assemblies that fix the gripper
assembly, and remove the gripper assembly;
11) Remove the Z-FPC from the X-FPC slot;
12) Remove the two M3X6 cross recessed countersunk head screws that fix the Z-FPC fixing
plate, and remove the Z-FPC fixing plate;
13) Remove the two M3X6 cross recessed pan head screw assemblies that fix the Z-FPC, and
remove the Z-FPC;
14) Put the new Z-FPC, and install it according to the reverse order of the above steps.
N/A
2.7.13 Replacing the Vertical Anti-Collision Spring

When to do
The vertical anti-collision spring fails.
Tools
Small flathead / 1 piece
screwdriver
Needle-nose pliers / 1 piece
158
Z-axis housing

(M3X6)
Vertical anti-collision guide shaft

Vertical anti-collision spring
033-000162-00

pan head screw
and hanging sleeve
Upper shield of the

Z-axis belt
Lower shield of the M3X6 cross recessed

Z-axis belt countersunk head screw
Figure 2-63 Exploded View of Installing the Vertical Anti-Collision Spring

housing;
5) Remove the two M3X6 cross recessed countersunk head screws that fix the upper
shield of the Z-axis belt, and remove the upper shield of the Z-axis belt;
6) Remove the two M3X6 cross recessed countersunk head screws that fix the lower
shield of the Z-axis belt, and remove the lower shield of the Z-axis belt;
7) Use a flathead screwdriver to remove the vertical anti-collision guide shaft, and use a
pair of sharp-nose pliers to take out the guide shaft and spring;
8) Place the new vertical anti-collision spring, and install it according to the reverse order
of the above steps.
N/A
159
2.7.14 Replacing the First Gripper Assembly

When to do
The first gripper assembly fails.
Tools
screwdrivers
Small monkey wrench / 1 piece

head screw assembly
Z-FPC press plate
Z-FPC

head screw assembly
Gripper assembly
115-011977-00
Figure 2-64 Exploded View of Installing the First Gripper Assembly
Steps
3) Move the gripper assembly to the proper position, remove the two M3X6 cross recessed
pan head screw assemblies that fix the Z-FPC press plate, remove the Z-FPC press plate,
and unplug the cable of gripper assembly out of the Z-FPC socket;
5) Place the new gripper assembly, and install it according to the reverse order of the above
steps.
160
N/A
2.7.15 Replacing the Finger Clamping Spring

When to do
The finger clamping spring fails.
Tools
Z-axis Finger clamping spring Spring pins

assembly 033-000151-00
Figure 2-65 Exploded View of Installing the Finger Clamping Spring
Steps
3) Move the Z-axis assembly to a position convenient for operation, and remove the finger
clamping spring from the two spring pins;
4) Place the new finger clamping spring, and install it according to the reverse order of the
above steps.
N/A
161
2.7.16 Replacing the BM10 Double Optical Coupler
Conversion Board PCBA

When to do
The BM10 double optical coupler conversion board fails.
Tools
screwdrivers
Z-FPC
BM10 dual optical coupler

conversion board Z-FPC press plate
051-001001-00 M2.5X4 cross recessed pan M3X6 cross recessed pan
head screw head screw assembly
Figure 2-66 Exploded View of Installing the BM10 Double Optical Coupler Conversion
Board in the Gripper Assembly
Steps of replacing the BM10 double optical coupler conversion board in the gripper assembly
press plate, remove the Z-FPC press plate, and unplug the cable of BM10 double optical
coupler conversion board out of the Z-FPC socket;
4) Remove the M2.5X4 cross recessed pan head screw that fixes the BM10 double optical
coupler conversion board, and remove the BM10 double optical coupler conversion board;
5) Place the new BM10 double optical coupler conversion board, and install it according to
162
the reverse order of the above steps.
N/A
Z-axis assembly
Lower end of Z axis

relieving spring and M3X6 cross recessed pan head
hanging sleeve screw assembly
Z-FPC
Z-FPC press plate

M3X6 cross recessed pan head screw assembly
head screw assembly BM10 dual optical coupler
conversion board
051-001001-00
head screw assembly
pan head screw
Gripper assembly Z axis relieving spring
hanger
M2.5X4 cross recessed pan head screw
Figure 2-67 Exploded View of Installing the BM10 Double Optical Coupler Conversion
Board in the Z-Axis Assembly
Steps of replacing the BM10 double optical coupler conversion board in the Z-axis assembly
press plate, remove the Z-FPC press plate, and unplug the cable out of the Z-FPC socket
completely;
4) Remove the M2.5X8 cross recessed pan head screw that fixes the Z-axis relieving spring
and lower end of hanging sleeve, and make the Z-axis relieving spring and hanging sleeve
in a free state at the upper part;
6) Remove the three M3X6 cross recessed pan head screw assemblies that fix the Z-axis
relieving spring hanger, and remove the Z-axis relieving spring hanger with the BM10
double optical coupler conversion board;
7) Remove the M2.5X4 cross recessed pan head screw that fixes the BM10 double optical
coupler conversion board from the Z-axis relieving spring hanger, and remove the BM10
double optical coupler conversion board;
8) Place the new BM10 double optical coupler conversion board, and install it according to
the reverse order of the above steps.
163
N/A
2.7.17 Replacing the Empty Gripping Optical Coupler
Conversion Board PCBA of the BM10 First Gripper

When to do
The empty gripping optical coupler conversion board of the BM10 first gripper fails.
Tools
screwdrivers

head screw assembly
Z-FPC press plate
M2.5X4 cross
recessed
countersunk
head screw
Finger line pressing

plate
M2.5X4 cross
recessed pan
Gripper head screw
assembly
M3X8 cross recessed pan Empty gripping optical coupler conversion board
head screw assembly 051-001373-00 of the BM10 first gripper
Figure 2-68 Exploded View of Installing the Empty Gripping Optical Coupler
Conversion Board of the BM10 First Gripper
Steps
press plate, remove the Z-FPC press plate, and unplug the cable of gripper assembly out
of the Z-FPC socket;
5) Remove the M2.5X4 cross recessed countersunk head screw that fixes the finger line
pressing plate, and remove the finger line pressing plate;
164
6) Remove the M2.5X4 cross recessed pan head screw that fixes the empty gripping optical
coupler conversion board of the BM10 first gripper, and remove the empty gripping optical
coupler conversion board of the BM10 first gripper;
7) Place the new empty gripping optical coupler conversion board of the BM10 first gripper,
and install it according to the reverse order of the above steps.
N/A
2.7.18 Replacing the Finger Positioning Spring

When to do
The finger positioning spring fails.
Tools
Z-axis assembly
Spring pins
Finger positioning
Spring
spring
pins
033-000152-00
Figure 2-69 Exploded View of Installing the Finger Positioning Spring
Steps
3) Move the Z-axis assembly to a position convenient for operation, and remove the finger
positioning spring from the two spring pins;
4) Place the new finger positioning spring, and install it according to the reverse order of the
above steps.
N/A
165
2.7.19 Cuvette loading module
Function Module Introduction

The cuvette loading assembly is the interaction point for adding a new cuvette box and taking
away the old cuvette box.
Figure 2-70 Exploded View of the Cuvette Loading Assembly
(1) Ball bearing slide.3601 type, three section type, 12 inches (3) Electromagnet 25kgf
(2) Correlative optical coupler wire (S)
2.7.20 Replacing the Drawer Slide

When to do
The drawer assembly fails to operate smoothly.
Tools
166
4
1
Figure 2-71 Exploded View of Installing the Drawer Slide
(1) the drawer assembly (3) the three M4X12 cross recessed
countersunk head screws
(2) the three M4X12 cross recessed
countersunk head screws
Steps
2) Remove the transparent cover above the cuvette loading assembly, and open the front left
door;
3) There are two drawers in the assembly. Pull out the drawer assembly (No. 1) to be replaced;
4) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the three M4X12 cross recessed countersunk head
screws (No.2) that fix the drawer assembly, and remove the drawer;
5) Turn over the drawer assembly to make the side with slide face upward, pull out the slide
(No. 4), use a cross screwdriver to remove the three M4X12 cross recessed countersunk
head screws (No.3) that fix the slide, and remove the slide;
6) Place the new slide, install and fix it on the drawer assembly, and apply thread glue during
installation;
7) Use screws to install the drawer assembly at the original position. It is required to push the
drawer assembly to the left or right side before tightening the screws;
8) Push back the drawer assembly, and make sure that the drawer matting is located in the
middle of the optical coupler groove and does not rub with the optical coupler, and the
electromagnet and the drawer assembly can be fitted and come into close contact;
9) Install the transparent cover, and close the front left door.
Enter the software alignment interface to perform operations: 1) align the gripper at the
167
horizontal position on the drawer cuvette box; see 7.9.4 -7.9.5 for details; 2) align the gripper
at the height on the drawer cuvette box; see 7.9.13 ,7.9.14 .for details; enter the status interface
to confirm the drawer status.
NOTE
Push back the drawer assembly, and make sure that the drawer matting is
located in the middle of the optical coupler groove and does not rub with
the optical coupler, and the electromagnet and the drawer assembly can
be fitted and come into contact.
2.7.21 Replacing the Optical coupler

When to do
The optical coupler fails or there is a drawer status alarm.
Tools
Figure 2-72 The Optical coupler
(1) the drawer assembly (3) the two M3X8 screws

(2) the optical coupler (4) the drawer mounting plate
Steps
door;
3) There are two drawers in the assembly. Pull out the drawer assembly (No. 1) of the optical
coupler to be replaced;
4) Unplug the wiring associated with the optical coupler to be replaced; use a cross
screwdriver to unscrew the two M3X8 screws (No. 3) that fix the optical coupler (No. 2),
168
and remove the optical coupler;
5) Place the new optical coupler, connect the wiring of the optical coupler, and install and fix
it on the drawer mounting plate (No. 4);
6) Push back the drawer assembly, and make sure that the drawer matting is located in the
middle of the optical coupler groove and does not rub with the optical coupler;
7) Install the transparent cover, and close the front left door.
Enter the software alignment interface to perform operations: align the gripper at the horizontal
position on the drawer cuvette box; see 7.9.4 -7.9.5 for details; enter the status interface to
confirm the drawer status.
2.7.22 Replacing the Electromagnet

When to do
The electromagnet fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
8
2
Figure 2-73 Exploded View of Installing the Electromagnet
(1) the two drawer assemblies (4) the electromagnet

(2) the drawer mounting plate (5) the M5X12 hexagon socket head cap screw
(3) the four M5 screws
Steps
169
door;
3) There are two drawers in the assembly. Pull out the two drawer assemblies (No. 1), use a
hexagon wrench to remove the four M5 screws (No. 3), spring washers and flat gaskets
that fix the drawer mounting plate (No. 2);
4) Pull out the electromagnet cable connector, ad take out the cuvette loading assembly;
5) Use a cross screwdriver to unscrew the M5X12 hexagon socket head cap screw (No. 5)
and spring washer that fix the electromagnet (No. 4) to be replaced, and remove the
electromagnet;
6) Put the new electromagnet, lead the electromagnet connection line through the through
hole nearby, and install the electromagnet according to the reverse order of the above
steps.
Enter the software alignment interface to perform operations: align the gripper at the horizontal
position on the drawer cuvette box; see 7.9.4 -7.9.5 for details; and confirm the electromagnet
and the drawer assembly can be fitted and come into close contact.
2.7.23 Replacing the Drawer Stopper Plate Button Switch and
Reflective Optical Coupler
Figure 2-74 Diagram of Removing the Drawer Stopper Plate Button Switch and
Reflective Optical Coupler
(1) Rubber cover(DS193) (4) Button switch

(2) Left front panel (5) Drawer stopper plate
(3) Front left door (6) Reflective optical coupler
170
When to do
The waste container works abnormally.
Tools
None
Steps
2) Unplug the two rubber caps on the desktop, remove the two M4 screw assemblies on the
desktop, and remove the left front panel;
3) Open the front left door, use a cross screwdriver to remove the fastening screws, draw out
the appearance parts of drawer stopper plate, and unplug the connecting cable;
4) Remove the drawer stopper plate button switch or reflective optical coupler for
replacement according to the requirements.
171
2.8 Dispersion system
2.8.1 Dispersion Mechanical Module

The dispersion assembly is located at the left rear of the whole unit. It consists of the dispersion
pot, drive assembly and dispersion aspirate assembly. The dispersion assembly is used to bear
the cuvette, complete mixing and separation of the reaction liquid and magnetic beads, enable
the cuvette to reach the designated position, and work together with the gripper to take/place
the cuvette from/in the dispersion carousel.
Figure 2-75 Position of the Dispersion Assembly in the Whole Unit
(1) Dispersion aspirate assembly

(2) Dispersion chamber and drive assembly
172
Figure 2-76 Exploded View of Dispersion Assembly
173
(1)MOTOR STEP 2V 1.8 degree/step Power (7) Ф1.5 swab
down holding force 43.2 mN.m
(2) Dispense probe locking nut (8)Deep groove ball
bearing.60X78X10/ 6812ZZ
(3) Dispense probe pretightening spring (9)Dispersion chamber and drive
assembly
(4) BM50 aspirate probe (10)Correlative optical coupler wire
(S)
(5) Screw nut group (11)Synchronous belt 575S5M100
rubber
(6) Dispensing probe assembly (12) Motor pulley assembly
2.8.2 Replacing the Aspirate Positioning Correlative Optical
Coupler Conversion Line/Correlative Optical Coupler
Conversion Line (S)

When to do
The aspirate positioning sensor fails.
Tools
Figure 2-77 Exploded View of Installing the Conversion Line of Aspirate Positioning
Correlative Optical Coupler
(1) the coupling (3) the 3X8 pan head screw

(2) optical coupler sensor (4) the 3-phase BM50 aspirate probe
Steps
2) Remove the transparent cover, front vertical panel assembly and top cover in turn by
referring to steps in sections 5.2.3-5.2.5;
174
3) Turn the coupling (No. 1) anticlockwise to unscrew the dispersion lead screw from the
screw nut, remove this part of assembly, put it upside down on the rack, and make sure
that it is placed stably;
4) Remove the cable tie that fixes the aspirate positioning correlative optical coupler
conversion line, loosen the 3X8 pan head screw (No.3), and replace the sensor (No.2);
5) Install back the previously removed assembly. Before turning the lead screw into the screw
nut, insert the 3-phase BM50 aspirate probe (No. 4) into the respective corresponding
swab hole, and turn the coupling (No. 1) clockwise till the optical coupler retaining plate (5)
drops to the position of optical coupler sensor (No. 2).
(2) optical coupler sensor (5)the optical coupler retaining plate

Enter the software alignment interface to perform operations: 1) align the dispersion assembly
unit.
NOTE
Place the dispersion lifting assembly upside down carefully and stably, lest
the assembly would be turned over to damage the aspirate probe.
2.8.3 Replacing the Correlative Optical Coupler Conversion
Line/Correlative Optical Coupler Conversion Line (S) of
Dispersion Chamber And Drive Assembly

When to do
The dispersion chamber and drive assembly sensor fail.
175
Tools

Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 2-78 Exploded View of Installing the Correlative Optical Coupler Conversion
Line of Dispersion Chamber and Drive Assembly
(1) flat gaskets (4) spring washers and flat gaskets

(2) the dispersion aspirate assembly (5) the 3X8 pan head screw
(3) the dispersion chamber and drive assembly (6) the sensor
Steps
2) Remove the transparent cover, front vertical panel assembly and top cover in turn by
referring to steps in sections 5.2.3-5.2.5;
3) As shown in the left diagram below, remove two 3X8 screws, remove the substrate
dispense base from the dispersion carousel cover, and remove the 3-phase dispensing
tube shown in the figure from the joint at the same time;
4) As shown in the right figure below, open the tube clip fixed in the board assembly, and
176
disconnect the Z direction optical coupler line of dispersion from the joint at the same time;
5) Remove the four 4X12 socket head cap screws with spring washers and flat gaskets (No.
1), take out the dispersion aspirate assembly (No. 2), and put it on the rack upside down;
6) Remove the four 5X10 socket head cap screws with spring washers and flat gaskets (No.
4) from the baseplate, disconnect the connection line of optical coupler sensor (No. 6) from
the joint, and move the dispersion chamber and drive assembly (No. 3) out of the rack;
7) Loosen the 3X8 pan head screw (No.5), and replace the sensor (No.6) (prevent the sensor
from bumping into the code disk during installation, and try to adjust the optical coupler at
the middle position of the code disk);
8) Install back the previously removed parts, and reconnect the pipe and optical coupler line.
Z direction
optical coupler
line
M3X8 screws
3-phase
dispensing
Tube clip
tube connector

unit.
2.8.4 Replacing the Motor Pulley and Synchronous Belt

When to do
The motor fails or the pulley and synchronous belt are worn seriously.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Belt tension meter / 1
177
Figure 2-79 Exploded View of Installing the Motor Pulley and Synchronous Belt
(1) the 4X20 socket head cap screw (4) the belt
(2)the 4X10 socket head cap screw (5) the spring washers
(3) the motor pulley (6) the optical coupler and support assembly
(7) the two 3X6 cross recessed pan head screw
assemblies
Steps of replacing the synchronous belt

2) Perform steps 1 to 6 in section 10.1.4;
3) Collect the tensioning force frequency of belt, and record it as A;
4) Turn the 4X20 socket head cap screw (No. 1) anticlockwise to loosen the belt tensioning;
5) Loosen the 4X10 socket head cap screw (No. 2) that fixes the motor adjustment plate, and
move the motor adjustment plate together with the motor pulley (No. 3) to the center of the
dispersion chamber;
6) Remove the two 3X6 cross recessed pan head screw assemblies (No. 7), and remove the
optical coupler and support assembly (No. 6);
7) Replace the belt (No. 4);
8) Adjust the tensioning force of belt through the 4X20 socket head cap screw, use a belt
tension meter to confirm if its frequency is in the A(-5~5)HZ range, and then fasten the
motor adjustment plate;
9) Install back the optical coupler and support assembly in step 6.
Steps of replacing the motor pulley

178
3) Collect the tensioning force frequency of belt, and record it as A;
4) Turn the 4X20 socket head cap screw (No. 1) anticlockwise to loosen the belt tensioning;
5) Remove the 4X10 socket head cap screw (No. 2) that fixes the motor adjustment plate,
and remove the motor adjustment plate together with the motor pulley (No. 3);
6) Remove the four 4X10 socket head cap screws, including the spring washers (No. 5),
replace the motor pulley (No. 3), and fasten the four 4X10 socket head cap screws,
including the spring washers;
7) Adjust the tensioning force of belt through the 4X20 socket head cap screw, use a belt
tension meter to confirm if its frequency is in the A(-5~5)HZ range, and then fasten the
motor adjustment plate;
None
NOTE
Before replacing the motor pulley and synchronous belt, collect the
tensioning force frequency of belt, and keep a record.
2.8.5 Replacing the Deep Groove Ball Bearing

When to do
Perform routine maintenance of the deep groove ball bearing of dispersion spindle, and replace
it in case of a failure.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
179
Figure 2-80 Exploded View of Installing the Deep Groove Ball Bearing of Dispersion
(1) the four 4X10 socket head cap screws (4) the dispersion bearing press plate
(2) the dispersion carousel (5) the deep groove ball bearing
(3) the three 3X8 phillips screws (6) the dispersion spindle and pulley code
disk assembly
Steps
3) Remove the four 4X10 socket head cap screws (No. 1), and remove the dispersion
carousel (No. 2);
4) Remove the three 3X8 phillips screws (No. 3), and remove the dispersion bearing press
plate (No. 4);
5) Take out the dispersion spindle and pulley code disk assembly (No. 6), and replace the
deep groove ball bearing (No. 5);
6) Install back the previously removed parts or assemblies.
None
NOTE
Before replacing the motor pulley and synchronous belt, collect the
tensioning force frequency of belt, and keep a record.
180
2.8.6 Replacing the Dispersion Aspirate Probe/Dispense
Probe Locking Nut/Pretightening Spring

When to do
Perform routine maintenance of the dispersion aspirate probe, and replace it in case of a failure.
Tools
Figure 2-81 Exploded View of Installing the Dispersion Aspirate Probe/Dispense

Probe Locking Nut/Pretightening Spring
Steps
2) Remove the transparent cover and front vertical panel assembly in turn by referring to
steps in sections 5.2.3-5.2.5;
3) Turn the coupling (No. 4) clockwise (top view), reduce the lifting plate by one half,
4) and take the three-phase pipeline from the tube clip (No. 5);
5) Turn the dispersion aspirate probe/dispense probe locking nut/pretightening spring
anticlockwise (top view), and remove the dispersion aspirate probe/dispense probe locking
nut/pretightening spring for maintenance. To replace it, separate the pipe joint from the
connecting pipe;
6) Use alcohol to clean the new aspirate probe, and insert the pipe joint into the pipe. One-
to-one operation is recommended to avoid wrong installation;
7) Install back the previously removed parts.
unit; 2) offset and align the probe aspiration level.
181
NOTE
Do not twist or bump the dispersion aspirate/dispense probes. If they are
found deformed or damaged, contact the service department for new
probes.
2.8.7 Replacing the Dispersion Lifting Motor

When to do
The dispersion lifting motor fails.
Tools
Figure 2-82 Exploded View of Installing the Dispersion Lifting Motor
(1) the motor hood (4) the dispersion lifting motor

(2) the three 3X8 cross recessed pan (5) the two 3X10 socket head cap screws
head screw assemblies
(3) the spring washers
3) Remove the connection line of dispersion lifting motor;
4) Unscrew the three 3X8 cross recessed pan head screw assemblies (No. 2), and move
away the motor hood (No. 1);
5) Loosen the two 3X10 socket head cap screws (No. 5) that fix the motor and coupling, and
unscrew the four 4X10 socket head cap screws that fix the motor together with the spring
washers (No. 3);
6) Replace the dispersion lifting motor (No. 4), and fasten the four 4X10 socket head cap
182
screws with spring washers;
7) Tighten the two 3X10 socket head cap screws (No. 5) of the coupling, and install back the
previously removed parts.
None
2.8.8 Replacing the Dispersion Dispense Probe/Dispense
Syringe
When to do
The dispersion dispense probe is damaged.
Tools
Figure 2-83 Exploded View of Installing the Dispersion Dispense Probe/Dispense

Syringe
(1)the two 3X8 cross recessed pan head (2) the dispense probe/dispense syringe
screw assemblies
Steps
3) Use a pair of diagonal pliers to pry and remove the pipeline of phase-3 dispense probe;
4) Unscrew the two 3X8 cross recessed pan head screw assemblies (No. 1) in turn, replace
the dispense probe/dispense syringe (No. 2), and then tighten the two 3X8 cross recessed
pan head screw assemblies (No. 1);
5) Connect the previously removed pipeline, and insert the pipe joint into the dispense probe.
One-to-one operation is recommended to avoid wrong installation.
183
None
NOTE
Do not twist or bump the dispersion dispense probe. If they are found
deformed or damaged, contact the service department for new probes.
2.8.9 Replacing the Swab

When to do
The swab fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 2-84 Exploded View for Installation of Swab
(1) the three 3X8 phillips screws (3) the pipeline of swab
(2) the swab press plate
Steps
1) Perform steps 1 to 3 in section 10.1.3, open the transparent shielding cover, remove the
front transparent cover and top cover of the dispersion assembly, and put the dispersion
lifting board assembly on the rack upside down;
2) Perform steps 3 to 5 in section 10.1.4, remove the substrate dispense base, put the other
184
assemblies on one side, remove the three 3X8 phillips screws (No. 1), and raise the swab
press plate (No. 2);
3) Remove the pipeline of swab (No. 3), install the new swab, and insert the pipe;
4) Place the swab press plate, verify that the swab can be turned freely in the swab slot, and
then tighten the three 3X8 phillips screws (No. 1);
5) Install back the previously removed parts, and reconnect the pipeline.
None
2.8.10 Replacing the Screw Nut Group

When to do
The swab fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 2-85 Exploded View of Installing the Screw Nut Group
(1) spring washers (2) the two 3X10 socket head cap screws
Steps
1) Perform steps 1 to 2 in section 10.1.10, and then remove the four 3X10 socket head cap
screws with spring washers (No. 1);
2) Unscrew the nuts, install the new ones, and then fasten the four 3X10 socket head cap
screws with spring washers (No. 1);
3) Loosen the two 3X10 socket head cap screws (No. 2), install the new lead screws, and
then fasten the two 3X10 socket head cap screws (No. 2).
4) Install back the previously removed parts, and reconnect the pipeline.
185
None
186
2.9 Incubation Photometric System

2.9.1 Overview of the Incubation Photometer System
The incubation photometric system is located at the left back of whole unit and the left side of
dispersion assembly. It consists of the incubation module assembly, optical assembly (BM60)
and waste drainage shielding mechanical module.
(1) Incubation module assembly It is used to bear the cuvette and complete incubation of
reaction liquid at constant temperature.
(2) The optical assembly (BM60) implements luminous intensity check of the reaction liquid.
(3) The waste drainage shielding module provides the functions of shading the light for the
photometric position and emptying the waste liquid in the waste cuvette at the waste cuvette
position.
In the chemiluminescence immune assay, the luminous intensity of the reaction liquid of the
sample to be tested is checked to check the material composition in the sample and its content.
The photoelectric detection module implements light intensity check of the reaction liquid. The
photoelectric detection module consists of the photon counting module and reference module.
Its principle is shown in the following diagram.
Photon counting module Cuvette

Parallel plate
PMT assembly Lens
Reference LED
module
Parallel platePhotodiode
Figure 2-86 Principle Block Diagram of the Photon Counting Photometer
The photon counting module detects light intensity of the liquid to be measured, and calculates
the analyte concentration in the sample by referring to the calibration curve.
The reference module provides light output with stable light intensity, which is used to calibrate
the photon counting module.
187
2.9.2 Incubation Module Assembly
Figure 2-87 Position of the incubation module in the whole unit
(1) Incubation photometric assembly
188
4
3
2
Figure 2-88 Exploded View of Incubation Photometric Assembly
(1) Incubation Module Assembly (3) Heat insulation ring of

photometer
(2 LED assembly (4) Optical assembly (BM60)
2.9.3 Replacing the Incubation Module Assembly

When to do
The temperature sensor fails and triggers an alarm, the temperature switch is damaged, or the
heating film is damaged.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
189
2
1
3
5
4
Figure 2-89 Exploded View of Installing the Incubation Module Assembly
(1) the two interfaces (4) the optical assembly (BM60)

(2) the four M5 screws (5) the three M4 screws
(3) the new incubation module assembly
Steps
2) Remove the transparent cover and substrate silk screen of right front cover;
3) Remove the two screws that fix the substrate tube holder;
4) Unplug the temperature sensor on the incubation photometric assembly, heating film,
temperature switch connector, and optical assembly connection line, and connect the two
interfaces (No. 1) of preheating pool to the end of liquid pipe not coming into contact with
the preheating pool and the substrate tube;
5) Use a hexagon wrench to remove the four M5 screws (No. 2) that fix the incubation
photometric assembly and the spring washers and flat gaskets;
6) Use a hexagon wrench to remove the three M4 screws (No. 5) that fix the optical assembly
(BM60) (No. 4) and the spring washers and flat gaskets;
7) Turn to unplug the optical assembly (BM60) from the side wall of incubation module
assembly carefully; note to protect the optical assembly (BM60) lens;
8) Place the new incubation module assembly (No. 3), and install it according to the reverse
order of the above steps.
Enter the software alignment interface to perform operations: 1) carry out incubation
190
temperature calibration; see 7.6.1 for details; 2) carry out the substrate tube cleaning and
substrate priming process; see 7.10.2 for details; 3) align the horizontal position of the gripper
on the incubation module; see 7.9.6 for details; 4) align the height of gripper on the incubation
module; see 7.9.15 for details.
NOTE
Prevent direct strong light on the lens when removing the optical
assembly, and protect the lens to avoid damage to optical components.
2.9.4 Replacing the Heat Insulation Ring of Photometer

When to do
The heat insulation ring of photometer cracks or is damaged.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
3 4
2
Figure 2-90 Exploded View of Installing the Heat Insulation Ring of Photometer
(1) the incubation module assembly (2) the heat insulation ring of photometer
(3) the optical assembly (4) the three M4 screws
Steps
191
1) Remove the transparent cover, top cover, left front panel and left lower cover;
2) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the screw that secures the hydro separator and rotate
the hydro separator outward;
3) Loosen and unplug the optical assembly connection joint, use a hexagon wrench to
unscrew the three M4 screws (No. 4) that fix the optical assembly (BM60) (No. 3) and the
spring washers and flat gaskets;
5) Remove the heat insulation ring of photometer (No. 2) from the incubation module
assembly (No. 1);
6) Place the new insulation ring of photometer, and use three M4 screws to lock the optical
assembly (BM60);
7) Connect the optical assembly connection line, and use a cross screwdriver to fasten the
screw fixing the liquid separator.
8) Install the left lower cover, left front panel, top cover, and transparent cover.
Enter the software alignment interface to perform operations: 1) dark count diagnosis; 2.9.7
for details.
NOTE
assembly, lest the optical components would be damaged.
2.9.5 Replacing the Optical Assembly

When to do
The alarm message displays the following fault and it is confirmed through check that the
photometer assembly malfunctions or the performance cannot meet requirements.
 Dark count is out of range
 Alarm: excessive fluctuation of photometric counting
 Alarm: the photometer cannot be turned on.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
192
3 2
Figure 2-91 Exploded View of Installing the Optical Assembly
Steps
4) Loosen and unplug the optical assembly connection joint, use a hexagon wrench to
unscrew the three M4 screws (No. 3) that fix the optical assembly (BM60) (No. 3) and the
spring washers and flat gaskets;
assembly (No. 1) carefully; note to protect the optical assembly (BM60) lens;
6) Place the new optical assembly (BM60), and use three M4 screws to lock the optical
assembly (BM60);
7) Connect the optical assembly connection line, and use a cross screwdriver to fasten the
screw fixing the liquid separator.
Enter the software alignment interface to perform operations: 1) configure the PMT parameters;
see 7.7.2 for details; 2) perform PMT initialization; see 7.7.3 for details.
193
NOTE
Place the removed optical assembly in the optical assembly packaging
box, and bring/mail it to the production line of the company for repair.
Do not touch the lens surface after taking down the optical assembly. If
the surface is touched, use a clean cloth to wipe it.
Avoid strong light irradiation for the lens end of the optical assembly, and
note to protect it. Especially avoid exposing the lens end to the external
environment when the photometer is powered on.
2.9.6 Photometer Diagnosis

Select Utility -> Maintenance, and enter the Diagnosis -> Photometer interface:
Figure 2-92 Photometer Diagnosis Interface
The diagnosis is mainly used for manual diagnosis when the photometer fails, or manual
confirmation photometer parts are replaced. The diagnosis aims to confirm whether the key
performance of photometer is good.
Table 2-1 Photometer Diagnosis Content
Diagnosis Scenario Diagnostic Operation

Replacing the Perform dark count diagnosis,
photometer or photometric count diagnosis and DCF
accessories diagnosis
194
When Photometer Perform photometric count diagnosis and
calibration failed or QC DCF diagnosis
out of range
Clinical precision Perform photometric count diagnosis and
exception and DCF diagnosis
photometer calibration
failure
Acceptance criteria:
 Dark count diagnosis: the dark count of each cuvette position is greater than 0 but not
greater than 350CPS.
 Photometric count diagnosis: Exte Diff p < 1.5%
 DCF diagnosis: 0.6 < DCF < 1.7.
2.9.7 Dark Count Diagnosis

Tap Dark Current Count Diagnosis on the photometer diagnosis interface to enter the "Dark
Current Count Diagnosis" interface, set the start cuvette position and stop cuvette position (1#
to 20#), and tap Start to perform the dark count test.
Figure 2-93 Dark Count Diagnosis
The dark count of each cuvette position should be 0 to 350CPS. If the dark counts of all cuvette
positions are greater than 350CPS, possibly the photometer assembly needs to be replaced; if
only the dark counts of some cuvette positions are greater, there may be pollution residue at
such a cuvette position.
2.9.8 Photometric Count Diagnosis

Tap Photometric Count Diagnosis on the photometer diagnosis interface to enter the
195
"Photometric Count Diagnosis" interface, set the test cycle and LED_DA (the default values 20
and 58000 can be adopted), and tap Start to perform the photometric count test.
Figure 2-94 Photometric Count Diagnosis
The photometric count relative extreme difference should not be greater than 0.015.
When the photometric count relative extreme difference is greater than 0.015, refer to the
relative extreme difference of AD value:
1) If the relative extreme difference of AD value is greater than 0.015, replace the LED
assembly.
2) If the relative extreme difference of AD value is not greater than 0.015, the PMT stability
may be improper, and the photometer assembly needs to be replaced.
2.9.9 DCF Diagnosis

Tap DCF Diagnosis on the photometer diagnosis interface to enter the "DCF Diagnosis"
interface, set the test cycle, and tap Start to perform the DCF test.
196
Figure 2-95 DCF Diagnosis
The acceptance criterion of DCF diagnosis PASS is 0.6 < DCF average < 1.7. Since DCF is 1
during the photometer initialization, the DCF value too big or small means that the response
degree of PMT changes greatly when the LED stability (which can be tested in photometric
count diagnosis) is good.
2.9.10 Waste Drainage Mechanical Module

The waste drainage shielding module provides the functions of shading the light for the
photometric position and emptying the waste liquid in the waste cuvette at the waste cuvette
position.
197
Figure 2-96 Position of the Cuvette Loading Assembly in the Whole Unit
(1) Waste drainage assembly

Figure 2-97 Exploded View of Waste Drainage Shielding Assembly
198
(1) Correlative optical coupler wire (S) (3) Synchronous belt. TBN290MXL025 rubber
(2) Waste drainage motor assembly (4) Waste discharge probe
2.9.11 Replacing the Optical coupler

When to do
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 2-98 Exploded View of Optical coupler Installation
Steps
4) The waste drainage shielding assembly is equipped with two optical couplers. Remove the
connector of the optical coupler to be replaced. Use a cross screwdriver to remove the two
M3 screws (No. 3) that fix the optical coupler. Pass the screwdriver through the through
hole of the frame to unscrew the inner screws;
5) Replace it with a new optical coupler and install it on the waste drainage shielding
assembly and connect the optical coupler connector;
199
6) Close the hydro separator and tighten the screws securing the hydro separator with a cross
screwdriver;
After replacing the optical coupler close to the motor, you need to access the software alignment
interface to align the vertical position of the shielding cover; see 7.7.1 for details.
2.9.12 Replacing the Waste Drainage Motor Assembly

When to do
The waste drainage motor assembly is faulty.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 2-99 Exploded View for Installation of Waste Drainage Motor
(1) the two clamps (3) the waste drainage motor assembly
(2) the waste drainage shielding assembly (4) the four M3 screws
200
Steps
1 Switch off the main power of the whole unit;
1) Remove the transparent cover and open the front vertical panel;
2) Use a cross screwdriver to unscrew the two M4 screws that fix the waste drainage
shielding assembly (No. 2);
3) Pull out the motor wiring and optical coupler connector, and loosen the tube from the two
clamps (No. 1);
4) Remove the waste drainage shielding assembly;
5) Use a hexagon wrench to unscrew the four M3 screws (No. 4) that fix the waste drainage
motor assembly (No. 3) and unscrew the flat washer of the spring washer and remove the
waste drainage motor assembly.
6) Replace it with the new waste drainage motor assembly, pass the synchronous belt
through the motor pulley, and properly adjust the belt tension;
7) Install the waste drainage motor assembly on the waste drainage shielding assembly with
a hexagon wrench;
8) Restrict the tube in the clamps, and ensure that the shielding cover can move to the ends
of the slide rail without pulling the tube;
9) Connect the motor wiring and optical coupler connector;
10) After adjusting and determining the position of the waste drainage shielding assembly in
the left and right directions, fix the waste drainage shielding assembly to the frame with a
cross screwdriver;
11) Cover the front vertical panel and install a transparent cover.
To install and fix the waste drainage shielding assembly, press the shielding cover to confirm
that the shielding cover does not touch the inner wall of the photometric position of the
incubation block, and confirm that the shielding cover moves to the upper and lower limits
without pulling the tube.
After replacing the motor, you need to access the software alignment interface to align the
vertical position of the shielding cover; see 7.7.1 for details.
2.9.13 Replacing the Synchronous Belt

When to do
The teeth of synchronous belt are severely worn or the synchronous belt breaks.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
201
3
6
Figure 2-100 Exploded View for Installation of Synchronous Belt
(1) the waste drainage shielding assembly (4) the waste drainage motor assembly
(2) the belt press plate (5) the four screws
(3) the belt optical coupler (6) the belt
Steps
3) Remove the waste drainage shielding assembly (No. 1) and loosen the four screws (No.
5) that fix the waste drainage motor assembly (No. 4). See section 2.9.12 2.9.14 for the
methods and steps.
4) Use a cross screwdriver to unscrew the two M3 screws that fix the belt optical coupler (No.
3), and remove the belt optical coupler;
5) Use a cross screwdriver to unscrew the two M3 screws that fix the belt press plate (No. 2),
and remove the belt press plate;
6) Remove the belt (No. 6) in a relaxed state;
7) Replace it with the new synchronous belt and pass the synchronous belt through the motor
pulley to adjust the proper belt tension;
8) Install the waste drainage motor assembly on the waste drainage shielding assembly with
a hexagon wrench;
202
9) Install the belt press plate and the belt optical coupler plate in sequence;
10) Restrict the tube in the clamps, and ensure that the shielding cover moves to the ends of
the slide rail without pulling the tube;
11) Connect the motor wiring and optical coupler connector;
12) After adjusting and determining the position of the waste drainage shielding assembly in
the left and right directions, fix the waste drainage shielding assembly to the frame with a
cross screwdriver;
To install and fix the waste drainage shielding assembly, press the shielding cover to confirm
that the shielding cover does not touch the inner wall of the photometric position of the
incubation block, and confirm that the shielding cover moves to the upper and lower limits
without pulling the tube.
After replacing the synchronous belt, you need to access the software alignment interface to
align the vertical position of the shielding cover; see 7.7.1 for details.
2.9.14 Replacing the Waste Discharge Probe

When to do
The waste discharge probe is damaged.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 2-101 Exploded View for Installation of Waste Discharge Probe
(1) the waste discharge probe (3) M3 fastening screw

(2) the waste discharge probe from the shielding cover
203
Steps
3) Unplug the tube connected to the waste discharge probe;
4) Use a hexagon wrench to loosen one M3 fastening screw (No. 3) that fixes the waste
discharge probe (No. 1), and withdraw the waste discharge probe from the shielding cover
(No. 2);
5) Replace it with the new waste discharge probe, pass the waste discharge probe through
the through hole of the shielding cover, and insert the tube connected with the waste
discharge probe, and note that the tube is not bent;
6) Use the shielding cover alignment tool 898-000737-00 to determine the installation height
of the waste discharge probe, and then tighten the fastening screw to fix the waste
discharge probe on the shielding cover. For the methods and steps, see the vertical
position adjustment section of the shielding cover for photometer system alignment;
Use the shielding cover alignment tool 898-000737-00 for installation height adjustment of the
waste discharge probe; see 7.7.1 for details
204
3 Temperature Control System

This chapter mainly contains the following contents:
 Function Module Introduction
 Assembly position and FRU
 Control block diagram
 Replacing components
(1) Sample Reagent Carousel Assembly (2) Incubation Photometric Module
3.1 Temperature Control of Incubation Photometric

Module
The incubation photometric module consists of the heater, temperature protection switch,
temperature sensor, incubation module, photometric module and thermal insulation cotton,
forming a temperature control loop, the heater is used in series with the temperature protection
switch to heat the incubation module, the temperature sensor senses the temperature, and the
heater output is controlled through software and hardware to provide the reaction liquid with a
constant temperature system to implement reaction.
205
3.1.2 Assembly Locations and FRU Details
Figure 3-1 Exploded View of Incubation Module Temperature Control
FRU Details
SN FRU code/Material Code Material Name Comment
1 115-061110-00 Incubation Module Assembly
206
3.1.3 Block Diagram of Incubation Block Temperature Control
Main control board
Incubation
Incubation block
block
PC unit
temperature sensor
Heating film
Temperature
protection switch
Figure 3-2 Block Diagram of Incubation Block Temperature Control
3.1.4 Replacing the Incubation Module Assembly

When to do
The temperature sensor fails and triggers an alarm, the temperature switch is damaged, or the
heating film is damaged.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
2
1
3
5
4
207
(1) the two interfaces (4) the optical assembly (BM60)
(2) the four M5 screws (5) the three M4 screws
(3) the new incubation module assembly
Figure 3-3 Exploded View of Installing the Incubation Module Assembly
Steps
1 Switch off the main power of the whole unit;
2 Remove the transparent cover and substrate silk screen of right front cover;
3 Remove the two screws that fix the substrate tube holder;
4 Unplug the temperature sensor on the incubation photometric assembly, heating film,
temperature switch connector, and optical assembly connection line, and connect the two
interfaces (No. 1) of preheating pool to the end of liquid pipe not coming into contact with the
preheating pool and the substrate tube;
5 Use a hexagon wrench to remove the four M5 screws (No. 2) that fix the incubation
photometric assembly and the spring washers and flat gaskets;
6 Use a hexagon wrench to remove the three M4 screws (No. 5) that fix the optical assembly
(BM60) (No. 4) and the spring washers and flat gaskets;
7 Turn to unplug the optical assembly (BM60) from the side wall of incubation module
8 Place the new incubation module assembly (No. 3), and install it according to the reverse
order of the above steps.
Enter the software alignment interface to perform operations: 1) carry out incubation
temperature calibration; see 7.6.1 for details; 2) carry out the substrate tube cleaning and
substrate priming process; see 7.10.2 for details; 3) align the horizontal position of the gripper
on the incubation module; see 7.9.6 for details; 4) align the height of gripper on the incubation
module; see 7.9.15 for details.
NOTE
assembly, and protect the lens to avoid damage to optical components.
3.2 Reagent Refrigeration Unit

The reagent refrigeration unit is included in the reaction carousel assembly. It consists of the
radiator, radiator, temperature sensor, radiating fan, reagent pot and thermal insulation cotton,
forming a refrigerating circuit, and implements cooling of the carousel. The temperature sensor
senses the temperature, controls the radiator switch through software and hardware, and
provides the reagent with a uniform storage environment of 2°C to 8°C.
208
3.2.2 Assembly Locations and FRU Details
Figure 3-4 Exploded View of Reagent Refrigeration Unit
Table 3-1 FRU Details
SN FRU code/Material Code Material Name Comment

1 Stainless steel cross recessed
pan head screw assembly M4X12
2 Hot-end radiator
3 047-021328-00 Hot-end thermal pad
4 049-001629-00 Hot-end waterproof strip
5 009-009271-00 Radiator 51W 39.7*4.16mm cable
length 510 mm with terminal
6 047-018132-00 Thermal pad
7 024-000110-00 Sensor temperature 5Kohm
B3470K with threads
8 115-049070-00 Cold-end fan assembly
9 Stainless steel cross recessed
pan head screw assembly M3X8
10 099-000004-00 Silicone grease sealed insulation Excipient
7501 50 g/box
11 095-000050-00 Thermal grease silicone KP97 0.5 Excipient
kg/can
209
3.2.3 Block Diagram of Reagent Refrigeration Control
Main control board
refrigeration
Reagent
Reagent refrigeration
PC unit
temperature sensor
Semi-conductive
cooler DC12/24V
Radiating fan of reagent power
refrigeration unit
Figure 3-5 Block Diagram of Reagent Refrigeration Control
3.2.4 Replacing the Radiator

When to do
As shown in the figure below, when the “Reagent refrigeration temperature is out of range”
alarm occurs, and the radiator current is out of range [2.0, 5.5]A, the reagent cooling cold-end
fan is within the valid range (no alarm), and the multimeter is used to measure the output voltage
of the power board radiator between 11V and 14V, the reagent radiator must be replaced.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Scissors / 1 piece
Waterproof glue gun / 1 piece
210
Torque driver / 1 piece
AC impedance meter / 1 set
Figure 3-6 Exploded View of Installing the Radiator
(1) M4X12 stainless steel combination screw (4) Hot-end waterproof strip
(2) Hot-end radiator (5) Radiator
(3) Hot-end thermal pad (6) Thermal pad
Steps
2) Take the sample reagent carousel assembly according to the sample reagent carousel
removing method;
3) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the four stainless steel M4X12 cross recessed pan
head screw assemblies (No. 1) fixed between the radiator and thermal baffle, keep them
properly, and take out the hot-end radiator (No. 2);
4) Take out the hot-end waterproof strip (No. 4);
5) After taking out two radiators (No. 5), remove the cold-end thermal pad attached to the
cold-end radiator (No. 6);
6) Use clean cloth and absolute alcohol to wipe the surfaces of the hot and cold end radiators
and dry the water if there is.
7) Discard the original two radiators (whether one or both are bad), and paste the cold-end
thermal pad (No. 6) to the middle of the side of the new radiator with text (No. 5);
8) Put the side with thermal pad on the cold-end radiator, and drop a small amount of thermal
grease (used to adhere to the hot-end thermal pad) onto the side of radiator without text;
211
and place the hot-end thermal pad (No. 3);
Bend the lead wire when

placing it; take care not to Drop a small amount of
bend the root seal of the thermal grease to the four
lead wire corners of the radiator to
facilitate adhesion of the
hot-end thermal pad
1) Straighten out the cables of the radiators, fill the groove of the hot-end waterproof strip
with the sealing silicone grease, and then put the waterproof ring onto the thermal
insulation board, and place the cables of the radiators into the groove of the hot-end
waterproof strip in order;
2) Use absolute alcohol to wipe clean the contact position of the radiator with the hot-end
radiator, and remove the adhered old hot-end thermal pad (metal sheet-like) with a blade;
3) Apply a layer of thermal grease over the reader window;
4) Place the radiator of hot-end downward vertically in position, and lock the fastening screw;
5) Use an AC impedance meter to measure the resistance value of the two locked radiators,
which should be in the range of 2.17Ω±10%;
6) Install the sample carousel assembly in the main unit.
7) check and confirm that the condensate discharge pipe of the reagent pot has been
connected to the outlet of the condensate discharge of the reagent pot
Re-power on the whole unit;
Use a special user service account to enter the alignment interface;
In the Utility → Status → Power and Temperature Status Query screen, check whether the
parameters of the refrigeration module are normal and the temperature continues to drop to the
specified range.
Switch to user, and use the user account to enter the operating software.
212
4 Hardware system
4.1 Overview
This chapter describes functions of each circuit board of the chemiluminescence immunoassay
analyzer.
4.2 Summary of Hazards

Do not touch the hardware board with hands or other objects when the whole unit is operating.
To remove the board, disconnect the AC power supply before operation. Wear a pair of
electrostatic protective gloves or adopt other antistatic countermeasures when removing the
board.
4.3 PCB
4.3.1 PCB ID and function overview list
The table below lists the hardware boards of CL-900i automatic chemiluminescence
immunoassay analyzer and briefly summarizes the functions of each board.
Circuit board list:
Board PCBA (PCB) Implemented functions Comment
BM50 main control The main control board is the control center of the
board PCBA instrument. Communicating with PC through the
051-002794-00 network port, and transmitting data and instructions;
responsible for driving of all motors, optical coupler
check, heating drive and smart module interaction;
implementing the analog data acquisition and
processing functions, such as hydraulic pressure,
pneumatic pressure, temperature, voltage, and
current.
BM50 Main control Implementing electrical connections of the motor,
interface board PCBA optical coupler, temperature sensor, valve pump and
051-002793-00 heating film with the main control board
BM50 Power supply Implementing the functions of refrigeration drive,
conversion board PMT module voltage conversion and voltage
PCBA distribution
051-002795-00
BM50 Indicator Board Implementing the front panel indication function
PCBA
051-002796-00
BM50 level detection Providing the sample/reagent liquid level detection
board function and two pin longitudinal anti-collision
051-002938-00 detection function
213
Liquid check board Detecting bubbles of the wash buffer, converting the
PCBA detection result to a level signal and sending it to the
051-001621-00 main control board.
BM20 gripping Used to introduce the gripper empty, gripper opening
mechanism Z-FPC and Z-axis anti-collision optical couplers and finger
connecting plate PCBA motor signals to X-FPC.
051-001873-00
BM20 gripping Used to introduce the X-FPC signals, the X-axis
mechanism Y-FPC initial position and X-axis code disk optical coupler
connecting plate PCBA signals and the X-axis motor signal into the socket
051-001874-00 connected to the board end
BM20 gripping Used to introduce the edge connector signal from Z-
mechanism X-FPC FPC, Z-axis initial position and Z-axis middle position
connecting plate PCBA optical coupler signals, and Z-axis motor signal into
051-001875-00 Y-FPC.
BM10 double optical Used to fix and transfer the gripper Z-axis anti-
coupler conversion collision optical coupler and finger-opening optical
board PCBA coupler
051-001001-00
Empty gripping optical Used to fix and transfer the gripper empty optical
coupler conversion coupler
board PCBA of the
BM10 first gripper
051-001373-00
BM10 optical coupler Used to fix and transfer the gripper Z-axis initial
conversion board position, middle position, X-axis initial position, and
PCBA with socket code disk optical couplers
051-001034-00
BM20 network Used for network communication conversion
interface conversion between the PC and main control board
board PCBA
051-001895-00
24V/300W AC-DC Providing the 24V power supply of whole unit
power
022-000302-00
12V/300W AC-DC Providing the 12V power supply of whole unit
power
022-000303-00
214
4.4 PCB position
(1) power conversion board (6) Power module

(2) Indicator board (7) Network port conversion board
(3) Liquid level detection board (8) Main control interface board
(4) FPC (9) Main control board
(5) Liquid detection board
4.5 Removing the PCB

All the alignment parameters are saved in the main control board. Therefore, if the main control
board needs to be replaced, enter the parameter configuration query interface before the
replacement, and back up all the parameters to PC. After the main control board is replaced,
re-import all the parameters to the new main control board. The parameters do not need to be
saved beforehand when other boards are replaced.
To remove a PCBA, unplug the connectors on it and then remove the retaining screws.
215
4.6 Hardware Function Block Diagram
Level sense board communication Refrigeration control (drive circuit on power conversion board)
Main control
Network interface
conversion board
Indicator board communication Refrigeration current monitoring (collection circuit on power
Photon counting board communication
Bar code scanner communication
conversion board)
Valve control (drive circuit on main control conversion board)
board
Air pressure check 051-002794-00
Clogging check (hydraulic check)
PC
Ethernet Ethernet Switch signal check (carousel cover check and waste check)
cable cable J19 Motor drive control
Temperature check (heating temperature control and cooling
temperature control)
Pump drive control Optical coupler check (sample anti-collision and waste container
Electromagnet drive check)
Fan drive (jam check) Air bubble check of wash buffer substrate
12V/24V Incubation block heating drive
J8 Light key control
12V/24V voltage monitoring
Connectors
Valve
drive
Main control interface board
J35
051-002793-00
J6 J4 J34 J37 J33 J32 J31

Current check
Refrigeration
Photometric
system power
drive
Cooler J9 J8
24V power supply
Cooler 12V power supply Power supply/ Power supply/ Power supply/ Valve pump,
J10 J7 communication communication communication
motor optical
coupler, switch
Mains heating,
supply Power 12V power Liquid check Level sense Photon counting temperature
interface Switch L/N J1 J11 module Indicator board
board board board fan, float. . .
051-002796-00
L/N/PE 051-001621-00 051-002938-00 051-000743-00
Power conversion board 24V power
051-002795-00 module
216
4.7 PCB functions

4.7.1 Main control board
Function and principle

 The main control board (051-002794-00) implements the following functions:
 Communicating with the external PC through the network port, transmitting data and instructions, and
updating the board application
 Communicating with each smart module through the extended serial port, and transmitting data and
instructions, including the liquid level detection board, indicator board, photon counting board, and bar code
scanner
 Implementing the board 12V and 24V voltage check and prompt
 Pump drive control, electromagnet drive, fan drive (jam detection), incubation block heating drive, and light
key control
 Refrigeration control (drive circuit on the power conversion board)
 Refrigeration current monitoring (collection circuit on power conversion board)
 Valve control (drive circuit on main control conversion board)
 Air pressure check and clogging check (hydraulic check)
 Switch signal check (carousel cover check and waste check)
 Temperature check (heating temperature control and cooling temperature control)
 Optical coupler check (sample anti-collision and waste container check)
 Wash Buffer Bubble Check
The main control board function block diagram is as follows:
Main control board function block diagram:
217
Power
UART
Alignment serial port
DDR3
DDR3SDRAM16 RJ45-isolation
RMII PHY J19 network port
LAN8710 transformer
EEPROM PMIC
AM3358
8 Kb TPS 65020+TPS 62090
UART
I2 C Level sense board
UART
Indicator Board
SPI-Flash
64 MB
UART
Photon counting board
GPMC
x16 x8 Conversion
SPI
NOR NAND
S29GL 512P MT29F8G08A
through the
1 1 BABAWP
CPU daughter board Int
main control
Voltage
check interface board
Drive circuit Motor

Power SPI-Flash
Level conversion Optical coupler
Drive circuit Heating drive
Drive circuit Refrigeration control
Analog-to-digital conversion Temperature check
Drive circuit Electromagnetic lock
Level conversion Air bubble check of wash buffer
Level conversion Air bubble check of substrate
FPGA Drive circuit Status indicators and keys
Analog-to-digital conversion Air pressure check
Analog-to-digital conversion Hydraulic pressure check
Level conversion Floater sensor
Drive circuit Valve pump drive
Drive circuit Fan drive and jam check
Description
PCB diagram
The PCB layout of the main control board is as follows:
218
Connectors
The main control board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J8): 8PIN, providing the 24V and 12V voltages to the board.
219
Pin No. Power Signal name Reference

value
1 Digital 12V V12 11.4~12.6V
2 Digital 12V V12 11.4~12.6V
3 Digital 24V V24 22.8-25.2V
4 Digital 24V V24 22.8-25.2V
5 Digital ground GND /
Indicators
Power supply:
D66: 24V power indication, indicator constantly lit when powered on, Off when powered off and flashing during
abnormality.
D65: 12V power indication, indicator constantly lit when powered on, Off when powered off and flashing during
abnormality.
D54: 5V indication, indicator constantly lit when powered on, Off when powered off and flashing during
abnormality.
D75: 3.3V indication, indicator constantly lit when powered on, Off when powered off and flashing during
abnormality.
Board function type:
D77: FPGA operation indicator, with the flash frequency as On for 0.5s and Off for 0.5s; if the status is constantly
on or off or the flash frequency is incorrect, the FPGA fails to operate normally.
Test Points
In the following positions of the main control board can signal tests be performed.
TP47: 24V power input. Normal range: 22.8 - 25.2V.
TP48: 12V power input. Normal range: 11.4 - 12.6V.
TP73: 5V power supply. Normal range: 4.75~5.25V.
TP70: 3.3V power; normal range: 3.135~3.465V
Installation Methods and Precautions
Prior to removing the board, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of anti-static
gloves or wrist straps.
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.
Check the connectors with locks and ensure they have been locked properly.
Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.
When installing the locks on the baseplate, install the retaining screws at the positions of MH1/2/3/4.
220
NOTE
Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a
pair of anti-static gloves or wrist straps.
Check the connectors with locks and ensure they have been locked properly. Check the
connectors without locks and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.
Iif the main control board needs to be replaced, enter the parameter configuration query
interface before the replacement, and back up all the parameters to PC. After the main
control board is replaced, run the Upgrade program to download the middle-/lower-layer
units programs, and re-import all the parameters to the new main control board.
221
4.7.2 Main control interface board

The main control interface board (051-002793-00) leads out the related drive control signal and communication
signal on the main board to the socket, connects to the drive part, sensor and smart module board through the
socket. The connected parts are as follows:
 Motor and optical coupler
 PMT module communication and power supply
 Air bubble check of substrate and wash buffer
 Radiator control and current monitoring
 Built-in bar code scanner interface
 Level sense board interface
 Key, light key and indicator board interfaces
 Hydraulic pressure sensor
 Valve, pump control, heating module drive and temperature monitoring
 Fan drive and jam check
The functional block diagram of the main control interface board is shown below:
J1 Valves 1 to 12
J2 Valves 13 to 24
J3 Mixing assembly motor/Wash syringe motor

Main control interface board
J4 Gripper Z/finger motor

J5 Gripper X motor
J6 Dispersion rotation/sample syringe motor
J7 Shielding/dispersion syringe motor
J8 Carousel motor
Connector
Main control board
J9 Sampling assembly X/Sampling assembly Z motor

J10 Dispersion lifting/sample carousel motor
J11 Gripper Y-axis motor
J12 Electromagnet
J13 Waste Pump
J14 Constant delivery pump
J15 Optical coupler 1
Connector J19 Optical coupler 5

J20 Gripper Optical Coupler
J21 Floater
J22 CAN (reserved)
J23 CAN (reserved)
J24 Switch signal line 1
J25 Fan jam check
J26 Bar code scanning
J27 Temperature sensor
J28 Clog detection
J29 Temperature sensor (reserved)
J30
Connector Fan
J31 Optical communication
J32 Level sense board
J33 Air bubble check
J34 Optical power
J35 Refrigeration control
J36 Light keys
J37 Indicator Board
Figure 4-1 Functional Block Diagram of the Main Control Interface Board
222
Description
The PCB layout of the main control conversion board is as follows:
Connectors
The main control conversion board contains the following connectors.
No. Functions Comment
J1 Valve drive Control valves 1 to 12
J2 Valve drive Control valves 13 to 24
J3 Motor drive Mixing motor, wash syringe motor
J4 Motor drive Gripper Z motor, gripper finger motor
J5 Motor drive Gripper X motor
J6 Motor drive Dispersion rotation motor, sample syringe
motor
J7 Motor drive Shielding motor, dispersion syringe motor
J8 Motor drive Carousel motor
J9 Motor drive Sampling assembly X motor, sampling
assembly Z motor
J10 Motor drive Dispersion lifting motor, sample carousel
motor
J11 Motor drive Gripper Y motor
J12 Electromagnet drive 2-channel electromagnet drive
J13 Pump drive 2-channel pump drive
J14 Constant delivery pump and Control constant delivery pump and heating
heating drive film
J15 Optical coupler check interface Gripper Y initial, gripper Y code disk, left
cuvette box, right cuvette box, shielding lower
position and shielding upper position optical
coupler check
223
J16 Optical coupler check interface Dispersion syringe, panel reflection optical
coupler, dispersion rotation, dispersion lifting,
mixing and waste cuvette optical coupler
check
J17 Optical coupler check interface Unused
J18 Optical coupler check interface Sample carousel, carousel initial, carousel
code disk, sample anti-collision 1, sample
anti-collision 2, and sample syringe optical
coupler check
J19 Optical coupler check interface Sampling level initial, sampling level code
disk, sampling assembly Z, and wash syringe
optical coupler check
J20 Optical coupler check interface Check of the optical couplers of gripper other
than those in the Y direction
J21 Floater check interface Floater Check
J24 Carousel cover opening/closing Carousel cover and sample carousel cover
check interface opening/closing check
J26 Bar code scanner interface Bar code scanner interface, RS232
communication protocol
J27 Temperature check interface Check the reagent pot temperature, cold-end
temperature of refrigeration, incubation
temperature 1, and incubation temperature 2
J28 Clog detection Connect clogging detection sensor
J30 Fan drive Control the hot-end and cold-end fans of
reagent pot
J31 Photon counting board Photon counting board communication and
communication and power supply power supply interface, UART protocol
interface
J32 Level sense board interface Level sense board communication and power
supply interface, UART protocol
J33 Air bubble check Including air bubble check of wash buffer and
substrate
J34 Photon counting board power The photon counting board power supply
interface interface, connected to the power conversion
board J8, and also connected to J31 in the
conversion board
J35 Refrigeration control interface Control the radiator switch and check the
radiator working current
J36 Light key interface Used to turn on/off the light key and check the
key status
J37 Indicator board interface Indicator board interface, UART protocol
Table 4-1 J1 pin description of main control interface board
224
Pin No. Signal Reference value

1 V1 drive /
2 P12V 12V
3 V2 drive /
4 P12V 12V
5 V3 drive /
6 P12V 12V
7 V4 drive /
8 P12V 12V
9 V5 drive /
10 P12V 12V
11 V6 drive /
12 P12V 12V
13 V7 drive /
14 P12V 12V
15 V8 drive /
16 P12V 12V
17 V9 drive /
18 P12V 12V
19 V10 drive /
20 P12V 12V
21 V11 drive /
22 P12V 12V
23 V12 drive /
24 P12V 12V

1 V13 drive /
2 P12V 12V
3 V14 drive /
4 P12V 12V
5 V15 drive /
6 P12V 12V
7 V16 drive /
8 P12V 12V
9 V17 drive /
10 P12V 12V
11 V18 drive /
12 P12V 12V
13 V19 drive /
225
14 P12V 12V
15 V20 drive /
16 P12V 12V
17 V21 drive /
18 P12V 12V
19 V22 drive /
20 P12V 12V
21 V23 drive /
22 P12V 12V
23 V24 drive /
24 P12V 12V

1 P24V 24V
2 Electromagnet drive 1 /
3 P24V 24V
4 Electromagnet drive 2 /
5 P24V 24V
6 24V pump drive 1 /
7 P24V 24V
8 P24V 24V

1 P12V 12V
3 P12V 12V
5 P12V 12V
7 P12V 12V

1 P24V 24V
2 Constant delivery /
pump drive
226
3 P24V 24V
4 Heating film drive /
1
5 P24V 24V
6 Heating film drive /
2

1 Fan drive 1 /
2 P12V 12V
3 Fan drive 2 /
4 P12V 12V
5 Fan drive 3 /
6 P12V 12V
7 Fan drive 4 /
8 P12V 12V

1 AVCC_OPT 11.4~12.6V
2 AVDD_OPT 4.75~5.25V
3 AVSS_OPT -12.6~-11.4V
4 GND_OPT /
5 GND_OPT /

1 P12V 24V
2 J_HEAT_AC1 /
3 J_HEAT_AC2 /
4 PGND_P12V 0
5 Radiator 1 drive /
6 Radiator 2 drive /
7 GND 0
8 Radiator 1 current /
9 Radiator 2 current /
10 GND 0
227
NOTE
4.7.3 Power supply conversion board

The power conversion board (051-002795-00) implements the following functions:
AC power distribution and safety related treatment measures, such as fuss, X capacitors and Y capacitor
Distribution of DC power supply
Isolation power supply output of photon counting module
Radiator drive control and radiator current monitoring
AC heating (reserved)
The functional block diagram of the power conversion board is shown below:
J1/100~240V input J11/100~240V output

X/Y capacitor and fuse AC-DC power
J6
Refrigeration J2/J3 AC
control and heating
current drive
monitoring
J9/J10
refrigeration
drive and
current
sampling
J4 J7 AC-DC output
12V/24V 12V/24V
output input
U1 photon
J8 counting
±12V board
output isolation
power supply
Figure 4-2 Functional Block Diagram of the Power Conversion Board
228
Description
The PCB layout of the power conversion board is as follows:
Figure 4-3 PCB Diagram of Power Conversion Board
Connectors
The power conversion board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
AC power input interface (J1): 3PIN, used to provide AC power to the power conversion board.
Table 4-9 J1 pin description of power conversion board

1 AC_IN_L /
2 / /
3 AC_IN_N /
AC power output interface (J11): 3PIN, exporting AC power from the power conversion board to the AC-DC
power module.

1 AC_OUT_L /
2 / /
3 AC_OUT_N /
229
DC power input interface (J7): 6PIN, introducing the DC power output from the AC-DC module to the power
conversion board

1 P24V 22.8~25.2V
2 P12V 11.4~12.6V
3 P12V 11.4~12.6V
4 GND_P24V /
5 GND_P12V /
6 GND_P12V /
Main board power supply interface (J4): 8PIN, used to provide 12V and 24V power supply to the main control
board

1 P12V 11.4~12.6V
2 P12V 11.4~12.6V
3 P24V 22.8~25.2V
4 P24V 22.8~25.2V
5 GND_P12V /
6 GND_P12V /
7 GND_P24V /
8 GND_P24V /
Photon counting board power output interface (J8): 5PIN, providing a ±12V power supply to the photon counting
board.

1 AVCC 11.4~12.6V
2 AVDD 4.75~5.25V
3 AVSS -12.6~-11.4V
4 AGND /
5 AGND /
Detection and control types:
Radiator drive interface (J9/J10): 2PIN, used to drive operation of the radiator;
Refrigeration control and refrigerating current check (J6): 10PIN, used to control driving of the radiator and
report the working current of radiator to the main control board.
Indicators:
The power conversion board contains the following indicators.
D4: green, operation indication of the radiator connected to J9; when the indicator is turned on, the radiator
circuit is connected and refrigeration starts.
230
D5: green, operation indication of the radiator connected to J10; when the indicator is turned on, the radiator
circuit is connected and refrigeration starts.
NOTE
When the connectors such as J1, J4, J7 and J9-J11 with locks are unplugged, press the
lock, and then exert upward force; when the plug and unplug force of connectors like J4
and J7 are great, hold the board edge in the plugging/unplugging process, lest the board
would be distorted or damaged.
4.7.4 Indicator Board

The indicator board (051-002796-00) implements the following functions:
Receiving commands from the main board command to turn on or off the indicator;
The functional block diagram of the indicator board is shown below:
Main UART/ISP 8-channel

control MCU LED
board J37 drive
Table 4-14 Functional Block Diagram of the Indicator Board
Description
The PCB layout of the indicator board is as follows:
231
Figure 4-4 PCB Diagram of Indicator Board
Connectors
The indicator board contains the following connectors.
Power supply and communication interface with the main control board (J2): obtaining power from the main
control board and communicating with the main control board through UART, so as to control the LED on, off
and blinking statuses
SWD alignment interface (J1): used for SWD alignment in the development phase
NOTE
Make sure that the connector wires are inserted in positions.
After replacing the board, run the Upgrade program to burn the lower-layer unit program.
4.7.5 Level sense board

The level sense board (051-002938-00) implements the following functions:
It checks the liquid level of reagent/sample, with the same circuit structure and interface, and the liquid level
should be checked stably and reliably.
When the probe contacts the liquid level, the board exports the liquid level check signal to the main control
board. The insertion depth of liquid level check should be kept at about 3 mm.
Providing the longitudinal anti-collision detection function and exporting the check signal to the main control
board
The functional block diagram of the level sense board is shown below:
obstruction
signal
I2C
Sample Capacitance Serial port
Main control
MCU Interface circuit
probe conversion signal board
Description
PCB diagram
The PCB of the level sense board is shown below:
Connectors
232
The level sense board contains the following connectors.

Probe and board connection interface (J1): 2PIN, used to connect the sample probe to the detection circuit.
Pin No. Signal
1 GND
2 Probe capacitance signal input
Level sense board power and signal output interface (J2): 4pin, used to power the level
sense board, and also output the liquid level signal and vertical collision signal.
1 GND /
2 Vertical Output low level (about 0V) when vertical collision does not
collision occur (the anti-collision optical coupler is not shielded), output
signal output high level (about 4V) after vertical collision occurs (the anti-
collision optical coupler is shielded)
3 Level signal Low level (about 0V) is output when the probe fails to detect
output the fluid level, and a high level pulse (about 4V) is output
when the probe detects the fluid level.
4 +12V 11.4~12.6V
Level sense board serial communication line (J3): 3pin, used to complete the communication between the level
sense board and the main control board.
Pin No. Signal
1 RXD
2 GND
3 TXD
Indicators:
The level sense board contains the following indicators.
Liquid level signal indicator (D3/D5): ignored.
Software running respiration indicator (D2): orange. If the indicator continues to flash, it indicates that the liquid
level detection board software is operating normally.
Vertical collision signal indicator (D1): red. It should be always on when vertical collision does not occur; it should
be off when vertical collision occurs.
Test points:
In the following positions of the level sense board can signal tests be performed.
TP12 (LEVEL): level sense signal output. Normal status: Low level (about 0V) is output when the probe fails to
detect the fluid level; a high level pulse (about 4V) is output when the probe detects the fluid level.
TP15 (GND): level sense board ground.
TP11 (RAM): vertical collision signal output Normal status: Output low level (0V) when vertical collision does
not occur, output high level (about 4V) after vertical collision occurs.
NOTE
233
After replacing the liquid level detection board, run the Upgrade program to burn the
lower-layer unit program. If the position of the probe is offset because the probe is
touched during the process of card replacement, the “Dispensing System Alignment” is
required.
4.7.6 Liquid check board

The liquid check board (051-001621-00) implements the following functions:
It converts the bubble signal in the wash buffer into a level signal through the optical coupler and liquid check
tube, and sends it to the main control board. The main control board identifies the level signal to confirm the air
bubble volume so as to check the air bubble amount in the wash buffer.
The schematic diagram of the liquid check board is shown below:
Liquid
pathway
Power Photoelectric
Level output
Luminescent
receiving
tube
tube
OPB818
Description
The PCB of the liquid check board is shown below:
Figure 4-5 Top Side of the PCB Diagram of Indicator Board
234
Figure 4-6 Bottom Side of the PCB Diagram of Indicator Board
Connectors
The liquid check board contains the following connectors.
J1: obtaining the 3.3V power supply from the main control interface board and providing the air bubble
availability level to the main control interface board
Indicators
D1: red, the indicator is turned off when there are no air bubbles; the indicator is turned on when there are air
bubbles.
Test Points
TP1: VDD, 3.3V, provided by the main control conversion board
TP2: GND;
TP4: output signal; output low level when there is liquid; output high level (3.3V) when there is no liquid
NOTE
Make sure that the connector wires are inserted in positions.
4.7.7 Network interface conversion board

The network port conversion board (051-001895-00) implements the following functions:
Connect the PC network port to the analyzer network port, and connect the signal to the internal main control
board.
The schematic diagram of optical coupler conversion board is shown below:
The principle is as follows: the RJ45 network port is used to perform PIN to PIN connection, control impedance
matching and ground the board to prevent ESD.
235
Description
PCB diagram
The PCB layout of the network port conversion board is as follows:
NOTE
Prior to removing the board, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a
236
Make sure that the RJ45 connector wires are inserted in positions.
4.7.8 FPC conversion board

FPC (Z-FPC code 051-001873-00, X-FPC code 051-001875-00, Y-FPC code 051-001874-00) implements the
following main functions:
Converting the 7 optical coupler signals;
Converting the 3 motor signals;
Implementing three-dimensional movement of the gripper.
The FPC signal layout diagram is shown below:
Optical
coupler
1
Motor 1
Optical
coupler
1
Z-FPC
VCC
Optical
GND
coupler
SR1
3
SR2
A1+
B1+
A1-
B1-
GND
VCC
GND
SR3
Edge connector
237
SR3
GND
VCC
GND
SR2
SR1
GND
VCC
X-FPC B-
B+
A-
A+
J10
J10 J9
J8
Optical
Optical
coupler Motor 2
coupler 5
4
J1
Optical
Optical J2 coupler 6
coupler 7
Motor 3
VCC
GND
GND
SR5
SR4
Y-FPC-B
VCC
GND
GND
SR7
SR6
Motor 1 Motor 2 Motor 3

5 4 3 2 1
J5 J6 J7
SR5\SR4\SR3
SR6\SR7\SR1\SR2
Y-FPC-A
Description
PCB diagram
238
The PCB layout of the Z-FPC board is as follows:
The PCB layout of the X-FPC board is as follows:
239
240
The PCB layout of the Y-FPC board is as follows:
241
Connectors
The FPC board contains the following connectors.
Z-FPC:
Used to introduce the gripper empty gripping, gripper opening and Z-axis anti-collision optical couplers and
finger motor signals to X-FPC.
Connectors Pin No. Signal name Connectors Pin No.
Edge connector 1,2,3,4,5 A1+ J1 1
6,7,8,9,10 A1- 2
11,12,13,14,15 B1+ 3
16,17,18,19,20 B1- 4
21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28, / / /
29 VCCG J2 1
30 GND 2,3
31 SR_PHO1 4
32 SR_PHO2 J3 4
33 GND 2,3
34 VCCG 1
J4 1
35 GND 2,3
36 SR_PHO3 4
X-FPC:
Used to introduce the edge connector signal from Z-FPC, Z-axis initial position, Z-axis middle position and Z-
axis motor into Y-FPC.
J5 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 B2- J1 4
9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16 B2+ 3
17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24 A2- 2
25,26,27,28,29,30,31,32 A2+ 1
33,34 /
35,36, 37,38, 39,40, and A1+ J4 1,2,3,4,5
41,42
43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50 A1- 6,7,8,9,10
51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58 B1+ 11,12,13,14
,15
59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66 B1- 16,17,18,19
,20
67,68,69,70,71,72,73,74 / 21,22,
23,24,
25,26, and
27,28
75,76 VCCG 29
77,78 GND 30
242
79,80 SR_PHO1 31
81,82 SR_PHO2 32
83,84 GND 33
85,86 VCCG 34
87,88 GND 35
89,90 SR_PHO3 36
91,92 SR_PHO4 J2 4
93,94 GND 2,3
95,96 VCCZ 1
J3 1
97,98 GND 2,3
99,100 SR_PHO5 4
Y-FPC:
Used to introduce the Z-axis and finger signals of X-FPC, X-axis initial position, X-axis middle position optical
coupler signals and the X-axis motor signal into the socket (located at Y-FPC and close to the reinforcing plate
at the end) connected to the board end
J1 1 A3+ J7 1
2 A3- 2
3 B3+ 3
4 B3- 4
J8 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 B2- J6 4
9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16 B2+ 3
17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24 A2- 2
25,26,27,28,29,30,31,32 A2+ 1
33,34 / / /
35,36, 37,38, 39,40, and A1+ J5 1
41,42
43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50 A1- 2
51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58 B1+ 3
59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66 B1- 4
67,68,69,70,71,72,73,74 / / /
75,76 VCCG J4 12
77,78 GND 14
79,80 SR_PHO1 16
81,82 SR_PHO2 18
83,84 GND 20
85,86 VCCG 17
87,88 GND 15
89,90 SR_PHO3 13
91,92 SR_PHO4 11
243
93,94 GND 9
95,96 VCCZ 7
97,98 GND 5
99,100 SR_PHO5 3
101,102 / 19,1
J2 4 SR_PHO6 2
2,3 GND 4
1 VCCY 6
J3 1
2,3 GND 8
4 SR_PHO7 10
FPC connectivity test
Connect the three sections of FPC and use them as a whole to perform signal connectivity test. Remove the
J4, J5, J6, and J7 plugs of the optical coupler, motor, and Y-FPC during the test.
Signal name Test Points Test resistance value
A1+ Y-FPC J5.1 to Z-FPC J1.1 <10

A1- Y-FPC J5.2 to Z-FPC J1.2 <10
B1+ Y-FPC J5.3 to Z-FPC J1.3 <10
B1- Y-FPC J5.4 to Z-FPC J1.4 <10
SR1 Y-FPC J4.16 to Z-FPC J2.4 <10
VCCG Y-FPC J4.12 to Z-FPC J4.1 <10
GND Y-FPC J4.14 to Z-FPC J4.2 <10
244
NOTE
Check the connectors with locks and ensure they have been locked properly. Check the connectors without
locks and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.
FPC should be protected specially during installation or unloading. It cannot be damaged by sharp objects or
exposed to corrosive liquid. It should be placed flat and cannot be bent arbitrarily, and must be protected using
a special mold during transportation. Most components on the FPC are SMD connectors and should be treated
gently during plugging/unplugging and installation, otherwise the socket pin will be damaged. There is a forced
corner area at Z-FPC, which cannot be energetically pulled to tear the PCB. If there are screws for fixing here,
the length of main screw should be appropriate, and it cannot be too long and pierce the FPC. There are more
optical coupler connection wires at the Y-FPC connection control board end. Note to avoid damaging the socket
in the plugging/unplugging operation.
4.7.9 BM20 optical coupler conversion board

The optical coupler conversion boards (codes: 051-001373-00, 051-001001-00, 051-001034-00) implement the
following functions:
Fixing an independent optical coupler on a PCB through screws; applied to the position with a small space;
The schematic diagram of optical coupler conversion board is shown below:
Principle: the four pins of optical coupler U1 are led out through a socket or lead wire.
245
Description
PCB diagram
The PCB layout of the three kinds of optical coupler conversion boards is shown below:
246
Under normal circumstances, after the instrument is powered on, the voltage between the two pins A and K of
the optical coupler on the optical coupler conversion board is about 1.2V. The voltage between pins C and E is
related to the shielding status of the optical coupler: when the optical coupler is shielded, the voltage between
pins C and E is about 3.3V; when the optical coupler is not shielded, the voltage between pins C and E is around
0V.
Wire design
247
The wire design of the optical coupler conversion board is as follows:

Signal name Pin No. Pin No. Signal name Color
A 3 1 VCC Red
K 1 2 GND Black
E 4 3 GND Green
C 3 4 SR_PHO White or blue
PCBA and PCB corresponding relationship
The PCBA and PCB corresponding relationship is as follows:
PCBA name PCBA PN PCB name PCB PN Comment
Empty gripping 051-001373- BM10 optical 050-000826- Used to fix and
optical coupler 00 coupler 00 transfer the gripper
conversion board conversion empty optical
PCBA of the board PCBA coupler
BM10 first
gripper
BM10 double 051-001001- BM10 optical 050-000723- Used to fix and
optical coupler 00 coupler 00 transfer the gripper
conversion board conversion Z-axis anti-collision
PCBA board optical coupler and
finger-opening
optical coupler
BM10 optical 051-001034- BM10 optical 050-000843- Z-axis initial
coupler 00 coupler 00 position and
conversion board conversion middle position
PCBA with board PCB optical couplers
socket
NOTE
During the installation of the optical coupler conversion board, the wires should not interfere with other parts.
The wires that contact with PCBs should be fixed properly. If the wires are not fixed properly and move, they
will fall off the soldering pad. Adjust the position of the optical coupler and the retaining plate properly to avoid
the rubbing of the two parts otherwise the optical coupler will be damaged. Reflective optical coupler. Its voltage
is 1.2V or so when the diode is powered on. The feedback signal is 3.3V or so when the optical coupler is
blocked and it is 0V when it
248
Power
module
009-006949-00
009-006949-00
power board DC
power board DC
connection cable
connection cable
J37/009-006957-00 key indication connection cable J34/009-006951-00 optical power connection cable
/
-
-
009-006916-00 AC
J34
Board
input connection
Indicator
cable
J35
J37
J35/009-006944-00 heating control connection cable
Power
supply
n board
J36/009-007315-00 light key connection cable
/
-
-
conversio
J31
J32
Light key
J36
J33
J33/009-006912-00 liquid check connection cable
cord
/
-
-
J
main control
board power
009-006993-00
check
Liquid
J29
J27
J30
J32/009-006915-00 level sense board connection
J28
cable
/
-
-
Level
detection
J31/009-006952-00 optical
communication connection cable
/
-
J24
J25
J26
Photometric
J30/009-006956-00 fan connection cable
/
-
-
Fan
J28/009-006965-00 temperature
J20
J18
J19
sensor connection cable 1

4.8 Connection Diagram of the Whole Unit
/
-
-
1
J23
e sensor
Temperatur
2
249
J2
J26/009-006996-00 bar code scanner connection

cable
/
-
-
scanner
Bar code
J15
J16
J17
J21
J24/009-006963-00 switch signal line 1

/
-
-
J
1
check
Boolean
J21/009-006913-00 floater check connection cable

/
-
-
J
J12
J13
J14
Floater
Main control board 051-002794-00
J14/009-006941-01 constant
delivery pump - heating connection cable
/
-
-
J12/009-006914-00 waste pump -

et
Main control interface board 051-002793-00
electromagnet connection cable

/
-
-
-
Pump
heating
electromagn
J9
J10
J11
J20/009-006905-00 gripper optical coupler signal

line
/
-
-
optical
motor X2
Sampling
assembly
coupler X4
J19/009-006962-00 optical coupler signal line 5

/
-
-

/
-
-
X2
optical
coupler
Syringe
motor X2

/
-
-

X1
optical
coupler
carousel
Reagent
motor X1
J11/009-006953-00 gripper Y motor connection

J6
J7
J8
cable
/
-
-
J10/009-007025-00 dispersion lifting -

sample carousel motor line
optical
Sample
carousel
motor X1
coupler X1
J9/009-006910-00 sampling assembly motor

connection cable
/
-
-
Light
shield
optical
J8/009-006954-00 carousel motor connection cable

motor X1
coupler X2
-
-
Motion mechanism
J7/009-006946-00 drain - dispersion syringe motor

connection cable
009-007001-00
system network
-
-
-
connection cable
optical
Mixing
motor X1
J3
J4
J5
coupler X1
J6/009-006943-00 dispersion rotation motor line
J5/009-006908-00 gripper X motor line

/
-
-
optical
motor X2
Dispersion
coupler X2
J4/009-006909-00 gripper Z - finger motor line

-
-
J3/009-006947-00 mixing assembly motor - wash

syringe motor connection cable
/
-
-
-
optical
Gripper
motor X4
coupler X9
board
J1/009-006906-00 valve
Network
interface
connection cable 1
1
conversion
J1
J2
J2/009-006907-00 valve
connection cable 2
-
-
Valve
pumpx2
Note: In the connection diagram of the whole unit, “Jxx” in front of the wire coding indicates the corresponding Jxx interface on the main control interface board.
Board connection instructions:
Material Code Wire Name Corresponding Corresponding to board
to board 1 2 interface
interface
009-006951-00 Optical power cable Main control Power supply conversion
interface board board J8
J34
009-006944-00 Heating control Main control Power supply conversion
cable interface board board J6
J35
009-006957-00 Key indicator board Main control Indicator Board J2
cable interface board
J37
009-006915-00 Level detection Main control Level detection board J2
board interface interface board (4Pin)
J32 Level detection board J3
(3Pin)
Enlarged view of partial area:

Area division:
A B C
009-006916-00 AC
input connection
cable
009-006949-00
power board DC
connection cable
Power 009-007001-00
Network
009-006993-00
Power
system network
interface
supply
main control
board power connection cable
cord Main control board 051-002794-00 conversion
module 009-006949-00
power board DC
connection cable
conversio board
n board
J35/009-006944-00 heating control connection cable
J34/009-006951-00 optical power connection cable
Main control interface board 051-002793-00

J2
J37 J36 J23 J21
D E F
2
J35 J33 J30 J26 J19 J17 J14 J11 J8 J5
J34 J32 J29 J28 J25 J18 J16 J13 J10 J7 J4 J2
J31 J27 J24 J20 J15 J12 J9 J6 J3 J1
J37/009-006957-00 key indication connection cable
J8/009-006954-00 carousel motor connection cable
1
J21/009-006913-00 floater check connection cable
J7/009-006946-00 drain - dispersion syringe motor

J33/009-006912-00 liquid check connection cable
J32/009-006915-00 level sense board connection
J3/009-006947-00 mixing assembly motor - wash

J26/009-006996-00 bar code scanner connection
J20/009-006905-00 gripper optical coupler signal
J6/009-006943-00 dispersion rotation motor line

J11/009-006953-00 gripper Y motor connection
J4/009-006909-00 gripper Z - finger motor line

J36/009-007315-00 light key connection cable
J9/009-006910-00 sampling assembly motor
J1/009-006906-00 valve
J2/009-006907-00 valve
delivery pump - heating connection cable
J30/009-006956-00 fan connection cable
1
J24/009-006963-00 switch signal line 1
connection cable 1
connection cable 2
J5/009-006908-00 gripper X motor line
J10/009-007025-00 dispersion lifting -
J12/009-006914-00 waste pump -
communication connection cable
1
J28/009-006965-00 temperature
electromagnet connection cable
syringe motor connection cable

J14/009-006941-01 constant
sample carousel motor line

J31/009-006952-00 optical
-
sensor connection cable 1
-
connection cable
connection cable
-
-
cable
cable
cable
- - -
line
- - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - -
- - - -
- - - - - -
- -
Valve
- - - -
- /
/
-
/
/ -
/
/
/
- -
-
/ / / -
- -
/
- pumpx2
/ / J / / J /
J
J
/ J
J /
J
J
J
J
/ - -
4
/
Pump
Indicator Liquid Level Temperatur Bar code Boolean heating
Light key Photometric Fan Floater Reagent
Board check detection e sensor scanner check electromagn Sampling
assembly
Syringe
motor X2
carousel
Sample
carousel
Light
shield
Mixing Dispersion Gripper
motor X1 motor X1 motor X2 motor X4
et motor X2 optical
coupler
optical
motor X1
optical
motor X1
optical
optical optical optical
optical coupler coupler X1 coupler X2 coupler X9
coupler X4 X2 coupler X1 coupler X2
X1
Motion mechanism
250
Part A:
251
Part B:
252
Part C:
253
Part D:
254
Part E:
255
Part F:
256
5 Fluidics system
5.1 Overview
The CL-900i hydropneumatic system provides wash solution inlet, waste discharge, substrate
dispensing and other functions, controls and monitors the relevant parts and gives alarm so
that the normal operation of the analyzer is ensured.
The principle architecture of the hydropneumatic system is as follows:
Hydropneumatic
system
Substrate Liquid
Module Sampling Dispersion
dispensing detection
Name hydro module fluidic module fludic module module
Inject Substrate
Sample probe
Sample probe
Liquid check
dispensing
Dispersion
Dispersion
sampling
cleaning
Aspirate
Module
functions
Sample syringe SR1
Wash syringe SR2
Dispersion syringe
Negative pressure
Constant delivery
Wash solution air

Waste pump LP1
Waste pump LP2
bubble check
waste floater
chamber VC
pump DP
Main
SR3
components
Figure 5-1 Schematic diagram of the hydropneumatic system
Where,
Sampling fluidic module: used to realize quantitative sampling of the probe and clean the
interior and exterior of probe
Substrate dispensing module: dispensing the substrate and switching the substrate bottles.
Dispersion module: wash buffer inlet for the dispersion wash and waste discharge.
Liquid check module: checking the wash buffer entering the whole unit and the waste in the
waste tank outside the unit
5.2 Principles of Hydropneumatic System

5.2.1 Sampling Fluidic Module
The sampling fluidic module is used for accurate quantification of sample reagent, interior and
exterior washing of the probe, and discharging the waste generated after washing. The fluidic
diagram of the module is as shown below.
257
Clog detection
Air pressure 1
Swab
Wash well
Isolation room
Figure 5-2 Schematic Diagram of Sampling Fluidic Module
Table 5-1 Component List of the Sampling Fluidic Module
Graphic Name Type Function

V15 Self-made three-way valve Automatically switch the wash buffer tank
V16 Self-made three-way valve Switch the internal and external wash buffer of
analyzer
V17 LVM liquid valve Switch the interior and exterior wash tubes of
probe
V18 Self-made three-way valve Switch the interior and exterior wash waste tubes
V24 Self-made three-way valve Switch probe exterior wash and wash well tubes
SR2-10ml Self-made syringe Interior and exterior wash power source, used to
aspirate wash buffer and supply wash buffer to
wash probe interior and exterior
SR1-600ul Self-made syringe Quantitative sampling power source, used to
realize accurate quantification of the sample and
reagent
Swab Swab Used to wash the sample probe exterior, which can
be washed in the process of moving
LP1 Waste Pump Used to aspirate the waste after washing the
sample probe interior and exterior and blow dry
the sample probe exterior
Clog detection Sensor Used to detect clogging of the sample probe
SPB Probe Used to aspirate the sample reagent and check the
sample liquid level
Isolation room Isolation room Used to monitor the negative pressure of the wash
well and filter debris.
258
5.2.2 Dispersion fluidic module

The dispersion fluidic module is used for dispensing and aspirating of dispersion wash, as well
as the waste drainage, aspirating probe exterior cleaning, and condensate water discharge
function of carousel. The fluidic principle is shown below:
Air
pressure 2
Preheating
Waste discharge
probe
Aspirate 1 Aspirate 2 Aspirate 3 Waste
Dispense 1 Dispense 2 Dispense 3
Reagent carousel
Isolation
room
Figure 5-3 Schematic Diagram of Dispersion Fluidic Module
Table 5-2 Components List of Dispersion Fluidic Module

V14 Self-made three-way Automatically switch the wash buffer tank
valve
V01 Self-made three-way Switch the internal and external wash buffer
valve of analyzer
V02/03/04 Self-made two-way Implementing the phase-1/2/3 dispensing
valve switch
V05/19/20 Self-made two-way Implementing the exterior wash switch of
valve phase-1/2/3 aspirating
V06/07/08 Self-made two-way Implementing the phase-1/2/3 aspirating
valve switch
V09/23 Self-made two-way Implementing the waste aspirating switch and
valve wash buffer supply of the waste channel
LP2 Waste Pump Used to set up the stable negative pressure
required for aspirating, aspirate the waste
of aspirating probe exterior cleaning, and
wash and blow dry the aspirating probe
exterior
V11/12/13 Self-made three-way Implementing the exterior wash switch of
valve phase-2/3 aspirating
V10 Self-made three-way Switching phase-1 aspirating probe exterior
259
valve cleaning and condensate water discharge of
carousel
SR3 Self-made syringe Dispensing and wash power source, used to
aspirate and dispense wash buffer, and supply
wash buffer to wash aspirating probe exterior
and waste channel
SZ Swab Used to wash aspirating probe exterior
MSP Aspirating probe Used for dispersion aspirating
Isolation room Isolation room Used to filter debris
5.2.3 Substrate Dispensing Module

Substrate dispensing module dispenses the substrate.The fluidic diagram of the module is as
shown below.
Preheating
Air bubble
Substrate
check
Dispensing
Substrate 1 Substrate 2
Substrate
Substrate
Figure 5-4 Schematic diagram of substrate Dispensing Module

V22 LVM three-way Automatically switch the substrate bottle
valve 1/2
V21 LVM three-way Switching the substrate bottle tubing and
valve dispensing into the substrate tubing
DP Constant Used constant delivery of substrate: 200ul
260
delivery pump
Air bubble check Optical coupler Implementing substrate air bubble detection
The electromagnetic constant delivery pump is the power source of substrate dispensing, ad
works together with the electromagnetic valve V21 to switch and implement substrate
dispensing.
The electromagnetic valve V22 is used to switch the two bottles of substrate.
When substrate needs to be dispensed, turn on the electromagnetic constant delivery pump (if
substrate 2 is used, open the electromagnetic valve V22 first), and aspirate substrate from the
substrate bottle. After it is aspirated, open V21, and turn off the constant delivery pump so that
the substrate is dispensed into the cuvette. Substrate should be dispensed from the substrate
dispensing mouth at the upper part of cuvette.
Two bottles of substrate can be installed at the same time and the system can automatically
switch to another when one is used up.
Substrate heating and temperature control device is designed to ensure the stability of the
substrate temperature.
The consumption and switching of the substrate is controlled through auto counting. When one
bottle of substrate liquid is used up or air bubbles are detected, the system switches to another
bottle and prompts "Substrate x is empty" and its corresponding indicator is flashing. When two
bottles are both used up, the system prompts "substrate is exhausted" and substrate dispensing
is stopped. If bubbles are detected, substrate recovery should be performed while the
instrument is in the standby status to eliminate air bubbles.
5.2.4 Liquid Check Module

The liquid check module checks the wash buffer entering the whole unit and the waste in the
waste tank outside the unit. The two parts of the liquid check module are not modules of the
real significance, but used as a module due to similar functions, making description convenient.
The fluidic diagram of the module is as shown below.
Air bubble check
Air bubble check
Tank cover
assembly
Tank cover Tank cover

assembly assembly Waste tank
Wash solution 1 Wash solution 2
Figure 5-5 Schematic diagram of the liquid detection unit
261
displays the remaining amount of wash buffer. Only one tank is used during operation of the
analyzer. When this tank of wash buffer is used up or air bubbles are detected, the analyzer
will switch to the other tank and send an alarm, and prompt the user to load new wash buffer.
After wash buffer enters the analyzer, the dispersion syringe SR3 aspirates the dispersion
module, and the wash syringe SR2 aspirates the sampling module respectively through tube
branches.
The wash buffer tank is switched through the electromagnetic valves V14 and V15. When wash
buffer 1 is used, V14 and V15 are not energized; when wash buffer 2 is used, V14 and V15
must be energized before the syringe aspirates wash buffer.
When one tank is used up, the user needs to load the wash buffer tank manually. To replace
wash buffer, first prepare new wash buffer, take out the aspirating rod from the old wash buffer,
place it in the new wash buffer as keeping the catheter vertical, pull up the bottle mouth (soft
bottle) gently, turn to fasten the cap, and then press the cap gently till the aspirating rod comes
into contact (against) the tank bottom so as to minimize the remaining amount after wash buffer
is consumed.
After replacing the wash buffer, manually tap the "Load" button on the software interface to load
the wash buffer.
The analyzer waste is discharged to the waste tank or sewer outside the unit two waste pumps.
If the waste is discharge to the waste tank, the waste amount in the waste tank is checked
through the waste floater sensor. When the floater detects that the waste tank is full, the
analyzer stops loading of the new sample; if the test has started, the test will continue till it is
completed.
5.2.5 Introduction of Fluidic Actions
Control of Sampling and Adding Reagent

The sampling sprocess includes aspirating and sampling, as well as cleaning of the interior and
exterior walls of the probe.
The aspirating and sampling are completed by sample syringe S1, which is always connected
to the sample probe. Therefore, the syringe directly aspirates the sample at the aspirate position,
and then moves to the bottom of the mixing position to directly add the sample.
The interior wall cleaning of the probe is driven by cleaning syringe SR2. The cleaning process
is: the syringe SR2 aspirates wash buffer from the wash buffer tank, and then the
electromagnetic valves V16, V17 and V18 are energized and the waste pump LP1 is turned on,
and the syringe SR2 is driven to discharge wash buffer to the wash well through the sample
probe.
The exterior wall cleaning of the probe is driven by cleaning syringe SR2. The cleaning process
is: the syringe SR2 aspirates wash buffer from the wash buffer tank, and then the
electromagnetic valve V16 is energized and the waste pump LP1 is turned on, and the syringe
SR2 is driven to discharge wash buffer to the wash well through the sample probe.
262
Clog detection Clog detection
Period starts
SR1 aspirate SR1 aspirate SR1 discharge
SR1 discharge sample
sample reagent reagent
SR2
SR2 aspirate SR2 wash outer SR2 wash inner SR2 wash SR2 wash inner
SR2 aspirating SR2 aspirating aspirate
liquid wall and outer walls outer wall and outer walls
liquid
As shown in the above figure, when the sampling process starts, the wash syringe SR2
aspirates wash buffer from the wash buffer tank and the sample probe goes downwards at the
same time, and the sample syringe SR1 aspirates the sample. After the aspirating process ends,
the electromagnetic valve V16 is energized to start washing the exterior wall of the sample
probe. After the exterior is washed, V16 is closed. SR2 aspirating and SR1 sampling progress
at the same time. After sampling ends, the sample probe moves to the wash well, V16 and V17
are opened, and the sample probe interior and exterior are washed through SR2.
The probe clogging detection device is turned on when sample and reagent aspirating starts,
and the hydraulic pressure is monitored to check whether the sample probe is clogged.
Dispersion Wash Control

The dispersion washing process includes dispensing and aspirating.
Turn
carousel
Relieve pressure in the Maintain negative pressure
Waste drainage negative pressure in the negative pressure Turn on LP2
chamber chamber
Period
starts
SR3 dispense Aspirating probe aspirates

SR3 aspirate detergent
liquid liquid
When dispersion washing starts, the waste drainage probe moves downward to the cuvette
bottom, and V09 and waste pump LP2 are turned on at the same time to aspirate the waste
completely. After the waste is aspirated completely, V06, V07, V08 and V09 are opened at the
same time to relieve the negative pressure of the negative pressure chamber and check the
negative pressure at the same time. If the negative pressure valve, aspirating probe or waste
is clogged and pressure relief fails, the analyzer will report a fault.
V01 is opened at the same time as waste is discharged, and V02, V03 and V04 are opened in
turn as required to perform dispensing of the first, second and third phases. After dispensing
ends, V01 is turned off.
After the pressure relief is completed, the waste pump LP2 begins to establish a stable negative
pressure in the negative pressure chamber. According to the aspirating need, the three phase
aspirating probe drops at the same time, and V06, V07, and V08 are opened in turn or at the
same time to complete aspirating of dispersion wash.
After aspirating ends, the aspirating probe moves upwards, LP2 operates at full power, and
V05, V19, V20, V11, V12 and V13 are opened in turn to drive the syringe to wash or blow dry
263
the aspirating probe exterior through the swab.
Discharge condensate water of carousel

The dispersion module also provides the condensate water discharging function of carousel.
Condensate water discharge is powered by the waste pump LP2, the electromagnetic valves
V10 and V13 and waste pump LP2 are turned on at the same time, and the waste pump drains
condensate water directly into the waste tank or the waste treatment system. When the
instrument is in the standby or shut-down status (the instrument is continuously powered), the
condensate water is discharged every 18 minutes; after more than 18 minutes in the test status,
the condensate water is discharged during the vacant period.
Fluidic Initialization
The hydro initialization aims to determine whether the hydro power device and hydro related
motion mechanism can operate normally and return to the initial status, inquire the sensor
status and close the valve pump. The following main flows are involved:
The dispersion syringe, sample syringe and wash syringe go back to the initial optical coupler
position.
The sample probe, waste probe and waste drainage mechanism go back to the initial optical
coupler position.
All the valves and pumps are turned off.
The system inquires the status of the liquid level sensor of the waste tank. If it is full, the system
will prompt the user to clear it.
Removing and Installing Hydropneumatic Components
Overview
When the instrument fails or regular maintenance is performed, the analyzer is dismantled.
During dismantlement of the analyzer, pay attention to the following:
 Wear gloves and avoid contacting with liquid.
 Take caution to avoid bumping and scratching the parts and human injury.
 Under non-special circumstances, disconnect the power supply before re-installing the
analyzer.
 You should wear gloves and mask to prevent contamination.
 Take caution to avoid damaging other parts.
 When plugging out the tubes, take measures to avoid spilling the liquid onto other parts
especially electrical parts, otherwise, they can be damaged.
 After re-installing parts, power on the analyzer and check if it can work normally.
When dismantling the analyzer, the tools include:
Table 5-3 Re-Installing Tools and Accessories List of Hydropneumatic Components
Parameter Requirement Quantity

Cross screwdriver / 1
Hexagon wrench / 1
264
Flathead screwdriver / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1
Knife / Several
Empty substrate bottle New bottle >4
Acid wash buffer of 105-004838-00 Not smaller
substrate tubing than 100ml
5.2.6 Re-Installing the Sampling Fluidic Module
Component layout
The main components of sampling fluidic module are all on the analyzer back, as shown below.
Re-installing of the sampling fluidic module involves the wash syringe, sample syringe,
electromagnetic valve, probe clogging detection assembly and waste pump assembly, and its
layout on the whole unit is shown below:
⑩
⑧ ⑨
⑦ ⑥ ⑤ ④ ③ ② ①
Figure 5-6 Local Schematic Diagram of the Sampling Fluidic Module Components
(1) V18 (6) V15

(2) Waste pump assembly (7) LVM valve
(3) Wash syringe (8) V24
(4) Sample syringe (9) Probe clogging detection
assembly
(5) V16 (10) Sample syringe mounting plate
Replacing the 600 ul gapless syringe assembly

Exploded View of the Syringe Assembly
265
③
④
⑤
(1) Assembly fixing sleeve (4) Syringe fastening screw

(2) Optical coupler (5) 1ml syringe
(3) Tube connector (6) Drive assembly
Replacing the 600ul gapless syringe assembly as a whole

When to do
The sample syringe drive assembly motor, lead screw, slide block and other transmission
mechanisms fail.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
1) Drain the dispense tubing and dispersion tubing, and turn off the power supply of whole
unit;
2) Remove the backplate of whole unit;
3) Remove the four syringe assembly fastening screws, and take out the syringe assembly
carefully;
4) Remove the electrical connection lines such as syringe drive motor connection line and
sensor connection line;
5) Remove the connection tube of syringe assembly;
6) Replace the syringe assembly with a new one;
7) Install the syringe assembly and electrical connection lines in turn according to the reverse
order of the above steps, and connect the tubes.
266
NOTE
Liquid medium remains in the tube. Perform operations carefully during
re-installation, and avoid secondary damage caused by liquid dropping or
spraying to other components.
When the catheter is removed and re-installed, the fitting part of the
original catheter with the connector should be cut to ensure the sealing
reliability of re-installation, and the catheter must be inserted into the root
of connector.

After replacement, start the "Dispense Tubing Priming" and "Dispersion Tubing Priming"
functions, make sure that the tubing and tube connector do not leak, and then carry out
sampling system repeatability to confirm that the sampling performance is normal.
NOTE
Do not contaminate the connectors when installing or dismantling the
tubes. The split fluid should be cleaned in time to avoid eroding other
electrical components and rack.
Replacing the 1ml Syringe

When to do
The 1ml syringe leaks.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
unit;
4) Remove the two fastening screws at the upper part of the syringe , and take out the syringe
assembly;
5) Loosen the fastening screw at the lower end of syringe;
6) Take out the 1ml syringe;
7) Replace the 1ml syringe with a new one;
8) Install the 1ml syringe and connect the tubes in turn according to the reverse order of the
above steps, and connect the tubes.
267
NOTE
of connector.

functions, and make sure that the tubing and tube connector do not leak.
NOTE
Replacing the Optical Coupler of Syringe Drive Assembly

When to do
The syringe drive assembly fails and the failure is confirmed to be caused by a failed sensor.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
unit;
2) Remove the analyzer backplate;
carefully;
6) Unscrew the two fastening screws that fix the optical coupler connection line, and remove
the optical coupler connection line;
268
7) Replace the optical coupler connection line with a new one, and fix it again;
8) Install the other parts in turn according to the reverse order of the above steps.
NOTE
of connector.

NOTE
Replacing the Split Connector

When to do
The split connector on the syringe drive assembly or probe clogging detection assembly is
damaged.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
unit;
3) Remove the tube on the old connector, and remove the old tube connector;
4) Place the new tube connector, and then tighten it;
5) Cut one section of the old tube properly, and insert the tube into the bottom of the connector.
269
NOTE
of connector.

NOTE
Replacing the 10ml lead screw drive syringe assembly

Exploded View of the Syringe Assembly
⑥ ⑦
⑤ ④ ③ ② ①
(1) Assembly fixing sleeve (5) Syringe fastening screw

(2) Drive assembly (6) Syringe motor
(3) Special screw of syringe (7) Optical coupler
(4) 10ml syringe
270
Replacing the 10ml lead screw drive syringe assembly as a whole
When to do
The wash syringe drive assembly motor, lead screw, slide block and other transmission
mechanisms fail.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
unit;
2) Remove the entire left side plate;
carefully;
6) Replace the syringe assembly with a new one;
7) Install the syringe assembly and electrical connection lines in turn according to the reverse
order of the above steps, and connect the tubes.
NOTE
of connector.

NOTE
Replacing the 10ml Syringe
271
When to do
The 10ml syringe leaks.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
unit;
2) Remove the entire left side plate;
4) Remove the two fastening screws at the upper part of the syringe , and take out the syringe
assembly;
5) Remove the special screw;
6) Take out the 10ml syringe;
7) Replace the 10ml syringe with a new one;
8) Install the 10ml syringe and connect the tubes in turn according to the reverse order of the
NOTE
of connector.
When the pump is replaced, the inlet and outlet pipes of the waste pump
cannot be reversed.

NOTE
272
Replacing the Optical Coupler of Syringe Drive Assembly
When to do
The syringe drive assembly fails and the failure is confirmed to be caused by a failed sensor.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
unit;
carefully;
6) Unscrew the two fastening screws that fix the optical coupler connection line, and remove
the optical coupler connection line;
7) Replace the optical coupler connection line with a new one, and fix it again;
8) Install the other parts in turn according to the reverse order of the above steps.
NOTE
of connector.

NOTE
273
Replacing the Waste Pump Assembly
When to do
The waste pump assembly fails.
Exploded View of the Waste Pump Assembly
(1 Waste pump (2) Assembly fixing sleeve

Steps
3) Remove the four assembly fastening screws, and remove the waste pump assembly;
4) Remove the waste pump connection line;
5) Remove the connection tube of waste pump assembly;
6) Replace the waste pump assembly with a new one;
7) Install the waste pump and electrical connection lines in turn according to the reverse order
of the above steps, and connect the tubes.
NOTE
of connector.

274
NOTE
When the waste pump assembly and tube connector are removed and re-
installed, the split fluid should be cleaned in time to avoid eroding other
Replacing Other Assemblies

Exploded View
⑤ ⑥
④
①
②
(1) Assembly fastening screw (12) Split connector

(2) LVM valve (13) Assembly fastening screw
(3) Three-way valve (14) Clogging detection assembly
Replacing the Clogging Detection Assembly

When to do
The clogging detection assembly fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
unit;
3) Remove the connection tube of assembly;
4) Remove the screw of sample syringe mounting plate, and open the sample syringe
mounting plate;
275
5) Remove the two assembly fastening screws, and remove the clogging detection assembly;
6) Remove the assembly connection line;
7) Install the new clogging detection assembly;
8) Install the clogging detection assembly and electrical connection lines in turn according to
the reverse order of the above steps, and connect the tubes.
NOTE
of connector.

After replacement, first start the "Dispense Tubing Priming" and "Dispersion Tubing Priming"
functions, make sure that the tubing and tube connector do not leak, and then enter "Alignment"
to start the "Check Hydraulic Pressure o Sample Probe Aspirating and Draining" function, and
confirm that the hydraulic pressure is normal.
NOTE
Replacing the LVM Valve Assembly

When to do
The valve assembly leaks or fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
unit;
3) Remove the valve connection tube;
4) Remove the two assembly fastening screws, and remove the LVM valve assembly;
276
6) Install the new valve assembly;
7) Install the valve and electrical connection lines in turn according to the reverse order of the
NOTE
of connector.

NOTE
Replacing the Three-Way Valve Assembly

When to do
The valve assembly leaks or fails.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
unit;
4) Remove the two assembly fastening screws, and remove the three-way valve assembly.
6) Install the new valve assembly;
277
NOTE
of connector.

NOTE
electrical components and rack. Note the tubes and the three-way valve
should be connected as required.
5.2.7 Re-Installing the Dispersion Fluidic Module
Component layout
Re-installing of the dispersion fluidic module involves the dispersion syringe, two-way valve,
three-way valve, waste valve and other components, and its layout on the whole unit is shown
below:
278
⑥ ⑤ ④ ③ ② ①
Figure 5-7 Component layout of dispersion fluidic module
(1) Dispersion syringe (4) Isolation room

(2) Three-way valve (5) Waste pump
(3) Negative pressure chamber (6) Two-way valve y
CReplacing the Dispersion Syringe Assembly

Refer to the section about replacing the wash syringe of sampling fluidic module.
Replacing the Three-Way Valve/Two-Way Valve Assembly

Refer to the section about replacing the three-way valve assembly of sampling fluidic module.
Replacing the Waste Pump Assembly

Refer to the section about replacing the waste pump of sampling fluidic module.
Replacing the Negative Pressure Chamber Assembly

When to do
The negative pressure chamber assembly leaks.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
279
Steps
2) Remove the connection tube of assembly;
3) Remove the two assembly fastening screws, and remove the negative pressure chamber
assembly;
4) Install the new negative pressure chamber assembly.
NOTE
of connector.
When the assembly and tube connector are removed and re-installed, the
split fluid should be cleaned in time to avoid eroding other electrical
components and rack.
5.2.8 Replacement of the Substrate Dispensing Module
Component layout
Re-installing of the substrate dispensing module involves the constant delivery pump of
substrate, valve, substrate detection optical coupler and other components, and its layout on
the whole unit is shown below:
280
③ ② ①
Figure 5-8 Component layout of the Substrate Dispensing Module
(1) LVM valve assembly (3) Constant delivery pump of substrate

(2)Substrate detection optical coupler (4) Substrate dispensing mouth
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
5.2.9 Replacing the Constant Delivery Pump of Substrate

281
④ ③ ② ①
Figure 5-9 Constant Delivery Pump of Substrate
(1) LVM valve (4) Optical coupler

(2) Valve fastening screw (5) Constant delivery pump
(3) Optical coupler fastening screw (6) Constant delivery pump fastening
screw
When to do
The constant delivery pump of substrate is not accurate or leaks, the substrate channel is
contaminated and cannot be washed clean automatically, or other functions are abnormal.
Steps
1) Empty the substrate tubing, and turn off the power supply of whole unit;
2) Open the front shell of analyzer;
3) Remove the upper tube of constant delivery pump;
4) Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the two M3X8 screw assemblies of the assembly;
5) Remove the constant delivery pump connection line, and take out the constant delivery
pump;
6) Install the new constant delivery pump;
7) Install the electrical connection lines of constant delivery pump in turn according to the
reverse order of the above steps, and connect the tubes.
NOTE
282
of connector.

After the LVM valve assembly is replaced, first start the substrate tube priming function and
substrate dispensing amount diagnosis function, and carry out the substrate background
repeatability test to confirm if the substrate tube is contaminated after replacement; if the tube
is contaminated, carry out the substrate tube cleaning process in "Alignment".
NOTE
5.2.10 Replacing the LVM Valve Assembly

When to do
The valve of substrate module leaks or other functions are abnormal.
Steps
3) Remove the tube from the valve;
4) Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the two M3X8 screw assemblies of the assembly;
5) Remove the valve connection line,and take out the valve;
6) Install the new valve;
7) Install the valve connection lines in turn according to the reverse order of the above steps,
and connect the tubes.
NOTE
of connector.

After the LVM valve assembly is replaced, first start the substrate tube priming function, and
283
carry out the substrate background repeatability test to confirm if the substrate tube is
contaminated after replacement; if the tube is contaminated, carry out the substrate tube
cleaning process in "Alignment".
NOTE
Replacing the Substrate Detection Optical Coupler

When to do
The substrate detection optical coupler malfuntions.
Steps
3) Use a short cross screwdriver to loosen the screw on the right of the optical coupler;
4) Remove the optical coupler connection line, and take out the optical coupler;
5) Install the new optical coupler;
6) Install the optical coupler connection lines in turn according to the reverse order of the
above steps.
NOTE
Perform operations carefully during re-installation, and avoid bending the
tubes.

After the optical coupler is replaced, first start the substrate tube priming function, and carry out
the substrate background repeatability test to confirm that the function of the new optical
coupler is normal.
5.2.11 Re-installing the Liquid Check Module
Component layout
Re-installing of the liquid check module involves the wash buffer check board PCBA, floater
sensor and other components, and its layout on the whole unit is shown below:
284
Figure 5-10 Component layout of the Inlet/outlet module
(1) Wash buffer check board PCBA (2) Waste sensor interface
Replacing the Liquid Check Board PCBA

Exploded View
(1) Liquid check board PCBA (2) Liquid check mounting plate
285
When to do
The liquid check board is damaged or leaks or other functions are abnormal.
Steps
1) Empty the dispense tubing and dispersion tubing, and turn off the power supply of whole
unit;
2) Open the left side plate of analyzer;
3) Remove the tube from the liquid check tube;
4) Remove the PCBA board connection line, and take out the PCBA board;
5) Install the new PCBA board;
6) Install the PCBA board connection lines in turn according to the reverse order of the above
steps, and connect the tubes.
NOTE
of connector.

After the liquid check board PCBA is replaced, carry out dispense tubing and dispersion tubing
priming so as to confirm that the new PCBA board has normal functions.
NOTE
Replacing the Waste Sensor

Exploded View
286
When to do
The waste sensor malfunctions.
Steps
1) Enable the analyzer to enter the stopped status;
2) Remove the old waste sensor from the waste sensor interface;
3) Install the new waste sensor.

After the waste sensor is replaced, confirm the normal sensor status in "Diagnostics". Material
list of Hydropneumatic subsystem
5.2.12 Syringe List
Table 5-4 Pump list of Hydropneumatic subsystem
SN Parameter Material Graphics

Code
1 10ml lead 115-
screw drive 011901-
syringe 00
assembly
2 600ul 115-
gapless 046174-
syringe 00
assembly
5.2.13 Valve Pump List
287
Table 5-5 Valve Pump List of Hydropneumatic Subsystem
SN Parameter Material Graphics

Code
1 BM50 waste 115-050389-
pump 00
assembly
2 200uL 115-049586-
substrate 00
metering
pump
3 LVM valve 115-015675-

assembly 00
4 Three-way 115-033286-
valve 00
(PEIZH)
288
5 Two-way 115-033289-
valve 00
(PEIZH)
6 Swab 041-031527-
00
5.2.14 Sensor list
Table 5-6 Sensor list of Hydropneumatic subsystem
SN Parameter Material Code Graphics

1 Motor position 2800-21-28878
sensor
component
2 PHOTOELEC 011-000203-00
Optical Sensor
940nm
3 BM50 waste 115-044690-00

tank cover
assembly
5.2.15 Catheter Joint List

SN Parameter Material Code
T1/T2/T3/T7/T10/T14/T Rubber hose.M-87-D3,2mmX3.5mm,AV31X2103 082-000108-00
289
48/T49/T53
T4/T5/T21/T24/T27/T30 Rubber hose.EVA,ID:1/16",OD:1/8", clear M6G-020056---
/T31/T70
T6/T18/T20/T22/T23/T2 Rubber hose.1/16"X1/8",S-50- 3001-10-07069
5/T26/T28/T29/T32/T33 HLAAX02002,Tygon
/T34/T35/T36/T37/T38/
T41/T42/T45/T46
T8/T11/T12/T15/T16/T1 Rubber hose.TPU,ID:3/32",OD: 3/16", clear M6G-020054---
7
T9/T13/T40/T44/T51/T5 Rubber hose.ND-100-65,1/8"X1/4",Tygon 082-000314-00
4/T64/T66/T67/T68/T69
/T73
T39/T43/T47/T50/T52/T Rubber hose.3/32"X5/32",S-50- M90-100071---
55/T56/T57/T58/T59/T6 HLAAX02004,Tygon
0/T61/T62/T63/T65/T71
/T72/T74/T75/T76/T77/
T78
T87/T89/T91/T92 Tube-connector assembly.600 mm long connector 082-002252-00
PEEK material DZ10
T88 Rubber hose.PTFE,0.066"IDX0.098"OD M90-100031---
T90 Rubber hose.PTFE,0.040"IDX0.066"OD 0040-10-32301
J1/J2/J5/J6/J7/J8 Rubber hose.1/16"X3/16",F-5500-A,Fluran 082-000664-00
J3 Rubber hose.1/16"X1/8",F-5500-A,Fluran 082-002708-00
C1 Connector.flangeless nut,black delrin,1/4-28UNF M6Q-030065---
C2 Pipe M6q-120021---
hoop.FERRULE,FLANGELESS,2.5mm,ETFE,NA
TURAL
C3/C5 Connector.Tee,200Barb,3/32"&1/8"ID,White Nylo 3001-10-07066
C4/C6/C12/C13/C16/C1 Connector.Straight Through M90-100027---
7/C20/C27 Reduction,1/8"&3/32"ID
C7/C8/C9/C10/C11/C15 3/32 PE TEE FITTING-WHITE NYL T420-1 M90-100028---
/ C19
C14 Connector.Male LuerPlug,White M90-100026---
C18/C21 Connector.Elbow Reduction,1/8 M90-100066---
C22/C25 Connector.P-208,Flangelessnut,1/16",Black 0040-10-32304
C23/C24 Connector.P-200N,FlangelessFerrule,1/16",ETFE 0040-10-32305
C26 Thick-to-thin adapter 041-033066-00
5.2.16 Hydropneumatic System Diagram

The hydropneumatic diagram applies to the full range of CL-900i products.
290
T88-J3
T39
C12 Air
Preheating T40 pressure 2
T43 T44 C14
C13
C7 C8
T25 T28 T47 T19
C24-C25-T89-C26-C2-C1
T22 C18
T54
V21 V06 V07 V08 T51
T29 C9 C16 T50
V04 V09
T23 T26 C10 T52
J1-T87-J2
T32 T34 T49

V01 V02 V03 C11 T36
J10-T30-J14
T33
J5-T90-J6
C19 J11-T70-J13 T53 C15

T35
T42
T38
T18 T55 VC
V05
T46
C22 T48
DP T20 V19 V20 V23
C23
Preheating
Air bubble check
discharge
T41
J4-T24
J9-T27
T21
T37 SZ V13
Waste
probe
T31-J12
SZ T45 SZ
Substrate
Dispensing
MSP MSP MSP
T61 T59 T57
T66
V22
Aspirate 1 Aspirate 2 Aspirate 3 Waste
SR3 Dispense 1 Dispense 2 Dispense 3
V14 T56
Substrate 1 Substrate 2 T58
T60
V11 V12
T91-J7
Substrate
Substrate
V10
T92-J8
T5 T64
T17 T7 T62 T63
C17
Reagent carousel
T16 V15
T69
Clog detection
T12
SPB
隔离室
C5
LP1 LP2
T8
Air bubble check
T13 C27 T68 T67
C3
T14 T2 C21 气压1
C6
Swab T74
T15 T79
Air bubble check T9 T6
T11 T10 V16 V17 T73
C4 Tank cover
T1 T4 T76 assembly
T72
C20 T75
T3 V24
Tank cover Tank cover
T71 Waste tank
assembly assembly
V18
Isolation room
T80
Wash well
T77
C28
T81
Wash solution 1 Wash solution 2 SR2-10mL SR1-600uL
291
6 Software
This chapter describes how to install, upgrade and remove the CL-900i software and not how
to operate the software. The operating instructions can be found in the Operator's Manual for
CL-900i.
6.1 Software Installation

6.1.1 Introduction to Software Package Files
The installation package contains three folders: Setup, SetupGuide and Thirdparty.
Figure 6-1 Software Installation Package Files
Setup folder: includes the operating software installation file setup.exe and the KillBsLog tool
that can end the Bslog service in addition to necessary installation files.
Figure 6-2 Setup folder
292
SetupGuide folder: includes software installation guide and upgrade guide.
Thirdparty folder: includes dotnetfx and SQLExp installation packages. The former contains the
installation program of Microsoft .net Framework and is the running environment assembly of
SQL; while the latter is database software.
6.1.2 System Check Before Complete Installation of
Operating Software
Step 1: Check the PC network port.
The operating software uses the integrated network card of the PC (marked with LAN1 label in
the rear on a standard computer). Please make sure that the network card and related driver
are installed correctly, and the instrument power is switched on.
Step 2: Log in using Administrator account.
Step 3 Set the screen resolution as 1280*1024
Steps:
Right-click the desktop, choose Display Settings -> Advanced Display Settings, set the
resolution to 1280*1024, and click OK, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-3 Change screen resolution
293
Step 4: Make sure no SQL2005, SQL2008 and SQL2012 have been installed in the system.
Select Start —> Settings —>Programs and Features on the taskbar.
The operating software supports database: SQL2014. If non-SQL2014 such as SQL2005,
SQL2008 and SQL2012 have been installed, please uninstall them.
Step 5: Confirm symbol settings.
On the operating software control panel, ensure that the decimal point "." has been chosen in
the Decimal symbol pull-down list box. See the figure below.
Note: Regional options are set up according to the actual conditions in specific countries. For
example, decimal point ".” used in Spain is English Comma, ",” should be set.
Figure 6-4 Special character setting 1
294
Figure 6-5 Special character setting 2
Step 6: Set up network card IP address.

Right-click the network icon on the desktop taskbar. Open the network and sharing center is
displayed, as shown in the figure. Click the option.
295
Figure 6-6 Network and Sharing Center Displayed
Figure 6-7 Network and Sharing Center Screen
Click Change adapter settings on the network and sharing center screen, and enter the
network connection screen, as shown in the figure.
296
Figure 6-8 Network Connection Screen
Select the network card connected to the instrument (LAN1 corresponds to Ethernet); right-
click it and select Attribute to enter the attribute screen of the network card, as shown in the
figure.
Figure 6-9 Network Card Attribute Screen
Pull down the vertical scroll bar on the network card attribute screen, select Internet protocol
version 4 (TCP/IPv4), and then click Attribute, as shown in the figure.
297
Figure 6-10 Selecting Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)
As shown in the figure. Select Use the IP address below (S); input 192.168.23.3 in the IP
address bar, and then switch to Subnet mask (U), and input 255.255.255.0. By default, when
the IP address has been entered, 255.255.255.0 will be automatically entered as the subnet
mask. Finally, click OK.
Similarly, sets the IP address of a network card that is not connected to the machine (LAN2
corresponds to Ethernet 2). The network card is usually connected to the hospital LAN and is
related to the hospital network environment.
Figure 6-11 Network Card IP Address Setting Screen
298
Step 8: Reboot the computer.
To avoid the above settings from affecting the installation process, please reboot the computer
before performing the following installations.
6.1.3 Complete Installation Steps of Operating Software

Step 1: Run setup.exe in the Setup folder.
Step 2: Click Next to enter the installation screen. Click Next in figure below to go to the next
step.
Figure 6-12 Installation screen
Step 3: When the screen shows the figure below, wait until the third-party application is installed.
The computer will be rebooted automatically after the installation.
Note: If CL-900i software is not installed, the computer will be rebooted automatically, and if
CL-900i software is installed but uninstalled, the computer will not be rebooted.
299
Figure 6-13 Wait for installation of third party software
Emphasis: When you install SQL, a black window will pop up automatically. After the
installation is completed, it will be automatically closed. Do not manually close it!
Step 4: Select operating software installation directory.
Specify the installation directory as shown in the figure below, and select Next to go to the next
step.
Figure 6-14 Select operating software installation directory
300
Step 5: Choose a language as shown in the figure below (Chinese by default), and then select
Next.
As shown in the figure below, select the operating software language package and select Next
to proceed.
Figure 6-15 Choose a language
Step 6: Select Finish as shown in the figure below.

Continue installation following the prompts on the installation instructions screen. Select Finish
as shown in the figure below.
Figure 6-16 Installation is complete
301
Note: After installation, the software will be started automatically with the PC.
6.2 Backup and Restore the parameters and the

database
6.2.1 Backing up the Parameters
Enter Utility > Maintenance > Alignment > Other > Common functions > Backup and
restore of parameters.
Click “Backup” in the dialog box, and "Execute successfully" prompt dialog box will be popped
up after the backup is successful. Parameter backup is to back up the alignment information
stored in the EV20 main control board PCBA (051-001491-00) to the PC. For instance, CL900i
is installed in drive D, and the backup file is in the：
D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\AlignmentTool\Parameterlist\Instrument sequence number
_BackupPara.xml.
Figure 6-17 Application screen > Maintenance > Alignment > Other > Common
functions > Backup and restore of parameters
6.2.2 Restoring the Parameters

In the dialog box, click "Restore” and confirm the operation to restore parameters. After
successful restoring, "execute successfully" dialog box will be popped up and the parameter
information refresh screen is obtained from the instrument. Parameter restoration is to write the
302
alignment information in the PC to the EV20 main control board PCBA (051-001491-00). For
instance, CL900i is installed in drive D, and the alignment information in
D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\AlignmentTool\Parameterlist\Instrument sequence number
_BackupPara.xml is written to the CPU buckle.
6.2.3 Modifying Parameters

As shown in the figure below, select the compensation value column of the item to be modified
and enter a new parameter value. Press Enter, and the display format is: Current value > New
value to be modified, and then click Modify and confirm the operation to modify the parameter.
After successful modification, "execute successfully" dialog box will be popped up and the
parameter information refresh screen is obtained from the instrument. Parameter modification
is to write the parameter values on the screen to the EV20 main control board PCBA (051-
001491-00).
303
NOTE: When completed alignment, must to backup the parameter again.

304
6.2.4 Data Backup

Backing up data:
The database is in the Database folder under the installation directory. You can choose the
following two methods:
1) Use the engineer account to quit the operating software and back up the entire
Database folder.
2) After quiting the software, re-enter the software and copy the .bak file in the Backup
folder under Database.
6.3 Software Upgrade

6.3.1 Operating Software Upgrade
Step 1: Back up the parameters and the databse. Refer to 6.2.4 Data Backup.
Step 2: Check that relevant processes have been ended.
Open Task manager:Right-click the blank area of the Task bar, select Initiate Task Manager,
and select the Processes tab. See the figure below.
Figure 6-21 Access the Windows Task Manager window.
Confirm that relevant processes of the CL-900i have been ended. If not, select the process and
click End Process. See the figure below.
The processes include:
305
BS800.exe, BsLog.exe, BsLog_1.exe, Instrument.exe and datasaver.exe.
Figure 6-22 Task Manager
Step 3: Install the new operating software version.

Click setup.exe under the operating software installation package, enter the screen as shown
in figure 0, and click Next to enter the next step.
Installation screen
Figure 6-23 Clicking Next to Proceed
306
Figure 6-24 Installation is complete
Note: When the upgrade is completed, a Program Compatibility Assistant Dialog Box will
pop up, indicating the software has been installed. Click Cancel to ignore the dialog box. See
System pop-up prompt after installation failure or upgrade installation in FAQs in
Installation instructions for CL900i operating software in the SetupGuide folder.
6.3.2 Upgrading Control Software of Analyzer

Step 1: Back up the parameters of whole unit.
Parameters backup of whole unit needs to be executed in Utility - > Maintenance - >
Alignment. Please refer to 15.4 for detailed operations. (Note: You can perform this operation
only after logging on the system with the service user account.)
Step 2: Upgrade the operating software.
Refer to 6.1.3 Complete Installation Steps of Operating Software or 6.3.1 Operating Software
Upgradeto install or upgrade the operating software. If the operating software has been installed
or upgraded, go to step 3.
Step 3: Open upgrading tool, set up serial port, and select upgrading package.
The upgrading tool is in the UpgradeTool folder of the software installation directory. The default
directory is:
D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\UpgradeTool\Upgrade.exe. Find the directory based on
actual installation;
Open the upgrading tool, as shown in the figure.
307
Figure 6-25 Select Upgrade Control Software of Analyzer
Step 4: Power off the instrument and power on it again.

Switch off the power supply on the right back panel of the instrument. Power on the instrument
after 10 seconds.
Step 5: Start upgrading the control software.
After step 4, the instrument starts connecting with the console. Upgrade the software screen;
Download lamp lights on after the instrument is connected successfully.
Tap Download to start upgrading the instrument control software, as shown in the figure.
308
Figure 6-26 Upgrading progress of analyzer
When the upgrading is complete, the upgrade tool prompts the upgrading is complete; select
Exit to exit the updating tool screen.
Upgrading Control Software of Analyzer is completed.
309
Figure 6-27 Upgrading Control Software Completed
Step 6: Power off the instrument and power on it again.

Power off the instrument, and power on it again after 10 seconds.
Step 7: Reboot the computer to run the operating software.
If the upgrading is completed , you need to reboot the PC, and the operating software will run
automatically.
NOTE
After upgrading, you must turn off the power of the instrument analysis
part and then turn it on, and restart the PC. Then the upgraded software
can be applied.
310
6.4 Software Description

6.4.1 Folder Structure
The default software installation path is D:\Mindray\CL900i.
After installation, the folder structure is like the following:
Figure 6-28 Folder After Successful Installation
The OperationSoft folder is relatively important and expanded as follows:

OperationSoft folder
311
The folders which are relatively important include:

AlarmFile: stores alarm log messages.
AlignmentTool: alignment tools directory, includes alignment tool software, alignment log and
backup device configuration parameter information; see details in 6.4.3 Alignment Tool File.
BS800LOG: includes software logs mainly.
Database: database file, contains all parameters, test results, calibration and QC data, etc.
ExceptionLog: records address segments when the software collapses abnormally for easy
fault analysis. (Note: There are two ExceptionLog files, and the other one is in the Instrument_1
folder.)
HELP: chm version of help file
Instrument_1: Chemiluminescence analyzer host programs and log files
Item: Mindray's parameter form file
LOG: records software upgrading information. (last upgrading information record)
BS800.exe: CL900i program file
312
6.4.2 Log Files

BsLog introduction: automatic operation after boot, used to record software log files. Check if
the service is started when the software is initiated. If the service is not started, the software
will report errors and start failure. After successful login, the process can be terminated during
operation and the log will not be recorded.
The BsLog process records in real-time mode the communication and action information of the
software and analyzer, which includes but not limited to the following:
Keyboard input
Software fault logs, operation logs, maintenance logs
Communication instructions between PC and chemiluminescence analyzer
Action instructions of chemiluminescence analyzer
Floater and optical coupler statuses of the analyzer (real-time)
Pump and valve powering statuses of the analyzer (real-time)
……
Separate daily log file is generated and divided into two parts:
1. Located in BS800LOG folder under D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft.
ControlUnitLog: timing sequence execution log
InstrumentLog: MCU scheduling log
Drvdata: drive log
DebuggerLog: debug log
2. Located at D: InstrumentLOG folder under D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\Instrument_1.
CtrlSysLog: control software log
Lislog: LIS communication data
6.4.3 Alignment Tool File

The alignment tools are located in D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\AlignmentTool folder.
Debugger.exe: alignment tool software
Parameterlist: backup directory of instrument configuration information, and the backup file is
named "instrument serial number + backup date.xls". For example: GC_009_20180202.xls
6.4.4 Software Auto Start

In general, the software will be started automatically after Windows is started; if in some special
cases, the program needs to be prohibited from running automatically, you can modify the
computer startup items:
Switch back to the desktop using an engineer's account
1) Right-click the taskbar and choose Task Manager (see Figure 6-29 Access the Windows
Task Manager window.).
2) Select Start, select CL900i, and Click Disable (see Figure 6-30 Changing Startup Items
Configuration).
313
Figure 6-29 Access the Windows Task Manager window.
Figure 6-30 Changing Startup Items Configuration
6.4.5 Software Running Parameters

Right-click "CL900i" icon and select Attribute:
The Attribute dialog box pops up. Modify the Target column. The method is to add Space +
run parameters behind .exe, as shown in the figure below:
314
Figure 6-31 Configuring Software Running Parameters
The commonly used parameters are as follows:

-option: whether to execute the Home (initialization) command during the startup process. You
can choose nohome to skip the initialization process and enter the software. In this case, the
instrument status is Stopped.
-force login: forced login. It can be used if the computer memory is less than 1.5GB.
-VersionIgnore: The software does not perform version matching check when started. In this
case, you can still log in when the actual version of assemblies and the recorded version of the
software do not match.
-1280: cancel the screen resolution limit 1280X1024. You can use the resolution of 1024X768
to run the software.
-noshutdown: Windows shutdown process is not started when you exit the software.
-CalibResultSuccess: Reagent- Calibration Results can be passed.
6.4.6 Normal Software Startup Process

Normal software startup process is as follows:
1) The system checks if the Bslog process has been started automatically. If not, the
315
Bslog.exe program is run.
2) Sqlserver is started. If the start fails, the system indicates database initialization failure and
exits the process.
3) The software process is started.
4) User enters the username and password: engineer username: "ServiceUser"; password:
"#BS8A#SEU".
5) The software shakes hands with the middle-/lower-layer units. If handshake fails, an alarm
is given prompting the unit is abnormal.
6) Enter the Home process.
6.4.7 Log Copy Path

If a fault occurs, enter the following directory to copy the fault log (it’s better to get more logs
from the day of fault).
D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\BS800LOG
D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\ExceptionLog
D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\Instrument_1\ InstrumentLOG
Please pack the above log files and send them to MINDRAY Engineer for assistance.
6.4.8 Backing up and recovering the database

1) Before upgrading the operating software, start and log in to the old version of the software
on the instrument, and then exit the software. After the instrument is powered off, perform
the upgrade operation.
2) When the software fails to start or the data is found to be empty after startup, please keep
it as it is and contact the R&D engineer for troubleshooting.
6.5 Software Uninstallation

6.5.1 Uninstalling CL-900i Software:
End the BSlog process by using the KillBslog tool in the installation package.
In the control panel, locate the "CL900i" program and uninstall it.
6.5.2 Uninstalling SQL Database

1. Uninstall SQL Server;
2. Delete "Microsoft SQL Server" folder generated after installation, and then run the registry
(input regedit into [Start] - > [Run] to enter the registry editor); delete
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server,
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\ Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server (note that whole
folder of Microsoft SQL Server should be deleted).
3. Input regedit into [Start] - > [Run] to enter the registry editor, find
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session Manager and
"PendingFileRenameOperations" value, and delete all data.
316
Figure 6-32 delete a database
6.6 Demo Software Setup

6.6.1 Startup and Shutdown of Demo Software
Step 1: Change network settings before running Demo software.
Enter the following directory, (when logging into Windows with administrator permissions), and
double-click to process batch file, or (when logging into Windows with non-administrator
permissions) right-click to process batch file using administrator permissions:
D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\NetSetup\NetSetup(MCU_PC).bat
Step 2: Create a batch file that starts the Demo software.
Create a text file and write the following contents, as shown in the figure below. Note: Software
paths involved in the files need to be changed according to the actual installation path of the
software.
start "NewDriver" "D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\Instrument_1\MCU\driver.exe" &
ping localhost -n 3 > nul
start "MCU" "D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\Instrument_1\MCU\SequenceExcutor.exe" &
start "MCU" "D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\Instrument_1\MCU\MCU.exe" &
start D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\BS800.exe -demo -option -noshutdown -forcelogin -
VersionIgnore -1280 -CalibResultSuccess
317
Figure 6-33 Writing the Boot Program into a Notepad
Save Notepad, as shown in the figure below. Save the file as a batch file with .Bat suffix, such
as Run CL900-DEMO.bat.
Figure 6-34 Saving the File as a Batch File
Double-click Run CL900-DEMO.bat to start Demo software.

The batch program will start four programs, including:
The driver (driver.exe) is used to receive drive instructions and simulate the execution results
of the instrument.
The sequence executor program (SequenceExcutor.exe) is used to execute the sequence
instructions of the Main Control Unit program scheduling in the operating software, convert
sequence actions to drive instructions and send the instructions to the driver, and receive the
execution results returned by the driver; it can also be used to simulate the events triggered by
the key and the sensor. See details in 6.6.2 Use of Demo Software
The Main Control Unit program (MCU.exe) in the operating software is used to execute the user
operation instructions issued by the upper monitor. Corresponding timing sequence is
scheduled and sent to the sequence executor program, and execution results of the sequence
executor are received.
318
The upper monitor program (BS800.exe) in the operating software is used to interact with users
in PC terminal.
Note: Do not close any one of the four programs mentioned above when using Demo software.
Step 3: Referring to step 2, create a batch file that closes the Demo software, named KillAll.bat.
The file should contain:
@echo =====taskkill====================
@echo off
taskkill /F /IM BS800.exe /T
taskkill /F /IM BsLog.exe /T
taskkill /F /IM BsLog_1.exe /T
taskkill /F /IM Instrument.exe /T
taskkill /F /IM MCU.exe /T
taskkill /F /IM SequenceExcutor.exe /T
taskkill /F /IM driver.exe /T
taskkill /F /IM datasaver.exe /T
@echo on
Figure 6-35 Batch File That Closes the Demo Software
Double-click KillAll.bat to close the Demo software.

If the operating software has been activated before you want to use Demo software, you can
use KillAll.bat to close the operating software, and start running Demo software from step 1.
Step 4: After Demo software is used, if you want to run the operating software when connecting
CL900i instrument next time, please change the network settings:
Enter the following directory and double-click the batch file:
D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\NetSetup\ NetSetup(MCU_Embedded).bat
6.6.2 Use of Demo Software

The use of Demo software is basically the same as online use, but keys, floaters, and sensors
need to be triggered by simulation; SequenceExecutor software will be started when starting
Demo software using batch processing; use the software to simulate and report the data.
It is assumed that the waste container is full in the Demo software, as shown in the figure below.
It is necessary to simulate the operation of emptying waste container.
319
Figure 6-36 Waste Container Full
In SequenceExecutor software, click Active post data demo as shown in figure 0 below to pop
up a dialog box shown in figure 0, which contains the commonly used analog data. The
simulated data is located in:
D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\Instrument_1\MCU\MCU_DEMO user manual
Select Demo data that needs to be simulated and click Open. Click Send in the screen shown
in 0.
Figure 6-37 SequenceExecutor Software
320
Figure 6-38 Selecting Demo Data
After simulated data of emptying the waste container is sent, the waste container is emptied
again, as shown in figure 0 below.
Figure 6-39 Waste Container Emptied
To load the cuvette during using Demo software

Select the cuvette tray to be loaded and click Load; Locked is displayed at the position
corresponding to the tray.
321
Figure 6-40 Locked Cuvette Tray
In SequenceExecutor software, click Active post data demo as shown in figure 0 below.
Figure 6-41 Simulated Data of Tray Pulling out and Pushing Into
322
Select Tray 2 pull out.ini, send Demo event, the right tray of the consumables management
screen does not show corresponding inventory value.
Figure 6-42 Screen Display After the Tray Is Pulled Out
In the SequenceExecutor software, send the Tray 2 push.Ini event displayed in figure 0. After
2s, the software screen updates the tray cuvettes inventory to 88, as shown in figure 0. The
cuvettes are loaded successfully.
323
Figure 6-43 Screen Display After the Tray Is Pushed Into
6.7 Comparison of User Permissions

Divided into five categories from low to high: operator, administrator, engineer, production and
R&D; The administrator and operator are authorized as external users, and the operator's
specific permissions can be set by the administrator. Engineer, product personnel and R&D
account belong to inside account.
The permissions of each user group are listed in the table below:
Table 6-1Comparison of user permissions
Describe
permissions Perfor
Perform Adju Edit
Set Fac Align m
Test calibrati st Edit chemis Import/E Delet Dia
the tory the basic
samp on and perm result try xport e gno
instru set whol perfor
les quality issio s param data logs sis
ment up e unit mance
control ns eters
Classify tests
accounts
Operator Optio Option Optio Optio
√ √ × Optional × × × ×
account nal al nal nal
Administrato
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ × × ×
r account.
Engineer
√ √ × √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
account
324
It is important to note that, the operator and administrator account cannot view the radiator
current under Utility - State - Power. The current can be viewed with service engineer and
above permission accounts.
Figure 6-44 Operator and Administrator Accounts Cannot View Radiator Currents in
Red Box
325
7 Alignment Guideline
7.1 Tools/Auxiliary Materials
7.1.1 Scope
This technology is suitable for the host alignment of CL-900i series.
7.1.2 List of Equipment Tools
Table 7-1 List of Equipment Tools
SN Code Parameter Precision Quantity

/ Thermometer No less than 1 set
0.01℃
/ Clearance gauge 1.0~1.2mm 1
/ Hexagon wrench/cross screwdriver/flathead / 1
screwdriver/monkey wrench
/ Diagonal pliers/needle-nose pliers/tweezers / 1 piece
/ Sample tube with bar code / 50
/ Reagent bottle with bar code / 15
/ Disposable syringe / 1
/ High temperature tape / Several
048-007545-00 Small hole cover for incubating module / 1
105-005389-00 Clean substrate bottle / 6 sets
045-003099-00 BM20/BM21 new box-packed immunoassay / 2 sets
cuvette (containing tray)
BM10-J05-002 Sample position pseudo cuvette fixture / 3 sets
BM10-J08-002 Gripping depth positioning fixture / 4 sets
BM10-J08-007 Finger adjustment fixture / 1 set
898-000719-00 Home position fixture of probe z / 1 set
898-000738-00 Aspirating probe height fixture / 1 set
898-000720-00 Dispersion position IO fixture / 1 set
898-000736-00 Mixing position height fixture / 1 set
898-000733-00 Sampling position and mixing position center / 2 sets
fixture
898-000737-00 Shading cover center fixture / 1 set
326
7.1.3 Fixture Diagram
Sample position pseudo Gripping depth Finger adjusting

cuvette fixture positioning fixture fixture
Central fixture of (BM10-J08-002)
(BM10-J05-002) (BM10-J08-007)
shielding cover
(898-000737-00)
Sampling position and mixing

position center fixture
(898-000733-00) Home position
fixture of probe z Dispersion position
(898-000719-00) IO fixture
(898-000720-00)
Aspirating probe
height fixture
(898-000738-00)
Clearance gauge
Mixing position
height fixture
(898-000736-00)
Figure 7-1 Fixture Diagram
7.1.4 Excipient List
Table 7-2 Reagent Excipient List
SN Code Parameter
1 / Ultra-pure water
2 Acid wash buffe
105-004838-00
r
Table 7-3 Other Excipient List
SN Code Parameter Quantity

1 Disposable gloves. PVC gloves, si
095-000051-00 Several
ze M
2 Superfine fiber dustless cloth (siz Several
099-000056-00
e 4" x 4")
3 Rags Several
327
4 Absolute alcohol Several
7.2 Flow Block Diagram of Alignment Procedure

General alignment procedure of BM50 main unit
Level-1 Process Level-2 Process
Start
Alignment
preparation Start the operating
Upgrade operation Power on the whole software
software Back up the parameters
Connect peripherals unit
Enter the operating
Check the CL-900i software
operating software, and Turn on all the power Back up the parameters and
Connect PC/power line/ switches Account: ServiceUser database
external pipeline upgrade it to the latest Password:
version where appropriate #BS8A#SEU
Incubation temperature
Temperature alignment
alignment 1. Incubation temperature

calibration
Metering system
alignment
Metering
1. Vertical position of the
system shielding cover
Transportation system alignment 1
alignment 2. PMT parameter
configuration
3. PMT initialization 1. Electromagnet check for
cuvette box
2. Finger’s home position
Dispensing System\nAlignment 3. Discarding the horizontal Transportation system
Dispersion system position alignment 2
alignment 4. HP of the right cuvette box
Mechanical 1. Install the sample probe
5. HP of the left cuvette box
1. VP of right cuvette box
2. Probe & Mixer coplanar debug 1. Carousel rotary position
position 3. HP of probe mixing position 1 position compensation
6. HP of incubation block
2. VP of left cuvette box
4. HP of probe mixing position 2 7. HP of dispersion IO port
alignment 1 5. HP of probe wash pool
2. Probe position
8. HP of mixing position 1
position
compensation when 3. VP of incubation block
6. HP of probe disk Ra position 9. HP of mixing position 2
aspirating 4. VP of dispersion IO outlet
7. HP of probe disk Rb position 10. HP of substrate mixing
3. Extreme position check 5. Vertical position of the
8. HP of probe disk Rc position position
of the aspirating vertical mixing position
9. HP of probe disk Rd position 11. HP of discharging liquid level
mechanism
10. HP of probe sample position 12. HP of photometric position
11. Vertical home position of the probe
12. VLP of probe to reagent disk
13. VLP of probe to sample position
14. Bar code scanner initialization
15. Bar code scanner position alignment
16. Reagent disk bar code scanning
17. Sample disk bar code scanning
Fluidics Alignment
1. Preparations for fluidics alignment

2. Cleaning and priming substrate
tubes
3. Waste tank floater check
Fluidics 4. Vacuum pressure check
5. Waste drain tube check
Alignment 6. Check sample probe wash tube
7. Check hydraulic pressure on sample
probe tubes
8. Check dispersion aspirating tube
9. Check dispersion carousel drain
tubes
10. Check dispersion dispensing tube
11. Prime wash solution tubes
Dispensing System\nAlignment
Mechanical position
alignment 2 1. VLP of probe to mixing position 1
2. VLP of probe to mixing position 2
Remove and install the shell assembly

1. Remove and install the transparent
Remove and cover
2. Remove and install the front facade
install the shell panel assembly
assembly 3. Remove and install the reagent
aspirating plate assembly
Other
Other 1. Indicator check

2. Optical couplers check
alignments 3. Whole unit wash cuvette
4. Linked cuvette gripping
5. Reagent refrigeration temperature
check
End
328
Figure 7-2 Flow Chart of Alignment Procedure
7.3 Preparations
7.3.1 Alignment Precautions
1) You must wear disposable PVC gloves when conducting all operations involving various
reagents and chemical solutions to prevent chemicals from touching the skin.
2) In case of stab, cut or scratch, the injured person should take off the protective clothing,
clean the hands and the injured part, use appropriate skin disinfectant, and seek medical
treatment when necessary. Record the cause of injury and related microorganisms and
keep complete and appropriate medical records.
3) Pay attention to electrostatic protection. If you need to touch the charged components on
the board during alignment, you must wear an anti-static ring or gloves to avoid damage
to IC and charged components on the board because of static electricity.
4) In the process of alignment, power off the machine when you insert, pull the plugs and
adjust the position of cables; hot-line work is not allowed, so as to prevent electric shock
or damage to the board.
5) After each process, it is necessary to confirm whether the used fixture needs to be
removed from the host to prevent collision.
6) The fixture shaft (false needle or fixture shaft) and the fixture hole (pseudo cuvette, etc.)
need to be aligned freely when necessary.
7) Observe from 2 directions with a deviation of at least 90 degrees to confirm that the fixture
shaft and fixture hole are aligned.
8) When carrying out the operations related to sample probe and aspirating needle, wear
disposable gloves and gently handle needles to prevent deformation.
9) The ultra-pure water used during alignment must be fresh and clean. It is not
recommended to use water from the water supply module that has been operating for long
to prevent contamination. If the water supply module is to be used, confirm that the water
quality of the module meets requirements, and fresh and clean ultra-pure water must be
used for aligning the substrate system.
10) In the case of assembly and disassembly of the substrate tubing system, pay attention to
the cleaning of the pumps, valves, pipes and joints to prevent pollution. Wear disposable
gloves and clean the work platform with alcohol to ensure no dirt.
11) If the parts that have been aligned are dismantled, it is necessary to align relevant
alignment procedures to confirm that the reassembly meets the requirements.
7.3.2 Powering on the Analyzer

1) Alignment methods and procedure:
Use the network cable to connect the PC and the analyzer and connect the power cord.
The whole unit should connect network port 1 of the alignment computer (network port on
the computer motherboard). Otherwise, the software will not connect to the machine after
being installed.
329
Network
port 1
Network
port 2
Figure 7-3 Align the location of the computer network card
2) Switch the main power to on and confirm the working status: all boards are powered on,
the indicator is lit on, and the two fans outside the power module are running. If the power
supply presents abnormal smell or smoke after being powered on, please power off
for check immediately.
3) Remove the adhesive tapes used for covering the holes of the dispersion carousels and
mixing components completely (which can be torn off before the alignment after software
installation).
4) After confirming that all parts work properly, perform subsequent alignment steps.
7.3.3 Installing the Operation Software(Optional)

According to the CL-900i operation software installation guide, upgrade the operating software
to the latest version.
7.3.4 Screen Description

Start the operating software
Switch on the instrument, double click the shortcut icon on the desktop to start CL-900i
operating software.
Account: ServiceUser, password: #BS8A#SEU.
Alignment screen
Path: Utility —> Maintenance —> Alignment. The screen is as follows:
330
Figure 7-4 Application screen —> Maintenance —> Alignment (XX system alignment)
Unit screen description:

a) Click XX System Alignment to switch to the corresponding alignment screen.
b) The alignment order between alignment processes is executed in accordance with the
sequence required by technology.
c) The alignment processes in each unit are executed sequentially according to the process
number in the software.
7.3.5 Process Alignment Screen
Process Screen Description:

1) Enter step 1 by default, and the current step is in dark.
2) When the operator is facing the front of the machine, the fine-tuning direction arrows are
as follows:
Z axis: ----Vertically upward, corresponding to the keyboard button "↑"; --
-- vertically downward, corresponding to the keyboard button "↓".
X axis: ---- Horizontal to left, corresponding to the keyboard button "←"; ---
331
- horizontal to the right, corresponding to the keyboard button "→" .
Y axis: ---- Horizontally backward, corresponding to the keyboard button "PgDn" ;
---- horizontally forward, corresponding to the keyboard button "PgUp".
Rotation direction: --- Clockwise rotation, corresponding to the keyboard button "Q";
--- counterclockwise rotation, corresponding to the keyboard button "E" .

3) In the case of fine-tuning step, the edit box of step can be modified. The edit box of step
can be activated by pressing ALT+S in the keyboard. After entering the number, click
"Enter" or press it in the keyboard to complete the setup.
a) In each step, click Continue or press ALT+C to perform the next step.
b) In each step, click Cancel or press ALT+X to restore the initial value of the alignment
parameter, execute necessary reset actions, exit the alignment process and return to
the previous unit screen.
332
Figure 7-5 Application interface > Maintenance > Alignment >XX alignment > XX
process
7.4 Backup and Restore of Parameters

Before alignment the system，must to carry out backup the parameter refer to 6.2 Backup and
Restore
7.5 Dispersion System Alignment

Enter Dispersion System Alignment screen.
333
Figure 7-6 Fluidics Alignment > Dispersion System Alignment
Dispersion System Alignment process:
Dispersion
carousel system
Carousel rotary position

compensation
Probe aspiration level offset
End
Figure 7-7Flow Chart of Dispersion System Alignment
7.5.1 Carousel Rotary Position Compensation

Alignment index: The dispersion carousel is stopped at the dispersion position IO; place the
334
fixture dispersion position IO tool (898-000720-00) gently, and observe whether the distances
between the two sides of the fixture and the two sides of the cover plate hole are even.
Alignment methods and procedure:
The alignment tool cannot

be inserted into the hole by
force, but should be placed
naturally. Check if the gaps
at two sides are uniform.
Figure 7-8 Dispersion Carousel Rotary Position Compensation
1) Click "1. Carousel rotary position compensation", and then click Continue to enter the next
step.
2) According to the requirements and steps prompted by the software, place the alignment
fixture 898-000720-00 at the dispersion carousel position IO (placed gently and rough
handling is not allowed. If it can't be put in the hole naturally, adjust the parameters to
appropriate position before placement). Click the clockwise and counterclockwise arrows
to adjust the compensation (remove the fixture before clicking the arrows and continue.
You should continue according to the software prompts. Observe whether the distances
between the two sides of the fixture and the two sides of the cover plate hole are even. If
the light is weak, you can observe with the help of the flashlight.
335
Figure 7-9 Carousel Rotary Position Compensation Screen
Note: After alignment of the position, it is necessary to align the "horizontal position of the
dispersion carousel IO outlet" in the transport system alignment again.
7.5.2 Probe Position Compensation When Aspirating

Alignment index: Make the aspirating needle reach the bottom of the immune cuvette and
raise it up. The aspirating vertical mechanism runs to the bottom of the cuvette, and it is
confirmed that the phase-3 aspirating needle reaches the bottom of the cuvette and it is raised
to 1~1.2mm.
1) Take three clean empty immune cuvettes. Raise the three aspirating needles manually
and make them fall naturally without stagnation. Mount the dispersion aspirating needle
height alignment tool (898-000738-00) on the upper surface of the phase-3 aspirating
needle base, clamp the tube with the fixture, make the bottom close to the upper surface
of the needle base, and then tighten the fixture nut to clamp the tube tightly without loosing.
2) Click 2. Needle home position compensation, and then click Continue to pop up the
cuvette prompt box; place three cuvettes in turn according to the software prompts, and
finally click OK to proceed the next step; descend the aspirating lifting mechanism to make
the aspirating needle to the cuvette bottom, so that the needle can be lifted with the fixture.
3) Use a clearance gauge to stick the upper surface of the phase-3 aspirating needle base,
and measure the gap between the fixture and the upper surface of the aspirating needle.
336
The height should be ranged 1~1.2mm. If it does not meet the requirements, adjust the
position of the aspirating plate using the upper and lower arrows.
4) After completing the process, remove the three immune cuvettes according to the software
prompt to complete the alignment.
Clamp the aspirating tube
Press the probe together with the

Stick the furniture bottom to the upper fixture, and use a ruler to
surface of the aspirating needle base measure the pressed gap. It
should be 1 to 1.2 mm
Figure 7-10 Probe Position Compensation When Aspirating
7.5.3 Extreme Position Inspection of Aspirating Vertical
Mechanism
Alignment index: The aspirating needle moves vertically to the bottom of the cuvette and the
home position; observe the tubes and wires are not twined and tied.
1) Enter Alignment > Dispersion system alignment >, click Common Functions, click To
the home position and To the bottom position of the cuvette; in the two extreme
positions, observe the tubes and wires (wiring between aspirating vertical mechanism
motor and sensor) are not interfered with the other components, and not twined. (Note: To
the bottom position of the cuvette performs the vertical reset of the aspirating needle
first and then the needle moves to the bottom position of the cuvette.)
337
The vertical mechanism The motor line and

does not pull the tube at optical coupler wire are
the limit position and is constrained.
not folded.
Figure 7-11 Extreme Position Inspection of Aspirating Vertical Mechanism
7.6 Incubation Module Temperature Alignment

7.6.1 Incubation module temp. calibration
Alignment index: Temperature of the incubation module is tested under the ambient
temperature of 15~30℃, and the temperature correction parameter ΔT is calculated and
configured to modify the temperature. The temperature accuracy should be 37.0±0.15℃, and
the fluctuation degree (Dxtre Diff) ≤0.2℃.
338
Note: If the instrument was started up 20 minutes ago, you can omit step 2.
1) Enter 1. Calibration of Incubation Module Temperature alignment procedure from
Alignment > Other screen. Prepare an immune cuvette with 500μL (0.5ml) ultra-pure
water (placed in the incubation module position (4, 1) in advance to save the heating time
of the water);
2) Confirm that the incubation temperature control unit has been switched on for 20min; enter
the temperature curve screen, and observe whether the temperature curves of sensor 1
and sensor 2 have been stable.
Figure 7-12 Incubation Module Temp. Calibration Screen
3) Place the immune cuvette with 500μL (0.5ml)ultra- purified water at the incubation module
position (4, 1), and insert the thermometer probe into the bottom of the cuvette for
measurement. After the temperature gets stable, measure the temperature and record it
every 30S, with a total of 20 temperature values.
Figure 7-13 Position of the Cuvette for Incubation Module Temperature Test
339
Note 1: Insert the thermometer probe into the bottom of the cuvette, fix the probe (such as by
using high temperature tape) to prevent deviation, and then confirm that the probe cannot move
downward with your hand, or adjust the fixed position and angle of the probe connection, until
the probe reaches the bottom of the cuvette. Then, perform the test If you use high temperature
tape for fixing, try not to stick to the surface of the incubation module, and tear off the tape after
the test is complete. Any residual gum on the surface of the incubation module must be cleared
carefully using the cotton stickers with alcohol, and make sure the fragments not fall into the
cuvette.
4) Step 4: Remove the thermometer after the test is complete; check the mean T within the
range of 36.85℃~37.15℃; according to the maximum value Tmax and minimum value
Tmin, calculate the fluctuation degree = (Tmax-Tmin), which is required to be ≤0.2℃.
5) Click Continue to enter the Temperature configuration screen; manually enter the
average of 20 thermometer measured values (no matter whether the temperature
accuracy exceeds the standard), and click OK. Click Continue to complete the process;
re-enter the process, and confirm the measured temperature according to the method
described in step (3) ~ (4); ultimately, it must meet the requirements of the index.
Figure 7-14 Test Setting of Incubating Thermometer
7.6.2 Attachment - Instructions for use of FLUKE
thermometer 1524:
1) Insert the temperature probe into port T1 of the thermometer, and then press the key
to switch on the thermometer power supply. If necessary, power cords of the
thermometer must be plugged properly first. Before measuring the temperature, power on
the thermometer for 5 min.
2) Clear all the recorded data in the thermometer. In the Home, press RECALL to enter
RECALL screen:
340
 If manual recording SAVE function is used, press NEXT twice to select Delete Saved, and
then press ENTER to enter the DELETE screen. If the screen displays Saved：ALL. Saved：
ALL of X ENTER to Delete, press ENTER twice to clear all records, and then the screen
displays Saved Empty. Finally, press RECALL to return to the Home.
 If the auto recording LOG function is used, press NEXT for 4 times to select Delete Logs,
and then press ENTER to enter the DELETE screen. If the screen displays Tags：
ALL.……X records……, press ENTER twice to clear all records, and then the screen
displays Tags: ALL.……0 records. Finally, press RECALL to return to the Home.
3) Press ℃℉ to make the screen display ℃.
4) Press SETUP to enter SETUP screen; press NEXT for three times to select Date/Time,
and then press ENTER to enter date and time to set DATE/TIME ADJUST screen; switch
and set the date and time using NEXT, ↑ and ↓. After completion, press SETUP to return
to the Home.
5) After 5 min of warming up the thermometer, test and record the data according to the
following instructions (you can also use a stopwatch and thermometer to record one value
every 30s manually by pressing SAVE):
 In the Home, press SHIFT successively and continuously (SHIFT displayed in the
lower right corner of the screen) and LOG to enter AUTO LOG screen.
 Press ↑ and ↓ to set INTERVAL to 30S, and press ENTER to accept it.
 Press NEXT to switch to START; press ENTER to start auto recording, the screen enters
the auto recording state, and the bottom of the screen shows the auto record number LOG
1 and corresponding auto timing 0:00:00; press SAVE once immediately to record first
data SAV01; record number and timing jump once every 30s; press SAVE once
immediately to record one piece of data every time LOG n changes, until the record
number jumps to LOG 20, and press SAVE once to record the 20th data SAV20.
 Press SHIFT successively and continuously (SHIFT displayed in the lower right
corner of the screen) and LOG to enter AUTO LOG screen. The screen highlights STOP.
Press ENTER to stop auto recording.
 Press RECALL to enter RECALL screen, and the screen highlights Review Saved; press
ENTER to see the state of the temperature record (the bottom of the screen shows RCL
n YYMMDD hh:mm:ss); press ↑ and ↓ to see the temperature record RCL01 ~ RCL20.
 Press RECALL to exit the record check.
6) Calculate the average value T of the recorded 20 pieces of temperature data according
to (RCL01+RCL02+... +RCL20) /20, and record their maximum value Tmax and minimum
value Tmin. You cannot use STATS of the thermometer to see the
maximum/minimum/mean value, which is not corresponding to the temperature data
recorded manually by pressing SAVE.
7) Clear all the data of manual recording SAVE and auto recording LOG in the thermometer
after use.
8) Data Tag of auto recording LOG needs to be exported to the computer using the
thermometer's matching software and data line. Please refer to the instruction for use of
the thermometer.
Note 2: The probes, as shown in the figure below should be protected; do not touch their heads
341
and transparent positions in the process of use; do not bend or extrude them; it is suggested
that the transparent part of the head should be protected with a hard protective sleeve
immediately after use and put back in the packing box.
The head and transparent

part cannot be bent or
extruded
Hard protective sleeve
7.7 Photometer System Alignment

Enter Photometer System Alignment screen
Figure 7-15 Photometer System Alignment
342
Photometer System Alignment process:
Metering
system
Vertical position of the

shielding cover
PMT Parameter Setup
PMT Initialiation
End
Figure 7-16 Flow Chart of Photometer System Alignment
7.7.1 Vertical position of the shielding cover

Alignment index: Adjust the shielding cover so that the gap between the cover and the
incubation module is ranged 1~2mm in the shielding position, and the height of the waste
discharge probe tip from the bottom of the cuvette is ranged 0.6~0.7mm.
Waste position Loosen
343
Figure 7-17 Vertical Position Alignment of the Shielding Cover
1) Click 1 shielding cover position alignment; prepare a fixture (898-000737-00) and a

clean cuvette. Then, power off the shielding cover, place the fixture (898-000737-00) on
the incubation module; place a cuvette in the waste drainage position through the fixture
hole, and slightly unscrew the concave end fastening screw of the waste discharge probe
(the waste discharge probe can be moved when force is applied); move the shielding cover
down to make it fit with the fixture. Meanwhile, adjust the height of the waste discharge
probe so that the probe just stops at the bottom of the cuvette, and then tighten the top
thread (torque 5~6kgf.cm).
Figure 7-18 Schematic Diagram of Waste Discharge Probe
2) Click OK to start auto calibration; the shielding cover automatically moves up, and stops
at position zero to complete auto calibration;
3) Click Continue to configure the parameters and finish the alignment.
344
7.7.2 PMT Parameter Setup

Alignment index: PMT high voltage parameters and calibration factors τ1 and τ2 aligned in the
photometer module assembly are allocated to the whole unit.
Figure 7-19 Photometer Para Configuration Dialog Box
4) Select 2 PMT parameter setup to pop up the photometer parameter configuration dialog
box; manually input the high voltage parameter HV and calibration factor τ1 and τ2
parameters aligned when the photometer assembly is assembled, and click OK to finish
the parameter configuration.
7.7.3 PMT Initialiation

Alignment index:
 Saved Count is ranged 2.55M~3.45M.
 Dark current 0~200AD.
 Dark count 0~350CPS.
Note: Perform this test after the incubation temperature in 7.6 Incubation Module Temperature
Alignment，is aligned and the incubation module temperature gets stable.
1) Select 3 PMT initialization to enter the process; click Continue to pop up the Photometer
initialization screen; click Initialization for the first time to pop up the waiting time; if you
are sure that the incubation module temperature has been stable before alignment, just
wait for 1min and click Cancel, and then automatically perform subsequent alignments,
and display alignment results; the results should comply with the requirements of the index.
You need to wait for 10min countdown before going on if you perform the alignment
immediately after powering on the instrument.
345
2) Automatically initialize the photometer, return the result after initialization, and show that
the photometer is initialized successfully.
Figure 7-20 Photometer Initialization Screen
7.8 Dispensing System Alignment

Enter Dispensing System Alignment screen
346
Figure 7-21 Dispensing System\nAlignment
Dispensing System Alignment process:
347
Dispensing System\
nAlignment
Vertical home position of the

probe
Probe & Mixer coplanar debug Bar code scanner initialization
HP of probe disk Ra position HP of probe mixing position 1 HP of probe sample position

HP of probe disk Rb position HP of probe mixing position 2
HP of probe disk Rc position Scanner position alignment
HP of probe wash pool Reagent disk bar code scanning
HP of probe disk Rd position
Sample disk bar code scanning
VLP of probe to reagent disk VLP of probe to sample position
End
Figure 7-22 Flow Chart of Dispensing System Alignment
When Z axis is powered off during the sample probe alignment, press down the arm manually,
so that the probe tip can be adjusted to align the alignment position. Note that:
1) Protect the probe to prevent damage. The downward force should be moderate, avoiding
excessive force and fast speed, so that the probe tip touches the fixture or other parts.
2) The arm is near the guide rail. To prevent the deformation of the rocker arm and deviation
of the probe tip, manually press the arm near the Z-axis guide rail.
3) Before clicking Continue, keep your hands and other parts of the body away from the
machine running area to prevent bruising.
4) When moving the sample probe horizontally, it is necessary to confirm that the sample
probe has been lifted and the probe tip enters the swab completely.
Figure 7-23 Schematic Diagram of Probe Arm
348
7.8.1 Checking the Probe

NOTE
1) Protect the probe during the process of examination.
2) Electrostatic protection should be conducted in the case of liquid level detection wiring
connection.
Installation methods and procedure
Figure 7-24 Schematic Diagram of Probe Optocoupler Block
1) Confirm that the wiring of the liquid level detection runs outside the probe and does not
interfere with the solder joint (the solder joint and partial insulating skin are wrapped by
glue without bare core line), and the connection plug is inserted into the liquid level testing
board.
2) Make sure that the hose rotates in a circle, penetrates the cable tie clockwise at the bottom
of the arm (the cable tie cannot extrude tubes), and then is inserted into the probe; the
hose is inserted over the step surface. Adjust the size of the hose arc to ensure that the
hose does not interfere with probe core.
Figure 7-25 Schematic Diagram of the Inner Wall Pipe of Sample Probe
3) Manually lift the probe to simulate probe collision. The probe should be able to fall to the
bottom with no stagnation; when the block shields the optocoupler, lamp D1 on the liquid
level detection board is off, and otherwise it is on. Observe the block is located in the center
of optocoupler, with no contact with the optocoupler.
349
7.8.2 Coplanar Alignment of the Probe and the Mixer

Alignment index:
Adjust the mixing home position compensation and front and rear position of the mixing
baseboard, so that the probe can be aimed at the sampling position of the two mixing positions,
the hole center of the mixing position center fixture 898-000733-00, and the center hole of the
bottom of the wash well.
Click 1 Coplanar alignment of the probe and the mixer, and place Sampling position and
mixing position center fixture 898-000733-00 at the two mixing positions according to the
software prompts and steps; move the probe manually and make the probe tip align with the
center hole of the two fixtures and that of the bottom of the wash well; if the two holes in the
mixing positions cannot be aligned at the same time, adjust the mixing rotation parameters, and
rotate the mixer by clicking clockwise or counterclockwise button until the center holes of the
two fixtures are aligned. (If necessary, you can slightly adjust the position of the mixing
baseboard (knock the baseboard carefully).
Tighten the four fastening screws on the mixing baseboard. First tighten the two screws on the
diagonal, and confirm that the tip can still be aligned with the center holes of the two fixtures,
and then tighten the other two screws.
Figure 7-26 Schematic Diagram of Probe & Mixer Coplanar Alignment
Select Continue to save parameters and finish the alignment. Check that the four adjusting
screws are tightened firmly (torque 6~8kgf.cm).
350
NOTE
1) If the deviation between the front and rear centers of the wash well is large, you can loosen
the fastening screws on the wash well bracket and the upper cover plate to adjust them
slightly.
2) After the process is completed, you need to re-align HP of probe mixing position 1, HP of
probe mixing position 2, HP of probe wash well, HP of mixing position 1 and HP of mixing
position 2 in the transport system alignment.
3) When moving the sample probe horizontally, it is necessary to confirm that the sample
probe has been lifted and the probe tip enters the swab completely.
7.8.3 HP of Probe Mixing Position 1

Alignment index:
Adjust the HP parameters of probe mixing position 1, so that the probe can be inserted into the
center hole of fixture 898-000733-00 on mixing position 1.
Click 2 HP of probe mixing position 1; place Sampling position and mixing position center
fixture 898-000733-00 at mixing position 1 in accordance with the software prompts and steps;
move the probe above mixing position 1, and manually press the Z axis drive to make the probe
close to the center hole of the fixture; if there is a deviation, click the left and right arrows to
adjust until meeting the requirements; click Continue to confirm whether the probe meets the
alignment requirements; if not, click the right and left arrows until meeting the requirements.
Figure 7-27 Schematic Diagram of HP of Probe Mixing Position 1
Select Continue to save parameters and finish the alignment.

Particular attention: Confirmation cannot be omitted. If you detect an HP deviation during
confirmation, align again until the requirement is met. HP of the following probes should be
aligned according to this requirement which will be not further described.
7.8.4 HP of Probe Mixing Position 2

Alignment index:
Adjust the HP parameters of probe mixing position 2, so that the probe can be inserted into the
351
center hole of fixture 898-000733-00 on mixing position 2.
Click 3 HP of probe mixing position 2; place Sampling position and mixing position center
fixture 898-000733-00 at mixing position 2 in accordance with the software prompts and steps;
move the probe above mixing position 2, and manually press the Z axis drive to make the probe
close to the center hole of the fixture; if there is a deviation, click the left and right arrows to
adjust until meeting the requirements; click Continue to confirm whether the probe meets the
alignment requirements; if not, click the right and left arrows until meeting the requirements.
Figure 7-28 Schematic Diagram of HP of Probe Mixing Position 2

Particular attention: Confirmation cannot be omitted. If you detect an HP deviation during
confirmation, align again until the requirement is met.
7.8.5 HP of Probe Wash Well

Alignment index:
Adjust the HP parameters of probe wash position, so that the probe can be aligned with the
center hole of the bottom of the wash well.
Click 4 HP of probe wash well; move the probe above the wash position in accordance with
the software prompts and steps; manually press the Z axis drive to make the probe close to the
center hole of the bottom of the wash well; if there is a deviation, click the left and right arrows
to adjust until meeting the requirements; click Continue to confirm whether the probe meets
the alignment requirements; if not, click the right and left arrows until meeting the requirements.
7.8.6 HP of Probe Disk Ra Position

Alignment index:
Adjust the parameters of the sample probe in the reagent Ra horizontal position and in the
reagent carousel Ra stop position in order to align the sample probe to fit precisely with the Ra
position’s cross center of the reagent box.
Note: Remove the reagent pot aspirating plate on the reagent carousel before alignment (enter
352
Dispensing System Alignment > Common function; move the probe to mixing position 2,
and then remove the aspirating plate).
Take down the reagent

pot aspirating plate
6# position loading
reagent bottle
Figure 7-29 Schematic Diagram 1 of HP of Probe Disk Ra Position

Click 5 HP of probe disk Ra position; load a reagent bottle at the reagent carousel 6#; move
the probe above Ra position; manually press the Z axis drive to make the probe close to the
Ra position’s cross center; if there is a deviation, click the left and right, clockwise and
counterclockwise arrows to adjust the probe position and the reagent carousel position until
meeting the requirements; click Continue to confirm whether the requirements are met; if not,
click the right and left arrows until meeting the requirements.
Align the probe tip

with the Ra cross
center
353
Figure 7-30Schematic Diagram 2 of HP of Probe Disk Ra Position
7.8.7 HP of Probe Disk Rb Position

Alignment index:
Adjust the parameters of the sample probe in the reagent Rb horizontal position and in the
reagent carousel Ra stop position in order to insert the sample probe precisely into the Rb
position’s cross center of the reagent box.
Click 6 HP of probe disk Rb position; load a reagent bottle at the reagent carousel 6#; move
the probe above Rb position; manually press the Z axis drive to make the probe close to the
Rb position’s cross center; if there is a deviation, click the left and right, clockwise and
7.8.8 HP of Probe Disk Rc Position

Alignment index: Adjust the parameters of the sample probe in the reagent Rc horizontal
position and in the reagent carousel Rc stop position in order to insert the sample probe
precisely into the Rc position’s cross center of the reagent box.
Click 7 HP of probe disk Rc position; load a reagent bottle at the reagent carousel 6#; move
the probe above Rc position; manually press the Z axis drive to make the probe close to the Rc
position’s cross center; if there is a deviation, click the left and right, clockwise and
7.8.9 HP of Probe Disk Rd Position

Alignment index: Adjust the parameters of the sample probe in the reagent Rd horizontal
position and in the reagent carousel Rd stop position in order to insert the sample probe
precisely into the Rd position’s cross center of the reagent box.
Click 8 HP of probe disk Rd position; load a reagent bottle at the reagent carousel 6#; move
the probe above Rd position; manually press the Z axis drive to make the probe close to the
Rd position’s cross center; if there is a deviation, click the left and right, clockwise and
354
7.8.10 HP of Probe Sample Position

Alignment index:
Adjust the horizontal position parameters of the probe at sample position, sample carousel
clockwise stop position parameters and counter clockwise stop position parameters, so that the
sample carousel stops at sample position in clockwise and counter clockwise directions, and
the sample probe can be properly inserted in the center hole of the sample fixture 898-000733-
00.
Click 9 HP alignment of probe sample position; place alignment fixture 898-000733-00 at
the sampling position according to the software prompts and steps; the sample carousel rotates
counter clockwise and stops at the sample position; move the probe above the sample position,
and press the Z axis manually to make the probe close to the fixture center hole; if a deviation
exists, click the left and right arrows and clockwise and counter clockwise arrows to adjust
the left and right position of the probe and the counterclockwise stop position parameters of the
sample carousel to meet the index requirements.
Click Continue to align the home position of the carousel clockwise with the fixture hole.
Place the circular

arc surface at the
fixture bottom in
the test tube clamp
Align the probe tip

with the center
hole of fixture
Figure 7-31 Schematic Diagram of HP Alignment of Probe Sample Position
Click Continue to align the remaining ten sample positions based on the software prompts. By
adjusting the sample probe and sample carousel, the sample probe is aligned with the fixture
hole.
355
Click Continue to save parameters and finish the alignment after all sample positions are
aligned.
7.8.11 Bar code scanner initialization

Alignment index: Execute the bar code scanner initialization command.
Note: The bar code scanner must be initialized before the first bar code scanning check.
Click 10 Bar code scanner initialization; click Continue to execute the bar code scanner
initialization automatically, and exit the process automatically after completion.
7.8.12 Bar Code Scanner Position Alignment

Alignment index: The scanning light all falls into the groove of the scanning window.
Click 11 Bar code scanner position alignment, and click Continue. A dialog box is displayed.
Adjust the screws fixing the scanning bracket to make the scanning light fall into the groove of
the scanning window.
The scanning light should all fall into
the groove of the scanning window
Scanner bracket
adjustment
screw
7.8.13 Reagent Carousel Bar Code Scanning Check

Alignment index:
Scanning is performed continuously; all bar codes are recognized correctly; repeated scanning
results are consistent.
Note: It is required to rotate the reagent carousel when loading the reagent box with a reagent
bar code.
Before test, take 15 reagent boxes with bar codes (as shown in the figure below); the bar codes
must be clear, free of dirty and scratches and be pasted in the middle vertically.
356
For subsequent installation of the reagent boxes, pay attention to: the Ra gear of the reagent
box is aligned with the fixed large gear, and then leveled to clamp the tail of the reagent box
until sound "snap" is heard.
Figure 7-32 Schematic Diagram of the Reagent Box Bar Code Paste
Click 12 Reagent carousel bar code scanning check; click the clockwise and counter
clockwise on the screen following the software prompts; place reagent boxes with reagent bar
codes at all reagent positions; enter the scanning screen and enter the scan times: 5 (cycles);
click Start to scan the bar codes; feed back the identification information, which should be
consistent with the actual bar codes; the results of repeated scanning comparison are
consistent.
If NG exists,
confirm it, and
perform check
again till all the
reagent
positions are
OK
The comparison
result is OK, and
all the bar codes
scanned
repeatedly 5 times
are identified and
Change to 5 consistent
Figure 7-33Reagent Bar Code Scanning Check Screen
Select OK to finish the alignment.
7.8.14 Sample Carousel Bar Code Scanning Check

Alignment index:
Scanning is performed continuously; all bar codes are recognized correctly; repeated scanning
357
results are consistent.
Take 50 tubes with bar codes. The bar codes must be clear, free of dirty and scratches, not
inclined, and pasted flatly. Requirements for bar code pasting distances are shown in the figure
below:
Figure 7-34 Requirement for Sample Bar Code Position
Click 13 Sample carousel bar code scanning check; click the clockwise and counter
clockwise following the software prompts; place tubes with sample bar codes at all sample
carousel positions; enter the scanning screen and enter the scan times: 5 (cycles); click Start
to scan the bar codes; feed back the identification information, which should be consistent with
the actual bar codes; the results of repeated scanning comparison are consistent.
Select OK to finish the alignment.
7.8.15 Vertical home position of the probe

Alignment index:
The sample probe moves to the plane of the home position fixture 898-000719-00 against the
bottom of the wash swab, and moves downward automatically to detect the fixture, and then
the fixture is removed. The software is calibrated automatically to obtain the vertical home
position parameters of the probe.
Click 14 Vertical home position of the probe; make plane of the fixture slice 898-000719-00
against the swab bottom according to the software prompts and steps as well as the screen
prompts; click Continue. The probe moves downward automatically first, and then slows down
and stops immediately upon detecting the fixture plane. Remove the fixture following the
prompts. The software automatically runs and calculates the home position of the probe;
358
The fixture plane is

against the bottom of
the swab
Figure 7-35 Schematic Diagram of Vertical Home Position of the Probe

Note: After the vertical home position of the probe is aligned again, it is necessary to align the
VLP of probe to reagent carousel, VLP of probe to sample position, VLP of probe to mixing
position 1 and VLP of probe to mixing position 2 again.
7.8.16 VLP of Probe to Reagent Carousel

Alignment index:
Place the reagent box at position 6#; the height between the home position of the probe and
the plane of reagent boxes Rb and Rc is calculated automatically, so that VLP of probe to
reagent carousel is calculated and obtained automatically.
Click 15 VLP of probe to reagent carousel. Load a reagent box at position 1# following the
software prompts and steps; Z axis is powered off when the probe horizontally moves to the
above of Rc and returns back for a certain distance. The probe spring guide column is pressed
with hands, and the probe is moved down slowly, so that the probe is just against the plane
between reagent boxes Rb and Rc. You can stop when you feel that the resistance increases
obviously after pressing the guide column slightly (It is not allowed to press forcedly, and the
spring should not be pressed by the probe). See the following table.
359
It cannot be jacked
during moving down
Figure 7-36 Schematic Diagram of VLP of Probe to Reagent Carousel
Click OK to start auto calibration; the probe is powered on, rises automatically and stops after
finding position zero; the parameters are calculated, obtained, and configured automatically.
Select Continue to finish the alignment.
7.8.17 VLP of Probe to Sample Position

Alignment index:
VLP of probe to sample position is calculated and obtained automatically after the plane height
above the probe sample carousel is calculated automatically.
360
Click 16 VLP of probe to sample position. Following the software prompts and steps, Z axis
is powered off when the probe moves horizontally to the above of sample position and returns
back for a certain distance. The probe spring guide column is pressed with hands, and the
probe is moved down slowly, so that the probe tip is just against the plane on the sample
position. You can stop when you feel that the resistance increases obviously after pressing the
guide column slightly (It is not allowed to press forcedly, and the spring should not be pressed
by the probe).
Click OK to start auto calibration; the probe is powered on, rises automatically and stops after
finding position zero; the parameters are calculated, obtained, and configured automatically.
7.9 Transport System Alignment

Enter Transport System Alignment.
361
Figure 7-37 Transport System Alignment
Transportation
system alignment
Electromagnet check for

Finger’s home position
cuvette box
HP of cuvette
HP of the right HP of the left HP of mixing HP of mixing HP of substrate mixing HP of dispersion IO HP of incubation HP of photometric HP of discharging
discarding
cuvette box cuvette box position 1 position 2 position port block position liquid level
position
VP of right VP of left cuvette

cuvette box Vertical position of the VP of dispersion IO VP of incubation
box position mixing position
position port block
End
Figure 7-38 Flow Chart of Transport System Alignment
NOTE
1) When adjusting the horizontal position of the gripper, manually press the center position
of the upper plane of the Z axis motor; do not press it forcedly to avoid collision.
2) When adjusting the horizontal position of the gripper, first roughly align the fixture hole
center; do not clear microstep movement when pressing the arrows to adjust the position.
362
If offset exists in the case of confirmation, microstep alignment can be performed again.
At this time, microstep movement is zeroed, and make sure to avoid collision with your
hands and body.
3) The alignment fixture axis on your finger cannot be pressed into the fixture hole in the
target position forcedly. After alignment, gently press it down to the hole, and make sure
the gap is uniform around it. You can also rotate the fixture below. It should be rotated
smoothly and cannot be choked by the axis.
Use fingers to
press gently
Even gaps
around the
circumference
Figure 7-39 Schematic Diagram of Gripper Position Alignment
7.9.1 Electromagnet check for cuvette box

Alignment index: Electromagnets of the two cuvette box drawers are attracted normally. When
the electromagnets are attracted, the corresponding drawer cannot be pulled out; otherwise, it
could be pulled out.
1) Click Electromagnet check for cuvette box; enter the alignment procedure, the two
drawers can be pulled out first according to the screen requirements. Then, drawer 1 is
attracted and cannot be pulled out, while drawer 2 is not attracted and can be pulled out;
finally, drawer 1 is not attracted and can be pulled out, while drawer 2 is attracted and
cannot be pulled out;
2) Select Continue to return back to the Unit Screen and finish the alignment.
7.9.2 Finger’s Home Position

Alignment index: When the fingers move to the home position, pinch the middle of the fingers
with proper force (to prevent deformation or damage) and check if they cannot be closed.
363
1) Click 2. Finger’s Home Position, and then click Continue to enter the next step.
2) Pinch the middle of the fingers with proper force. The fingers cannot be closed. If they do,
check the big and small cams and use the left/right arrow buttons to adjust them. In case
the small cam is in front of the big one, select clockwise arrow button to increase the
opening parameter; otherwise, select counter clockwise arrow button to decrease it, till
requests are met.
3) Click Continue to confirm again that the fingers meet requirements. Click Continue once
more to finish the alignment.
Big cam
Small cam
Pinch the middle

part of finger
Figure 7-40Cam
7.9.3 HP of Discarding Position

Alignment index: Adjust the position of the cuvette gripper fingers until the fingers are aligned
with the center position of the waste container opening in X axis and can enter the position of
waste container opening in Y axis.
Note: When adjusting the direction arrow in the position confirmation process, keep you away
from the movement range of the gripper to avoid collision.
1) Click 3. HP of Discarding Position; adjust the front/rear and left/right positions of the
gripper fingers according to the software prompts and steps. Press the Z axis of the gripper
manually. The fingers should be aligned with the center position of the waste container
opening in X axis (confirm that they can also enter the gripper notch in Y axis); click
Continue to confirm the position of the fingers meets the requirements of the index.
Otherwise, click the arrows again to adjust the position of the gripper fingers until the
requirement of the index is met.
Observe from the lower

side of gripper X axis
arm: the gripper is at the
center of opening
364
Figure 7-41 Schematic Diagram of HP of Discarding Position
Note: If the waste container welds are not mounted, the position can be aligned after the welds
are mounted, but before discarding.
7.9.4 HP of the right cuvette box

Alignment index: Finger adjustment fixture BM10-J08-007 should align with the hole center of
pseudo cuvette fixture BM10-J05-002 at upper left corner, lower left corner and lower right
corner of the right cuvette box.
1) Put 1 set of pseudo cuvette fixture BM10-J05-002 into the upper left corner, lower left
corner and lower right corner of an empty cuvette box.
Place three
tools at these
three positions
at a time
Left Cuvette Box Right Cuvette Box
Figure 7-42 Schematic Diagram of HP of the Right cuvette Box
2) Click 4. HP of the right cuvette box; pull out the tray according to the software prompts
and steps; load the ready cuvette box and fixture on the tray, and place fixture BM10-J08-
007 on the finger. According to the software prompts, HP of 3 cuvette position holes in the
right cuvette box is aligned; the fixture shaft should be aligned with the hole of the pseudo
cuvette fixture, and the clearance is uniform; otherwise, you should adjust the position of
the gripper’s X and Y axes using the front/rear and right/left arrow buttons until the
requirements are met. After each position alignment is finished, click Continue to confirm
whether the position alignment meets the requirements. If not, click the arrow buttons
again to adjust the position (confirm the step microstep movement is zeroed, and avoid
collision) until the requirements are met. Put the fixture into the drawer when the drawer
magnet is powered off, and then push the drawer for attracting to prevent alignment errors.
7.9.5 HP of the left cuvette box

pseudo cuvette fixture BM10-J05-002 at upper left corner, lower left corner and lower right
corner of the left cuvette box.
365
1) Put 1 set of pseudo cuvette fixture BM10-J05-002 into the upper left corner, lower left
corner and lower right corner of an empty cuvette box.
2) Click 5. HP of the left cuvette box; pull out the tray according to the software prompts
and steps; load the ready cuvette box and fixture on the tray, and place fixture BM10-J08-
007 on the finger. According to the software prompts, HP of 3 cuvette position holes in the
left cuvette box is aligned; the fixture shaft should be aligned with the hole of the pseudo
cuvette fixture, and the clearance is uniform; otherwise, you should adjust the position of
the gripper’s X and Y axes using the front/rear and right/left arrow buttons until the
requirements are met. After each position alignment is finished, click Continue to confirm
whether the position alignment meets the requirements. If not, click the arrow buttons
again to adjust the position (confirm the step microstep movement is zeroed, and avoid
collision) until the requirements are met. Put the fixture into the drawer when the drawer
magnet is powered off, and then push the drawer for attracting to prevent alignment errors.
7.9.6 HP of Incubation Module

pseudo cuvette fixture BM10-J05-002 at lower right corner (1, 1), lower left corner (1, 12) and
upper left corner (7, 12), of the incubation module.
1) Put 3 sets of pseudo cuvette fixtures into the holes at the lower right corner (1, 1), lower
left corner (1, 12) and upper left corner (7, 12) of the incubation module, which should be
installed in place.
Place alignment
tools at these
three positions
Figure 7-43 Schematic Diagram of HP Alignment of Incubation Module
2) Click 6. HP of incubation module. Position alignment is completed following the software

prompts and steps. The fixture shaft should be aligned with the hole of the pseudo cuvette
fixture, and the clearance is uniform; otherwise, you should adjust the position of the
gripper’s X and Y axes using the front/rear and right/left arrow buttons until the
requirements are met. Click Continue to confirm whether the position alignment meets the
366
requirements. If not, click the arrow button again to adjust the position (confirm the step
microstep movement is zeroed, and avoid collision) until the requirements are met.
7.9.7 HP of Dispersion Carousel IO Outlet

Alignment index: Finger adjustment fixture BM10-J08-007 can make the gripper hole in
dispersion carousel align with the hole center of dispersion IO position fixture 898-000720-00.
1) Click 7. HP of dispersion carousel IO outlet; place alignment fixture 898-000720-00 at
the dispersion IO outlet following the software prompts and steps, and put fixture into the
gripper;
Fixture 898-000720-00
Figure 7-44 Schematic Diagram of Alignment of HP of Dispersion Carousel IO Outlet
2) The fixture shaft should be aligned with the center hole of the fixture, and the clearance is
uniform; otherwise, you should adjust the position of the gripper’s X and Y axes using the
front/rear and right/left arrow buttons until the requirements are met. Click Continue to
confirm whether the position alignment meets the requirements. If not, click the arrow
button again to adjust the position (confirm the step microstep movement is zeroed, and
avoid collision) until the requirements are met.
7.9.8 HP of Mixing Position 1

Alignment index:
Finger adjustment fixture BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole center of the sample position
pseudo cuvette fixture BM10-J05-002 in mixing position 1.
1) Put 1 set of sample position pseudo cuvette fixture into the hole of mixing position 1. Click
8. HP of Mixing Position 1. Position alignment is completed following the software
367
7.9.9 HP of Mixing Position 2

Alignment index: Finger adjustment fixture BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole center of the
sample position pseudo cuvette fixture BM10-J05-002 in mixing position 2.
1) Put 1 set of sample position pseudo cuvette fixture into the hole of mixing position 2.
2) Click 9. HP of Mixing Position 2. Position alignment is completed following the software
7.9.10 HP of Substrate Mixing Position

Alignment index: Finger adjustment fixture BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole center of
the sample position pseudo cuvette fixture BM10-J05-002 in the substrate mixing position.
1) Put 1 set of sample position pseudo cuvette fixture into the hole of the substrate mixing
position. Click 10. HP of Substrate Mixing Position. Position alignment is completed
following the software prompts and steps. The fixture shaft should be aligned with the hole
of the pseudo cuvette fixture, and the clearance is uniform; otherwise, you should adjust
the position of the gripper’s X and Y axes using the front/rear and right/left arrow buttons
until the requirements are met. Click Continue to confirm whether the position alignment
meets the requirements. If not, click the arrow button again to adjust the position (confirm
the step microstep movement is zeroed, and avoid collision) until the requirements are
met.
7.9.11 HP of Waste Drainage Position

Alignment Index:
Finger adjustment fixture BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole center of the peudo cuvette
fixture BM10-J05-002 in the waste drainage position.
1) Place the pseudo cuvette fixture in the photometer position on the incubation module.
368
Place alignment
tool at the waste
drainage position
Figure 7-45 Schematic Diagram of HP of Waste Drainage Position Alignment
2) Click 11. HP of waste drainage position. Finger adjustment fixture BM10-J08-007 and
sample position pseudo cuvette fixture BM10-J05-002 are aligned following the software
7.9.12 HP of Photometer Position

Alignment index: Finger adjustment fixture BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole center of
the pseudo cuvette fixture BM10-J05-002 in the photometer position.
1) Place the pseudo cuvette fixture in the photometer position on the incubation module.
Place alignment
tool at the
photometric
position
Figure 7-46 Schematic Diagram of HP of Photometer Position Alignment
2) Click 12. HP of photometer position. The finger fixture BM10-J08-007 and sample
369
position pseudo cuvette fixture BM10-J05-002 are aligned following the software prompts
and steps. The fixture shaft should be aligned with the hole of the pseudo cuvette fixture,
and the clearance is uniform; otherwise, you should adjust the position of the gripper’s X
and Y axes using the front/rear and right/left arrow buttons until the requirements are met.
Click Continue to confirm whether the position alignment meets the requirements. If not,
click the arrow button again to adjust the position (confirm the step microstep movement
is zeroed, and avoid collision) until the requirements are met.
7.9.13 VP of right cuvette box position

Alignment index: After cuvette position gripping at four corners of the right cuvette box, the
bottom edge of the gripper should be aligned with the bottom edge of the gripper depth fixture
groove in the cuvette.
1) Take 4 cuvettes, place the gripper depth fixture BM10-J08-002 in the cuvettes, and then
place them in the cuvette positions at the four corners of the right cuvette box.
Place the
depth
fixture in
the cuvette
Place fixtures
The fixture at four corners
bottom
edge can
be seen
Figure 7-47 Schematic Diagram of VP Alignment of the Gripper
2) Click 13. VP of right cuvette box position. Gripping is performed at the cuvette positions
at four corners from the finger to the right cuvette box following the software prompts and
steps; visually check whether the bottom edge of the gripper is aligned with the bottom
370
edge of the gripper depth fixture groove in the cuvette. If not, click the up/down arrow
buttons to adjust the gripper until the requirements are met.
7.9.14 VP of left cuvette box position

Alignment index: After cuvette position gripping at four corners of the left cuvette box, the
bottom edge of the gripper should be aligned with the bottom edge of the gripper depth fixture
groove in the cuvette.
place them in the cuvette positions at the four corners of the left cuvette box.
2) Click 14. VP of left cuvette box position. Gripping is performed at the cuvette positions
at four corners from the finger to the left cuvette box following the software prompts and
steps; visually check whether the bottom edge of the gripper is aligned with the bottom
edge of the gripper depth fixture groove in the cuvette. If not, click the up/down arrow
buttons to adjust the gripper until the requirements are met.
7.9.15 VP of Incubation Module

Alignment index: After incubating position gripping at four corners, the bottom edge of the
gripper should be aligned with the bottom edge of the gripper depth fixture groove in the cuvette.
place them in the cuvette holes at the four corners of the incubation position.
Place fixtures at
four corners
2) Click 15. VP of Incubating Position. Gripping is performed at four corners from the finger
to the incubating position following the software prompts and steps; visually check whether
the bottom edge of the gripper is aligned with the bottom edge of the gripper depth fixture
groove in the cuvette. If not, click the up/down arrow buttons to adjust the gripper until the
requirements are met.
7.9.16 VP of Dispersion IO Outlet

Alignment index: After dispersion IO outlet gripping, the bottom edge of the gripper should be
aligned with the bottom edge of the gripper depth fixture groove in the cuvette.
1) Take a cuvette, place the gripper depth fixture BM10-J08-002 in the cuvette, and then
place it in the dispersion carousel position IO.
371
2) Click 16. VP of dispersion IO outlet. Gripping is performed from the finger to dispersion
carousel position IO following the software prompts and steps; visually check whether the
bottom edge of the gripper is aligned with the bottom edge of the gripper depth fixture
groove in the cuvette. If not, click the up/down arrow buttons to adjust the gripper until the
requirements are met.
7.9.17 Vertical position of the mixing position

Alignment index: After gripping at mixing position 1, the bottom edge of the gripper should be
aligned with the bottom edge of the gripper depth fixture groove in the cuvette.
1) Take a cuvette, place the gripper depth fixture BM10-J08-002 in the cuvette, and then
place it in mixing position 1.
2) Click 17. VP of mixing position. Gripping is performed from the finger to the mixing
position following the software prompts and steps; visually check whether the bottom edge
of the gripper is aligned with the bottom edge of the gripper depth fixture groove in the
cuvette. If not, click the up/down arrow buttons to adjust the gripper until the requirements
are met.
7.10 HydroSystem
Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Hydro unit.
1) Before the alignment described in this chapter, confirm that relevant mechanical positions,
except the deck plate, have been aligned.
2) Fresh and clean ultra-pure water must be used for aligning the substrate system.
3) If the liquid path leaks or chemical fluid, such as wash buffer and substrate, drops, wear
plastic gloves to tighten the joints, and then use paper or cloth to wipe it to dry.
7.10.1 Preparations for Fluidics Alignment

1) Waste pipeline: Pipes and adapters for two waste outlets in the fluidics inlet and outlet
module are connected with the discharge pipe of the production waste; the waste sensor
module is inserted into the terminal of the component, and the waste sensor is placed
correctly (do not pollute the waste floater when the waste bucket is not used; note that
correct BM50 waste floater sensor 115-050123-00 should be used because it is different
from other products).
2) Inlet pipeline: Two wash buffer lines and bottle cap components are connected. Note that
wash buffer 1 of the fluidics inlet is connected to the wash buffer bottle cap assembly
marked with "1”, and wash buffer 2 is connected to the wash buffer bottle cap assembly
marked with "2”.
372
Waste sensor
Wash Waste 1
solution 1
Wash Waste 2
solution 2
Figure 7-48 Schematic Diagram of Fluidic Inlet and Outlet
Note: After loading the wash buffer, barrels for wash buffer 1 and wash buffer 2 are not allowed
to be exchanged with each other.
7.10.2 Cleaning and Priming Substrate Tubes

Alignment index: Rinse the substrate tube with ultra-pure water, and empty the bubbles in the
tube; clean the tube with acid wash buffer, and empty the acid wash buffer; then, rinse the
substrate tube with ultra-pure water again, and empty the tube; finally, prime substrates, and
tighten the joints.
Precautions:
1) Stop immediately in the case of liquid leakage; wear gloves to tighten the connector, and
wipe out the leakage.
2) Fresh and clean ultra-pure water must be used for alignment. The following substrate
process requirements are the same.
3) Avoid the substrate outlet tube and substrate spikes from contacting other objects or liquid.
Otherwise, use the acid wash buffer and ultra-pure water to clean it.
4) When no contamination and leakage occur, the substrate bottle can be used repeatedly.
Use a clean and sealed bag to pack it to keep the cap from contamination.
5) In the substrate tube cleaning process, the ultra-pure water cannot be reused. The ultra-
pure water substrate bottom must be cleaned and replaced.
373
Clean with ultra-pure water Empty ultra-pure water Clean with acid lotion Empty acid lotion
for the first time for the first time for the second time for the first time
Use ultra-pure water to clean Empty the positions of Use acid lotion to clean Empty the positions of
substrate 1 and substrate 2 substrate 1 and substrate 2 16 substrate 1 and substrate 2 substrate 1 and substrate 2 16
sixteen times respectively times respectively for 16 times respectively times respectively
Clean with ultra-pure water Empty ultra-pure water for the Priming substrate for the
for the third time third time fourth time
Use ultra-pure water to clean Empty the positions of Use substrate to prime
Load substrate 1 and
substrate 1 and substrate 2 substrate 1 and substrate 2 16 substrate 1 and substrate 2
substrate 2
sixteen times respectively times respectively for 50 times respectively
Figure 7-49 Process of Cleaning and Priming Substrate Tubes
Clean substrate tube

The process of “Clean Substrate Tubes”:
Pure water Empty Wash solution Empty Pure water

Clean substrate L&R Clean substrate L&R Clean substrate L&R
Empty substrate L&R Empty substrate L&R
with pure water each with wash solution with pure water each
each 16 times each 4 times
16 times each 32 times 16 times
Empty Pure water Empty Pure water 2 Pure water

Clean substrate L&R Clean substrate R Clean substrate L&R
Empty substrate L&R Empty substrate L&R
with pure water each with pure water each with pure water each
each 4 times each 4 times 48 times(leave
16 times 16 times
substrate L position
empty)
Empty
Empty substrate L&R
each 16 times
1) Prepare 2 bottles of Wash solution that has be Diluted and 2 clean substrate bottles;
Note: the Wash solution is packaged in a substrate bottle, with 20ml of the acid lotion as the
original solution, which needs to be diluted manually with ultra-pure water, and then diluted until
the bottle is full of the substrate.
2) The positions of two substrate spikes are vacant;
3) Select Fluidics Alignment > 2. Clean Substrate Tubes, and operate as prompted.
374
Figure7-50 Prompts before cleaning substrate tubes
The position of the substrate tube holder
Protect dispersion IO port
Connect the
substrate drain
tube to the Unscrew
connector under
the substrate this joint
Remove the substrate tube holder
holder (note to protect the
substrate tube)
375
Figure7-51 Preparation before cleaning substrate tubes
4) In the second step, clean the substrate with ultra-pure water. Fill two bottles of clean
substrate with ultra-pure water, load the two bottles to the positions of substrate L and
substrate R, then tap Clean the Substrate on the software to confirm that you have
followed the prompts and tap OK to access the cleaning screen. Execution Times is
set to 32 by default. The system automatically starts to clean substrate L and substrate
R with ultra-pure water each 16 times; during the cleaning process, observe the
screen prompts become "No bubbles detected in the substrate tubes", observe that
the substrate tubes are inserted into the positions correctly, and there is no leakage;
Figure 7-52 Clean Substrate Tubes Screen
5) Tap Continue to go to the third step, this step is to empty the ultra-pure water in the
substrate tubes, remove the clean substrate bottles containing ultra-pure water of
substrate L and substrate R, tap Empty, prompting that the substrate position should
be vacant. After confirming, enter the Empty screen. Set Execution Times to the
default value is 32 times. Empty the ultra-pure water in channel L and channel R each
16 times. Observe that the screen prompts "Bubbles detected in the substrate tubes";
exit the screen after completion.
6) Tap Continue to go to the fourth step, and use acidic lotion to clean the substrate
tubes;
Note: After you click substrate prime, do not perform any operation on the software
screen. Otherwise, substrate 1 and 2 may be switched or spike1 and 2 may be
switched.
Fill substrate bottle L and substrate bottle R with Wash solution, loosen the caps, and
tap Clean, prompting to confirm that the two substrate bottles have been loaded with
376
the acidic lotion. Enter the Clean screen, and set Execution Times to the default
value is 64 times. The system automatically starts cleaning. Clean the substrate
channels with acidic lotion each 32 times. The screen prompts "No bubbles detected
in the substrate tubes". Exit the screen after completion;
Figure 7-53 Place ultra-pure acidic lotion
7) Tap Continue to go to the fifth step, this step is to empty the Wash solution in the
substrate tubes; tap Empty, and take out the acidic lotion bottles of substrate L and
substrate R as prompted. Tap OK to access the Empty screen. Set Execution Times
to the default value is 8 times. Empty the acidic lotion in channel L and channel R each
exit the screen after completion;
8) Tap Continue to go to the sixth step, this step is to clean the substrate tubes with
ultra-pure water. Tap Clean, and replace the ultra-pure water in the two clean
substrate bottles as prompted. Place new ultra-pure water bottles at the
positions of substrate L and substrate R. Enter the Clean screen, and set
Execution Times to the default value is 32 times. The system automatically starts
cleaning. Clean the substrate channels L and R with acidic lotion each 16 times. The
screen prompts "No bubbles detected in the substrate tubes". Exit the screen after
completion;
377
Figure 7-54 Replace the ultra-water
Figure 7-55 Place the ultra-water

Note: Be sure to replace the ultra-pure water of the cleaning bottle in the previous use has
poured out, and filled the new ultra-pure water.
9) Tap Continue to go to the seventh step, this step is to empty the ultra-pure water in
the substrate tubes; tap Empty, and take out the bottles of substrate L and substrate
R as prompted. Tap OK to access the Empty screen. Set Execution Times to the
378
10) Tap Continue to go to the eighth step, this step is to clean the substrate tubes with
ultra-pure water again. Tap Clean, and replace the ultra-pure water in the two clean
substrate bottles as prompted again. Place new ultra-pure water bottles at the
positions of substrate L and substrate R. Enter the Clean screen, and set Execution
Times to the default value is 32 times. The system automatically starts cleaning. Clean
the substrate channels L and R with ultra-pure water each 16 times. The screen
prompts "No bubbles detected in the substrate tubes". Exit the screen after completion;
11) Tap Continue to go to the ninth step, this step is to empty the ultra-pure water in the
substrate tubes again; tap Empty, and take out the bottles of substrate L and substrate
R as prompted. Tap OK to access the Empty screen. Set Execution Times to the
12) Clean substrate R with pure water (leave substrate L position empty)
Tap Continue to go to the tenth step, this step is to clean the substrate R tubes with ultra-pure
water. Tap Clean, and replace the ultra-pure water in the two clean substrate bottles as
prompted. Place new ultra-pure water bottles at the positions of substrate R and leave substrate
L position empty. Enter the Clean screen, and set Execution Times to the default value is 48
times. The system automatically starts cleaning. Clean the substrate channels R with ultra-pure
water 48 times. Exit the screen after completion;
Figure 7-56 leave substrate L position empty
379
13) Tap Continue to go to the eleventh step, this step is to clean the substrate tubes with
ultra-pure water again. Tap Clean, and replace the ultra-pure water in the two clean
substrate bottles as prompted again. Place new ultra-pure water bottles at the
positions of substrate L and substrate R. Enter the Clean screen, and set Execution
Times to the default value is 32 times. The system automatically starts cleaning. Clean
the substrate channels L and R with ultra-pure water each 16 times. The screen
prompts "No bubbles detected in the substrate tubes". Exit the screen after completion;
14) Tap Continue to go to the twelfth step, this step is to empty the ultra-pure water in the
substrate tubes. Tap Empty, and take out the substrate bottles containing ultra-pure
water of substrate L and substrate R. Tap OK and enter the Empty screen. set
Execution Times to the default value is 32 times. Tap Start to empty the ultra-pure
water in channels L and R each 16 times;
15) After the substrate cleaning is completed, the screen prompts to restore the tubing
installation. Because you need to prime the substrate later, you can temporarily leave
it. Tap Continue to complete the process;
1)
Prime substrate tubes

1) Prepare two bottles of well-balanced substrate with balance time as long as six
hours and use them before the expiration date;
2) Exit the Alignment screen, Select Reagents > Consumables Management >
Substrate L, and tap Load. The Load screen is displayed. Use the handheld bar
code reader to scan the bar code of the substrate bottle, identify the substrate
bottle (tear the aluminum foil seal at the bottom of the substrate bottle) and load
the bottle to the position of substrate L; if two bottles of substrate should be loaded,
load the bottle to the position of substrate R in the same way. After loading, loosen
the substrate cap, and prepare for the next step;
Figure7-57 Loading the Substrate
Note:
a) Before loading the substrate, tear the aluminum foil seal at the bottom of the
substrate bottle;
380
b) If the reader cannot scan the bar code, perform the “Add and Enter Key”
operation on the bar code manual to scan three bar codes and see if it can
be restored.
Figure7-58 Bar code manual
3) Select Utility Alignment Fluidic Alignment  4. Priming the substrate

tubes (Note: Do not enter 2. Cleaning the substrate tubes by mistake), tap
Continue, and treat the substrate tubes as prompted. Because the last step
"Cleaning the substrate tubes" does not restore the tubes, tap OK in this step;
4) In the second step, according to the substrate actually loaded by the client, you
can select "Substrate L", "Substrate R" or "Substrate L & Substrate R", prompting
to confirm the loading of the substrate, and click OK. The system automatically
enters the Priming screen and starts priming.
Figure 7-59 Tubes selection（s）
NOTE:
 If use 1 bottle of substrate to prime left and right side, select “Substrate L” or Substrate
R" , first prime right side and then prime left side, totally 200 times.
381
Prime substrate Prime substrate
Load substrate to Prime substrate L Load substrate to Prime substrate R

substrate L 100 times substrate R 100 times
 If customer only use Left side, just prime Left side and remind customer just use left
side.
 If load 2 bottles of substrate at the same time, select "Substrate L & Substrate R" ,
prime substrate L and substrate R each for 50 times, totally 100 times , and the tube
statuses should be "Normal".
Prime substrate
Load substrate to Prime substrate L&R

substrate L&R each 50 times
 The system exits the screen automatically when the operation is done. (If the priming
is interrupted midway, in order to avoid abnormality of the subsequent tests, you need
to restart the process to perform the complete priming process.);
5) Follow the instructions in the third step to restore the substrate tubes;
Figure7-60 Prompts for restoring substrate tubes
Note:
Carefully install the screws. Do not drop screws into the dispersion carousel. Remove the
protection cover for the IO port of the dispersion carousel at the last step.
Protect the substrate tube from bending. Protect the hose at the substrate joint and the
joint outlet from contamination.
Make sure the three hand-operated nuts are tightened.
Insertion depth of
substrate drain tube
must be over 2 mm
Confirm it is
tightened
Remove
Fix with at last
cable tie
Fasten the
screws. Do not
drop the screws
in the dispersion
carousel.
Figure7-61 Diagram of restoring substrate tubes
382
7.10.3 Floater Check

Alignment index: High position of the waste tank floater indicates full, and low position
indicates not full.
1) Click Alignment -> Fluidics Alignment -> 1. Waste Tank Floater Check, and enter the
process; click Continue to enter the screen. The floater state is displayed.
2) Change the position of the floater manually. Check if the floater position matches the status
in the following table.
Table 7-4 Fluidics Alignment - Waste Tank Floater Check
Physical Location of
Hydro Container Floater Name Software Display
Floater
High/low Full
Waste tank Waste tank floater sensor
Low position Not full
7.10.4 Vacuum Pressure Check

Alignment index: The pressure displayed on the screen is less than -30KPa and the curve is
steady. No alarm is given when the vacuum is released.
1) Enter Fluidics Alignment -> 5. Vacuum Pressure Check screen; then, click Continue
to enter the pressure drawing page;
Establish
Vacuum
-30
Pressure stabilized under -30 KPa
Figure 7-62 Vacuum Pressure Check Screen
383
2) Click Start. The screen starts to draw the pressure curve. Execute Establish Vacuum.
After the pressure becomes stable, the primary vacuum pressure displayed should be no
more than -30KPa. Then, execute Release Vacuum and exit the page.
Note: Observe the pressure curve continuously. The pressure curve should be kept straight
without gradual upward trend. Otherwise, confirm whether leakage exists in the vacuum tube.
7.10.5 Waste Drainage Tube Check

Alignment index:
1) Check the waste tube and waste drainage tube of the reagent pot are connected correctly
without leakage in relevant tubes.
2) The waste can be discharged smoothly.
3) The tube is smooth after the waste drainage tube is clamped into the infusion tube clamp.
1) Enter Fluidics Alignment -> 6. Waste Drainage Tube Check; view only alignment-related
descriptions on the screen in the case of alignment.
2) Click Check S in the lower right corner to test the drainage capability of the reagent
compartment. After the test, a test result dialog box is displayed. Click Continue in after
the test is completed.
Figure 7-63 Schematic Diagram of Waste Drainage Tube Check
1) Place a cuvette full of water in the Waste Drainage Position, and then click Waste
384
Drainage at the bottom right corner. A prompt box pops up: A cuvette full of water is
place in the Waste Drainage Position before waste drainage. Then, click OK to execute
waste drainage once, and confirm that the suction tube runs to the vacuum chamber, and
then to LP2 waste pump, that the tube is free from leakage, extrusion and bending, that
the waste pump runs smoothly, and that the hose connected to the waste discharge probe
is clamped into the infusion tube clamp. Then, click Exit and operate according to the
prompt "Please remove the cuvette at the waste drainage position".
Make sure a reaction

cuvette full of water
is placed at the waste
liquid draining
position
Figure 7-64 Schematic Diagram of Waste Drainage Probe Tube Check
Remove the cuvette and confirm that there is no residual liquid at its bottom (liquid beads on
the wall are normal).
2) Click Continue to exit the screen.
Waste pipe
clamped in the
The pipeline perfusion tube
cannot be folded clamp
385
Figure 7-65 Schematic Diagram of Waste Discharge Probe
7.10.6 Sample Probe Wash Tube Check

Alignment index:
1) Check if the probe wash tubes and components are properly connected without leakage
in relevant tubes.
2) The sample probe can eject liquid continuously, and the liquid in the wash tank can be
discharged smoothly.
3) The swab is connected to the tube correctly and inserted into place, and the inlet tube is
filled with no bubbles.
1) Before priming, check the wash buffer on the left of the instrument and the state of the two
sensors on the component. Lamp of the sensor is on before priming.
2) Enter Fluidics Alignment -> 7. Check sample probe wash tube; check that connectors
between the sample probe and the tube are tightened, and click Continue;
3) Step 2: Click Check at the lower right corner; enter the number and tube and select wash
buffer 1 or wash buffer 2; click Start to clean and prime inner and outer walls of the probe.
Clean and prime probe inner and outer walls of wash buffer 1 and wash buffer 2,
respectively. (Set the execution times to default); bottle cap tube of wash buffer 2 should
be kept empty when wash buffer 1 is primed (do not put it into the bucket), and vice versa.
During priming, observe the tube priming of wash buffer 1 and wash buffer 2, and wait for
the liquid to be continuously ejected from the sample probe. (Stop immediately and check
it if leakage occurs during execution or the liquid enters into the tube slowly).
386
When wash buffer 1 is selected, place the

bottle cap pipeline inlet of wash buffer 1 in
the water tank and keep the bottle cap
pipeline of wash buffer 2 empty; when it is
switched to wash buffer 2, place the bottle
cap pipeline inlet of wash buffer 2 in the
water tank, and keep the bottle cap pipeline
of wash buffer 1 empty. The two bottle cap
pipelines cannot be placed under the liquid
level of purified water tank at the same time.
Figure 7-66 Prime Sample Probe Wash Tubes Screen
Note:
 Set the priming times to default first. After completion, the probe inner and outer wall tubes
should be filled. If the tubes are not full or no liquid can be observed (the screen indicates
bubbles detected), it is necessary to confirm if the tubes are connected correctly.
 Priming should be performed for both wash buffer 1 and wash buffer 2; bottle cap tube of
wash buffer 2 should be kept empty when wash buffer 1 is primed, and vice versa.
Otherwise, it is not easy to find the incorrect connection of wash buffer 1 and wash buffer
2.
 When performing priming, run the sample probe first into the wash well to perform inner
wall priming. Then, life the probe to carry out outer wall and swab priming.
1) Confirm the two inlet tubes of wash buffer 1 and wash buffer 2 and the probe sampling
tube. The wash buffers should run to V15 and V16 from the inlets; two syringes, V17, probe,
swab, tubes and joints are free of leakage; confirm that the tubes of the two wash buffer
check assemblies are filled with liquid with no bubbles; after the liquid is primed, the sensor
indicator is off; the two sensors correspond one by one, 1 connecting wash buffer bucket
1 and 2 connecting the wash buffer bucket 2; the software screen indicates that tubes of
wash buffer 1 and wash buffer 2 are connected correctly, and no bubbles are detected.
387
The indicator
The indicator is
goes out after
on (which can be
liquid is primed observed at the
board back) in the
priming status
Figure 7-67 Wash Buffer Bubble Check
2) Observe the sample probe can eject fluid continuously into the wash well.
Observe that the probe Check if the pipe on the

sprays water to the rocker arm is filled with
wash well and is liquid and free of air
drained smoothly bubbles, and there is no
leakage at the joint
Figure 7-68 Schematic Diagram of Prime Sample Probe Inner Wall Wash Tubes
3) When cleaning and priming probe outer wall, observe the swab tube is filled with liquid,
and no liquid drips from the swab after the priming is completed.
The liquid inlet

(thin) pipe and
liquid outlet (thick)
pipe cannot be
connected reversely
The liquid
inlet pipe is Inserted in
filled with position
liquid and free
of air bubbles
Figure 7-69 Schematic Diagram of Prime Sample Probe Outer Wall Wash Tubes
388
4) Check and confirm that the waste tube connected to the swab runs to V18, and the wash
well to V18, and then from V18 to waste pump LP1 and finally to the liquid inlet and outlet,
with on leakage, and the liquid is smoothly discharged to the waste barrel.
Waste 1 tube
drains waste
Figure 7-70 Schematic Diagram of Waste 1 Tube
5) Complete check and stop priming.
7.10.7 Check Hydraulic Pressure on Sample Probe Aspirating
and Draining
Alignment index: The alignment software detects hydraulic pressure automatically, the screen
displays pass, and the three sections of pressure curve have no exception.
1) Preconditions: Prime Sample Probe Wash Tubes is completed;
2) Enter Fluidics Alignment -> 8. Check Hydraulic Pressure on Sample Probe
Aspirating and Draining screen. Preparations: connect wash buffer 1 of fluidics inlet to
ultra-pure water bucket and to waste bucket, and click Continue.
3) Step 2: Click Continue; measure hydraulic pressure on sample probe aspirating and
draining, and enter the pressure curve screen; observe the pressure curve, complete the
check and return pass.
389
Figure 7-71 Check Hydraulic Pressure on Sample Probe Aspirating and Draining
screen
Note: The system detects automatically, performs syringe suction and drainage, and
automatically draws three curves.
Observe that the three curves should be stable, and their forms should be consistent with the
reference curves. Otherwise, check whether the inner wall wash tube has leakage.
Figure 7-72 Check of Hydraulic Pressure Exception on Sample Probe Aspirating and
Draining
390
7.10.8 Dispersion Aspirate Tube Check

Alignment index:
1) Dispersion phase-1, phase-2, and phase-3 aspirating needles can perform aspiration,
without inverse connection; the aspiration tube is full of liquid, without leakage or overflow.
2) The waste is discharged smoothly and free from leakage.
3) The dispersion drainage tube has been restored and installed, and it is clamped into the
infusion tube clamp. The tube is smooth without excessive bending.
1) Enter Fluidics Alignment - 9. Check or Empty Dispersion Aspirate Tubes; prepare
containers filled with ultra-pure water, and click Continue;
2) Click Phase-1 Aspiration at the lower right corner. The screen indicates Immerse phase-
1 aspirating probe into ultra-pure water. Click OK after completion; the default
aspiration times is 1 (increase as required); click Start to perform dispersion aspiration;
observe whether phase-1 dispersion aspirating tube is full of wash buffer in the process of
execution without leakage. If phase-1 aspiration is not performed, check whether phase-1
tube is incorrectly connected to phase-2 and phase-3 tubes. If so, correct the connection.
Then, click Exit and then Continue; observe whether the liquid is discharged from the
waste tube.
391
Aspirating probe
The sample installation position
probe aspirates Aspirating probe of phase 1
liquid. Observe installation position
the process that of phase 3
the pipe changes
from the empty
status to the
liquid aspirating
status, and the
liquid column
moves until the
pipe is filled.
Figure 7-73 Schematic Diagram of Check Dispersion Dispensing Tube
Click Continue. The screen will instruct you to wipe phase-1 aspirating probe with dust cloth
and put it back in place.
Figure 7-74 Restoring Installation Prompt of Dispersion Aspirating Probes
1) Perform Phase-2 Aspiration with the same method; perform multiple dispersion
aspirations, and observe whether phase-2 dispersion aspirating tube is full of wash buffer
with no leakage, and liquid is discharged from the waste tube.
2) Step 4: Perform Phase-3 Aspiration with the same method; perform multiple dispersion
aspirations, and observe whether phase-3 dispersion aspirating tube is full of wash buffer
with no leakage, and liquid is discharged from the waste tube.
392
3) Click Continue to exit the screen after completion; clean the aspirating probe with dust-
free cloth and put it back; the tubes should be connected correctly: phase-1 T38 connects
to V06, phase-2 T42 connects to V07, and phase-3 T46 connects to V08. The tubes are
mounted back in place; the tubes are smooth without bending, and are clamped into the
infusion tube clamp.
The dispersion
aspirating tube
has been
clamped into the
perfusion tube Aspirating probe
clamp installation
position of phase 1
Aspirating probe
installation position
of phase 3
Figure 7-75 Installation Diagram of Three Phases of Aspirating Probes Tubes
Note: Phase-1, phase-2 and phase-3 aspirating tubes are confirmed one by one and connected
correctly.
7.10.9 Check dispersion wash tube

Alignment index:
1) Check if the dispersion wash tubes and components are properly connected and inserted
in place without leakage in relevant tubes.
2) The three phases of wash tubes are filled with liquid with no bubbles.
3) The liquid inlet tube is thin below the swab, and the liquid outlet tube is large above the
swab. The tube is smooth without bending, and is clamped into the infusion tube clamp.
1) Preconditions: Prime Dispersion Dispensing Tubes is completed and Check Drainage
Tube is completed.
2) Enter Fluidics Alignment -> 10. Check dispersion wash tube.
3) Click Check at the lower right corner; connect the ultra-pure water tank to the fluidic ports
of wash buffers 1 and 2, and connect the waste tank following the prompts. Enter the
priming screen; first select wash buffer 1 and input priming times (2 times by default);
confirm the bottle cap tube of wash buffer 1 is put below the ultra-pure water level, and
remove the bottle cap tube of wash buffer 2; click Start to perform phase-1 cleaning for
several times; observe whether the tubes from V14 to dispersion syringe and from V05 to
swab are full of liquid and waste is removed from the swab without leakage. If phase-1
wash tube is not filled with liquid, confirm whether it is connected to phase-2 or phase-3
tubes incorrectly.
393
 After wash buffer 1 priming is completed, perform wash buffer 2 priming with the same
method, remove the bottle cap tube of wash buffer 1 and put the bottle cap tube of wash
buffer 2 below the ultra-pure water level, aiming to fill T16 tube; confirm that the tube is
free of extrusion, bending and leakage.
Figure 7-76 Dispersion Dispensing Tubes - Wash Buffer 2
 Times of priming: The tube can be filled by default under normal circumstances. If no liquid
is observed, check if the tube is connected correctly.
 Dispersion wash tube swab inlet pipe (below, thin) and outlet pipe (above, large) cannot
be connected reversely.
394
Pipe clamped in
the perfusion
tube clamp
Phase-2 drain tubes
Pipe clamped Phase-1 drain tubes

in the perfusion
tube clamp
Phase-3 drain tubes
The swab inlet tube

(thin) and outlet tube
(thick) of wash tube in
the first phase cannot
be inserted inversely
The phase-1 swab

dispensing tube of wash
tube is filled with liquid
and free of air bubbles
and does not leak, and
the hose is inserted in
position and cannot be
bent or folded
Figure 7-77 Schematic Diagram 1 of Prime Dispersion Wash Tubes
Exit the screen after completion, and select Continue.

4) Step 3: Click Cleaning/Emptying at the lower right corner; perform phase-2 wash tube
priming with the method in step 2; observe whether the tube from V19 to swab is filled with
liquid, and waste is discharged from the swab, with no leakage; confirm that it is connected
correctly with phase-3 (perform wash buffer 1 priming only).
395
The phase-2 swab inlet

tube (thin) and outlet
tube (thick) of wash
tube cannot be inserted
inversely
The phase-2 swab

and does not leak, and
the hose is inserted in
position and cannot be
bent or folded
5) Step 4: Click Emptying/Priming at the lower right corner; perform phase-3 wash tube
priming with the method in step 2; observe whether the tube from V20 to swab is filled with
liquid, and waste is discharged from the swab, with no leakage (perform wash buffer 1
priming only).
Pipe clamped in
the perfusion
tube clamp
The phase-3 swab inlet

tube (thin) and outlet
tube (thick) of wash
tube cannot be inserted
inversely
The phase-2 swab

and does not leak, the
hose is inserted in
position, and the tube
cannot be bent or folded
396
6) Select Continue to finish the alignment, and exit the screen.

NOTE
 Click Cleaning/Emptying from phase 1 to phase 3 in turn to complete each phase priming.
If you click Continue and skip a phase priming by mistake, click Cancel to exit the process
to start again.
 Do not miss Wash Buffer 2 priming.
 Check that phase-1 and phase-3 wash tubes are clamped into the infusion tube clamp.
7.10.10 Check dispersion dispensing tube

Alignment index:
1) Check that tubes from the external wash buffer bucket to dispersion dispensing tube and
waste drainage wash tube are connected correctly. The three dispensing tube are
connected properly; all tubes have no leakage, no bending, and are clamped into the
infusion tube clamp.
2) The three phases of dispensing probe tubes are filled with liquid with no bubbles.
3) The waste drainage wash tube is filled with liquid with no bubbles.
Enter Fluidics Alignment -> 11. Check dispersion dispensing tube; preparations: place
clean cuvettes at three positions in the lower right corner of the left tray, as shown in the figure
below; load tray 1 in place, and click Continue.
397
Figure 7-80 Schematic Diagram of Prime Dispersion Dispensing Tubes - Place
Cuvettes
4) Step 2: Perform phase-1 dispensing tube priming; click Check at the lower right corner.
The screen prompts When priming, please connect wash buffer 1 and wash buffer 2 at
fluidics inlet to the ultra-pure water buckets, and connect the waste bucket; click OK to
enter the priming screen; input the number of priming, and select Wash buffer 1 (only wash
buffer 1 is used in this step because the wash buffer 2 barrel has been filled in the last
step) to prime wash buffer 1 for several times (the number of priming is default); observe
the priming of wash buffer 1 and tubes filled with liquid (stop immediately and check it if
leakage exists or liquid enters into the tube slowly).
Note:
 For wash buffer 1 inlet tube and dispersion dispensing tube, confirm that the wash buffer
inlet runs to V14, V01, and then to syringe when intaking; it runs from the syringe to V01
and V02 (phase-1 tube T24 connects to V02, phase-2 tube T27 connects to V03, and
phase-3 tube T31 connects to V04), and then to dispensing probe. The tube is filled with
liquid, and tubes and connectors are free of leakage.
 Take the default number of priming. It is necessary to confirm whether the tubes are
connected properly if the tube is still not filled or no liquid is found after completion.
 In order to avoid connection error of dispensing tubes, the 3 phases of dispensing tubes
will aspirate fluid in turn in the process of dispersion and priming. After priming is completed,
observe whether the liquid primed into the cuvette by the aspirating probe tube is aspirated.
Remove the cuvette after completion; the liquid should be emptied.
398
Phase 2
Pipe clamped
in the
Phase 3 perfusion
tube clamp
Phase 1
Preheating
Figure 7-81 Schematic Diagram of Prime Dispersion Dispensing Tubes Check
1) Step 3: Perform phase-2 dispensing tube priming with the same method in step 2; prime
wash buffer 1 (the number of priming is default), and observe wash buffer 1 priming; the
tube is filled with liquid gradually, and tubes and connectors are free of leakage (stop
immediately and check it if leakage exists or liquid enters into the tube slowly).
2) Step 4: Perform phase-3 dispensing tube priming as in step 2; prime wash buffer 1 (the
number of priming is default), and observe wash buffer 1 priming (phase-3 dispensing tube
is preheated by the incubation module, and the tube is longer. The number of priming is
greater than that of the first two phases); wait for the fluid to be ejected continuously from
the dispensing probe (stop immediately and check it if leakage exists or liquid enters into
the tube slowly). The tube is filled with liquid gradually, and tubes and connectors are free
of leakage. Finally, click OK to exit the screen.
3) Click Continue to enter Waste drain tube checking, and execute automatically once;
grippe the cuvette to the waste drainage position; perform waste tubing wash priming, and
observe whether the tubes between, in front of and behind V23 and V09 are filled with
liquid, with no leakage. After completion, discard the cuvette and exit the process.
399
Figure 7-82 Screen of Prime and Check Waste Drainage Probe Wash Tubes
Note:
 Observe the three phases of dispensing tubes, without bending and breaking;
The tubes cannot be bent

or folded at the bend
 If the priming fails, confirm whether the dispersion carousel overflows. If overflow exists, it
is necessary to remove the aspirating and dispensing mechanism to check and remove
the overflow from the dispersion pot, and start priming after the trouble is eliminated.
 Priming must be executed in accordance with the sequence of the process. If you click
Continue and skip a phase priming by mistake, click Cancel to exit the process to start
again.
 Do not miss the inspection of the waste drainage wash tube.
7.10.11 Prime wash buffer tubes

1) Prepare one barrel of clean wash buffer and connect it to the hydro inlet through the bottle
cap assembly.
400
2) Tubes of waste 1 and waste 2 are connected to the waste drainage tubes or waste buckets.
The waste buckets are connected to sensors, and the waste floater sensor is placed
properly (do not pollute the waste floater when the waste bucket is not used; note that
correct BM50 waste floater sensor 115-050123-00 should be used because it is different
from other products).
3) Tube of wash buffer 1 or wash buffer 2 is connected to the corresponding wash buffer
bucket (the wash buffer bucket is connected based on the actual use; a bucket of wash
buffer is enough usually).
Waste sensor
Waste 1
Wash buffer 1
1 Wash
Buffer 1
Wash buffer 2 Waste 2
2 Wash
buffer2
Figure 7-83 Wash buffer
Note: Wash buffer 1 of fluidics inlet is connected to the wash buffer bottle cap component
marked with "1”, and wash buffer 2 is connected to the wash buffer bottle cap component
marked with "2". If wash buffer 1 and wash buffer 2 are loaded, their buckets cannot be
exchanged.
1) Load wash buffer: Enter Reagent -> Consumables management; load wash buffer 1 or
wash buffer 2 as required; input the inventory and click Load.
401
Note: The buckets connected to wash buffer 1 bottle cap component and wash buffer 2 bottle
cap component cannot be exchanged. If part of the wash buffer is left after testing, mark the
wash buffer inventory XX% on the screen and the bucket in order to reduce waste. When
loading the wash buffer bucket again in the future, you can fill in the inventory XX% directly. Try
not to use the wash buffer with other models. Otherwise, the inventory may be inaccurate,
resulting in intaking failure.
2) Enter Alignment - Fluidics Alignment, perform the priming process, and confirm that all
tubes are normal and free of bubbles after the wash buffer is replaced.
Prime the wash buffer tube to be

used (wash buffer 1 or 2) according
12. Prime wash buffer tubes to the prompt on the interface, and
select the default times.
3) Enter the Wash buffer tube priming process, click Continue, and place a cuvette at the
lower right corner of the left tray following prompts.
402
Step 2: Select a tube loaded with wash buffer, and then click Continue.
When entering the priming screen, the system automatically primes the sampling probe tube,
dispersion wash tube and dispensing tube, and the state of corresponding tubes is returned on
the screen.
403
After execution, alignment procedure is completed; the left tray can be loaded again, and a
cuvette is added.
Note: After the above priming is completed, you can enter Reagent -> Consumables
management, and perform Recover wash buffer if the tube is abnormal and has bubbles
during follow-up test process.
Perform System recovery, wait for completion of system recovery, and switch the state to
Standby. (If the system is in standby, skip this step);
404
7.11 Mechanical Position Alignment

Note: This step can be performed after the sample probe liquid tube is primed.
7.11.1 VLP of probe to mixing position 1

Preconditions:
1) The vertical home position and horizontal mixing position 1 of the probe are aligned.
2) The wash buffer tube is primed, and the wash buffer 1 and wash buffer 2 on the
fluidics inlet are connected to the wash buffer tank and the waste tank.
Alignment index:
Place alignment fixture 898-000736-00 at mixing position 1; the probe performs 6 bottom
detection actions at this position; if the height difference of 6 detections is less than or equal to
4 microsteps, the height of the 6 detections is averaged and configured to the instrument.
Otherwise, the calibration fails.
Click 17 VLP of probe to mixing position 1; place alignment fixture 898-000736-00 at mixing
position 1 following the software prompts and steps; make the fixture bottom notch align the
mixing base notch; make sure the fixture is dry, and does not touch the probe. The probe will
automatically run down slowly, and stops automatically after contacting and detecting the fixture
bottom of mixing position 1. Then, it rises automatically to look for the position zero, repeats
the action for 6 times, and configures the parameters after calculating the mean.
405
The bottom gap of

fixture is aligned with
the mixing base gap.
Figure 7-84 Schematic Diagram of VLP of Probe to Mixing Position 1

Note: For the alignment of VLP of probe to mixing position, whether the bottom is reached is
determined based on the change of capacitance AD produced after the probe tip contacts the
fixture bottom, so it is necessary to pay attention to the following matters:
1) Please check whether the bottom of the fixture is clean before alignment. Otherwise,
please wipe it with a cotton swab with alcohol before alignment.
2) VLP alignment cannot be performed before the horizontal position of the probe mixing
position is aligned.
7.11.2 VLP of probe to mixing position 2

Preconditions:
1) The vertical home position and horizontal mixing position 1 of the probe are aligned.
2) The wash buffer tube is primed, and the wash buffer 1 and wash buffer 2 on the
fluidics inlet are connected to the wash buffer tank and the waste tank.
Alignment index:
Place alignment fixture 898-000736-00 at mixing position 2; the probe performs 6 bottom
detection actions at this position; if the height difference of 6 detections is less than or equal to
4 microsteps, the height of the 6 detections is averaged and configured to the instrument.
Otherwise, the calibration fails.
Click 18 VLP of probe to mixing position 2; place alignment fixture 898-000736-00 at mixing
position 2 following the software prompts and steps; make the fixture bottom notch align the
mixing base notch; make sure the fixture is dry, and does not touch the probe. The probe will
automatically run down slowly, and stops automatically after contacting and detecting the fixture
bottom of mixing position 2. Then, it rises automatically to look for the position zero, repeats
406
the action for 6 times, and configures the parameters after calculating the mean.
Note: For the alignment of VLP of probe to mixing position, whether the bottom is reached is
determined based on the change of capacitance AD produced after the probe tip contacts the
fixture bottom, so it is necessary to pay attention to the following matters:
1) Please check whether the bottom of the fixture is clean before alignment. Otherwise,
please wipe it with a cotton swab with alcohol before alignment.
2) VLP alignment cannot be performed before the horizontal position of the probe mixing
position is aligned.
7.12 Disassembly and Assembly of Cover, Shell and

Components
7.12.1 Disassembly and Assembly of Transparent Shielding
Cover
Steps:
1) Switch off the power supply of whole unit.
2) Open the front left door, pull out two drawers, and unscrew the hex socket fastening screws
M3X12 (with spring washer) using a hexagon wrench.
3) Press the middle part at the bottom of the transparent shielding cover, lift it up and remove
the cover.
4) Reinstall the transparent shielding cover following the steps mentioned above in a reverse
order.
Figure 7-85 Transparent Shielding Cover
407
7.12.2 Disassembly and Assembly of Front Vertical panel
Assembly
Steps:
1) According to 7.12.1 Disassembly and Assembly of Transparent Shielding Coverremove
the transparent shielding cover;
2) Remove two rubber covers on the machine and unscrew two M4X20 fastening screws.
3) Press both sides of the front vertical panel, loosen slowly when hearing the sound of
"crack", and the front vertical panel assembly will automatically pop out (note: hold the
front side of the front vertical panel assembly gently to avoid damage).
4) Unplug the cables in the front vertical panel and remove the front vertical panel assembly.
5) To reinstall the front vertical panel assembly, follow the steps mentioned above in a reverse
order.
Front
facade
4X20 screw
Figure 7-86 Disassembly and Assembly of Front Vertical panel Assembly
408
7.12.3 Disassembly and Assembly of Reagent Aspirating
Plate
Steps:
1) Move the sample probe to the mixing position.
2) Unscrew two M3X8 fastening screws with a cross screwdriver;
3) Remove the reagent aspirating plate;
4) To reinstall the reagent aspirating plate, follow the steps mentioned above in a reverse
order.
Two small cross recessed pan head screw

assemblies M3X8
Figure 7-87 Disassembly and Assembly of Aspirating Plate
7.13 Other Checks

7.13.1 Mechanical Reset of the Whole Unit
Alignment index:
Perform Mechanical Reset of the whole unit without any abnormal alarm.
Enter Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Other; enter 4. Mechanical Reset of the whole
unit, and click Continue to start the mechanical reset of the whole unit; observe the sample
probe assembly, gripper assembly, reagents carousel assembly, sample carousel assembly,
dispersion carousel assembly, waste drainage assembly, mixing assembly, dispersion syringe
assembly, sample syringe and wash syringe are reset with no abnormal warnings.
7.13.2 Indicator Check

Alignment index: The cables are correctly connected and the indicators work normally.
1) The right side panel and waste tank welds have been installed and the indicator cables
409
have been connected.
2) Enter Alignment - > Other, click 7. Inspection of Indicators and Optical Couplers to
enter the alignment process screen, and click Continue to pop up the check screen.
Figure 7-88 Indicator Check Screen
410
Indicator of disk Left-Turn key
Indicator of disk Right-Turn key
Indicator of the Substrate L Key Indicator of the Substrate R Key

Start indicator (press
Indicator of the Waste

Container Key
Figure 7-89 Schematic Diagram of Indicator of the Start Key
1) Instructions to lamps on the transparent shielding cover and panel are as shown in the
figure above. Select any indicator and click on-off. The indicator should work accordingly
with same light color and light intensity, without obvious differences and defects. Note:
Check the indicators of the same group and same assembly or close to each other to make
sure their cables are correctly connected.
2) Note: Exit the screen after check, and confirm that all indicators are off.
7.13.3 Optical couplers Check

Alignment index: Optical couplers for waste containers, left and right anti-collision optical
couplers of the sample carousel work normally.
Enter Alignment - > Other, click 7. Inspection of Indicators and Optical Couplers to enter
the alignment process screen, and click Continue to pop up the check screen; select Optical
Couplers Check.
411
Figure 7-90 Optical Couplers Check Screen
3) Simulate blocking the left and right anti-collision optical couplers of the sample carousel.
The check results should be correct in block and unblock statuses.
Left and right crashproof optical

couplers of sample carousel
Figure 7-91 Schematic Diagram of Anti-Collision Optical Coupler of Sample Carousel
4) It is unblock when the waste tank is removed; otherwise, it is block. Exit the screen after
the check.
7.13.4 Whole Unit Discarding Cuvette

Alignment index:
Discarding all cuvettes is normal. All cuvettes are discarded into the waste container.
412
1) Place one empty cuvette at the cuvette positions at the four corners of the incubation
module, photometer position, waste drainage position, dispersion carousel operation
position and three mixing positions each.
2) Enter Alignment - > Other, click 5. Whole Unit Discarding Cuvette, enter the process.
The software automatically discards the cuvettes at the incubating position, photometer
position, waste drainage position, mixing positions and dispersion operation position. All
the cuvettes are cleared and discarded into the waste container. During this process, there
should be no empty gripping, bumping or dropping of cuvettes.
7.13.5 Linked Cuvette Gripping

Alignment index: Perform All cuvettes function. There should be no alarm, abnormal noise or
jamming. Check that FPC does not interfere with any parts during gripping.
Note: This alignment should be performed after Whole Unit Discarding Cuvette. There is no
discarding during this process.
1) Place one tray full of cuvettes respectively on trays 1 and 2, and load them in place.
2) Enter Alignment -> Other, click 6. Linked Cuvette Gripping and then click Continue
following the screen prompts until Linked Cuvette Gripping dialog box pops up; set the
number of testing to 1 by default and the type to Whole Cuvette Positions; select tray 1
and tray 2. The gripper starts to grip, transport and place the cuvettes on the tray. During
this process, there should be no alarm. Otherwise, check the analyzer assembly and
alignment state for causes.
Figure 7-92 Linked Cuvette Gripping Screen
3) When gripping at the dispersion IO outlet, observe the gripper should not interfere with the
dispersion hose.
413
4) In the process of gripping, observe that FPC should not be rubbed or interfered with other
components.
Note:
 The cuvettes used in linked cuvette gripping test can be reused. It is not recommended to
use these cuvettes for other performance tests.
7.13.6 Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Check

Alignment index:
Reagent refrigeration temperature should be within 2.0~8.0℃;
1) Confirm that the top cover of the reagent carousel has been installed and the reagent
refrigerant has been enabled.
2) Enter Alignment > Other; enter 3. Graph trends of reagent carousel temperature;
refrigeration temperature should fall within the range of 2.0°C~8.0°C after the temperature
gets stable (90 minutes later).
Refrigeration
Temperature
Figure 7-93 Rgt Refrig Temp Curve Screen
414
8 Installation Guide
8.1 Before Installation

8.1.1 Environment
 Altitude: -400-3,000m.
 The system is for indoor use only.
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be level (with gradient less than 1/200).
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be able to support at least 150Kg weight.
 The installation site should be well ventilated.
 The installation site should be free of dust.
 The installation side should not be in direct sun.
 The installation site should be kept away from a heat or draft source.
 The installation site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be free of vibration.
 Operating temperature: 15°C-30°C with fluctuation <2°C/H. Provide air conditioning
equipment if the room temperature does not meet the requirements.
 Relative humidity: 35%-85% RH, without condensation.
8.1.2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Unpacking

 Dimensions of whole unit after packing: 1130 mm (length) × 910 mm (depth) × 760 mm
(height)
 Unpacking space requirement: After putting down the instrument with the packing box, the
distance from the wall is ≥ 0.5 m for unpacking operation.
Space and Accessibility Requirements for Installation

 Dimensions of whole unit before packing: 860mm (length) × 740 mm (depth) × 560mm
(height).
415
5417m IVD Global Technical Support Dept
5279m
m
m Circuit breaker
Power line
≥700mm
Communication
Waste tube line
Waste tank
2782m
2474m
operation
m
LIS host
UPS
PC for
≥500mm
m
CL-900i ≥350mm
Figure 8-1 Space and accessibility requirements for installation of the CL-900i
Power and Noise

 Power supply: 100V-240V~ 50Hz, 100V/240V~ 60Hz. Voltage fluctuation: +/-10%. Line
 Frequency: +/-1Hz. Three-wire power cord with good grounding performance.
WARNING
Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Incorrect grounding

may lead to electric shock or equipment damage.
Check if the power socket outputs voltage meeting the specified
requirements and has a proper fuse installed.
 Rated input power of analyzer: 500VA. The instrument should be connected to a power
socket with load no less than 2.5A.
 The ground voltage should be <5V, be sure the ground voltage is only for the instrument.
How to make sure the ground voltage:
The voltage of between neutral wire and live wire similar the voltage of between neutral wire
and ground wire, also less than the standard voltage.
 If the user is going to use a UPS to power the instrument, make sure that the UPS can
provide power supply greater than or equal to 1500VA (analyzer + computer + printer).
 The installation site should be kept away from big noise and power supply interference.
 Keep the system away from brush-type motors and electrical contact devices that are
frequently switched on and off.
 Do not use such devices as mobile phones and radio transmitters near the system.
Drainage Check (if draining water through a sewer)

 The chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzer can directly discharge the waste liquid to
416
the sewer. The length of the waste tube is less than 5 m and greater than 1 m.
 The waste outlet should be no less than 8mm wide.
 The waste outlet should be lower than sewer for at least 0.5m.
BIOHAZARD
Recommended PC Configuration
Item Description
CPU 3.1GHz
Random access memory At least 4GB
(RAM)
Network adapter The computer is connected to the analyzer through a network adapter.
If you are going to connect the computer with the LIS or Internet, you
should prepare another network adapter (Intel gigabit network adapter)
Hard disk defragment At least 500GB, with SATA interface.
Install the operating system in the C drive and the operating software of
the instrument in the D drive.
Make sure that the C drive is over 100G, E drive over 50G, and the
remaining space for D drive, and the disk file system is of NTFS format.
Deselect the two options at the bottom of the disk properties window:
“Compress drive to save disk space” and “Allow Indexing Service to
index this disk for fast file searching”.
Operating system The operating system installed on the computer must be an activated
Microsoft Win10 Professional 1903 (OS Build:18362.175).
Application software Except for the operating system, other application software must not be
installed or reserved on the computer. If an anti-virus application has
been installed, then remove the automatic scheduled scanning and add
the operating software and BSLOG to the trust list.
Screen saver and system Turn off the screen saver and BS Special Power Policy power scheme,
standby and then disable the hibernation option.
Screen display properties 17” touchscreen monitor or above, 16:9 or 4:3 with resolution of
1280×1024.
Automatic synchronization Disable the Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server
with Internet time server option.
Automatic updates Turn off the automatic updates.
Auto startup setup If you are going to use the auto startup function, perform necessary
settings for BIOS and network adapters while referring to their operation
manuals.
417
8.1.3 Configuration Check
Table 8-1 Standard Configuration List
Name Quantity
CL-900i/CL-920i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer 1
Accessory kit 1
Computer (Self-prepare) 1
Display monitor (Self-prepare) 1
Waste tank 1
Table 8-2 Optional Modules
Name Quantity
Printer 1
8.2 Instrument Installation

8.2.1 Tools
Hexagon wrenches (M3~M6), 13# box spanner, tape measure, 200mm spanner, cross
screwdriver, flathead screwdriver and snap-off knife.
Figure 8-2 Tools
418
8.2.2 Installation Procedure
Unpacking
Check against packing list: Check the instrument configuration against the packing list before
unpacking according to section 1.3 System Configuration.
Analyzer SN
and packing list
Figure 8-3 Serial No. and packing list

1) Unloading: Unload the instrument from the truck. It is recommended to use a forklift.
Note: There is a tilt warning label on the main unit package, which can change in color for tilting.
When the center of the label turns red, it means the package has been seriously tilted and
instrument damage may be caused. Contact the logistics company immediately to prevent
unexpected results.
419
If it turns red here, a

serious tilt occurs during
transportation!
Figure 8-4 Tilt warning label in normal conditions
2) Transfer: Use a forklift to transport the instrument to a location suitable for unpacking.
Note: Keep the proper distance between the instrument and the wall to facilitate the removal
of the package.
Figure 8-5 Transferring Instrument to a Location Suitable for Unpacking
3) Unpacking analyzer: Cut the packing ropes with scissors, remove the upper cover of
the main box, remove the protective plates on both sides, and remove the
boarding. Deliver the removed packaging materials to the customer for safekeeping.
420
NOTE
After unpacking, remind the user to keep the packaging materials for 3
months for use in returning or replacing the instrument.
Figure 8-6 Outer Package Removed
4) Remove the instrument protective film and accessory foam.
CAUTION
After remove the accessory foam, remind the user to keep the accessory
foam for 3 months for use in returning or replacing the instrument.
Figure 8-7 Accessory foam removed
5) Carry the analyzer to the desk:

a) Confirm that the carrying handles at the four ends of the instrument have been
tightened;
b) Lift the instrument and move it to the test bench by 4 persons;
421
CAUTION
Because the analyzer is heavy, it is recommended to carry it 4 people

together and walk with caution.
Be careful of bruises! Be careful not to hit other fragile items! Be careful
not to scratch the instrument!
Figure 8-8 Carry the analyzer to the desk
c) After the instrument is placed on the test bench, adjust the anchor of the instrument
to make the machine evenly bear the force;
Figure 8-9 Adjusting the anchor of the Instrument
6) Removing Clear protective accessories :

a) Unscrew the carrying handles of the instrument and hand them to the customer
for safekeeping for subsequent transfer;
b) Remove all the fixing tapes on the surface of the instrument;
c) Open the front door, and remove the protective foam of the front door;
422
Remove the protective

foam of the front door
Figure 8-10 Remove the protective foam of the front door
d) Remove the screws of the transparent cover to open it;
2.Pull this place to remove

the transparent cover.
1.Open the front left door. Remove the

hexagon screw which is on the bottom
of the beam. Fix the screw after
maintenance.
Figure 8-11 Remove the screws of the transparent cover
423
Figure 8-12 Remove the transparent cover
7) Remove all fixing plates as follow :

a) Remove the fixing plate for fixing gripper Y axis. First, remove the screw from
the position below;
Figure 8-13 Remove the screw from the position below
424
Remove the fixing plate.
Push foreward the gripper X

axis movement part and
remove another screw. Then
remove the fixing plate.
Figure 8-14 Remove the fixing plate
b) Remove the fixing plate for the drawer assembly
Figure 8-15 Remove the fixing plate for the drawer assembly
c) Remove the fixing plate for fixing gripper X axis
Remove the screw witch is on

the rightside of the griping
425
Push foreward the

gripper X axis movement
part and remove another
screw. Then remove the
fixing plate.
Figure 8-16Remove the fixing plate for fixing gripper X axis
d) Remove the fixing plate for fixing gripper Z axis
1.Loose this screw, no need to

remove it. Re-tighten it after remove 2.Remove another screw
the fixing plate. which is on the leftside of the
gripper
Figure 8-17 Remove the fixing plate for fixing gripper Z axis
e) Unplug the rubber covers on both sides, remove the hex socket screws on
both sides, and press the top two sides of the front vertical plate. When
removing the pop-up, take care not to pull the wiring on both sides.
Figure 1.1 The rubber covers
426
Figure 8-18 Removing the Front Vertical Plate
f) Remove the fixing plate of the Probe drive assembly
Figure 8-19 Remove the fixing plate for the probe drive assembly
427
g) Remove the fixing plate for waste drainage
Figure 8-20 Remove the fixing plate for waste drainage
h) Remove the sealing tapes around the incubation block, dispersion, mixing
position, wash well, and aspirate plate of the reagent chamber in turn, and
use.
Figure 8-21 Sealing Tapes around the Incubation Block, Dispersion, Mixing Position,
and Wash Well
Figure 8-22 Sealing Tapes around the Aspirate Plate of the Reagent Chamber
428
i) There are 7 fixing plates, make sure all fixing plates are removed
Figure 8-23 All the fixing plates
Note: It is recommended to give the above fixed parts and handle to the customer for temporary
storage, so as to facilitate transfer and other business use for future.
Fluidic Connection
Connecting Waste Tubes

The instrument has two waste drainage outlets: waste outlet 1 and waste outlet 2. According to
the actual situation of the customer, you can choose to use the waste tank, or directly discharge
the waste.
1. Use the waste tank
(1) Take out the waste tank cover assembly and the waste sensor assembly, and connect
one end of the two waste tubes to “waste outlet 1” and “waste outlet 2” of the instrument, and
connect the waste sensor at the same time.
429
Figure 8-24 Waste Tube and Waste Sensor Connection
(2) Connect the other end of the waste tubes to the waste tank cover and install the waste
sensor.
Figure 8-25 Waste tank connection
(3) Place the waste tank and complete the connection of the waste tank.
NOTE: Do not connect the tubes of waste outlet 1 and waste outlet 2, which will cause waste
to be flowed backward!
2. Directly discharge the waste
If the waste can be discharged through sewer, follow the steps below:
430
CL-900i Chemiluminescence
Immunoassay Analyzer
Waste
drain
Figure 8-26 Waste discharge
NOTE: Do not connect the tubes of waste outlet 1 and waste outlet 2, which will cause waste
to be flowed backward!
Requirements for connecting waste tubes:
1) Insert the waste tube into the sewer, and make sure that the tube is about 1m~5m long.
2) Make sure that the waste outlet is no less than 50cm high.
3) Cover the waste outlet to eliminate noise and prevent bubbles overflow.
4) When installing the tubes, prevent them from being bent, twisted, or pressed, and keep
them away from any sharp-edged objects or others that may scratch the tubes.
5) Ensure that all electric connectors are away from and higher than hydropneumatic system
parts.
6) Ensure that all electric connectors are higher than and away from fluidic parts and prevent
fluidic connectors from facing electric components.
BIOHAZARD
Connect Wash buffer tank

1) Take out the wash buffer tank assembly.
2) Connect the tubes of the wash buffer tank assembly to the wash buffer inlets of the
instrument;
Note: The tube with mark 1 is connected to wash buffer tank 1; the tube with mark 2 is
connected to wash buffer tank 2. Do not mistake them!
431
Figure 8-27 Wash Buffer Tube Connection
3) Take two wash buffer tanks. Remove the cover of the wash buffer tank and place the
wash buffer tank assembly into the tank and tighten the cover.
Figure 8-28 Placing the Wash Buffer Tank Cover Assembly into the Tank and Tighten
the Cover
4) Place the wash buffer tank and complete the connection of the wash buffer tank.
432
Final Connection Effects
Figure 8-29 Final connection effects
The layout of the waste tank and the wash buffer tank can be adjusted slightly according to the
actual situation of the customer.
Connect the computer.

Connect the PC with analyzer
The network cable is used to connect the analyzing unit. The IP of the network adapter on the
PC should be set as 192.168.23.3.
Software Installation
Complete the software installation according to the SetupGuide in software package.
8.3 Power on and alignment

8.3.1 Preparation for Powering On
1) Load solid waste container.
433
Solid waste
container
Figure8-30 Load solid waste container
1) Be sure had installed the front vertical plate.

2) Power on the instrument
8.4 Initial Startup

1) Refer to the "SetupGuide" in the software installation package to complete the
upgrade of the control software, and restart the computer and instrument after
completing the upgrade.
2) Start up the computer. The CL-900i Operating Software is run automatically. See the
figure below.
Figure8-31 Start up CL-900i
3) Enter the username “ServiceUser” and password “#BS8A#SEU” in the login window
434
Figure8-32 Login window of CL-900i
8.5 Fluidic Prime

1. Load the Detergent C
1) Select Reagent > Consumable Management;
Figure8-33 Consumable management screen
2) Select Detergent C, tap Load, input the corresponding information and margin of
Detergent C, and load the Detergent C;
435
Figure8-34 Load the Detergent C
2. Load and prime the wash buffer

1) In the Consumables Management screen, select Wash Buffer 1 and Wash Buffer
2, respectively, and tap Load to load the wash buffer;
Figure8-35 Load the wash buffer
436
2) Select Utility > Maintenance > Alignment > Fluidic Alignment; select 12. Priming
Wash Buffer Tubes, and prime the wash buffer according to the prompt information;
Figure 8-36 Prime wash buffer tubes
8.6 Original Parameter Backup

Select Utility > Maintenance > Alignment > others > Common Function，click Backup and
Restore of Parameters, enters the screen for the parameter，
437
Select backup, save the parameters. The parameter is located in the file:
D:\Mindray\CL900i\OperationSoft\AlignmentTool\Parameterlist. Find the parameter and
name it with “date+ original parameter”.
NOTE: When completed alignment, must to backup the parameter again.
8.7 Main Unit Position Confirmation and Alignment

1) Preparation for position confirmation and alignment
Execute Home. If it enters the "Idle" state smoothly and there is no fault alarm, you can refer
to the Debugging Guide to confirm and debug the key positions. Otherwise, the fault should be
checked.
438
Figure8-37 Home system
2) Procedure of position confirmation and alignment

Position confirmation and alignment of probe
Select Utility > Maintenance > Alignment > Sampling System Alignment
439
Figure8-38 Position confirmation and alignment of probe
Confirm and align the positions in the red frame above. For detailed steps, please refer to the
Alignment Guide.
3) Position confirmation and alignment of gripper
Select Utility > Maintenance > Alignment > Transport System Alignment.
440
Figure8-39 Position confirmation and alignment of gripper
Alignment Guide.
4) Position alignment of dispersion probe
Select Utility > Maintenance > Alignment > Dispersion System Alignment.
441
Figure8-40 Position confirmation and alignment of dispersion probe
Alignment Guide.
5) Position confirmation and alignment of shielding cover
Select Utility > Maintenance > Alignment > Photometer System Alignment.
442
Figure8-41 Position confirmation and alignment of shielding cover
Alignment Guide.
8.8 Clean and prime substrate tubes
8.8.1 Clean substrate tube

The process of “Clean Substrate Tubes” see the section 7.10.2 Cleaning and Priming
Substrate Tubes.
8.8.2 Prime substrate tubes

The process of “Prime Substrate Tubes” see the section 7.10.2 Cleaning and Priming
Substrate Tubes.
8.9 Setting up
8.9.1 Load and check the consumables

Loading the cuvette tray:
Select Left Tray, tap Load, and then pull out the left drawer assembly manually, load the cuvette
443
tray, and push it forward after confirming that it is placed well. Load the cuvettes in the right tray
with the same method.
Figure8-42 Loading the cuvette tray
Figure8-43 Pushing it forward after confirming that the cuvettes are placed well
1) Load the Detergent C and wash buffer
Before priming the tubes, you have loaded the Detergent C and wash buffer.
2) Load the waste tank
Before connecting the hydropneumatic system tubes during installation, you have loaded the
water tank.
3) Load the substrate
Before priming the substrate, you have loaded the substrate.
4) Besides the Consumable Management screen, you can query the detailed
information of consumables on the Reagent Overview screen
444
Figure8-44 Reagent overview
8.9.2 Importing and Configuring Chemistry Parameters

Select Utility -> Chemistries -> Import.
Figure8-45 Import
Select Load Default to display all Mindray reagent chemistries in the left column. Select Add All
445
to add all chemistries to the right column.
Figure8-46 Import default chemistry parameters
Select Import and then select Exit. The default chemistry parameters are imported.
Figure8-47 Select Import and Exit
Check the imported chemistries on the Chemistries screen.
446
Figure8-48 Check the imported chemistries
8.10 System Performance Test

8.10.1 DCF Diagnosis
1) Enter Utility-Maintenance-Diagnostics- Photometer Diagnosis -DCF diagnosis.
2) Parameter settings: Set the Test Cycle as 20 and select Start to start the test.
3) Record the Relative Extreme Difference, which should be less than 1.5%.
Figure 8-49 DCF stability test
8.10.2 Substrate Background detection

1) Select Utility > Maintenance > SPT > Substrate;
447
2) Select Substrate Background;
3) Tick the Dispersion checkbox, tap Start, and wait for the results;
4) The instrument automatically starts detection, and displays the results after completion.
Item Index
Substrate background RLU 3000-6000
Substrate background SD SD＜100
8.10.3 System Repeatability

Prepare the sample: Add 1 ml System Detection Solution A (0.002 ug/ml) to the microtube and
load it to 1# sample position;
1) Select Utility > Maintenance > SPT > Photon Counting;
2) Select System Repeatability;
3) Confirmation:
The Sample Replicate(s) is 20, and the Reagent Replicate(s) is 0;
The Sample Aspirate Volume (ul) is 15, and the Sample Dispense Volume (ul) (ul) is 10;
4) Tap Start, and wait for the results.
5) The instrument automatically starts detection, and displays the results after completion.
The
Item Index
Sample RLU 400000-2000000
Sample CV CV ≤ 1.5%
8.10.4 Repeatability Test

Pick at least 1 item that will be test by user in the list below, finish the calibration at first.
Anti-Tg Anti-TPO LH HCG
HBsAg HIV Anti-TP Anti-HCV
Take a quality control as sample to perform 15 times repeatability test, the repeatability test
should satisfy the following indices:
CV≤5%
Fill the test results into the Basic Performance Test Record file attached, it will show if the
repeatability test is pass or failed:
448
Basic
Performance Test Record.xlsx
8.11 LIS and Remote Help

8.12 LIS Connection
The service engineer should assist the hospital in connecting the LIS software.
Select Utility >setting > LIS Setting
449
9 Maintenance Guide
9.1 Overview
9.1.1 Introduction:
 The maintenance function mainly includes:
 CL-900i&CL-960i customers during the warranty period (standard or extended warranty).
 The active maintenance of CL-900i&CL-960i is one annually. The specific maintenance
time is subject to the active maintenance service dispatched by the headquarters.
 Maintenance time: The maintenance is performed during troubleshooting and restoration
after the instrument has experienced performance problems.
9.1.2 Maintenance Materials and Tools List

Before maintenance, please prepare corresponding supplies and tools according to the
maintenance items.
Tools and materials that need to be prepared by the customer:
Supplies and Tools Applicable Maintenance
Clean gauze or tissue Wiping out dispersion dispensing probe outer
wall, and cleaning probe/dispersion swab,
waste probe and grippers
Dust-free cotton swabs Cleaning the vortexer hole, incubation module
hole, photometer position hole, waste drainage
position hole and so on
Suction cleaner Cleaning the dust screen
Hair brush Clean Dust Screen
Tweezers Removing/Installing syringe washers
Thread syringe Unclogging the probe
Keyboard wash solution Cleaning the keyboard
9.2 Routine Maintenance

Instrument maintenance can be performed when door maintenance is needed by the service
engineers for other reasons, in order to prevent equipment failure, maintain the instrument
performance and keep parts clean and tidy. Maintenance items and maintenance time are listed
in the table below according to the recommended maintenance sequence. The whole
maintenance process takes about 67min. Negotiate with the customer and leave enough
maintenance time before maintenance.
SN Type Chemistry Maintenance
Time
1 Cleaning Cleaning the Cap of the Wash Buffer Tank 3min
2 Cleaning 10min
Cleaning the dust screen
450
3 Cleaning 8min
Cleaning the Gripper
4 Cleaning 15min
Cleaning the Probe/Dispersion Swab
5 Cleaning Cleaning the Outer Wall of the Dispersion Aspirate Probe 15min
6 Cleaning Cleaning Waste Drainage Probe 5min
451
7 Cleaning Cleaning Waste Drainage Probe 3min
Maintenance Cleaning Waste Drainage Probe
item
Maintenance Waste discharge probe
object
Causes for Stains deposited on the waste
maintenance drainage probe will affect the
effect of drainage.
Maintenance Cleaning Waste Drainage Probe
items
Materials Dustless gauze, alcohol
required
Precautions: 1. The probe tip is sharp and may
cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution
when working around the probes.
2. Wear gloves and lab coat, and
if necessary, goggles during the
maintenance process.
System Shut Down
status
How to do 1. Confirm the instrument is
powered off;
2. Open the transparent shield
cover;
3. Gently wipe the probe outer
wall from top to bottom with a
piece of dustless gauze dipped
with alcohol to ensure that the
outer wall is wiped clean.
4. Reinstall the transparent shield
cover (after finishing other
maintenance (if any)).
Check No stains on the probe surface,
exposing metallic luster.
Maintenance About 5min
takes
Cleaning Vortexer Hole

8 Cleaning Cleaning Incubation, Photometer and Waste Drainage 8min
Hole
452
9.2.1 Cleaning the Cap of the Wash Buffer Tank
Maintenance item Cleaning the Cap of the Wash Buffer Tank

Maintenance Cap of wash buffer tank
object
Causes for Disconnect the joint on the tank cap when loading or changing
maintenance the wash buffer, and a small amount of wash buffer may spill onto
the cap in this process. It is necessary to carry out such
maintenance in order to prevent liquid from spilling on other
components or blocking the exhaust holes on the bottle cap after
drying and crystallizing.
Maintenance items Clean the cap of the wash buffer tank
Materials required None
Precautions: Wear gloves before operation to prevent biological risk.
System status The whole unit is powered off or is standby.
How to do 1. Remove the tank cap and gently remove the stems of the
exhaust port with a clean TIP head.
2. Wash with Deionized Water;

3. Finally, wipe it with a clean napkin and reload it for use.
Check Confirm whether the wash buffer tank cap is clean.
Maintenance takes About 3min
453
9.2.2 Cleaning the dust screen

Maintenance Cleaning the dust screen
item
Maintenance Dust screen
object
Causes for Dust may accumulate on the dust screens after the instrument is
maintenance used for a long time, influencing the ventilation, heating the whole
unit and reducing the performance of reagent refrigeration unit.
Maintenance Cleaning the dust screen
items
Materials Suction cleaner, hair brush and fresh water
required
Precautions: 1. Do not reinstall the dust screens until they are dry completely.
2. Install the dust screens correctly to avoid gaps.
System Shut Down
status
How to do 1. Switch off the analyzer’s power.
2. Open the outlet cover and remove dust screens from the right of
the analyzer.
3. Use the suction cleaner, hair brush or fresh water to clean the
dust screens, and then dry them in air.
4. Reinstall the dust screens when they are dry.
Check Visual inspection. Observe the dust situation on the dust screens
under the light, and confirm there is no obvious blockage.
takes
454
9.2.3 Cleaning the Gripper

Maintenance Cleaning the Gripper
item
Maintenance Gripper
object
Causes for The gripper may be dirty after a long time and needs cleaning. Otherwise,
maintenance it may lead to gripping failure.
Maintenance Clean the gripper
items
Materials Dustless gauze, alcohol
required
System Make sure that the system is in "Standby “ status.

status
How to do 1. Confirm that the system is in Standby status; select Utility -
Maintenance, and click Wipe Fingers.
2. A window indicating that fingers will move is displayed. Click Execute.
3. Open the front transparent shielding cover of the analyzer.

4. Unscrew the fastening screws on the gripper cover using a screwdriver
and remove the cover.
5. Wipe the finger inner and outer walls using a piece of dust-free gauze
dipped with alcohol, so as to expose metallic luster with no dust, stains
and rusts.
6. Close the transparent shield cover of analysis unit and click Exit to
complete the maintenance.
Check No dust, stains and rusts on the fingers, exposing metallic luster.
455
takes
9.2.4 Cleaning the Probe/Dispersion Swab

Maintenance item Cleaning the Probe/Dispersion Swab
Maintenance object Probe/dispersion swab
Causes for Crystals will accumulate on the sample probes and dispersion swab after
maintenance the instrument is used for a long time. Excessive crystallization may affect
the vertical movement and cleaning effect of the sample probes and
dispersion.
Maintenance items Probe/dispersion swab
Materials required Dustless gauze, alcohol
System status Shut Down
456
How to do 1. Confirm the instrument is powered off;
2. Remove the front panel and transparent shield cover;
3. Move the sample probe between the wash well and mixing position (to
facilitate the cleaning of the upper and lower surfaces of the sample probe
swab).
Note: Move the probe vertically to the top before moving horizontally, so
as to avoid damaging the sample probe.
4. Wipe the upper and lower surfaces of the sample probe swab using a
piece of dust-free gauze dipped with alcohol, until no crystals on the swab
surface. After completion, move the probe to the top of the wash well.
Wipe the upper and lower

surfaces of the sample probe
swab using a piece of dust-
free gauze dipped with
alcohol.
5. Wipe the upper surface of the dispersion aspirating probe swab using
a piece of dust-free gauze dipped with alcohol, until no crystals on the
swab surface.
Three phases of
dispersion swab
6. Reinstall the front panel and transparent shield cover;

Note: Reinstall them after finishing other maintenance (if any).
Check No crystals on the swab surface.
457
9.2.5 Cleaning the Outer Wall of the Dispersion Aspirate
Probe
Maintenance item Cleaning the Outer Wall of the Dispersion Aspirate Probe
Maintenance object Clean the outer wall of the Dispersion Aspirate Probe (3 probes in
total)
Causes for Cleaning the outer wall of the dispersion probe helps obtain the best
maintenance dispersion washing effect.
Maintenance items Clean the outer wall of the Dispersion Aspirate Probe
Materials required Clean dust-free tissue (some) and DI water
Precautions: 1. The probe tip is sharp and may cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the probes.
2. If it is bent or damaged, replace it immediately; otherwise,
unreliable results may be obtained.
3. Wear gloves and lab coat, and if necessary, goggles during the
2. Remove the front panel and transparent shield cover;
3. Remove three dispersion aspirating probes.
4. Gently wipe the probe outer wall from top to bottom with a clean
towel coated with deionized water to ensure that the outer wall is
wiped clean. Install back the probe on the plate and tighten the round
screw clockwise to fix the probe. Lift the aspirate probe gently to
check if it can spring back smoothly.
Note: Do not bend, collide or scrape the probe during operation. After
the maintenance procedure, please make sure all tubes and
connectors are properly connected.
5. Reinstall the front panel and transparent shield cover (after
finishing other maintenance (if any)).
Check No stains and crystals on the surface of the aspirating probe,
exposing metallic luster.
458
9.2.6 Cleaning Waste Drainage Probe

Maintenance item Cleaning Waste Drainage Probe
Maintenance object Waste discharge probe
Causes for Stains deposited on the waste drainage probe will affect the effect
maintenance of drainage.
Maintenance items Cleaning Waste Drainage Probe
Precautions: 1. The probe tip is sharp and may cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the probes.
2. Wear gloves and lab coat, and if necessary, goggles during the
2. Open the transparent shield cover;
3. Gently wipe the probe outer wall from top to bottom with a piece
of dustless gauze dipped with alcohol to ensure that the outer wall
is wiped clean.
4. Reinstall the transparent shield cover (after finishing other
maintenance (if any)).
Check No stains on the probe surface, exposing metallic luster.
9.2.7 Cleaning Vortexer Hole

Maintenance item Cleaning Vortexer Hole
Maintenance object Vortexer hole
Causes for Dust in the vortexer hole will affect the mixing effect.
maintenance
Maintenance items Cleaning Vortexer Hole
Materials required Clean cotton swabs and alcohol
Precautions: None

2. Remove the transparent shield cover;
3. Wipe the vortexer hole gently with cotton swab dipped with
alcohol.
4. Close the transparent shielding cover.
Check Visually check the vortexer hole is clean.
459
9.2.8 Cleaning Incubation, Photometer and Waste Drainage
Hole
Maintenance item Clean incubation/waste drainage/photometer hole
Maintenance object Incubation/waste drainage/photometer hole
Causes for Contamination to incubation/waste drainage/photometer hole may
maintenance reduce incubation effect.
Maintenance items Clean incubation/waste drainage/photometer hole

3. Wipe the incubation/waste drainage/photometer hole gently with
cotton swab dipped with alcohol.
4. Install the transparent shielding cover.
Check None
460
9.3 Check and Maintenance

 The maintenance items described in this section aim to find out the causes and solve
simple faults after the decline of performance. They are mainly performed by the service
engineer.
 The maintenance function permission has been authorized to the user; the user can also
carry out maintenance under the guidance of the service engineer, to preliminarily confirm
the causes of performance problems or to rectify simple faults. The maintenance functions
involved include:
 Checking the Probe
 Probe Special Wash
 Aspirate Probe Wash
 Waste Tubing Wash
 Prime and Drain
9.3.1 Checking the Probe

Maintenance item Checking the Probe
Maintenance object Probe
Causes for Correct analysis cannot be carried out if the sample probe is
maintenance abnormal. The probe cannot be effectively cleaned and the test
results will be affected if the wash well does not work properly.
Therefore, it is necessary to check whether there is dirt and
crystallization outside the sample probe, and whether the wash well
is clogged. If yes, cleaning is needed.
Maintenance items To check whether water drips at the tip of the probe, whether there
are stains on the outer wall, and whether the liquid flow on the inner
wall is abnormal.
Check whether the wash well works properly.
Materials required None
Precautions: 1. Wear gloves before operation to prevent biological risk.
2. Caution to prevent probe puncture.
3. Be careful not to bend the probe.
4. Keep away from the probe to avoid collision with it.
System status Standby
461
How to do 1. Make sure that the analyzer status is Incubation or Standby, and
then open the transparent shielding cover of the analyzer.
2. Execute the operating software; select Utility - Maintenance -
Maintenance, and click Check Probe.
3. Check the liquid flow on the probe inner wall as shown in the
figure.
4. If the liquid flow is sprayed out or does not come out vertically, the
probe may be clogged.
Clogging processing: first, conduct Probe Special Wash; if it is still
not normal, replace the probe. Note: The probe cannot be passed
through.
Normal Abnormal
Description of Probe Inner Wall Wash Flow

5. After maintenance, close the transparent shield cover of analysis
unit and click Exit.
Check After maintenance, repeat the above maintenance steps to confirm
the maintenance results.
Maintenance takes 5min
9.3.2 Probe Special Wash

Maintenance item Probe Special Wash
Maintenance object Probe
Causes for The liquid flow of the sample probe is not up to expectations, when
maintenance performing Check Probe.
Maintenance items Clean the sample probe using the probe detergent.
Materials required Probe detergent (about 850uL used each time; prepare at least 4.3ml
probe detergent considering the dead volume of 3.385mL; more
detergent is better).
462
Caution to prevent probe puncture.
Keep away from the probe and other moving parts to avoid collision
with them.
System status Make sure that the system is in "Standby “ status.
How to do 1. Confirm that the probe detergent is sufficient.
2 Select Utility- Maintenance - Maintenance;
3. Click Probe Special Wash to clean the probe, during which Exit
is gray;
4. After the execution, Exit is activated. Click Exit to complete the
maintenance.
Check After maintenance, perform Check Probe; refer to 9.3.1 Checking

the Probe.
9.3.3 Aspirate Probe Wash

Maintenance item Aspirate Probe Wash
Maintenance object Dispersion Aspirating probes
Causes for To keep good performance of probe, avoid probe clogging and
maintenance reduce influence of the probe carryover on the test result.
Maintenance items Clean the dispersion aspirating probe using the probe detergent.
Materials required Probe detergent (about 800uL used each time; prepare at least 4.2ml
probe detergent considering the dead volume of 3.385mL; more
detergent is better), cuvette.
with them.
How to do 1. Confirm that the probe detergent is sufficient, and the cuvette tray
contains a cuvette.
2. Select Utility - Maintenance - Maintenance.
3. Click Aspirate Probe Wash to clean the probe, during which Exit
is gray;
maintenance.
Check None
9.3.4 Waste Tubing Wash

Maintenance item Waste Tubing Wash
463
Maintenance object Waste Drainage Tube
Causes for Blockage of waste drainage tube will cause incomplete waste
maintenance drainage, or failure to establish the dispersion vacuum, affecting the
test results.
Maintenance items Clean the waste drainage tube using wash buffer.
Materials required Cuvette
with them.
How to do 1. Confirm the cuvette tray contains a cuvette.
2. Select Utility - Maintenance - Maintenance.
3. Click Waste Tubing Wash to clean the probe, during which Exit
is gray;
maintenance.
Check None
9.3.5 Prime and Drain

Maintenance item Prime and Drain
Maintenance object Wash buffer and substrate tubing system of whole unit
Causes for 1. Bubbles in tubes will lead to problems such as inaccurate sample
maintenance addition and poor cleaning effect, which will affect the test results, so
priming is needed to remove the bubbles in tubes.
2. Empty and clean the tubes of whole unit if the analyzer will not be
used for a long time, so as to avoid crystallization.
Maintenance items Empty/prime wash buffer or substrate tubing system of the whole unit
Materials required /

with them.
How to do 1) Select Utility - Maintenance - Maintenance and then select Prime

and Drain.
2) To use the wash buffer for prime, select the Wash Buffer tab,
select Wash Buffer 1 Tubing or Wash Buffer 2Tubing to be
464
primed, and click Prime or Drain as required. Check that the
inventory of the cuvette is ≥1 and the waste container and waste
tank are not full before priming and drainage. Verify that the wash
buffer is adequate before priming, and take out the wash buffer
tank cover before drainage.
3) To use the substrate for priming, select the Substrate tab, select
Substrate L Tubing or Substrate R Tubing to be primed, and click
Prime or Drain as required.
4) The cuvette will be consumed for priming and drainage. Make
sure that the inventory of the cuvette is ≥1 and the waste container
and waste tank are not full before priming and drainage. Check
that the substrate is adequate before priming (Make sure that
there are more than 24 bottles of substrate in corresponding tube),
and put an empty substrate bottle at the substrate position before
drainage. Be careful not to leave the substrate position empty to
avoid exposure of the substrate probe to the air for a long time
and avoid contamination of the substrate probe.
5) After drainage and priming, click OK to complete the
maintenance.
Check After maintenance, the instrument fails to detect bubble alarm.
Maintenance takes 6min for priming/emptying single wash buffer tube

12min for priming/emptying two wash buffer tubes
6min for priming/emptying single substrate tube
12min for priming/emptying two substrate tubes
465
9.4 Maintenance setup

This section describes auto maintenance periodically conducted by service engineers. The auto
maintenance includes the following items, and the maintenance time is 15min.
NO. Type Chemistry Frequency Maintenance Time
1 Replacement Replacing the spring of Annual 15min
the gripper maintenance
2 Maintenance Remove crystal on the Annual 10min
swab maintenance
Note that the maintenance items listed in 9.2 Routine Maintenance may need to be done in the
case of home maintenance; negotiate with the customer in advance and leave sufficient time
before maintenance.
9.4.1 Replacing the spring of the gripper

Maintenance item Replacing the spring of the gripper
Maintenance object Gripper spring
Maintenance Engineer: 12 months (maintenance for 4 quarters)
cycle/time
Causes for After the instrument is used for a long time, the spring may
maintenance fall off or break, and then the gripping function may be
unavailable.
Maintenance items Replace the gripper spring
Materials required New gripper spring (please apply for materials according to
the material list)
Precautions: Maintenance is performed by the engineer only
System status The instrument is shut down.
466
Maintenance item Replacing the spring of the gripper
How to do 1. Switch off the main power of the whole unit;
2. Open the front shielding cover, and remove it by loosening
the two screws.
3. Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the three screws on the
Z-axis shielding cover, and remove the Z-axis shielding cover.
4. When replacing the finger clamping spring, use the
tweezers to grab the gripper cam, make the fingers close, and
then take the spring hook from the spring column with
tweezers; be careful not to drop the finger clamping spring
and other finger parts to the instrument.
Gripper spring
5. Hang a new finger clamping spring on the spring guide

post, and note that the spring hook must be accurately hung
in the groove of the spring column.
6. Install the spring and tighten the screws in reverse order of
step 1\2\3.
Check Start up the instrument, and confirm that the gripper works
properly.
9.4.2 Remove crystal on the swab

Maintenance item Remove crystal on the swab
Maintenance object Swab
Maintenance Engineer: 12 months (maintenance for 4 quarters)
cycle/time
467
Maintenance item Remove crystal on the swab
Causes for After the sampling probe and dispersion aspirating probes are
maintenance cleaned by the swab for a long time, Crystals may be
generated on the upper surface of the swab. After the long-
term accumulation of crystals increases, crastals may fall into
the reagents, sample and cuvette, so crystals must be
removed periodically.
Maintenance items Check for crystallization above the swab of the sampling
probe and the dispersion aspirating probes. If there is obvious
crystallization, clean it.
Materials required Dust-free cotton, pure water
Precautions: 1. Wear gloves before operation to prevent biological risk.
2. Caution to prevent probe puncture.
3. Be careful not to bend the sampling probe and the
aspirating probe.
4. Keep away from the probe to avoid collision with it.
5. When removing crystals, take care to prevent crystals from
falling into the instrument.
3. Use a cotton swab dipped in pure water to remove the
crystals from the upper part of the swab of the sampling probe
and the dispersion aspirating probes and dry the swab with a
dry cotton swab.
4. Close the transparent shielding cover.
Check Visually inspect and confirm that there is no crystal on the
upper part of the swab, the sampling probe and the exterior
wall of the aspirating probe.
468
10 Alarms and Troubleshooting

10.1 Introduction
This chapter provides all alarms of the CL-900i, as well as the triggering mechanism, possible
causes and corrective actions. However, the alarms may not cover all failures, and the possible
causes and corrective actions may not completely comply with the actual failure mode. The
maintenance suggestions provided in this chapter are for reference only and cannot be taken
as the final judgment criteria.
When an error occurs, it will be indicated in many ways. The following sections describe the
troubleshooting methods and instruct you how to troubleshoot errors occurring on the
instrument. This chapter mainly describes alarms occurring on the instrument, which are
classified into data alarms (such as calibration, quality control, and results), software error
alarms, and hardware error alarms.
An error will be indicated by highlighting relevant buttons and screen texts with different
colors. Yellow indicates a warning while red indicates a serious warning or error.
Figure 10-1 There are three types of alarm prompts:
469
Figure 10-2 Alarm boxes
Common error: including those that are indicated by warning the user, and by invalidating tests,
reagents and samples. When such error occurs, the alarm message box shows with the title
bar highlighted in yellow. Serious error: including those except for the common error. When
such error occurs, the alarm message box shows with the title bar highlighted in red, and you
are only allowed to reboot or exit the system.

Result alarms (data alarms)
When calibration error or failure, or sample result error occurs due to the sample, reagent or
system failure, a flag will appear near the corresponding calibration result or sample results.
470
Figure 10-3 Error logs
All error alarms are recorded in error logs. By recalling the error logs you are enabled to master
the current status of the system and troubleshoot errors. Error logs error logs
10.2 Error alarms

Error alarms are divided into prompts and pop-up messages. Prompts are displayed in the
prompt message area to indicate alarms. See the figure below:
Figure 10-4 Error alarms
Popup messages are shown on a dialog box displayed to remind the operator of an error that
is happening. See the figure below:
471
Figure 10-5 Popup messages
Both of the two types of error alarms are recorded in the error logs. The description of alarms
in prompts and pop-up messages is brief and are explained in detail in the error logs. The error
alarms listed below may appear in the error logs.
See appendix A9 all error codes
10.3 Data alarm

Data alarms indicate that the immunoassay test results are abnormal. They are contained in
the data alarm list. In the data alarm list, you can find detailed descriptions of alarms, causes,
and troubleshooting methods.
10.3.1 Data Alarm Type

Data alarms can be classified into the following categories: data alarms related to calibration
results, related to quality control results, and related to sample results.
10.3.2 Principles and Handling of Data Alarms

See the service manual volume I.
472
10.4 Common Software Error Alarms and Handling

This section analyzes the common errors that may arise during software installation, upgrade,
and use.
10.4.1 Database Initializing Failed

Symptom:
The analyzer reports an alarm indicating that the database fails to be opened.
Solution:
1) Verify that the current account of the system is an administrator.
2) Verify that Open in Compatibility View is not selected in Compatibility on the
properties bar of the software.
3) Back up the Database folder. Delete all files in this folder except the Backup folder.
Start the software. If the software can be started successfully, an error occurs on the
current database file has. If the software cannot be started, proceed to the next step.
4) Uninstall the SQL database and reinstall it. Check whether the software can be started.
If no, proceed to the next step.
5) Reinstall the OS and reinstall the software. Check whether the software can be started.
If no, format the disk where the software installation directory is located and reinstall
the software.
473
10.4.2 Database backup failed

Symptom:
The analyzer reports an alarm indicating a database backup failure.
Figure 10-6 Database backup failed
Solution:
Delete the Backup file from the Database folder and restart the system.
10.4.3 Database version is higher than the software version

Symptom:
The analyzer reports an alarm indicating that the database version is too new.
474
Figure 10-7 The database version is too new.
Solution:
Access the software installation directory, locate the Databaselog folder, modify the number
similar to 210 in the third line from bottom, and adjust the number by about 200 to 411.
Figure 10-8 Database config
475
10.4.4 Unmatched software version.

Symptom:
The analyzer reports an alarm indicating software version mismatch.
Solution:
Verify that the OS is upgraded first and then the control software is upgraded. The purpose is
to ensure that the programs used for control software upgrade are the latest. After upgrading
the OS, upgrade the control software as per the operation guide.
10.4.5 Software Getting Stuck

Symptom:
The software gets stuck and responds slowly.
Solution:
1) The database file is oversized. The possible causes are as follows:
a) The analyzer has been used for a long time. As a result, the BackUp file in the
database is oversized. Ask R&D engineers to optimize the database.
b) An error occurs on the backup file, which is very large (for example, larger than
20 GB). Delete the file and restart the system.
2) The PC of the analyzer is infected with viruses.
3) Third-party software (such as input method) is installed on the PC of the analyzer.
4) The analyzer is not shut down for more than one month.
5) A function key on the keyboard of the analyzer gets stuck.
10.4.6 Configuring key parameters failed.

Symptom:
The analyzer reports an alarm indicating that key parameters are not configured.
Solution:
1) Select Alignment > Component Version Setup and configure the version. If the
alarm persists, proceed to the next step.
2) Select Alignment > Parameters and reconfigure non-motion parameters of all units.
476
10.5 Common Hardware Error Alarms

Description:
This section describes common mechanical, fluidic, board, and optical errors occurring on
the analyzer.
10.5.1 Substrate Background Test Failed

 Purpose of the substrate background test: To ensure that the RLU measured by the
analyzer is accurate and stable when only the substrate is added.
 Criteria: 3000 < AVE < 6000; SD < 100
 Notes: 10 cuvettes and 2 ml substrate are consumed.
 Symptom: Select Utility > Maintenance > Diagnostics > System Diagnosis >
Background Test, and the test fails.
Error analysis:
A single value is higher,
The RLU is a dark current
The SD value is lower. causing the SD value to be
count.
out of range.
6000 6000 6000

5000 5500
5000
4000 5000
3000 4000 4500
2000 4000
3000
1000 3500
0 2000 3000
1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9
1. The substrate bottle leaks 1. The equilibrium time of 1. The dispersion carousel
out or is empty; bubble the substrate at room overflows, which results in
detection is abnormal or temperature is short, the substrate crystal in the
shielded. room temperature is too low, reaction carousel (the
2. The pipelines are leaking or the substrate has expired substrate crystals are found
severely or the syringe for a long time. in the same positions after
connector is installed 2. Foreign particles enter the multiple retesting).
incorrectly. substrate pipeline. 2. There is dust inside the
3. Pipelines are squeezed. 3. The substrate dispensing cuvettes (random positions).
4. There are crystals inside volume is insufficient. 3. There are foreign
the pipelines. 4. The signal collecting particles inside tubes
position of the reaction (random positions).
carousel is deviated from
477
A single value is higher,
The RLU is a dark current
The SD value is lower. causing the SD value to be
count.
out of range.
the normal range or the
photometry window is
blocked.
5. The heating temperatures
of the reaction carousel and
substrate are low.
The single-point low value The former several values The former several values
SD is out of range. are low. are high.
5000 6000 6000

4500 5500 5500
4000 5000 5000
3500 4500 4500
3000 4000 4000
2500 3500 3500
2000 3000 3000
1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9
1. There are foreign particles 1. The effect check interval 1. The Teflon tube at the
inside the cuvettes in the is too long. substrate dispensing outlet
outer ring of the reaction 2. The substrate back is abnormal (not trimmed or
carousel (generally in fixed aspirate position is incorrect. too short).
positions). A segment of the substrate 2. The temperature of the
2. The Teflon tube at the is exposed outside. substrate heating assembly
substrate dispensing outlet 3. The temperature of the is abnormal.
is abnormal (not trimmed or substrate heating assembly
too short). is abnormal.
3. The pipeline is clogged by
foreign particles
(occasional).
478
The RLU chart presents The RLU chart presents a
The mean value of SDs
a trend of first rise and trend of first fall and then
that are out of range is
then fall, and the SD is rise, and the SD is out of
low.
out of range. range.
6000 6000 8000
5000 5000 7000
4000 4000 6000
3000 3000 5000

1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9
1. The pipeline is not 1. The pipeline is not 1. The dispersion

washed or cleaned. washed or cleaned. carousel overflows and
2. The concentration of 2. The concentration of the there are crystals on the
the used acid wash buffer used acid wash buffer is reaction carousel.
is incorrect. incorrect, or non-acid wash 2. The pipeline is not
3. The quality of water buffer is used to clean washed or cleaned.
used for washing is bad. pipelines. 3. The substrate is
3. The quality of water used contaminated.
for washing is bad.
4. The substrate syringe is
not properly shielded from
light.
10.5.2 Photometer Problem Handling and Analysis
Photometer replacement
Replacement time:
Replace the optical assembly when an optical problem cannot be resolved after troubleshooting
operations are performed. If the optical assembly that needs to be replaced includes the LED,
replace the entire optical assembly .
Erroe codes：
 A54409：Photon counting board communication fault
 A54401：Failed to turn on photometer PMT module.
 A54406：Dark count is out of range
 A54402：Failed to turn on the LED.
 A54403：Failed to turn off the LED.
 A54404：DCF is out of range.
Requirements:
479
 The new and old assemblies before and after replacement need to be kept away from
light.
 The interfaces of the optical assembly and main control board should face downward
and the ground cable needs to be connected to the base of the buffer tank.
Key points of replacement:
1) Turn off the power supply of the analyzer.
2) Avoid touching the lenses when disassembling and assembling the optical assembly ,
and use shade cloth to cover the optical lenses to keep them away from strong light.
Note: Perform the same operation on the old optical assembly .
3) After replacement, configure software parameters.
4) Select Alignment > Reaction Carousel Unit > Photometer Configuration to
configure software parameters.
5) Photometer Home
6) Select Alignment > Reaction Carousel Unit and run the photometer initialization
instruction.
7) Restart the analyzer.
8) After startup, perform photometer diagnosis and verify that the test results of the dark
current count diagnosis, photometric count diagnosis, and DCF diagnosis are passed.
9) Perform recalibration and quality control on chemistries.
Photon count diagnosis process and criteria

1) Dark Current Count Diagnosis
Purpose: To test the photometric value of cuvette positions in the outer ring of the reaction
carousel in the light-free environment.
Criteria:
a) The photometric value of each cuvette position does not exceed 600 CPS.
b) In normal cases, the value does not exceed 200
Test process:
Keep the LED off, enable the reaction carousel to rotate and pass by 25 cuvette positions, and
measure the dark current counts of the 25 cuvette positions.
Photon Count Diagnosis

Purpose: To judge the stability of the RLU measured by the PMT.
Criteria: The relative extreme difference of the RLU measured by the PMT is smaller than
or equal to 1.5%.
Test process:
Turn on the LED of the reference module, and enable the PMT to test the photon count of the
LED for 20 times repeatedly.
2) DCF Diagnosis
Purpose: To calculate the calibration factor DCF and check whether the self-calibration of
the photometer module is normal.
Criteria: The relative extreme difference of the measured DCF calibration factor is smaller
than or equal to 1.5%, and the DCF factor is greater than or equal to 0.6 but smaller than or
480
equal to 1.7.
Test process: Turn on the LED of the reference module, and enable the PMT to perform
the test for 20 times repeatedly and calculate the DCF value.
3) Handling of common photometer problems
The figure below shows the common troubleshooting model. For detailed content, see related
sections.
First check Photometer error First check

Check that the ambient
Check that the
temperature does not
software version is
exceed 30°C and the
the latest. If not,
temperature difference
upgrade the software.
does not exceed 15°C.
Dark Dark DCF is DCF is

current current is violently Failed to turn Failed to turn
out of
count is out out of fluctuating. on the LED. off the LED.
range.
of range. range.
The received An error is An error occurs An error

The dark A cuvette An error is An error is
light intensity reported during DCF occurs during
current position is reported reported after
is out of during use. diagnosis. LED
counts are larger. during daily the photometer
range when diagnosis.
generally cleaning. is replaced.
the LED is
larger.
not turned on.
Upgrade the No actions Upgrade the

Reinitialize the Is the problem
software. are software.
photometer and solved after the analyzer is powered
Clean related cuvette required.
restart the system. off and restarted?
holes.
Are the power

supply, UPS, and ground cable in Yes
good condition?
No
Is the sealing cotton at Replace the entire photometer module.

the joint of the optical component and reaction No
carousel light-tight?
Troubleshooting of the Connection Failure

Mechanism: The PC host cannot connect to the analyzer.
481
Symptom: The analyzer reports an alarm indicating a failure to connect to the host.
Error analysis:
482
Is the main
Connection Is the power supply power switch turned on and is the
No Yes Are fans running?
failure normal? external power supply in good
condition?
Yes
No
The network cable is
fastened securely. In
The power board
normal cases, the green
Is the network cable malfunctions or
indicator of the network Yes
in good condition? protection is incurred
port on the PC is on and
due to load short circuit.
the yellow indicator
blinks.
Yes Disable the firewall or

whitelist the program.
Set the IPv4 address of

the network adapter
Are the IP address and firewall
No No connected to the
settings correct?
analyzer to
192.168.23.3.
Yes
Yes
Do network adapters
Can the analyzer ping
No on the PC work
192.168.23.250? Check the
properly?
network port
conversion
board, data
Set parameters Yes No cable, and main
to default
control board on
values in the
the analyzer.
Communicatio Reinstall the network
naddress.ini adapter driver, remove
Is the configuration file of the
and No and then insert network
analyzer correct?
ClientConfig adapters, and replace the
files as per the network adapters when
software necessary.
installation
Yes
guide.
Does the upgread Redownload software on

software show that the connection No TDP and install the
is successful? software.
Yes
The software version does not match the

control software version. Upgrade the
software.
483
10.6 Flags and Fault list

10.6.1 Result Flags
Flags are available from the sample test results, calibration test results, and QC test results, and used for marking any abnormality occurring during the tests.
Flags are also available if the results are affected by alarms or original test results are post-processed. See the following table:
Flag Alarm Type Description Causes Corrective Actions
< Result related Exceeds the lower limit of the Sample or control result exceeds Take no actions, or rerun the test for
linearity range. the lower limit of the linearity range. confirmation.
> Result related Exceeds the upper limit of the Sample or control result exceeds Rerun the test with diluted sample.
linearity range. the upper limit of the linearity range.
Result related Exceeds the upper limit of the The result exceeds the high limit of No actions are required.
∧
reference range. the reference range.
Result related Exceeds the upper limit of the The result exceeds the upper limit No actions are required.
↑!
critical range. of the critical range.
Result related Exceeds the lower limit of the The result exceeds the low limit of No actions are required.
↓
reference range. the reference range.
Result related Exceeds the lower limit of the The result exceeds the lower limit of No actions are required.
↓!
critical range. the critical range.
10x Result related 10x Results of five runs (10 results), or Check if the reagent is qualified,
10 continuous results of a control control sample is normal, and the
are on the same side. instrument is working correctly.
12S Result related 12S The current QC result is between Check if the reagent is qualified,
±2 and ±3 standard deviations from control sample is normal, and the
the assigned mean concentration. instrument is working correctly.
484
13s Result related 13s The current QC result is greater Check if the reagent is qualified,
than ±3 standard deviations from control sample is normal, and the
the assigned mean concentration. instrument is working correctly.
22s Result related 22s Results of two controls in the same Check if the reagent is qualified,
run or two continuous results of a control sample is normal, and the
control are on the same side and instrument is working correctly.
greater than ±2 standard deviations
from the assigned mean
concentration.
41s Result related 41s Results of two runs or four Check if the reagent is qualified,
continuous results of a control are control sample is normal, and the
on the same side and greater than instrument is working correctly.
±1 standard deviation from the
assigned mean concentration.
ABN Result related Sample RLU is out of range. Sample RLU is lower than the Check the sample for foreign matters
minimum absolute value (2500) or or interferent; check if the reagent is
higher than the maximum absolute qualified and placed in the correct
value (100M) of the instrument. position; check the cuvette quality;
check if the photometric system is
working normally.
CAL Calibration Corrected result The result is calculated based on No actions are required.
related the default calibration factors.
(manually or automatically)
CALF Result related Calibration status is not satisfied. The reagent is not calibrated or Request and run the calibration.
calibration failed.
CALJ Calibration The calibration factors are Use sample and control result No actions are required.
485
related rejected. gained based on the rejected

calibration factor.
COV Calibration Calibration curve not convergent For nonlinear calibration, a Check if the reagent and calibrator
related satisfying base cannot be are normal, and then perform
calculated and no calibration curve calibration again.
is drawn.
CSDB Result or Result error. Air bubbles are Air bubbles are detected during After the substrate is primed, rerun
calibration detected. substrate dispensing process. the test.
related
CVTM Result related No cuvette. No cuvette on the tray or the gripper No operation required or rerun the
grips nothing. test
DBL Result related Wash buffer is insufficient. Wash buffer aspirates air bubbles Replace the wash buffer.
during test, and no wash buffer is
available.
DEL Result related The QC result has been deleted. The QC result has been deleted. No actions are required.
DEV Calibration Calibrator RLU deviation is out of Calibrator RLU deviation is out of Perform the calibration again.
related range. range, so the check failed.
DRGTB Result related Probe bumps when aspirating the 1. The cross cut of the sample 1.Use the pipette tip to open the
sample diluent. diluent bottle is adherent. cross cut.
2. Probe’s reagent aspirating 2.Readjust the probe position
position parameters are not proper. parameters.
3. The sample diluent bottle is not 3. Reinstall the sample diluent bottle.
installed in place.
DRGTE Result related Sample diluent is expired. Expired diluent is used in the Replace sample diluent.
sample or QC test.
DRGTL Result related Sample diluent is insufficient. 1. Sample diluent is not loaded. 1. Load the sample diluent.
486
2. Sample diluent is insufficient. 2. Remove the problematic sample

3. There are air bubbles in sample diluent and discharge the air bubbles.
diluent.
DTGL Result related Probe detergent is insufficient. The probe detergent is insufficient Add the probe detergent.
during the test.
The wash using probe detergent
failed due to the problem and
carryover occurs, resulting in the
invalidity of the contaminated test.
DUP Calibration Calibration repeatability error Calibrator RLU repeatability out of Perform the calibration again.
related range
EDT Result related Edited result The result has been edited. No actions are required.
ERR Result related The cuvette positions are In the QC test of the sample, the Restore the system and rerun the
disabled or the hole is dirty or the cuvette positions are disabled or test.
part is disabled. the hole is dirty or the part is
disabled.
EXT Calibration Extended calibration factor The result is obtained by extending Take no actions, or recalibrate.
related the calibration time.
ICA Result related The RLU is normal, but results The RLU is normal, but results Rerun it after calibration.
cannot be calculated. cannot be calculated. Results
cannot be calculated when none of
the RLUs has the ABN or RRN flag.
INDE Result related Flag indicating infectious disease The result of the infectious disease No operation required or rerun the
chemistry gray area chemistry falls in the gray area. test
LVC Calibration Calibration recursion check The calibrator concentration in the 1. If maintenance is not performed as
related failed. That is, the previous valid previous valid calibration is out of required, perform calibration again
487
calibration is out of range. the range defined in the calibrator after the maintenance is completed.
bar code. 2. Replace the calibrator and reagent
and perform calibration again.
MON Calibration Monotony check failed. 1. The actual tested CPSi does not 1. If the calibrators are placed in a
related meet the requirement of ascending wrong sequence, place them in the
sequence of sandwich method and right sequence and perform
the descending sequence of calibration again.
competitive method. 2. If maintenance is not performed as
2. The major calibration adjustment required, perform calibration again
CPSj after 2-3 points adjustment after the maintenance is completed.
does not meet the requirement of
ascending sequence of sandwich
method and the descending
sequence of competitive method.
NREA Result related Flag indicating the test result for The test result for infectious No actions are required.
infectious disease chemistry is disease chemistry is Negative.
Negative.
R Result related Retest results Retest the finished chemistry No actions are required.
R4s Result related R4s One result of a run is greater than Check if the reagent is qualified,
+2 standard deviations from the control sample is normal, and the
assigned mean and the other is instrument is working correctly.
greater than -2 SDs.
RAT Calibration Signal ratio of the calibrator is out Signal ratio exceeds the fluctuation Perform the calibration again.
related of range, so the check failed. range defined in the bar code.
RCV Calibration The regression concentration of Recovery regression check failed. Perform the calibration again.
related the calibrator is out of range.
488
REAC Result related Flag indicating the test result for The test result for infectious No operation required or rerun the
infectious disease chemistry is disease chemistry is Positive. test
Positive.
REC Result related The sample result is recalculated The sample result is calculated No actions are required.
manually. manually with the latest calibration
factors.
RGTB Result related Probe bumps with other objects Probe bumps. No operation required or rerun the
when aspirating reagent. test
RGTE Result related Reagent is expired. Sample and QC test result gained Replace the reagent.
by expired reagent
RGTL Result or Insufficient reagent Probe failed to aspirate the reagent. Replace the reagent.
calibration
related
RRN Result related Sample RLU is out of range. Sample RLU exceeds the RLU of Rerun the test with diluted sample.
the maximum concentration
calibrators.
SMPB Result related The probe bumps with other The probe bumps with other object. No operation required or rerun the
object. test
SMPJ Result related Probe is clogged. Probe is clogged during aspiration. Treat the sample.
SLO Calibration Slope is out of range. The slope exceeds the slope Perform the calibration again.
related fluctuation range defined in the bar
code. Calibration slope check
failed.
SMPE Result related The sample is expired. The sample is expired. Replace the sample.
SUBE Calibration Substrate is expired. Expired substrate is used to Change the substrate.
related analyze the sample or control.
489
TNN Result related Temperature error Temperature control is abnormal Rerun the test after the incubation
during test. temperature is stabilized.
VAM Calibration Calibration data is lost. The calibration test is unfinished 1. Rerun the operating software or
related during calibration process, causing restore the system.
the calibration factor cannot be 2. Restart the analyzing unit.
calculated.
10.6.2 Fault List

In the event of any fault, the fault information will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen, and recorded in a fault log. In the fault log, fault
details can be queried.
10.6.3 Software Environment Fault

Fault ID Error Message Flag Trigger Event Probable Causes Solution
and Event Log
C00007 CPU performance N/A The CPU usage exceeds 90% The CPU is overloaded 1. Check what is the most CPU-
low for over 1 minute. If this intensive software. If it is
problem persists, the message operating software, perform the
is reported at an interval of 10 following steps. If it is other
minutes. software, reduce its occupation
of CPU resources by resetting
or deleting it.
2. Restart the PC and operating
software.
3. Reinstall the operating
software.
4. Reinstall the operating
490
system.
C00008 Printer cannot be N/A No printer is detected during The printer is not powered on; the printer Check the printer connection;
connected print. cable is not connected; or no driver is check if the printer is powered
installed. on and if the driver and default
printer have been installed.
C00012 Sound card failure N/A No sound card is installed; the No sound card is installed; the sound card Reinstall the sound card or
sound card fails; or the sound fails; or the sound card driver is incorrect. sound card driver.
card driver is incorrect.
C01001 Equipment cannot N/A 1. The equipment is considered The network cable is not connected. 1. Check if the network IP
be connected disconnected if the main The analyzing unit power is switched off. address of the equipment is set
control unit of the equipment The equipment is powered on before the to 192.168.23.3.
does not receive any operating operating software is started. 2. Check if the cables between
software command within 3 The network IP address is wrong. the PC and host and between
seconds. The network card goes wrong. the host network port and
2. The equipment is considered The network cable goes wrong. control board port are
disconnected if the command connected properly. If not,
sent by the operating software reconnect them.
is executed wrongly three 3. Power off the equipment,
times (no response or restart the PC, and then start
response error). the software and power on the
During non-test, the main equipment.
control unit shakes hands with 4. Replace the network card.
the smart module once every 5 5. Replace the network cable.
seconds.
491
C02005 Reading/Writing N/A The SQL statement execution Data cannot be written into or read from the 1. Restart the operating
database failed failed. database. software.
2. Back up the database, clear
the database, and start the
software.
3. Reinstall the database and
operating software.
10.6.4 LIS-Related Fault

and Event Log
C06001 LIS initialization N/A The LIS platform version does not The LIS file is damaged or does not Reinstall the operating
error match or exist, or the instrument exist. software.
console TCP/IP stack is abnormal.
C06002 LIS N/A The IP address or port number of the LIS parameters are set wrongly. 1. Check the system
communication LIS host, communication protocol configuration
parameter error and timeout duration are set wrongly. parameters, and
reconnect the LIS.
2. Restart the operating
software.
3. Reinstall the
operating software.
C06003 LIS N/A Sending a packet failed or a network Communication failed. 1. Check the LIS
communication connection is interrupted. network connection.
error 2. Perform log analysis.
492
C06004 LIS host cannot N/A Attempts to connect with the LIS host The network connection is abnormal, 1. Check LIS connection
be connected failed three times. or the LIS server is not started. setting and network
cable, and check if the
LIS host and LIS station
are started normally.
2. Contact the LIS
manufacturer and ask
the manufacturer to
check and confirm LIS
related programs
according to the LIS
manual requirements.
3. If the LIS
manufacturer cannot
find the cause, perform
log analysis.
C06005 Sending sample N/A A sample result message is sent Communication failed. 1. Check the LIS
results failed. successfully, but no correct response network connection.
Sample ID/bar message is received within the 2. Contact the LIS
code: %s, timeout duration. manufacturer and ask
position: %s/ the manufacturer to
related programs
3. Perform log analysis.
493
C06006 Sending sample N/A No response is received or the timer Communication failed. 1. Check the LIS
information expires after a sample is sent. network connection.
failed. Sample 2. Contact the LIS
ID/bar code: %s, manufacturer and ask
related programs
C06007 Inquiring sample N/A A sample query request is sent, but LIS host failed. 1. Check the LIS
information no correct response is received network connection.
failed. Sample within 300 seconds. 2. Contact the LIS
ID/bar code: %s, manufacturer and ask
related programs
C06008 Downloading N/A The sample information queried from The chemistry settings on the LIS Check and re-set the
sample failed. the LIS does not contain key fields server or operating software are chemistry
Sample ID/bar (sample ID, sample bar code, and wrong; or insufficient or redundant correspondence
code: %s, test item) required for application. chemistries exist on the LIS host. between the operating
position: %s/ software and the LIS
host.
494
C06011 Downloading N/A The sample ID has existed on The sample ID has existed on Reset the sample ID and
sample failed operating software and cannot be operating software and cannot be ensure it does not
Sample ID/Bar downloaded from LIS. downloaded from LIS. conflict with existing
code: %s, ones.
position: %s
10.6.5 Consumables-Related Fault

and Event Log
C07023 Chemistry: %s, 30 minutes N/A The valid period of the calibration The calibration factors are about to Recalibrate the
left for next calibration. factors is compared periodically. expire. chemistries.
C07027 Calibrator %s lot no. %s has CALF The valid period of the calibrator is Calibrator is expired. Replace the calibrator.
been expired. compared periodically.
C07028 Chemistry:%s, lot RGTE The valid period of the reagent is Reagent is expired. Replace the reagent.
number:%s, position:%s, compared periodically.
has been expired
C07029 Chemistry:%s, lot RGTE The uncapping time of the reagent The uncapping time of the reagent Replace the reagent.
number:%s, position:%s, is compared periodically. pack is too long.
has exceeded the on-board
stability time.
C07036 Chemistry: %s. Calibration CALF N/A The calibration factors are expired. Perform calibration
factors are expired Recalibration is required. again.
C07038 Reagent lot number of %s N/A N/A Lot number of the reagent is Perform calibration
chemistry is changed. changed. again.
Please recalibrate
495
C07039 Calibration factors of %s N/A N/A The calibration factors are expired. Perform calibration
chemistry are expired. Recalibration is required. again.
Perform calibration again.
C07102 The %S diluent on the DRGT N/A All inventory of the sample diluent is Refill or replace the
carousel is insufficient. L less than the lower limit. Or sample sample diluent.
diluent is too little to be detected.
C07103 Sample diluent is N/A N/A All inventory of the sample diluent is Refill or replace the
exhausted. less than the lower limit. sample diluent.
C07104 Less than %s tests are left in N/A N/A All inventory of the reagent is less Refill or replace the
immunological reagent.\n than the lower limit. Or reagent is reagent.
Chemistry: %s too little to be detected.
C07105 Substrate L is exhausted. N/A N/A Substrate L is exhausted. Replace substrate at
corresponding positions.
C07106 Substrate R is exhausted. N/A N/A Substrate R is exhausted. Replace substrate at
C07107 Substrate inventory is N/A N/A Substrate inventory is less than the Refill substrate.
insufficient for %s tests. lower limit.
C07108 Substrate is exhausted. N/A N/A All substrate is exhausted. Replace substrate.
C07109 Substrate L is expired. N/A N/A Substrate is expired. Replace substrate at

C07110 Substrate R is expired. N/A N/A Substrate is expired. Replace substrate at
C07115 The solid waste container N/A N/A The number of waste cuvettes in Empty the waste
inventory is insufficient the solid waste container is less container.
496
for %s cuvettes. than the lower limit.
C07120 %s has been expired; N/A N/A Diluted reagent is exhausted. Replace diluent at
position:%s corresponding position.
C07121 During the test, no waste N/A N/A During the test, the waste container Load the waste
container is available is taken away. container.
because it is taken away.
C07125 Sample diluent on the N/A N/A The volume of the diluent has not Refill or replace the
carousel is exhausted. reached the set lower limit; or the sample diluent.
level of the reagent cannot be
detected.
C07126 Probe detergent is N/A N/A The inventory of sample probe Refill or replace the
insufficient. detergent is less than the alarm probe detergent.
limit.
C07127 Probe detergent is N/A N/A Sample probe detergent is Refill or replace the
exhausted exhausted. Or no detergent level is probe detergent.
detected.
C07128 Probe detergent is expired N/A N/A Probe detergent is expired Replace the probe
detergent.
C07129 The remaining reaction N/A N/A The cuvette inventory is less than Load new cuvette tray.
cuvettes are less than %s. the alarm limit.
C07130 Cuvettes are exhausted. N/A N/A Cuvettes are exhausted. Load new cuvette tray.
C07131 Substrate L has exceeded N/A N/A Substrate L has exceeded the on- Replace substrate at
the on-board stability time. board stability time. corresponding positions.
C07132 Substrate R has exceeded N/A N/A Substrate R has exceeded the on- Replace substrate at
497
the on-board stability time. board stability time. corresponding positions.
C07141 The solid waste container is N/A N/A The solid waste container is full. Empty the waste
full. Please empty it. container.
C07166 %s, lot number: %s, N/A N/A Exceeded On-board stability time Replace diluent at
position: %s, has exceeded corresponding position
On-board stability time
10.6.6 Sample and QR abnormal

and Event Log
C03008 Sample concentration is RRN Sample concentration is higher Sample concentration is higher than that No actions are required.
higher than that of the than that of the highest-level of the highest-level calibrator.
highest-level calibrator. calibrator.
Sample ID/bar code: %s;
position: %s;
chemistry: %s
C03018 Chemistry: Control: 1-2S 12S The current QC result is The current QC result is between ±2 and Check if the reagent is
warning between ±2 and ±3 standard ±3 standard deviations from the assigned qualified, control is
deviations from the assigned mean concentration. normal, and the
mean concentration. instrument is working
correctly. Complete
instrument maintenance.
498
C03019 Chemistry: Control: 1-3S 13s The current QC result is greater The current QC result is greater than ±3 Check if the reagent is
out of control than ±3 standard deviations standard deviations from the assigned qualified, control is
from the assigned mean mean concentration. normal, and the
concentration. instrument is working
correctly. Complete
C03020 Chemistry: Control: 2-2S 22s Results of two controls in the Results of two controls in the same run or Check if the reagent is
out of control same run or two continuous two continuous results of a control are on qualified, control is
results of a control are on the the same side and greater than ±2 normal, and the
same side and greater than ±2 standard deviations from the assigned instrument is working
standard deviations from the mean concentration. correctly. Complete
assigned mean concentration. instrument maintenance.
C03021 Chemistry: Control: R- R4S One result of a run is greater One result of a run is greater than +2 Check if the reagent is
4S out of control than +2 standard deviations standard deviations from the assigned qualified, control is
from the assigned mean and mean and the other is greater than -2 normal, and the
the other is greater than -2 SDs. instrument is working
SDs. correctly. Complete
C03022 Chemistry: Control: 4-1S 41s Results of two runs or four Results of two runs or four continuous Check if the reagent is
out of control continuous results of a control results of a control are on the same side qualified, control is
are on the same side and and greater than ±1 standard deviation normal, and the
greater than ±1 standard from the assigned mean concentration. instrument is working
deviation from the assigned correctly. Complete
mean concentration. instrument maintenance.
C03023 Chemistry: Control: 10-X 10x Results of five runs (10 results), Results of five runs (10 results), or 10 Check if the reagent is
out of control or 10 continuous results of a continuous results of a control are on the qualified, control is
499
control are on the same side. same side. normal, and the
instrument is working
correctly. Complete
10.6.7 Reagent Bar Code-Related Fault

and Event Log
C04001 Duplicate sample bar code. N/A A same bar code is scanned Duplicate bar code is used. Replace the duplicate sample
Sample ID/bar code: %s, on a sample carousel within bar code label.
Position 1: %s, Position 2: %s one batch.
C04006 Sample is expired. Sample SMPE The duration from the The sample is loaded after its shelf life is The sample is expired.
ID/bar code: %s/%s, sampling time point or exceeded. Replace the sample and
position: %s application time point to the program it again. Reject the
time when a sample bar expired sample. If the sample
code is scanned exceeds shelf life is too short, change it
the shelf life of the sample. to a reasonable one.
C04008 Sample bar code too long. N/A The sample bar code is The bar code length is greater than the Redefine the bar code with no
Position: %s greater than 27 digits. maximum value of 27 digits. more than 27 digits.
500
C04009 Sample bar code too short. N/A The sample bar code is less The bar code length is less than 3 digits, Redefine the bar code with no
Position: %s than 3 digits. the minimum value of the system. less than 3 digits.
C05002 Reagent bar code N/A The corresponding Wrong reagent bar code is used. The 1. Check if the chemistry has
information error. chemistry is not queried reagent bar code contains incomplete or imported chemistry
Position: %s based on the chemistry No. incorrect reagent information, for parameters;
or chemistry name. The example, the valid period of the reagent 2. Replace the reagent bottle,
bottle type is invalid. The exceeds specifications. or contact the reagent supplier
valid period is invalid. to replace.
C05003 Reagent bar code analysis N/A Reagent bar code is invalid. Wrong bar code is used and the system Replace the reagent bottle, or
error Position :%s The key for closing the bar cannot analyze the reagent information. contact the reagent supplier to
code is wrong and causes replace.
analysis failure.
10.6.8 Effect Detection

and Event Log
C09001 Effect check failed, CPS1: %s, N/A During effect detection, the 1. The substrate inventory or 1. Check the substrate inventory
CPS2: %s, CPS3: %s. CPS2\CPS3 luminescence cuvette inventory is and if substrate is expired.
value exceeds the range of insufficient. 2. Check if the dispensed
[2500, 6500] 2. Substrate goes bad. substrate is sufficient.
3. Dispensed substrate is 3. Replace the photometer.
abnormal.
4. Photometer is abnormal.
501
10.6.9 Shielding Cover Warning

and Event Log
C10001 The analysis is not permitted N/A N/A The transparent shielding cover is opened Restore the system after the
because the shielding cover is during the test. transparent shielding cover is
opened during operation. closed.
10.7 Instrument Fault List

In the event of any fault, the fault information will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen, and recorded in a fault log. In the fault log, fault
details can be queried.
10.7.1 Sample carousel fault

and Event Log
A50260 Sample carousel N/A During movement initialization, The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the home position optical
movement error the sample carousel runs the found during the calibration of the coupler of the sample carousel
maximum range, but the zero sample carousel. and motor cable.
position sensor (home position 1. The home position optical coupler of 2. Wipe the home position optical
optical coupler) cannot find the the sample carousel is damaged or coupler of the sample carousel.
jump edge. cable is loose. 3. Replace the home position
2. The home position optical coupler of optical coupler of the sample
the sample carousel is dirty, which carousel.
affects transparency effect. 4. Replace the sample carousel
3. The motor of the sample carousel is motor.
502
damaged or cable is loose.
A50262 The sample ERR Sample tube anti-bump coupler The anti-bump coupler of sample tube 1. Check the anti-bump coupler of
carousel signal is detected during sample is triggered. sample tube for any obstacle, and
movement was carousel movement. 1. The sample tube is not inserted check if the sample tube is
stopped urgently properly and it extrudes. inserted properly.
to prevent the 2. The anti-bump coupler cable of 2. Check the anti-bump coupler
sample tube sample tube is unconnected or cable and connector of sample
collision damaged. tube.
3. The anti-bump coupler of sample 3. Replace the anti-bump coupler
tube is clogged. of sample tube.
4. The anti-bump coupler of sample
tube is damaged.
10.7.2 Reagent carousel fault

and Event Log
A52270 The lid of the reagent ERR The reagent carousel lid is The reagent carousel lid is opened 1. Cover the reagent carousel lid.
carousel was opened opened before reagent carousel unexpectedly when the reagent 2. Check the sensor cable and
unexpectedly mixes or executes a command. carousel is running. connector of the reagent carousel
1. The reagent carousel lid is opened lid.
unexpectedly. 3. Replace the sensor of the
2. The sensor cable for the reagent reagent carousel lid.
carousel lid is loose or damaged.
3. The sensor for the reagent carousel
503
lid is damaged.
A52280 Reagent carousel N/A During movement initialization, The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check if the reagent bottle is
movement error the reagent carousel runs the found during the calibration of the installed wrongly or the reagent
maximum range, but the zero reagent carousel. bottle rotation resistance is large.
position sensor (home position 1. The reagent bottle is installed 2. Check the home position optical
optical coupler) cannot find the wrongly and causes the reagent coupler and motor cable of the
jump edge. carousel sticking. reagent carousel.
2. The home position optical coupler of 3. Wipe the home position optical
the reagent carousel is damaged or coupler of the reagent carousel.
cable is loose. 4. Replace the home position
3. The home position optical coupler of optical coupler of the reagent
the reagent carousel is dirty, which carousel.
affects transparency effect. 5. Replace the reagent carousel
4. The motor of the reagent carousel is motor.
A52281 Reagent carousel N/A During movement initialization, The status of the positioning sensor is 1. Check if the reagent bottle is
movement error the reagent carousel runs the incorrect when reagent carousel installed wrongly or the reagent
maximum range, but the zero moves. bottle rotation resistance is large.
position sensor (home position 1. The reagent bottle is installed 2. Check the coded disk optical
optical coupler) cannot find the wrongly and causes the reagent coupler and motor cable of the
jump edge. carousel sticking. reagent carousel.
2. The coded disk optical coupler of 3. Wipe the coded disk optical
the reagent carousel is damaged or coupler of the reagent carousel.
cable is loose. 4. Replace the coded disk optical
3. The coded disk optical coupler of coupler of the reagent carousel.
504
the reagent carousel is dirty, which 5. Replace the reagent carousel

affects transparency effect. motor.
4. The motor of the reagent carousel is
A52282 Reagent carousel ERR When mixing ends, the reagent Reagent carousel lost steps when 1. Check the tightness of the belt.
movement error carousel is reset. No optical moving. 2. Check if the reagent bottle is
coupler signal is found, and the 1. The belt tightness of the reagent installed wrongly or the reagent
zero position sensor (home carousel is not proper. bottle rotation resistance is large.
position optical coupler) cannot 2. The reagent bottle is installed
find the jump edge. wrongly and causes the reagent
carousel sticking.
10.7.3 Sampling probe fault

and Event Log
A51100 Probe vertical movement N/A During vertical movement The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the cable of the home
error initialization, the probe runs found during probe vertical movement position optical coupler, and
the maximum range, but the calibration. reinsert the cable to the connector
zero position sensor (home 1. The home position optical coupler is of the home position optical
position optical coupler) damaged or cable is loose during coupler.
cannot find the jump edge. probe vertical movement. 2. Check the cable of the motor,
2. The motor is damaged or cable is and reinsert the cable to the motor
loose during probe vertical movement. connector.
3. Replace the vertical drive
assembly of the probe.
505
A51101 Probe vertical movement SMP During probe vertical The status of the zero position sensor 1. Check the cable of the home
error B movement resetting, the zero is incorrect during probe vertical position optical coupler, and
position sensor (home resetting. reinsert the cable to the connector
position optical coupler) 1. The home position optical coupler is of the home position optical
cannot find the jump edge damaged or cable is loose during coupler.
within the estimated step probe vertical movement. 2. Check the cable of the motor,
range. 2. The motor is damaged or cable is and reinsert the cable to the motor
loose during probe vertical movement. connector.
3. Replace the vertical drive
A51121 Probe collision in a SMP During vertical movement, the The probe bumps with other objects 1. Check if samples in the cup are
sample position during B probe detects the jump of the when moving vertically in a sample sufficient.
vertical movement. collision sensor status and position. 2. If the sample position is
Sample position: XXX; sends three motor movement 1. The sample cup is empty. abnormal, resolve the abnormality,
sample ID/bar code: pulses consecutively to query 2. The sample position is abnormal, for for example, open the sample tube
XXX that the collision sensor example, the sample tube cap is not cap.
remains in the collision trigger opened. 3. If the horizontal position of the
status. 3. Horizontal position of the probe is probe is deviated, adjust the
deviated. horizontal position of the probe.
A51122 Probe collision in the RGT During vertical movement, the The probe bumps with other objects 1. Remove the aluminum foil from
reagent position during B probe detects the jump of the when moving vertically in the reagent the cross cut of the reagent
vertical movement. collision sensor status and position. compartment to ensure the cross
Reagent carousel sends three motor movement 1. The reagent position is abnormal, cut of the reagent compartment is
position: %s (for pulses consecutively to query for example, the reagent compartment normal.
example, 1); specific that the collision sensor is not opened. 2. If the horizontal position of the
506
position: %s (Cavity A of remains in the collision trigger 2. Horizontal position of the probe is probe is deviated, adjust the
reagent carousel/Cavity status. deviated. horizontal position of the probe.
B of reagent
carousel/Cavity C of
reagent carousel/Cavity
D of reagent carousel).
A51123 Probe collision in %s (left ERR During vertical movement, the The probe bumps with other objects 1. If the horizontal position of the
reaction liquid mixing probe detects the jump of the when moving vertically in the mixing probe is deviated, adjust the
position, right reaction collision sensor status and position. horizontal position of the probe.
liquid mixing position) sends three motor movement 1. Horizontal position of the probe is 2. If the vertical position of the
during vertical pulses consecutively to query deviated. probe is deviated, adjust the
movement that the collision sensor 2. Vertical position of the probe is vertical position of the probe.
remains in the collision trigger deviated.
status.
A51124 Collision encountered ERR During vertical movement, the The probe bumps with other objects 1. If the horizontal position of the
when the sample probe probe detects the jump of the when moving vertically in the wash probe is deviated, adjust the
moves vertically in the collision sensor status and position. horizontal position of the probe.
wash position sends three motor movement 1. Horizontal position of the probe is
pulses consecutively to query deviated.
that the collision sensor
remains in the collision trigger
status.
A51140 Probe horizontal N/A During horizontal movement The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the cable of the home
movement error initialization, the probe runs found during probe horizontal position optical coupler, and
the maximum range, but the movement calibration. reinsert the cable to the connector
zero position sensor (home 1. The home position optical coupler is of the home position optical
507
position optical coupler) damaged or cable is loose during coupler.

cannot find the jump edge. probe horizontal movement. 2. Check the cable of the motor,
loose during probe horizontal connector.
movement. 3. Confirm that the optical coupler
does not respond on the status
screen, and then replace the
probe.
4. Replace the horizontal drive
A51141 Probe horizontal N/A During horizontal movement The status of the positioning sensor is 1. Check the cable of the home
movement error initialization, the positioning incorrect during probe horizontal position optical coupler, and
sensor (coded disk optical movement. reinsert the cable to the connector
coupler) cannot find the jump 1. The coded disk optical coupler is of the home position optical
edge. damaged or cable is loose during coupler.
probe horizontal movement. 2. Check the cable of the motor,
loose during probe horizontal connector.
movement. 3. Confirm that the optical coupler
does not respond on the status
screen, and then replace the
probe.
4. Replace the horizontal drive
A51142 Probe horizontal ERR During probe movement, the Probe loses steps when moving 1. Check the tightness of the
movement error motor steps of the positioning horizontally. horizontal movement belt.
508
sensor (coded disk optical 1. The horizontal movement belt of the 2. Check if any foreign object
coupler) within a signal period probe is not proper. blocks the probe in horizontal
exceed the theoretical range 2. Probe is blocked in horizontal direction.
[75%, 130%]. direction.
A51160 Wash syringe movement N/A During movement The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the cable of the home
error initialization, the wash syringe found during wash syringe calibration. position optical coupler, and
runs the maximum range, but 1. The home position optical coupler of reinsert the cable to the connector
the zero position sensor the wash syringe is damaged or cable of the home position optical
(home position optical is loose. coupler.
coupler) cannot find the jump 2. The motor of the wash syringe is 2. Check the cable of the motor,
edge. damaged or cable is loose. and reinsert the cable to the motor
connector.
3. Replace the wash syringe
assembly.
A51161 Wash syringe movement ERR During movement resetting, The status of the zero position sensor 1. Check the cable of the home
error the wash syringe runs the is incorrect when wash syringe resets. position optical coupler, and
maximum range, but the zero 1. The home position optical coupler of reinsert the cable to the connector
position sensor (home the wash syringe is damaged or cable of the home position optical
position optical coupler) is loose. coupler.
cannot find the jump edge. 2. The motor of the wash syringe is 2. Check the cable of the motor,
damaged or cable is loose. and reinsert the cable to the motor
connector.
3. Replace the wash syringe
assembly.
A51170 Probe syringe N/A During movement The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the cable of the home
movement error initialization, the probe syringe found during probe syringe calibration. position optical coupler, and
509
runs the maximum range, but 1. The home position optical coupler of reinsert the cable to the connector
the zero position sensor the probe syringe is damaged or cable of the home position optical
(home position optical is loose. coupler.
coupler) cannot find the jump 2. The motor of the probe syringe is 2. Check the cable of the motor,
edge. damaged or cable is loose. and reinsert the cable to the motor
connector.
3. Replace the sample syringe
assembly.
A51171 Probe syringe ERR During movement resetting, The status of the zero position sensor 1. Check the cable of the home
movement error the probe syringe runs the is incorrect when probe syringe resets. position optical coupler, and
maximum range, but the zero 1. The home position optical coupler of reinsert the cable to the connector
position sensor (home the probe syringe is damaged or cable of the home position optical
position optical coupler) is loose. coupler.
cannot find the jump edge. 2. The motor of the probe syringe is 2. Check the cable of the motor,
damaged or cable is loose. and reinsert the cable to the motor
connector.
3. Replace the sample syringe
assembly.
A51180 Probe level detection ERR The serial port for the probe Probe level sense board 1. Check if the cable connection of
board communication level sense board does not communication error the level sense board is normal.
error respond within 1000 ms or the 1. The level sense board COM cable 2. Exclude external interference
response packet is wrong. is damaged or loose. source.
The error persists after 2. The instrument is interfered 3. Replace the level sense board.
retransmission twice. externally.
3. The level sense board is damaged.
510
A51181 Insufficient sample, SMP The level sense board does Sample probe failed to detect level 1. Check if a sample is placed in
Sample position: XXX, L not detect any level signal when aspirating. the sample position, and if the
Sample ID/bar code: when the sample probe 1. No sample is placed or no liquid is sample in the sample tube is
XXX moves from the initial position available in the sample tube. sufficient.
to the vertical limit position. 2. Level Sense Board goes wrong. 2. Replace the level sense board.
A51182 Sample is insufficient or SMP The level signal detected by The probe failed to aspirate the 1. Check if the sample in the
contains air bubbles, L the level sense board sample. sample tube is sufficient.
Position: XXX, Sample disappears after aspiration. 1. Insufficient sample. 2. Check if the swab leaks and if
ID/bar code: XXX 2. The waste drainage tube of the the liquid tube is loose or bent.
sampling probe swab is loose or bent, 3. Replace the level sense board.
causing the waste drainage capability
to reduce and the swab to leak.
3. The level sense board is damaged.
A51183 Reagent is insufficient or RGT The level sense board does Probe failed to aspirate the liquid. 1. Check if the reagent amount is
contains air bubbles. L not detect level signal after 1. The reagent amount displayed by proper, avoid tilting or drop, and
Reagent carousel aspiration. the software is inconsistent with that in avoid bottle that was used when
position: %s (for the bottle. loaded on another instrument.
example: 1) position: %s 2. The waste drainage tube of the 2. Replace the reagent bottle.
(Reagent bottle A sampling probe swab is loose or bent, 3. Check if the liquid tube is loose
cavity/Reagent bottle B causing the waste drainage capability or bent.
cavity/Reagent bottle C to reduce. 4. Replace the level sense board.
cavity/Reagent bottle D 3. The level sense board is damaged.
cavity)
A51184 The sampling probe and DTG When the aspirating probe 1. The probe detergent is empty or its 1. Check the inventory of the
aspirating probe failed to L aspirates the detergent, the inventory is less than the dead probe detergent, and reload the
detect liquid level when probe failed to detect the volume. probe detergent.
511
aspirating the detergent. liquid level after traveling the 2. The level sense board goes wrong. 2. Replace the level sense board.
maximum stroke.
A51186 Level detection N/A When a level detection Level detection calibration failed. 1. Check the connector
calibration failed. command is executed, the 1. The probe connector connected to connecting the probe and level
signal baseline of the level the level sense board is loose. sense board, and reconnect them.
detection capacitor cannot be 2. The level sense board goes wrong. 2. Replace the level sense board.
adjusted to the range of
[0x700, 0x900].
A51200 Sample is insufficient or SMP During probe aspiration, the 1. The sample contains clots, or is too 1. Check and replace the sample.
contains fibrins and L main control board analyzes thick or insufficient. 2. Wash and maintain the probe.
clots. Position: Sample the hydraulic pressure change 2. Probe is clogged. 3. Replace the hydraulic pressure
ID/bar code:/ in the tube, and determines 3. The hydraulic pressure sensor is sensor.
that the probe is clogged. damaged. 4. Replace the probe assembly.
A51220 Vortexer movement error N/A During movement The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the home position optical
initialization, the vortexer runs found during vortexer movement coupler of the vortexer and motor
the maximum range, but the calibration. cable.
zero position sensor (home 1. The home position optical coupler of 2. Wipe the home position optical
position optical coupler) the vortexer is damaged or cable is coupler of the vortexer.
cannot find the jump edge. loose. 3. Replace the vortexer assembly.
2. The home position optical coupler of
the vortexer is dirty, which affects
transparency effect.
3. The vortexer bearing gets rusty
which results in large resistance.
4. The motor of the vortexer is
512
A51221 Vortexer movement error ERR The vortexer moves at the Vortex speed is too low. 1. Check the tightness of the
theoretical speed, but it does 1. The vortexer belt is tight. vortexer belt.
not complete the required 2. The vortexer bearing gets rusty 2. Replace the vortexer assembly.
steps after the specified which results in large resistance.
period.
A51222 Vortexer movement error ERR The vortexer moves at the Vortex speed is too high. 1. Replace the vortexer assembly.
theoretical speed, but it 1. The vortexer bearing model is 2. Return the old assembly to the
completes the required steps wrong. production department for
before the specified period verification.
ends.
A51223 Vortexer movement error ERR During vortexer resetting, no The status of the zero position sensor 1. Check the home position optical
optical coupler signal is found, is incorrect during vortexer resetting. coupler of the vortexer and motor
and the zero position sensor 1. The home position optical coupler of cable.
(home position optical the vortexer is damaged or cable is 2. Wipe the home position optical
coupler) cannot find the jump loose. coupler of the vortexer.
edge. 2. The home position optical coupler of 3. Replace the vortexer assembly.
the vortexer is dirty, which affects
3. The vortexer bearing gets rusty
which results in large resistance.
4. The motor of the vortexer is
513
10.7.4 Light shield fault

and Event Log
A53300 Light shield movement error N/A During movement initialization, the The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the home position
shielding cover runs the maximum found during the vertical movement optical coupler and motor
range, but the zero position sensor calibration of the shading cover. cable of the shielding cover.
(home position optical coupler) 1. The home position optical 2. Wipe the home position
cannot find the jump edge. coupler is damaged or cable is optical coupler of the shielding
loose during shielding cover vertical cover.
movement. 3. Replace the shielding cover
2. The home position optical assembly.
coupler is dirty during shielding
cover vertical movement, which
affects transparency effect.
3. The motor is damaged or cable is
loose during shielding cover vertical
movement.
A53301 Light shield movement error N/A During movement initialization, the The status of the positioning sensor 1. Check the lower position
shielding cover runs the maximum is incorrect when the shading cover optical coupler and motor
range, but the positioning sensor moves vertically. cable of the shielding cover.
(lower position optical coupler) 1. The lower position optical coupler 2. Wipe the lower position
cannot find the jump edge. is damaged or cable is loose during optical coupler of the shielding
shielding cover vertical movement. cover.
2. The lower position optical coupler 3. Replace the shielding cover
is dirty during shielding cover assembly.
514
vertical movement, which affects

movement.
A53302 Light shield movement error ERR The zero position sensor (home The status of the zero position 1. Check the home position
position optical coupler) signal and sensor is incorrect when the optical coupler and motor
block status are inconsistent when shading cover moves vertically. cable of the shielding cover.
the shielding cover moves to the 1. The home position optical 2. Wipe the home position
upper position. coupler is damaged or cable is optical coupler of the shielding
loose during shielding cover vertical cover.
movement. 3. Replace the shielding cover
2. The home position optical assembly.
coupler is dirty during shielding
cover vertical movement, which
movement.
A53303 Light shield movement error ERR The positioning sensor (lower The status of the positioning sensor 1. Check the lower position
position optical coupler) signal and is incorrect when the shading cover optical coupler and motor
block status are inconsistent when moves vertically. cable of the shielding cover.
the shielding cover moves to the 1. The lower position optical coupler 2. Wipe the lower position
lower position. is damaged or cable is loose during optical coupler of the shielding
shielding cover vertical movement. cover.
2. The lower position optical coupler 3. Replace the shielding cover
515
is dirty during shielding cover assembly.

vertical movement, which affects
movement.
10.7.5 Photometer fault

and Event Log
A54401 Failed to turn on ERR After the PMT high voltage is 1. The wires are not properly connected. 1. Check the PMT cable
photometer PMT turned on, the high voltage AD is 2. Power supply conversion board is damaged. connection.
module checked to 0. 3. The photon counting board is damaged or its 2. Check the PMT analog
logic is corrupted. power voltage. If it is abnormal,
replace the power supply
conversion board.
3. Replace the PMT assembly.
A54402 Failed to turn on N/A After the LED is turned on, the 1. The wires are not properly connected. 1. Check the PMT cable
the LED. LED AD is checked less than 200 2. LED assembly is damaged. connection.
A54403 Failed to turn off N/A After the LED is turned on, the 1. Communication error. 1. Check the PMT cable
the LED. LED AD is checked greater than 2. LED assembly is damaged. connection.
200 2. Replace the PMT assembly.
A54404 DCF is out of N/A DCF is out of the range [0.6, 1.7]. Photometer is aged. Replace the PMT assembly.
range.
516
A54405 DCF is violently N/A The ratio of the new DCF to the old Photometer is aged. Replace the PMT assembly.
fluctuating. DCF is out of the range [0.95,
1.05].
A54406 Dark count is out N/A Dark count is greater than 600. 1. The wires are not properly connected. 1. Check the PMT cable
of range 2. The shielding cover is not tightly closed. connection.
2. The photon counting board is damaged or its 2. Readjust the vertical
logic is corrupted. position of the shielding cover.
A54407 The photometer N/A Dark current is greater than 200. 1. PD pre-amplification board is aged. 1. Replace the PMT assembly.
dark current is
high.
A54408 The photometer N/A Dark current is smaller than 0. 1. Power supply conversion board is damaged. 1. Check the PMT analog
dark current is 2. PD pre-amplification board is aged. power voltage. If it is abnormal,
low. replace the power supply
conversion board.
A54409 Photon counting ERR The response duration to the 1. The wires are not properly connected. 1. Check the PMT cable
board photon counting board command is 2. The photon counting board is damaged or its connection.
communication 85 ms, and the error persists after logic is corrupted. 2. Replace the PMT assembly.
fault retransmission twice.
10.7.6 Gripper fault

and Event Log
517
A55500 Gripper movement error N/A During X-axis movement The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the home position
in X-axis direction initialization, the gripper runs found during gripper X-axis movement optical coupler and motor
zero position sensor (home 1. The home position optical coupler is 2. Wipe the home position
position optical coupler) cannot damaged or cable is loose. optical coupler.
find the jump edge. 2. The home position optical coupler is 3. Replace the gripper X-axis
dirty, which affects transparency effect. assembly.
loose.
A55501 Gripper movement error N/A During Y-axis movement The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the home position
in Y-axis direction initialization, the gripper runs found during gripper Y-axis movement optical coupler and motor
find the jump edge. 2. The home position optical coupler is 3. Replace the gripper Y-axis
loose.
A55502 Gripper vertical N/A During vertical movement The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the home position
movement error initialization, the gripper runs found during gripper vertical movement optical coupler and motor
find the jump edge. 2. The home position optical coupler is 3. Replace the gripper Z-axis
518
loose.
A55503 Gripper finger movement N/A During finger movement The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the home position
error initialization, the gripper runs found during gripper finger movement optical coupler and motor
find the jump edge. 2. The home position optical coupler is 3. Replace the gripper finger
loose.
A55504 Gripper movement error N/A During X-axis movement The status of the positioning sensor is 1. Check the coded disk optical
in X-axis direction initialization, the gripper runs incorrect when the gripper moves in X coupler and motor cable.
the maximum range, but the axis. 2. Wipe the coded disk optical
positioning sensor (coded disk 1. The coded disk optical coupler is coupler.
optical coupler) cannot find the damaged or cable is loose. 3. Replace the gripper X-axis
jump edge. 2. The coded disk optical coupler is dirty, assembly.
which affects transparency effect.
loose.
A55505 Gripper movement error N/A During Y-axis movement The status of the positioning sensor is 1. Check the coded disk optical
in Y-axis direction initialization, the gripper runs incorrect when the gripper moves in Y coupler and motor cable.
the maximum range, but the axis. 2. Wipe the coded disk optical
positioning sensor (coded disk 1. The coded disk optical coupler is coupler.
optical coupler) cannot find the damaged or cable is loose. 3. Replace the gripper Y-axis
jump edge. 2. The coded disk optical coupler is dirty, assembly.
519
which affects transparency effect.

loose.
A55506 Gripper vertical N/A The positioning sensor (middle The status of the positioning sensor is 1. Check the middle position
movement error position optical coupler) signal incorrect when the gripper moves optical coupler and motor
and block status are vertically. cable.
inconsistent when the gripper 1. The middle position optical coupler is 2. Wipe the middle position
moves to the vertical middle damaged or cable is loose. optical coupler.
position. 2. The middle position optical coupler is 3. Replace the gripper Z-axis
loose.
A55507 Gripper finger movement N/A During finger movement The status of the positioning sensor is 1. Check the cam optical
error initialization, the positioning incorrect during the movement of the coupler and motor cable.
sensor (cam optical coupler) gripper fingers. 2. Wipe the cam optical
cannot find the jump edge. 1. The cam optical coupler is damaged or coupler.
cable is loose. 3. Replace the gripper finger
2. The cam optical coupler is dirty, which assembly.
loose.
A55530 Gripper movement error ERR During gripper X-axis Gripper loses steps when moving in X- 1. Check the tightness of the
in X-axis direction movement, the motor steps of axis direction. belt.
the positioning sensor (coded 1. The belt tightness is not proper. 2. Check if the gripper arm rubs
disk optical coupler) within a 2. The gripper arm rubs in the X-axis in the X-axis direction.
signal period exceed the direction. 3. Replace the gripper X-axis
520
theoretical range [75%, 130%]. assembly.
A55531 Gripper movement error ERR During gripper Y-axis Gripper loses steps when moving in Y- 1. Check the tightness of the
in Y-axis direction movement, the motor steps of axis direction. belt.
the positioning sensor (coded 1. The belt tightness is not proper. 2. Lubricate the movement
disk optical coupler) within a 2. Gripper is blocked in Y-axis direction. guide rail.
signal period exceed the 3. Replace the gripper Y-axis
theoretical range [75%, 130%]. assembly.
A55532 Gripper vertical ERR The actual running steps of the Step loss occurs when the gripper moves 1. Check the tightness of the
movement error gripper motor in vertical in Z axis. belt.
direction exceed the maximum 1. The belt tightness is not proper. 2. Replace the gripper Z-axis
theoretical running steps. assembly.
A55540 Gripper collision during ERR Anti-bump optical coupler 1. The gripper position is deviated. 1. Check if the gripper fingers
vertical movement signal is triggered when the 2. The anti-bump optical coupler of the are vertical.
gripper moves in the vertical gripper goes wrong. 2. Check if the gripper position
direction. is deviated. If yes, readjust the
gripper.
3. Replace the gripper finger
assembly.
A55561 No cuvette during CVT When a gripping command is The cuvette is deformed or the gripper 1. Check if a cuvette is
cuvette gripping of the M executed, the gripper moves fingers do not move vertically. The available in the gripping
gripper. Specific vertically to the gripping cuvette is adhered the hole of tray or position.
position: %s (right position and closes fingers. hardware goes wrong. 2. Check if the gripper position
cuvette pack position, Query the empty gripping is deviated. If yes, readjust the
left cuvette pack optical coupler. If the optical gripper.
position) coupler is in the block status, no 3. Maintain the gripper.
521
cuvette is available.
A55562 The gripper grips nothing CVT When a gripping command is The cuvette is deformed or the gripper 1. Check if a cuvette is
when gripping cuvettes. M executed, the gripper moves fingers do not move vertically. The available in the gripping
Specific position: %s vertically to the gripping cuvette is adhered the hole of tray or position.
(right cuvette pack position to grip a cuvette and hardware goes wrong. 2. Check if the gripper position
position, left cuvette then moves vertically to the top. is deviated. If yes, readjust the
pack position, right Query the empty gripping gripper.
reaction liquid mixing optical coupler. If the optical 3. Maintain the gripper.
position, left reaction coupler is in the block status,
liquid mixing position, the gripper grips nothing.
substrate mixing
position, dispersion IO
position, photometric
position, waste drainage
position, and incubation
position).
A55563 Gripper losing the ERR The gripper moves to the The cuvette is deformed or the gripper 1. Readjust the gripper.
cuvette destination position. Query the fingers do not move vertically. The 2. Maintain the gripper.
empty gripping optical coupler. cuvette is adhered the hole of tray or
If the optical coupler is in the hardware goes wrong.
block status, the cuvette is
dropped.
A55564 Cuvette is adhering to ERR When a release command is The cuvette is deformed or the gripper 1. Maintain the gripper.
Gripper. Position: %s executed, the gripper releases, fingers do not move vertically. The
(dispersion carousel, moves vertically to the top, and cuvette is adhered the hole of tray or
522
hole position) closes fingers. Query the empty hardware goes wrong.
gripping optical coupler. If the
optical coupler is in the unblock
status, a cuvette is stuck to the
gripper.
10.7.7 Dispersion fault

and Event Log
A58600 Dispersion carousel N/A During movement initialization, the The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the home position
movement error dispersion carousel runs the found during dispersion carousel optical coupler and motor
maximum range, but the zero movement calibration. cable of the dispersion
position sensor (home position 1. The home position optical coupler of carousel.
optical coupler) cannot find the the dispersion carousel is damaged or 2. Wipe the home position
jump edge. cable is loose. optical coupler of the
2. The home position optical coupler of dispersion carousel.
the dispersion carousel is dirty, which 3. Replace the dispersion
affects transparency effect. carousel assembly.
3. The motor of dispersion carousel is
A58601 Dispersion carousel N/A During vertical movement The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the cable of the
vertical movement initialization, the dispersion found during dispersion carousel home position optical
error carousel runs the maximum range, vertical movement calibration. coupler, and reinsert the
but the zero position sensor (home 1. The home position optical coupler is cable to the connector of the
position optical coupler) cannot find damaged or cable is loose during home position optical
523
the jump edge. dispersion carousel vertical coupler.

movement. 2. Check the cable of the
2. The motor is damaged or cable is motor, and reinsert the cable
loose during dispersion carousel to the motor connector.
vertical movement. 3. Replace the dispersion
carousel assembly.
A58602 Dispersion syringe N/A During movement initialization, the The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the cable of the
movement error dispersion syringe runs the found during the calibration of the home position optical
maximum range, but the zero dispersion syringe. coupler, and reinsert the
position sensor (home position 1. The home position optical coupler of cable to the connector of the
optical coupler) cannot find the the dispersion syringe is damaged or home position optical
jump edge. cable is loose. coupler.
2. The motor of dispersion syringe is 2. Check the cable of the
damaged or cable is loose. motor, and reinsert the cable
to the motor connector.
3. Replace the dispersion
syringe assembly.
A58603 Dispersion carousel ERR During vertical movement The mechanical zero position is not 1. Check the cable of the
vertical movement resetting, the dispersion carousel found during dispersion carousel home position optical
error runs the maximum range, but the vertical movement resetting. coupler, and reinsert the
zero position sensor (home 1. The home position optical coupler is cable to the connector of the
position optical coupler) cannot find damaged or cable is loose during home position optical
the jump edge. dispersion carousel vertical coupler.
movement. 2. Check the cable of the
2. The motor is damaged or cable is motor, and reinsert the cable
loose during dispersion carousel to the motor connector.
524
vertical movement. 3. Replace the dispersion

carousel assembly.
A58604 Dispersion syringe ERR During movement resetting, the The status of the zero position sensor 1. Check the cable of the
movement error dispersion syringe runs the is incorrect when dispersion syringe home position optical
maximum range, but the zero resets. coupler, and reinsert the
position sensor (home position 1. The home position optical coupler of cable to the connector of the
optical coupler) cannot find the the dispersion syringe is damaged or home position optical
jump edge. cable is loose. coupler.
2. The motor of dispersion syringe is 2. Check the cable of the
damaged or cable is loose. motor, and reinsert the cable
to the motor connector.
3. Replace the dispersion
syringe assembly.
A58610 Dispersion carousel ERR The actual steps the dispersion Dispersion carousel lost steps when 1. Check the tightness of the
movement error carousel runs when rotating to the moving. belt.
target position are 80 steps more 1. The belt tightness of the dispersion 2. Check if any foreign object
than the theoretical calculation carousel is not proper. blocks the dispersion
value. 2. The dispersion carousel is blocked. carousel.
3. Lubricate the rotating axis.
A58660 Vacuum creation N/A Open the vacuum pump to The dispersion vacuum pump or 1. Check the dispersion
failure pressurize. The target pressure is solenoid valve SV06, SV07, SV08, or vacuum pump, and replace
[-23, -24] KPa. Six seconds later, SV09 is damaged, or the vacuum the faulty vacuum pump.
query the pressure value which tubing leaks. 2. Check the solenoid valve
exceeds the range [-20, -27] KPa. SV06, SV07, SV08 or SV09,
and replace the faulty
solenoid valve.
525
3. Check the vacuum tubing.
A58661 Vacuum holding N/A Pressurize to [-23, -24] KPa, and The dispersion vacuum pump or 1. Check the dispersion
failure close the vacuum pump. 6.5 solenoid valve SV06, SV07, SV08, vacuum pump, and replace
seconds later, query the pressure SV09, or SV23 is damaged, or the the faulty vacuum pump.
value which exceeds the range [- vacuum tubing leaks. 2. Check the solenoid valve
8.9, -27] KPa. SV06, SV07, SV08 or SV09,
and replace the faulty
solenoid valve.
3. Check the vacuum tubing.
A58670 Probe clogging in %s N/A Pressurize to [-23, -24] KPa, close The liquid in the aspirating probe is 1. Check if the tubing is
(phase 1 dispersion the vacuum pump, and then open crystallized, or a probe clogging clogged.
aspirating probe, the phase 1 drainage probe, phase detection error occurs. 2. Check the solenoid valve
phase 2 dispersion 2 drainage probe, phase 3 SV06, SV07, SV08 ， and
aspirating probe, drainage probe. 5 seconds later, replace the faulty solenoid
phase 3 dispersion query the pressure value which is valve.
aspirating probe, lower than -9.7 KPa.
waste drainage
probe).
10.7.8 Hydropneumatic system fault

and Event Log
A59290 Ultrahigh hydraulic ERR If the main control board Ultrahigh hydraulic pressure of the probe tubing 1. Check if the liquid tubing is
pressure of the probe detects that the hydraulic 1. The liquid tubing is bent. bent.
tubing pressure exceeds the threshold 2. Probe is clogged. 2. Replace the probe
526
P0 (triple of the standard 3. The hydraulic pressure sensor is damaged. assembly.

atmospheric pressure) for over 3. Replace the hydraulic
100 ms, the main control board pressure sensor.
stops sequence execution and
reports an alarm.
A59001 Wash buffer is N/A Available wash buffer inventory Wash buffer is insufficient. 1. Check the inventory of the
insufficient. is less than 15% (the wash wash buffer, and reload new
buffer tank detects bubbles and wash buffer.
considers the wash buffer is 2. If the wash buffer
unavailable). inventory is sufficient but
bubbles are detected,
manually restore the wash
buffer.
A59012 No wash buffer is DBL The two wash buffer tanks are No wash buffer is available 1. Check the inventory of the
available unavailable, or available wash wash buffer, and reload new
buffer inventory is 0 (the wash wash buffer.
buffer tank detects bubbles and 2. If the wash buffer
considers the wash buffer is inventory is sufficient but
unavailable). bubbles are detected,
manually restore the wash
buffer.
A59014 The waste tank is full. N/A The waste floater trigger signal 1. The waste tank is full. 1. Clear the waste tank.
is detected for 60 consecutive 2. The waste floater connection is improper. 2. Reconnect the waste
seconds. 3.The waste floater goes wrong. floater cable.
3. Replace the waste floater
sensor.
527
A59015 Bubbles in wash N/A Bubble ratio is measured when Bubbles are detected in wash solution tank 1. 1. Check the inventory of the
solution tank 1 a syringe aspirates wash buffer wash buffer, and reload new
from tank 1. The bubble wash buffer.
amount is the product of the 2. If the wash buffer
bubble ratio multiplied by inventory is sufficient but
aspiration amount. If the bubble bubbles are detected,
amount is greater than 50uL, manually restore the wash
bubbles are detected. buffer.
3. If the software is unable to
identify whether bubbles
exist, replace the liquid
detection board.
A59016 Bubbles in wash N/A Bubble ratio is measured when Bubbles are detected in wash solution tank 2. 1. Check the inventory of the
solution tank 2 a syringe aspirates wash buffer wash buffer, and reload new
from tank 2. The bubble wash buffer.
amount is the product of the 2. If the wash buffer
bubble ratio multiplied by inventory is sufficient but
aspiration amount. If the bubble bubbles are detected,
amount is greater than 50uL, manually restore the wash
bubbles are detected. buffer.
3. If the software is unable to
identify whether bubbles
exist, replace the liquid
detection board.
A59017 Substrate bottle %s CSD Bubble ratio is measured when The substrate is used up or the substrate tubing 1. Check if substrate tubing
(L, R) in use, bubbles B a quantifying pump aspirates leaks. is normal.
528
in the substrate substrate from the substrate 2. Load the new substrate,
tubing bottle. The bubble amount is and manually restore the
the product of the bubble ratio substrate.
multiplied by aspiration 3. If the software is unable to
amount. If the bubble amount is identify whether bubbles
greater than 60uL, bubbles are exist, replace the liquid
detected. detection board.
A59018 Bubbles detected in N/A Bubble ratio is measured when The substrate is used up or the substrate tubing 1. Check if substrate tubing
substrate L a quantifying pump aspirates leaks. is normal.
substrate from the substrate 2. Load the new substrate,
bottle. The bubble amount is and manually restore the
A59019 Bubbles detected in N/A Bubble ratio is measured when The substrate is used up or the substrate tubing 1. Check if substrate tubing
substrate R a quantifying pump aspirates leaks. is normal.
substrate from the substrate 2. Load the new substrate,
bottle. The bubble amount is and manually restore the
529
A59291 Hydraulic sensor ERR The hydraulic pressure P1 is The hydraulic pressure sensor is damaged. Replace the hydraulic
failure collected when the sample pressure sensor.
probe tubing is still during
working, the mean value is not
in the range of (-40,40) Kpa or
its SD is not in the range of [0,5]
Kpa; the hydraulic pressure P2
is collected when the sample
probe tubing is still in the test
preparation, and the difference
between P1 and P2 is not in the
range of (-20, 20) Kpa.
A59292 Abnormal cleanser ERR The difference between the 1. The wires of hydraulic pressure sensor are 1. Check the wires of the
pressure inside the hydraulic mean values before loose. hydraulic pressure sensor.
sample probe and after the inner wall cleaning 2. The tubing of the sample probe is loose. 2. Check the tubing of the
is less than 70 KPa. sample probe.
A59293 Abnormal negative ERR The slope of the data from the 1. The wires of the waste pump of the sample 1. Check the wires of the
pressure of cleanser start to the end of the inner wall probe are loose. waste pump of the sample
2. The waste pump of the sample probe is probe.
inside the sample cleaning is greater than -0.1.
damaged. 2. Check if the fluidic
probe tubing of the sample probe
3. The fluidic tubing of the sample probe is loose.
is loose.
3. Check the waste pump of
the sample probe, and
replace the faulty waste
pump.
530
A59662 Probe clogging in N/A Establish the pressure to [-23, - The waste drainage probe is crystallized and 1. Check if the waste
waste drainage probe 24] KPa. Turn off the vacuum clogged or the tubing is bent. drainage tubing is clogged
or bent.
pump and open solenoid valve
2. Check solenoid valve
SV09. After waiting for 5
SV09 and replace the faulty
seconds, inquire that the
one.
pressure is lower than -9.7
KPa.
A59663 Abnormal N/A Establish the vacuum pressure The condensate drainage channel is clogged. 1. Remove the kit in idle
condensing water to [-30, -32] KPa, and then and store it in a 2-8℃
environment.
drainage tube open valves 10 and 13 to dain
2. Check if the condensate
the condensate for 2 seconds,
drainage tubing is clogged.
and check that the vacuum
3. Check solenoid valves
pressure is lower than -32 kPa.
SV10 and SV13, and replace
the faulty one(s).
10.7.9 Temperature Control & Voltage & Current Fault

and Event Log
A60700 Incubation block TNN The incubation block temperature 1. The ambient temperature is out of the range. 1. Check if the ambient
temperature out is queried every 20 seconds and it 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong temperature is out of range
of range exceeds the range [36.7, 37.3]°C (component error or cable error). [10, 30]°C.
for three consecutive times. 3. The heater goes wrong (component error or 2. Replace the incubation
cable error). module assembly.
4. The main control board goes wrong. 3. Replace the main control
board.
531
A60701 The temperature N/A The incubation module 1. The temperature sensor goes wrong 1. Replace the incubation
sensor of the temperature sensor is (component error or cable error). module assembly.
incubation disconnected or short circuited. 2. The main control board goes wrong. 2. Replace the main control
module board.
encountered an
error
A61730 Reagent N/A The reagent carousel refrigeration 1. The ambient temperature is out of the range. 1. Check if the ambient
refrigeration temperature is queried every 20 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong temperature is out of range
temperature is seconds and it exceeds the range (component error or cable error). [10, 30]°C.
out of range [2.0, 10.0]°C for three consecutive 3. The radiator goes wrong (component error or 2. Check if the temperature
times. cable error). read from the temperature
4. The fan goes wrong (component error or sensor is normal. If not,
cable error). replace the temperature
5. The dust screen is dirty and clogged. sensor.
6. The main control board goes wrong. 3. Check if the radiator
current is normal. If not,
replace the radiator.
4. Check the hot- and cold-
end fans. If they stop,
replace the fans.
5. Clean the dust screen.
6. Replace the main control
board.
A61731 The temperature N/A The reagent refrigeration 1. The temperature sensor goes wrong 1.Remove the kit in idle
sensor of the temperature sensor is (component error or cable error). and store it in a 2-8℃
environment.
reagent disconnected or short circuited. 2. The main control board goes wrong.
532
refrigeration 2. Replace the

temperature sensor.
encountered an
error 3. Replace the main control
board.
A62761 Power 24 V N/A The power 12 V voltage is queried A power error occurs. Replace the power
voltage out of every 60 seconds, to determine if it assembly.
range exceeds the range [20, 30] V.
A62762 Power 12V N/A The power 24V voltage is queried A power error occurs. Replace the power
voltage out of every 60 seconds, to determine if it assembly.
range exceeds the range [11, 13] V.
A62771 Hot-end fan 1 N/A The hot-end fan 1 rotates at a 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Remove the kit in idle
abnormal speed smaller than 1000 r/s. 2. The fan is damaged. and store it in a 2-8℃
environment.
2. Replace the hot-end fan
assembly.
environment.
assembly.
environment.
assembly.
533
A62774 Cold-end fan 1 N/A The cold-end fan rotates at a 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Remove the kit in idle
environment.
2. Replace the cold-end fan
assembly.
A62781 Cooler 1 current N/A Radiator 1 current exceeds the 1. The radiator goes wrong (component error or 1. Remove the kit in idle
abnormal range [3, 6.6]A. cable error). and store it in a 2-8℃
environment.
2. Replace the radiator.
A62782 Cooler 2 current N/A Radiator 2 current exceeds the 1. The radiator goes wrong (component error or 1. Remove the kit in idle
abnormal range [3, 6.6]A. cable error). and store it in a 2-8℃
environment.
2. Replace the radiator.
10.7.10 Communication fault

and Event Log
A71701 Abnormal communication N/A A single command for controlling the 1. The LED dashboard cable is not 1. Check and reconnect
with LED dashboard LED dashboard status times out 300 connected or is damaged. the cable.
ms, and no response is returned 2. The LED dashboard is damaged. 2. Replace the LED
after retransmission twice. dashboard.
A71702 Bar code reader N/A A handshake command for the bar 1. The bar code reader cable is not 1. Check and reconnect
communication error code reader times out 300 ms, and connected or is damaged. the cable.
no response is returned after 2. The bar code reader is damaged. 2. Replace the bar code
retransmission twice. reader.
534
10.7.11 Other fault

and Event Log
A22039 Unmatched software N/A The detected instrument version 1. Executing version query instruction 1. Re-upgrade the control
version. of the software does not match failed. software of the instrument.
the expected version. 2. Returned control software version does 2. Restart the instrument and
not match that stored in the operating operating software.
software. 3. Replace the component
whose version result is
0.0.0.0.
A90999 System failure ERR A failure occurs unexpectedly. 1. The sample probe interferes with the 1. Save a log file and send the
The following interferences occur vortexer. log file to an R&D engineer for
to protect mechanical parts: 2. The sample probe interferes with the analysis.
1. The sample probe interferes sample carousel. 2. Restart the operating
with the vortexer. 3. The sample probe interferes with the software and instrument.
2. The sample probe interferes reagent carousel.
with the sample carousel. 4. The gripper interferes with the vortexer.
3. The sample probe interferes 5. The gripper interferes with the dispersion
with the reagent carousel. carousel.
4. The gripper interferes with the 6. The gripper interferes with the shielding
vortexer. cover.
5. The gripper interferes with the 7.Software BUG
dispersion carousel.
6. The gripper interferes with the
shielding cover.
535
11 Assembly Exploded Views

11.1 Overview
This section shows the diagram and Order Number for each assembly. Such information can
help engineer order and change the parts.
NOTE
All the Order Numbers in the tables below are intended for engineer to query the order number.
When you order spare parts, please use the order number in the spare parts list from Mindray.
If the Order Number is shown as /, that means the part cannot be ordered as a spare part. It is
intended to help reader understand the machine.
Tubes or connectors are not mention in this section. Please refer to the liquid system section.
11.2 Instrument Panels Exploded

11.2.1 The Base of Adjust Foot
No. Order Number Part name Quantity Remark

1 041-024905-00 The Base of Adjust Foot 1 /
536
11.2.2 Front Panels
2
1 042-020044-00 Front left door 1 /
2 042-020870-00 Base plate of right front cover 1
/
SS
537
11.2.3 Back Panels

1 048-004808-00 Dust-proof Net 1 /
2 042-020026-00 Rear cover 1 /
538
11.2.4 Left Side Panels

1 042-020010-00 Left down cover 1 /
539
11.2.5 Right Side Panels
1 048-007365-00 Dust-proof Net 1 /
2 042-020017-00 Right down cover 1 /
3 / Hot plate 1 /
540
11.2.6 Top Panels
4
8
7
5
6

1 042-020020-00 Top cover 1 /
2 115-044904-00 Front display ofasm 1 115-044904-
(115-058862-00) 00(900i)
115-058862-
00(960i)
541
3 043-007846-00 Transparent cover 1 /
4 043-007845-00 Left face board 1 /
5 043-007844-00 Left front face board 1 /
6 115-052640-00 Front panel assembly 1 /
7 115-050205-00 Sample rack cover 1
/
assembly
8 115-039774-00 Reagent small cover 1 /
11.2.7 Front display ofasm

1 051-002796-00 BM50 Indicate Board PCBA 1 /
2 M6P-020001--- Lock Catch (White) 3 /
3 011-000054-00 Reflective Photosensor 1 Sensor for front
(Long Distance) vertical plate open or
close
542
11.2.8 Front panel assembly
5
2
3 4
543
1 010-000114-00 Switch (φ16mm, with 5
/
yellow LED)
2 010-000287-00 Switch green light 1
/
φ22mmACN/ADC24V
3 115-050203-00 Opposite optical sensor 1 Left sensor for sample
assembly, left tube anti-collision
4 115-050204-00 Opposite optical sensor 1 Right sensor for sample
assembly，right tube anti-collision
5 024-000145-00 Reagent Carousel 2 Open/close sensor for
proximity sensor reagent carousel cover
and sample rack cover
544
11.3 Front Assembly Exploded

11.3.1 The Drawer Cover Assembly
5
1
2
545
1 011-000054-00 Reflective Photosensor 2
/
(Long Distance)
2 010-000114-00 Switch (φ16mm, with yellow 5
/
LED)
3 / The Jointing for Drawer 1 /
4 M6P-020001--- Lock Catch (White) 3 /
5 115-028562-00 Lock Catch Assembly 1 /
6 / The Bracket for Lock 1 /
11.3.2 Cuvette Loader Unit
Order Quantity
No. Part name Remark
Number
1 / Cuvette Loader Unit 1 /
546
Cuvette Loader Unit

1 024-000342-00 Electromagnet 2 /
2 / Drawer Unit 1 /
3 009-002204-00 Wire of Optical Switch(s) 14 /
547
11.3.3 Mechanical Arm
Order Quantity
Number
1 / Mechanical Arm 1 /
548
Y-axis Assembly
3
2

1 115-028539-00 Manipulator Y axis driving 1
/
motor assembly
3 051-001874-00 Y-FPC Cable 1 /
4 115-028540-00 Y-axis Driven Wheel 1
/
Assembly
5 031-000308-00 Belt for manipulator Y axis 1
/
driving
549
X-axis Assembly
1 2 3

1 051-001034-00 BM10 photo and connector 4
/
board PCBA
2 115-028542-01 X-axis driven wheel assembly 1 /
3 051-001875-00 X-FPC Cable 1 /
4 115-011981-00 Track open-close motor and 1
/
belt wheel
5 031-000309-00 Belt for manipulator X axis 1
/
driving
550
Z-axis Assembly
7 6
1
3
3 4

1 051-001873-00 Z-FPC Cable 1 /
2 115-011977-00 Manipulator assembly 1 /
3 051-001034-00 BM10 photo and connector 4
/
board PCBA
4 051-001875-00 X-FPC Cable 1 /
5 033-000161-00 Z Axis Sub-weight Spring 1 /
6 115-011981-00 Track open-close motor 1
/
and belt wheel
7 033-000162-00 Vertical Anti-collision Spring 1 /
551
Manipulator assembly
2
2 3
552
1 033-000152-00 Finger Orientation Spring 1 /
2 051-001034-00 BM10 photo and 4
/
connector board PCBA
3 033-000151-00 Manipulator Spring 1 /
11.3.4 Reagent/sample Disk Assembly
Order Quantity
Number
1 / Reagent/sample Disk Assembly 1 /
553
Reagent/sample Disk Assembly -Front side
554
8
9
10

1 Sample rack (for sample 1
115-049091-00 /
position 1-10)
115-052021-00 /
position 11-20)
115-052022-00 /
position 21-30)
115-052023-00 /
position 31-40)
115-052024-00 /
position 41-50)
6 / Detergent plate 1 /
7 023-001556-00 Laser Barcode Scan 1 /
8 115-049070-00 Reagent refrigeration fan 1
/
assembly
9 024-000110-00 Reagent Temperature 1
/
Sensor
10 115-044665-00 Reagent carousel driving 1
/
motor assembly
555
Reagent/sample Disk Assembly -Front side
7
1
1 2
4
6
5

2 115-050185-00 Sample rack driving motor 1 Sample rack driving
assembly motor with gear
3 BA34-20-63593 Glass window 1 Glass plate on barcode
scanning window
4 047-021328-00 Hot end thermal pad 2 Replace the new one
during replace the
Peltier
5 047-018132-00 Cold end thermal pad 2 Replace the new one
during replace the
Peltier
556
6 115-053192-00 Peltier Cooler BM50 2 Peltier on bottom of
reagent carousel,
include 1 Pcs cold end
thermal pad and 1 pcs
hot end thermal pad.
7 031-000126-00 Belt for reagent carousel 1
/
driving
11.3.5 Sampling probe drive assembly
557
Order Quantity
Number
1 / Sampling probe drive assembly 1 /
2 / Horizontal drive assembly 1 /
3 / Vertical Sampling Drive 1 Without vertical
Assembly movement assembly
558
Horizontal drive assembly
1
3
1
4

2 115-039691-00 Probe horizontal driving 1
/
motor assembly
3 031-000478-00 Belt for sampling probe 1
/
horizontal driving
4 115-039692-00 Driven wheel assembly for 1
/
sampling probe horizental
559
Vertical Sampling Drive Assembly
3
5

1 041-031527-00 Sampling probe washer 1 /
2 115-039693-00 Probe vertical driving motor 1
/
assembly
3 801-3003-00015-00 Syringe Motor Position 4
/
Sensor Assembly
4 031-000365-00 Belt for sampling probe 1
/
vertical driving
5 / Assembly of z axis slave 1
/
belt wheel
560
Vertical Movement Assembly
4 3

1 115-039761-00 Sample probe assembly 1 /
2 051-002938-00 BM50 Liquid Level Detect 1
/
Board
3 033-000108-00 Spring for sampling probe 2
/
anti-collision
4 041-004625-00 Spring Pole 2 /
561
11.3.6 Mixing And Washing Unit

1 115-040747-00 Mixing and washing unit 1 Include the mixing
motor, belt, cuvette
holder and probe
washing bath
562
11.3.7 Reaction Module And PMT
1 3
Order Quantity
Number
1 115-061110- Reaction module(FRU) 1
/
00
563
Order Quantity
Number
2 115-043226- Optical Assembly 1
/
00
3 041-004703- Heat Insulation Ring for 1
/
00 PMT Module
11.3.8 Drain Waste Assembly
564

1 082-002841-00 Waste draining probe 1 /
3 031-000312-00 Belt for waste draining 1
/
assembly driving
4 115-050368-00 Waste draining probe 1
/
driving motor assembly
565
11.3.9 Magnetic Separation Assembly
Order Quantity
Number
1 / Magnetic separation aspirating 1
/
assembly
2 / Magnet separate carousel and drive 1
/
assembly
566
Magnetic Separation Aspirating Assembly
5
4
4
5
5
4

1 082-002836-00 Dispersion aspirating probe 3 /
2 024-000148-00 MOTOR STEP 1 Motor of Dispersion
Separation Aspirating
Assembly
4 801-3102-00057-00 Washer for dispersion 3
/
dispensing probe
5 115-058724-00 Dispersion Dispensing 3
/
Probe
567
Magnet Separate Carousel And Drive Assembly
1
2

2 031-000122-00 Belt for dispersion carousel 1
/
driving
3 115-028530-00 Dispersion carousel driving 1
/
motor assembly
568
11.3.10 Substrate Detector Assembly
569
1 115-049586-00 200uL Substrate Pump 1 /
2 115-015675-00 LVM Valve Assembly 1 /
3 011-000203-00 Substrate bubble detecting 1
/
sensor
11.4 Left Assembly Explode

11.4.1 Wash Buffer Detector Assembly
570
1 051-001621-00 Liquid detect board PCBA 2 /
11.4.2 Liquid Board Assembly
571
1 115-011901-00 10ml syringe module 2 /
2 801-1805-00023-00 Isolation Chamber 2 /
3 115-033286-00 3-way Valve（PEIZH） 9 /
4 115-033289-00 2-way Valve（PEIZH） 12 /
11.5 Back Assembly Explod

11.5.1 PCB UNIT
572

1 051-002794-00 Main Control Board 1 /
2 051-002793-00 Main Control Conversion 1
/
Board
573
11.5.2 Vacuum Assembly
1
5

1 115-033289-00 2-way Valve（PEIZH） 12 /
2 115-033286-00 3-way Valve（PEIZH） 9 /
574
3 115-050389-00 BM50 pump assembly 2 /
4 801-1805-00023-00 Isolation Chamber 2 /
5 801-1805-00006-00 Press Chamber Assembly 1 /
11.5.3 Sample Syringe Board
4 1
575
1 115-011901-00 10ml syringe module 2 /
2 115-046174-00 1mL syringe module 1 /
3 115-033286-00 3-way Valve（PEIZH） 9 /
4 115-015675-00 LVM valve assembly 3 /
5 115-015130-00 Sample Probe Clot 1
/
Detector
1mL Syringe Module

1 115-039684-00 1mL self-made syringe 1 /
2 801-3003-00015-00 Syringe Motor Position 4
/
Sensor Assembly
3 / Stepping motor 1 /
576
11.5.4 Fans

1 801-BA80-00169-00 FAN 12VDC 60*60*25mm 3
/
78CFM 43dB
577
11.5.5 The Interface for Power

1 801-2105-00030-00 Main Switch 1 /
2 051-001895-00 Network Port Conversion 1 /
578
Board
3 / Filter power 250VAC 10A 1 /
11.5.6 Power Unit
579
1 022-000302-00 24V Power Supply Module 1 /
2 022-000303-00 12V Power Supply Module 1 /
3 051-002795-00 Power Conversion Board 1 /
580
12 LIS Connection Configuration

12.1 Overview
The Laboratory Information System (LIS) is one of the important parts in the hospital
information management. The main functions of the LIS include but are not limited to sample
check and receiving, report processing, report review, and sample transfer and processing. The
stability of the LIS significantly affects the normal operation of the clinical laboratory and even
the disease diagnosis of clinicians. The functions of the LIS are also the important items in the
ISO15189 review conducted on medical laboratories. Medical institutes increasingly attach
importance to medical informatization, including the LIS building. The LIS is closely related to
other systems in the hospital, such as the Hospital Information System (HIS) and Electronic
Medical Record (EMR) system. After a tester in the clinical laboratory reviews a report on the
LIS, the self-service machines, outpatient doctor stations, and inpatient doctor stations,
including the WeChat official account and Alipay account can receive the test result from the
LIS in a timely manner. The LIS makes more and more frequent data interactions with other
subsystems of the HIS.
For medical instrument vendors, the analyzer can connect to the LIS normally and the LIS
can print qualified test reports, which is one of the most important symbols showing that the
analyzer is officially put into service. Engineers should pay enough attention and work with LIS
engineers to complete the LIS interface alignment. The following describes basic work content
of LIS connection and common LIS problems.
12.2 Network Connection and LIS-related Parameter

Setting
The PC of the analyzer communicates with the LIS via TCP/IP. They transfer test data
through network ports (using a network cable). The network stability is crucial to the LIS
communication. The PC configured for the analyzer has two network adapters and the PC
needs to be in the same network as the analyzer and the LIS server.
581
Chemiluminescence immunoassay
Chemistry analyzer PC Blood analyzer PC
analyzer PC
Workstation LIS server HIS server
Figure 12-1 LIS Connection DiagramNetwork
12.2.1 Adapter Status Query

Checking the installation status of the network adapter driver is an important part of
checking the network status. If the network adapter driver is not installed or the installed driver
is abnormal, network communication will fail even if the network ports and network cable are in
good condition.
Right-click My Computer and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Click Device
Manager, expand Network adapters, and check the installation status of the network adapter
driver to check the network adapter status.
582
Right-click My Computer and choose

Properties from the shortcut menu.
Click Device Manager and expand
Network adapters(s). Expand network
adapters to check the installation
status of the network adapter driver.
Figure 12-2 Device Manager
Open Network and Sharing Center.
Click the network

connection icon (wired
or wireless) to access
Network and Sharing
Center, and click Change
adapter settings.
Figure 12-3 Network and Sharing Center
Open Control Panel\Network and Internet\Network Connections and check the

network connections.
583
Network adapters can be in the connected, not connected, or disconnected state.

Right-click a network connection and choose Rename from the shortcut menu
(configure an easy-to-understand name for the network, for example, LIS network).
Figure 12-4 Network Connections
12.2.2 Network Status Check

Two network adapters are generally configured for the workstation of the analyzer. One
network adapter is used for communicating with the analyzer and the other network adapter is
used for communicating with the LIS server. An effective LIS connection can be established
only when the workstation of the analyzer can communicate with both the analyzer and LIS
server. Connect one end of a network cable to the RJ-45 port of the analyzer and the other end
to the RJ-45 port of the workstation and check whether the network indicator blinks yellow. If
the network indicator does not blink yellow, the network cable is faulty or the network adapter
driver is not installed properly. The network adapter used for communicating with the LIS needs
to be in the same network as the IP address of the LIS server.
Ping is also a communication protocol and is a part of TCP/IP. Run the ping command to
check the network connectivity, so as to analyze and judge network errors. Format of the ping
command: ping IP address. Run the ping command to test the network status.
To set the IP address of one network adapter configured for the workstation to be in the
same network as that of the LIS server, do as follows:
1) On the PC desktop, click the network connection icon, click Network and Sharing Center,
and then click Local Area Connection.
Click the wired or

wireless network icon
and click Network and
Sharing Center.
Figure 12-5 Network and Sharing Center
584
Check active networks.

There is one more active
connection when one
network is added. The
workstation of the
analyzer generally has
two active networks and
the IP addresses of the
active networks are not in
the same network.
Figure 12-6 Checking Active Networks
2) Right-click Local Area Connection and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Click
Configure and then Click Details. The IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and
DNS server are displayed.
Figure 12-7 Network Connection Details
3) Access Network and Sharing Center and check active networks. Right-click a network
connection and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Click the Networking tab, tick
Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4), and click Properties.
Set IP address and other information. The network used for communication between the
workstation and the analyzer is 10.0.0.0 and the network used for communication between the
workstation and the LIS is set based on the network structure of a hospital.
585
Enter the IP address, subnet mask, and other

information.
Selet IPv4
Figure 12-8 Entering an IP Address
The IP address settings of the workstation used in a hospital are as follows.
Figure 12-9 IP Address Settings of the Workstation Used in a Hospital
The IP address of one network adapter configured for the workstation must be in the same
network as the server IP address configured on transmission setup.
586
Figure 12-10 Transmission Setup
The IP address of the other network adapter configured for the workstation must be in the
same network as that of the analyzer.
1) Press Win+R and enter cmd.
Figure 12-11 Run Window
2) Run the Ping + IP address command. If the ping operation is successful, the network is
reachable.
3) In the Run dialog box, enter cmd to access the command console. Enter ping + IP
address to check whether the ping operation is successful. If yes, the network is reachable.
587
Figure 12-12 Ping Window
The figure below shows that the ping operation fails:

The request timed out and data packets are lost.
Figure 12-13 Ping Operation Failed
588
12.3 LIS-related Parameter Settings

12.3.1 Protocol Introduction
Mindray equipment strictly complies with the Health Level 7 (HL7) and American Society
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) protocols. LIS vendors independently determine the protocol
used to implement LIS interface connection and whether to use network ports or serial ports for
the LIS connection. Network ports and serial ports only differ in the transmission media. Data
can be transmitted through network cables or serial cables. Network cables can be also used
as telephone wires. Serial cables can be classified into straight-through cables and crossover
cables and they need to comply with the RS232C standard. Network cables also need to
comply with certain standards.
The HL7 and ASTM protocols provide detailed descriptions of fields in the message
headers and delimiter fields. LIS engineers should complete the LIS interface development in
strict accordance with the communication protocols. This document further describes the
communication protocols so as to provide effective guidance for LIS engineers to complete
interface development.
The ASTM protocols are not exclusive to serial ports. Network ports can also use the ASTM
protocols for data transmission. The ASTM and HL7 protocols define the format of messages
used for packet transmission. Network ports and serial ports are data transmission modes.
12.3.2 Parameter Settings on the Workstation of the Analyzer

Select Utility > System Setup > LIS Setup.
Select bidirectional
for bidirectional LIS
communication.
Select unidirectional
These parameters
for unidirectional LIS
must be ticked.
communication.
Figure 12-14 LIS Transmission Setup
Auto Connect to LIS

After it is ticked, the analyzer automatically connects to the LIS interface (precondition:
589
The LIS port ID is set to be same as the port ID in transmission setup).
The LIS communication session is not always maintained after an LIS connection is
established. After this item is ticked, the analyzer actively connects to the LIS when detecting
the LIS disconnection.
Do not tick these

parameters for
unidirectional/bidi
rectional LIS
communication.
Figure 12-15 Transmission Setup
Test data can be transmitted through network ports or serial ports. The CL-900i supports
both network ports and serial ports for data transmission. Whether network ports or serial ports
are used depends on whether the instrument workstation is configured with two network
adapters or two serial ports. The ASMT and HL7 protocols are unrelated to the transmission
media. They both support network ports and serial ports for test data transmission.
The port ID is
determined by the
LIS. The port ID
in transmission
setup needs to be
the same as the
LIS port ID. It
cannot be set to
port 80 or port
8080.
HL7 or ASTM
Enter the IP address of the LIS server. If the LIS server is configured on the
workstation of the analyzer, the IP address is 127.0.0.1 or the actual IP
address.
590
Figure 12-16 LIS Setup
12.3.3 Basic Concepts of Unidirectional/Bidirectional LIS
Communication
Unidirectional LIS communication:
The analyzer only sends test data to the LIS but does not receive any instructions from the
LIS. The analyzer does not send sample programming information to the LIS and the LIS does
not send test chemistry information to the analyzer. Therefore, after placing a sample on the
analyzer, you need to manually enter program chemistries. After processing the sample and
generating results, the analyzer automatically sends related data to the LIS, which parses
received test results.
Bidirectional LIS communication:
The analyzer not only sends test data to the LIS but also receives instruments from the
LIS. A sample is uniquely identified by a barcode. Once the barcode of a sample is generated,
the barcode is unique and cannot be modified.
After identifying a barcode, the analyzer sends sample programming information to the
LIS. After receiving the sample programming information, the LIS, based on the received
barcode, searches for information about test chemistries matching the barcode. After clinical
information about the barcode is found, the LIS needs to send a message in a specified format
to the analyzer within the specified time.
Note: The LIS interface needs to respond to the received test information from the analyzer
regardless of whether in bidirectional or unidirectional LIS communication.
In LIS Setup > Transmission Setup, the settings are basically the same for unidirectional
and bidirectional LIS communication. The only difference is as follows.
Settings of bidirectional LIS communication
1) Select Utility > System Setup > LIS Setup and set the communication mode to
bidirectional.
591
Unidirectional/Bidirectio
nal LIS communication
The normal
channel IDs
and dilution
channel IDs
need to be
consistent
with
chemistry
channel IDs
in the LIS.
TCP/IP or ASTM. The ASTM protocols can be also

used for data transmission via network ports.
2) Select Utility > System Setup > Instrument > Sample Analysis Mode and select the barcode
mode or sequential mode.
In barcode mode, the

analyzer sends sample
barcodes to the LIS to
program sample information
in bidirectional LIS
communication. In
sequential mode, the
analyzer sends sample
programming information to
the LIS by sequence
number. Bidirectional
communication is supported
in both barcode mode and
sequential mode.
Most commonly-used mode in bidirectional

LIS communication am sample
592
3) Select Utility > System Setup > Barcode Setup, and select Auto Number Scanned
Samples.
In bidirectional LIS communication,

if the LIS does not transmit sample
IDs, the system automatically
generates sample IDs. Otherwise,
the sample ID is blank.
Figure 12-19 Auto Number Scanned Samples
12.3.4 Channel ID Setting

Channel IDs (chemistry codes) play a very important role in LIS communication. If a test
chemistry has no channel ID (chemistry code) in unidirectional LIS communication, the test
results will not be sent to the LIS. The loss of many test results is incurred by the absence of
maintenance channel IDs.
A sample may need to be diluted before testing in clinical application so that more accurate
test results can be obtained to provide guidance for clinical decision-making. Channel IDs are
classified into normal channel IDs and dilution channel IDs. Their setting and maintenance
methods are the same. However, dilution channel IDs cannot be maintained as normal channel
IDs, and the same sample cannot be tested based on the original concentration and dilution at
the same time. The LIS can process a diluted chemistry and normal chemistry as two
chemistries, but only one channel ID is available during the LIS communication with the
analyzer.
Channel IDs play a more important role in bidirectional LIS communication. The channel
ID (chemistry code) on the analyzer must be set the same as the channel ID set in the LIS.
After identifying a sample barcode, the analyzer sends sample programming information to the
LIS. The LIS, based on the barcode, searches for information matching this barcode and
notifies the analyzer of the chemistries to be tested. The correct transmission of test chemistry
information requires the LIS chemistry codes set in the LIS. If the LIS sends a test chemistry
593
(channel ID) not maintained on the analyzer to the analyzer, the analyzer will report an alarm
and refuse to process the chemistry after receiving it.
Specific steps of setting channel IDs are as follows:
1) The maintenance of channel IDs needs LIS disconnection.
2) Double-click Maintenance next to a chemistry and enter the channel ID defined in the LIS
(channel IDs are determined by LIS engineers).
Normal
channel IDs
and dilution
channel IDs
need to be
consistent
with channel
IDs set in the
LIS.
When maintaining chemistry channel IDs, manually disconnect the LIS connection
and double-click blank area next to normal channel IDs or diluted channel IDs.
Figure 12-20 Channel ID Setting
Note: Only users with administrator permissions in the LIS can maintain chemistry channel
IDs in the LIS. Other users are not allowed to modify channel IDs.
The channel IDs maintained on the workstation of the analyzer must be strictly consistent
with those maintained in the LIS.
12.4 Usage Guide of the Test Tool

Function of the test tool: The test tool is used to detect the LIS communication function of
the analyzer, that is, the capability of sending test results after samples are tested).
LIS communication function is one of the most basic functions of the software. Devices
from different LIS vendors may process raw data of the analyzer differently. When a test result
is not transmitted or the results of some chemistries are transmitted incorrectly, a data receiving
tool is required to find out causes. Data receiving is the first step in LIS interface development.
If it can be verified that data sent by the analyzer is strictly consistent with that displayed on the
screen of the analyzer workstation, the subsequent operation is to pinpoint errors in the raw
data processing of the LIS interface. Therefore, a test tool is required to pinpoint the cause of
the LIS problem.
This tool mainly assists engineers in checking raw data sent by the analyzer.
The analyzer and LIS cannot serve as both the client and server at the same time. Only
one of them serves as the client and the other serves as the server. Note that the port IDs must
594
be consistent. If both conditions above are met, basic communication can be established. The
analyzer, serving as the client, can automatically connect to the LIS.
12.4.1 Steps of Using the Test Tool

1) Double-click Mindray.exe.
Note: The bidirectional test check box is selected by default and the mode is set to server
mode by default.
Copy Mindray.exe to the workstation of the analyzer and start Mindray.exe. The port ID
and server IP address on the workstation must be consistent with those on the tool. The tool
serves as the client. One port ID maps to one service and no two same ports can be enabled
on the same PC. Therefore, before performing the data test, exit the LIS, or change the LIS
port and then change it back after the test is complete. The purpose of modifying the port ID is
to disconnect from the LIS. After disconnection, change the LIS port and then establish an LIS
connection with the tool.
The LIS Servers as the Server and the

analyzer Servers as the clinet. the
analyzer and LIS cannot servers as The Port No. needs to be the same as
both The client and server at the that set on LIS Setup of analyzer,Port
Same time .Only one of them servers No. 80 and Port No. 80 are
as the client and the other servers as prohibited due to the LIS interface
the Server
Figure 12-21 LIS Tool
2) Set the port ID and IP address.

The port ID and IP address are important to the simulation of bidirectional LIS
communication.
Note: Click Log. Logs will be generated. The logs are stored in :LisDebug\Lislog.txt. Raw
data will be cleared when Clear is clicked.
595
Logs are generated in the disk where

tools is located. if the tools is started
from a USB flash drive, Logs are
generated in the USB flash drive
Port ID: The port ID needs to be consistent with that on the test tool.
The IP address is the IP address of the LIS. If the LIS is installed on the PC of the analyzer,
the IP address can be set to the local IP address (127.0.0.1). If the LIS is not installed on the
PC of the analyzer, the IP address is the distance IP address.
LIS Servers as the Server
If the interface has been enabled,it cannot directly Port No.must setted
because the port maybe occupied and there is only the same on two side
one LIS interface inside one PC,If the port has been
occupied the tool cannot be started .Exit the LIS or
change the port No. for testing
The tools or LIS Serves the Server
3) Simulate bidirectional LIS communication.

In the simulation of bidirectional LIS communication, this tool can visualize the
596
communication with
the analyzer and generate communication logs. The logs can be used to provide guidance on
how to complete bidirectional LIS communication development for LIS engineers. The logs are
especially useful when LIS engineers have no advance when independently developing
bidirectional LIS communication. LIS engineers must refer to this tool guide to complete
bidirectional LIS communication development.
Note that this tool contains only some LIS functions and cannot substitute for the LIS. The
protocol used by and the principle of the communication with the analyzer are the same as
those of the communication with the LIS. On the LIS, to test bidirectional LIS communication,
LIS engineers need to print barcodes on the LIS, program a chemistry, and then perform
operations on the analyzer. When this tool is used, engineers do not need to manually program
chemistries but manually enter chemistry channel IDs in the configuration file. In the
bidirectional LIS communication of chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzers, chemistries
are identified by channel ID. If the LIS sends a nonexistent channel ID or an incorrect channel
ID to the analyzer, the analyzer gives no response after receiving the sample programming
information.
This tool completely presents the data flow of bidirectional LIS communication, and helps
engineers better understand bidirectional LIS communication.
It also reduces LIS engineers' difficulties in interface development.
597
Port No. on both side

should be consistent
The tools or LIS Serves the Server

The channel ID is
required only in the
testing of simulated
bidirectional LIS
communication.chan
enel ID on both side
should be consistent
The configuration file is used to maintain chemistry information and clinical information
sent to the analyzer during the bidirectional LIS communication testing.
598
Basic information about a patient
Chemistry code (LIS Channel ID )
Figure 12-25 LIS Channel IDs
Note: By default, Mindray.exe is designed to set basic information about patients to default
values. The channel IDs need to be manually entered into MRsettings.ini.
Notes for LIS engineers:
 Start character: char(11) Ox0B
 Carriage return character: char(13) Ox0D
 End character: char(13)+char(28) Ox0D+Ox1C
 The American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) is a set of computer
coding system based on the Latin alphabet. It is mainly used to display modern English
and other western European languages. It is by far the most common single-byte coding
system. In the information exchange of LIS communication, some codes in the ASCII table
are also used as control characters. Therefore, LIS engineers should judge the start
character and end character in the LIS interface development. Data is valid if the conditions
are met. The start character is a single-byte start character, that is, char(11) Ox0B. The
end character is a multi-byte end character, that is, char(13)+char(28) Ox0D+Ox1C.
08,00:46:09:140,LinkLayer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180708004609||QRY^Q02|2487|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
QRD|20180708004609|R|D|1169|||RD|120000116538|OTH|||T|<CR>
QRF||||||RCT|COR|ALL||<CR>
<EB><CR>
,
Figure 12-26 ASCII Samples
Messages in the LIS communication use specific formats. Invisible control characters are
599
added to each sample message.
Control characters are necessary. To manifest the receiving of a message, the analyzer
converts the start character into <SB> and the end character into <EB><CR>.
The analyzer will detect the start characters and end characters in a received message
frame whether the message is sample programming information or a response from the LIS.
LIS engineers cannot treat the start characters and end characters as common characters in
the LIS interface handling. The control characters should be appropriate and cannot be more
or less.
12.5 Common Problems and Handling Methods

12.5.1 LIS Connection Failed
Check whether the port ID set on the workstation of the analyzer is consistent with that of
the LIS interface, whether the IP address on the LIS is consistent with that of the LIS host, and
whether the IP address can be pinged. Port 80 and port 8080 are prohibited.
The analyzer serves as the client by default. It can automatically connect to the LIS and
the LIS serves as the server. The analyzer and LIS can serve as the client or server but cannot
serve as the client and server at the same time. Only one of them can serve as the client and
the other serves as the server.
12.5.2 Intermittent Interruption of LIS Communication

 Intermittent interruption on the LIS: The LIS transmission button is grayed. It is black
indicating transmitting in the normal state.
 HOST status bar blinks. It is blue in normal cases (the precondition is that the LIS interface
is enabled).
 The analyzer software shows that LIS is connected but the transmission button is grayed
(the precondition is that the LIS interface is enabled).
 The analyzer software shows that LIS is unconnected and the transmission button is
grayed (the precondition is that the LIS interface is enabled).
 The connection icon blinks on and off (The precondition is that the LIS interface is enabled).
There is a vulnerability on Windows 10: When Control Panel > User Account Control >
Change User Account Control settings is selected and the block is dragged to Never notify,
EnableLUA=0 is not actually modified in the registry. As a result, the permission for running the
software is not the real administrator permission. In the LIS communication, Mindray instrument
needs the administrator permissions for normal transmission of test results and information
exchange
600
Figure 12-27 Running regedit
Enable LUA is set to 0
In the command window, enter regedit to acess the

registry Editor and change the value of Enable LUA
Figure 12-28 Registry
The value of EnableLUA is 0 in normal cases. Access the registry and change the value of
EnableLUA to 0.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Policies\Syst
em
601
Figure 12-29 LIS Status
12.5.3 Firewall Problem

Firewall settings also affect LIS communication. It is necessary to check the firewall
settings on both the analyzer and LIS.
Many engineers pay attention only to the firewall settings on the analyzer. They do not
check firewall settings on the LIS.
The firewall settings on the LIS can be ignored easily and cannot be checked easily.
Firewall policies: Some clinical laboratories define policies to allow communication of
specified LIS ports for the sake of security. This action is wrong. Though the port used for LIS
communication is fixed, data communication inside the analyzer uses ports that are randomly
allocated. Therefore, the port ID can be neither fixed nor limited to a range.
Windows OS as a copy: Some PCs use non-genuine Windows version, especially, the
black PC desktop affects LIS communication. If such a case occurs, install the genuine OS and
redeploy the LIS environment.
12.5.4 Invalid LIS Response

The LIS communication continues only after a correct response is received from the LIS,
especially when test results are transmitted. Otherwise, the communication will be blocked.
Error C06005 Sending sample results failed
The major cause is that, if the analyzer fails to receive a valid acknowledgment message
602
from the LIS after sending a sample result,the analyzer judges that the sending fails.
Error C06007 Querying sample information failed
The major cause is that the analyzer sends a sample programming message to the LIS
(that is, the analyzer scans a barcode and sends it to the LIS) but the LIS does not respond to
the analyzer with the test chemistries of the barcode in the correct format within specified time.
Then, the analyzer reports an error after a period of time.
22,10:28:59:523,LinkLayer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20190222102859||QRY^Q02|10|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
QRD|20190222102859|R|D|9|||RD|1902224828|OTH|||T|<CR>
<EB><CR>
22,10:28:59:668,LinkLayer
Log: <=<SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20190222102859||QCK^Q02|10|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII||<CR>
MSA|AA|10|Message accepted|||0|<CR>
ERR|0|<CR>
QAK|SR|OK|<CR>
<EB><CR>
22,10:28:59:669,MSH segment field count < 19 error[Count = 18].,
22,10:28:59:669, Parse segment[1] of message error[Ret = -2147090430]. ,
22,10:28:59:669,LinkLayer Log: CLinkLayer::DealFrame create FetchRcvFrm(),
After identifying a bar code, the analyzer sends the

The analyzer receives a message from the LIS. QRY^Q02 message to the LIS to program sample
information.
The duration from the transmission of sample

programming information to the receiving of In the bidirectional communication, the LIS
an LIS response is limited. Query timeout is responds with the QCK^Q02 message. If no error
reported when the duration exceeds the limit. occurs, the LIS sends the DSR^Q03 message
afterward.
The LIS has responded but the analyzer still

reports an error. The number of delimiter fields
counted by the analyzer is 19 but the number of
delimiter fields in the message sent by the LIS is
18. After check, ASCII ||| is correct but is omitted
by the LIS.
Figure 12-30 LIS Code
If an error occurs on the message acknowledgment, an error will be reported when the
chemistry information is transmitted to the analyzer.
603
Figure 12-31 LIS Chemistry Information
LIS Response Timed Out C06005

27,11:33:07:185, Link Layer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180727113307||ORU^R01|3583|P|2.3.1||||0||ASCII|||
27,11:33:37:194, App Layer Log: Application Layer Timeout !!!,:
27,11:33:37:198, sending the sample result failed. Sample ID/barcode: 3032, position: N0016-
2,
The analyzer proactively sends a test result to the LIS, which should respond
within 30s. If the LIS fails to respond within this period, timeout is reported.
The time exceeds 30s.
Timeout
The information transmission

flag is N in the alarm.
Figure 12-32 LIS Sample Result
When a sample result sending failure occurs, check whether responses are already
developed for the LIS interface.
The response time can be set to 10s, 20s, 30s, or other values on the LIS.
The LIS needs to respond after a sample test result is sent. If the LIS fails to respond after
10s, the analyzer reports response timeout. If the response is incorrect, an error is also reported.
LIS engineers should pay special attention to the start character, end character, and message
ID in the response processing. Message ID is a variable in the response from the LIS to the
analyzer. The message ID is not always 1 or a constant each time a response is sent.
<SB>MSH|^~\&|LIS-Server|NanShan
Hospital|Mindray|BS-400|20090216201111||ACK^R01|64|P|2.3.1||||0||ASCII|||<CR>
<EB><CR>,
604
12.5.5 Slow Transmission of LIS Communication Results

The analyzer has a response check mechanism, in which when sending a sample test
result, the analyzer continues the communication only after receiving a valid response from the
LIS; otherwise, the analyzer waits for the response. Test results sent by the analyzer can reach
the LIS within seconds. If the transmission of a test result takes several minutes or longer or
even test results on the current date are not completely transmitted, there is a high probability
that the LIS does not respond or a response error occurs.
In such cases, LIS engineers are recommended to check the response format of the LIS
interface.
Note: The message ID in the response is a variable rather than constant, and the message
ID is the message ID in the sample result sent by the LIS. When receiving a test result
containing a message ID, the LIS needs to, based on the received message ID, give a response
in specified format to the analyzer. The message ID and message format must be correct. When
processing LIS interface responses, the LIS does not merely send ACK or (06) to the analyzer
but respond to the analyzer in the following message format.
Response format:
<SB>MSH|^~\&|LIS-Server|NanShan
Hospital|Mindray|BS-400|20090216201111||ACK^R01|64|P|2.3.1||||0||ASCII|||<CR>
<EB><CR>,
12.5.6 Loss of Some Chemistry Results During LIS
Communication
The results of some test chemistries are missing in the raw results of test chemistries sent
to the LIS. In this case, check the chemistry channel ID.
12.6 Logs of Bidirectional LIS Communication

Interaction
605
Analyzer -> LIS
Phase I
LIS -> analyzer
Phase II starts only

after no error
Message key words are fixed. occurs in Phase I.
The functions of messages
vary with the message names.
11,09:57:56:467,LinkLayer Log:=>
<SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180811095756||QRY^Q02|1|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
QRD|20180811095756|R|D|1|||RD|002100418080230050|OTH|||T|<CR>
<EB><CR>
11,09:57:56:558,LinkLayerLog:
<=<SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180811095756||QCK^Q02|1|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
ERR|0|<CR>
QAK|SR|OK|<CR>
<EB><CR>
MSH|^~\&|||||20180811095756||DSR^Q03|1|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
ERR|0|<CR>
QAK|SR|OK|<CR>
606
QRD|20180811095756|R|D|2|||RD||OTH|||T|<CR>
DSP|1|||||<CR>
DSP|2|||||<CR>
DSP|3|||||<CR>
DSP|4|||||<CR>
DSP|5|||||<CR>
DSP|6|||||<CR>
DSP|7|||||<CR>
DSP|8|||||<CR>
DSP|9|||||<CR>
DSP|10|||||<CR>
DSP|11|||||<CR>
DSP|12|||||<CR>
DSP|13|||||<CR>
DSP|14|||||<CR>
DSP|15|||||<CR>
DSP|16|||||<CR>
DSP|17|||||<CR>
DSP|18|||||<CR>
DSP|19|||||<CR>
DSP|20|||||<CR>
DSP|21|002100418080230050||||<CR>
DSP|22|||||<CR>
DSP|23||20180811095756|||<CR>
DSP|24||N|||<CR>
DSP|25|||||<CR>
DSP|26||serum|||<CR>
DSP|27|||||<CR>
DSP|28|||||<CR>
DSP|29||2^^^|||<CR>
DSP|30||13^^^|||<CR>
DSP|31||6^^^|||<CR>
DSP|32||7^^^|||<CR>
DSP|33||8^^^|||<CR>
DSP|34||9^^^|||<CR>
DSP|35||10^^^|||<CR>
DSP|36||11^^^|||<CR>
DSP|37||12^^^|||<CR>
DSP|38||1^^^|||<CR>
DSC||<CR>
<EB><CR>
607
11,09:57:56:732,LinkLayer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180811095756||ACK^Q03|1|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
ERR|0|<CR>
<EB><CR>
12.7 Functions of the Parsing Tool

From the usage description of the data parsing tool, you can better understand the work
of LIS interface engineers, so as to effectively work with them to complete LIS interface
development. This tool allows copying raw data of the analyzer and parsing the data to generate
valid data for the LIS. Parsed data can be also logged.
Figure 12-33 Parsing Tool
08,23:03:18:947,LinkLayer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180708230318||ORU^R01|2800|P|2.3.1||||0||ASCII|||<CR>
PID|1472|||||||O|||||||||||||||||||||||<CR>
OBR|1472||9015|^|N|20180708224731|20180708224703|20180708224703||1^1||||201807082
24703|serum||||||||||5|||||||||||||||||||||||<CR>
OBX|1|NM|4|Ca|2.252133|mmol/L|-|N|||F||2.252133|20180708225609|||0|<CR>
OBX|2|NM|5|Mg|0.569389|mmol/L|-|N|||F||0.569389|20180708225829|||0|<CR>
OBX|3|NM|6|inorganic phosphorus|1.578690|mmol/L|-
|N|||F||1.578690|20180708230304|||0|<CR>
OBX|4|NM|10|total bilirubin (vanadate oxidation method)|8.779144|μmol/L|-
|N|||F||8.779144|20180708230315|||0|<CR>
608
OBX|5|NM|11|direct bilirubin (Vanadate oxidation)|3.441980|μmol/L|-
|N|||F||3.441980|20180708230318|||0|<CR>
OBX|6|NM|16|adenosine deaminase|7.739112|U/L|-|N|||F||7.739112|20180708230311|||0|<CR>
OBX|7|NM|17|prealbumin|230.296762|mg/L|-|N|||F||230.296762|20180708230300|||0|<CR>
OBX|8|NM|18|total bile acid|1.787443|μmol/L|-|N|||F||1.787443|20180708230130|||0|<CR>
OBX|9|NM|19|alanine aminotransferase|19.820950|U/L|-
|N|||F||19.820950|20180708230134|||0|<CR>
OBX|10|NM|20|AST|39.088345|U/L|-|N|||F||39.088345|20180708230137|||0|<CR>
OBX|11|NM|21|alkaline phosphatase|130.115058|U/L|-
|N|||F||130.115058|20180708230130|||0|<CR>
OBX|12|NM|22|GGT|67.893341|U/L|-|N|||F||67.893341|20180708230134|||0|<CR>
OBX|13|NM|23|lipoprotein (a)|71.263917|mg/L|-|N|||F||71.263917|20180708230217|||0|<CR>
OBX|14|NM|24|total protein|48.843538|g/L|-|N|||F||48.843538|20180708230224|||0|<CR>
OBX|15|NM|25|cholinesterase|4114.479156|U/L|-
|N|||F||4114.479156|20180708225949|||0|<CR>
OBX|16|NM|26|albumin|29.379028|g/L|-|N|||F||29.379028|20180708225721|||0|<CR>
OBX|17|NM|27|lipase|10.279494|U/L|-|N|||F||10.279494|20180708230130|||0|<CR>
OBX|18|NM|28|α-amylase|63.568402|U/L|-|N|||F||63.568402|20180708230039|||0|<CR>
OBX|19|NM|29|apolipoprotein A1|1.740667|g/L|-|N|||F||1.740667|20180708230217|||0|<CR>
OBX|20|NM|30|apolipoprotein B|1.241503|g/L|-|N|||F||1.241503|20180708230231|||0|<CR>
OBX|21|NM|31|triglyceride|5.302102|mmol/L|-|N|||F||5.302102|20180708230235|||0|<CR>
OBX|22|NM|33|LDL-C|2.838998|mmol/L|-|N|||F||2.838998|20180708230231|||0|<CR>
OBX|23|NM|34|HDL-C|1.156541|mmol/L|-|N|||F||1.156541|20180708230235|||0|<CR>
OBX|24|NM|35|total cholesterol|5.675223|mmol/L|-|N|||F||5.675223|20180708225732|||0|<CR>
OBX|25|NM|36|creatinine (sarcosine oxidase)|61.837352|μmol/L|-
|N|||F||61.837352|20180708230239|||0|<CR>
OBX|26|NM|38|uric acid|436.774956|μmol/L|-|N|||F||436.774956|20180708230242|||0|<CR>
OBX|27|NM|40|cystatin C|1.232627|mg/L|-|N|||F||1.232627|20180708230246|||0|<CR>
OBX|28|NM|41|urea|3.750785|mmol/L|-|N|||F||3.750785|20180708230116|||0|<CR>
OBX|29|NM|43|creatine kinase-myocardial band isoenzyme|32.245208|U/L|-
|N|||F||32.245208|20180708230242|||0|<CR>
OBX|30|NM|44|creatine jubase|62.994467|U/L|-|N|||F||62.994467|20180708230249|||0|<CR>
OBX|31|NM|45|lactic dehydrogenase|324.101538|U/L|-
|N|||F||324.101538|20180708230217|||0|<CR>
OBX|32|NM|46|α-HBDH|243.997631|U/L|-|N|||F||243.997631|20180708230213|||0|<CR>
OBX|33|NM|58|C-reactive protein|36.545503|mg/L|-
|N|||F||36.545503|20180708230257|||0|<CR>
OBX|34|NM|61|β2-microglobulin|2.708314|mg/L|-|N|||F||2.708314|20180708230300|||0|<CR>
OBX|35|NM|62|α-L-fucosidase|53.824504|U/L|-|N|||F||53.824504|20180708230123|||0|<CR>
OBX|36|NM|63|Fe|10.033768|μmol/L|-|N|||F||10.033768|20180708230257|||0|<CR>
OBX|37|NM|65|Hcy (enzymatic cycling method)|13.780098|μmol/L|-
|N|||F||13.780098|20180708230304|||0|<CR>
OBX|38|NM|1|Na|136.355000|mmol/L|-|N|||F||136.355000|20180708225006|||0|<CR>
OBX|39|NM|2|K|4.220000|mmol/L|-|N|||F||4.220000|20180708225006|||0|<CR>
609
OBX|40|NM|3|Cl|101.729000|mmol/L|-|N|||F||101.729000|20180708225006|||0|<CR>
OBX|41|NM|135|Glo|19.400000|g/L|-|N|||F||19.400000|||||<CR>
OBX|42|NM|136|A/G|1.515464||-|N|||F||1.515464|||||<CR>
OBX|43|NM|137|AST/ALT|1.972250||-|N|||F||1.972250|||||<CR>
OBX|44|NM|138|IBIL-V|5.340000|μmol/L|-|N|||F||5.340000|||||<CR>
<EB><CR>
Figure 7.37 Online Decode

This tool shows how the LIS interface processes, analyzes, and extracts raw data sent from
the analyzer, and generates in specified format.
610
Figure 12-34 Logs
Sample ID 9015
Channel ID-------------4--------||chemistry name--------Ca:--------:result 2.252133
Channel ID-------------5--------||chemistry name--------Mg:--------:result 0.569389
Channel ID-------------6--------||chemistry name-------- inorganic phosphorus:--------:result
1.578690
Channel ID-------------10--------||chemistry name--------total bilirubin (vanadate oxidation
method):--------:result 8.779144
Channel ID-------------11--------||chemistry name--------direct bilirubin (vanadate oxidation
method):--------:result 3.441980
Channel ID-------------16--------||chemistry name--------adenosine deaminase:--------:result
7.739112
Channel ID-------------17--------||chemistry name--------prealbumin:--------:result 230.296762
Channel ID-------------18--------||chemistry name--------total bile acid:--------:result 1.787443
Channel ID-------------19--------||chemistry name--------alanine aminotransferase:--------:result
19.820950
Channel ID-------------20--------||chemistry name--------AST:--------:result 39.088345
Channel ID-------------21--------||chemistry name-------- alkaline phosphatase:--------:result
130.115058
Channel ID-------------22--------||chemistry name--------GGT:--------:result 67.893341
Channel ID-------------23--------||chemistry name--------lipoprotein (a):--------:result 71.263917
Channel ID-------------24--------||chemistry name--------total protein:--------:result 48.843538
Channel ID-------------25--------||chemistry name--------cholinesterase:--------:result 4114.479156
611
Channel ID-------------26--------||chemistry name--------albumin:--------:result 29.379028
Channel ID-------------27--------||chemistry name--------lipase:--------:result 10.279494
Channel ID-------------28--------||chemistry name--------α-amylase:--------:result 63.568402
Channel ID-------------29--------||chemistry name--------apolipoprotein A1:--------:result 1.740667
Channel ID-------------30--------||chemistry name--------apolipoprotein B:--------:result 1.241503
Channel ID-------------31--------||chemistry name--------triglyceride:--------:result 5.302102
Channel ID-------------33--------||chemistry name--------LDL-C:--------:result 2.838998
Channel ID-------------34--------||chemistry name--------HDL-C:--------:result 1.156541
Channel ID-------------35--------||chemistry name--------total cholesterol:--------:result 5.675223
Channel ID-------------36--------||chemistry name--------creatinine (sarcosine oxidase):-------
-:result 61.837352
Channel ID-------------38--------||chemistry name--------uric acid:--------:result 436.774956
Channel ID-------------40--------||chemistry name--------cystatin C:--------:result 1.232627
Channel ID-------------41--------||chemistry name--------urea:--------:result 3.750785
Channel ID-------------43--------||chemistry name--------creatine kinase-myocardial band
isoenzyme:--------:result 32.245208
Channel ID-------------44--------||chemistry name--------creatine jubase:--------:result 62.994467
Channel ID-------------45--------||chemistry name--------lactic dehydrogenase:--------:result
324.101538
Channel ID-------------46--------||chemistry name--------α-HBDH:--------:result 243.997631
Channel ID-------------58--------||chemistry name--------C-reactive protein:--------:result
36.545503
Channel ID-------------61--------||chemistry name--------β2-microglobulin:--------:result 2.708314
Channel ID-------------62--------||chemistry name--------α-L-fucosidase:--------:result 53.824504
Channel ID-------------63--------||chemistry name--------Fe:--------:result 10.033768
Channel ID-------------65--------||chemistry name--------Hcy (enzymatic cycling method):-------
-:result 13.780098
Channel ID-------------1--------||chemistry name--------Na:--------:result 136.355000
Channel ID-------------2--------||chemistry name--------K:--------:result 4.220000
Channel ID-------------3--------||chemistry name--------Cl:--------:result 101.729000
Channel ID-------------135--------||chemistry name--------Glo:--------:result 19.400000
Channel ID-------------136--------||chemistry name--------A/G:--------:result 1.515464
Channel ID-------------137--------||chemistry name--------AST/ALT:--------:result 1.972250
Channel ID-------------138--------||chemistry name--------IBIL-V:--------:result 5.340000
612
13 Host Emptying and Relocation

13.1 Procedure of Emptying Whole Unit
The CL-900i requires 24 hours to be powered on. If it is turned off for a long time or the
instrument is deactivated, the emptying process must be performed.
Reagents in the instrument should be packaged and returned to the box, the substrate should
be taken out, the cap should be tightened, and the aluminum foil should be attached to the
bottom of the bottle, and the bottle should be stored in the refrigerator.
Tighten the cap to store the remaining wash buffer.
13.1.1 Empty Whole Unit

Emptying of the whole unit is performed as follows:
613
Level-1 Process Level-2 Process
Software
Turn off the cooler
drain
Clean and Empty Substrate

Tubes
Empty wash solution from

wash solution tubes
Clean wash solution tubes

with purified water
Empty purified water from the

Confirm wash waste tubes
analyzer
model
and SN Clean and Empty Waste
Tubes
Manually Check the dispersion

Check overflow
drain and carousel tubes and move Empty the
Empty cuvettes of the dispersion
check the vertical mechanism to cuvette boxes
carousel
the bottom
Clean the solid Check the

Dry the floater Clean the sample
waste incubation
sensor assembly probe and swab
container module
Check and
Check the Check silk screen
restore after
mixing module of sample rack
emptying
Seal the opening

Fix the dust of working
screen position
Figure 13-1 Procedure of Emptying Whole Unit
614
13.2 Whole Unit Emptying and Data Emptying

Methods
13.2.1 Refrigeration Off
Select Alignment -> Sampling System/Alignment, tap Common Functions, select
"Reagent Carousel", and tap Refrigeration Off.
Figure 13-2 Refrigeration Off
Open the small cover of the reagent compartment and wipe the condensate in the pot with a
dust-free cloth. Open and place it for subsequent emptying.
13.2.2 Clean and Empty Substrate Tubes

Indicator: Clean the substrate tubes with ultra purified water and empty the substrate tubes.
There is no liquid drained from the substrate drainage port. There is no columnar liquid in the
transparent tubes.
Methods and procedure:
1) Select Alignment -> Fluidics Alignment, and select 3. Empty Substrate Tubes.
2) Follow the instructions on the following screen: (Note: Do not bend the tubes.)
615
Protect dispersion carousel Remove the substrate

IO port drain tube
Remove the substrate tube Insert the substrate drain tube into
holder (note to protect the the connector (note to protect the
substrate tube) connector and hose)
Figure 13-3Clean and Empty Substrate Tubes
NOTE
 Carefully remove the screws. Do not drop them into the dispersion carousel. Before this
step, use the adhesive tape to glue the IO port of the dispersion carousel, and then peel it
off after completion;
 Protect the substrate tube from bending. Protect the hose at the substrate joint and the
joint outlet from contamination.
 Loosen the inlet nut of each substrate tube one turn to facilitate substrate emptying.
3) Tap OK to go to the second step. Tap the Empty button, operate as prompted in "Leave
the substrate bottles L and R blank" when emptying, and tap OK to access the Empty
screen. The default execution times is 16. The instrument automatically starts emptying.
Observe the bubble detection alarm below, you should be able to switch to detect bubbles
when emptying; otherwise, you need to confirm whether the bubble detection optical
coupler is abnormal. The instrument automatically exits the screen after completion.
616
Figure 13-4 Empty
4) Tap Continue to go to the third step. Tap the Clean button, operate as prompted in "Place
ultra pure water at the substrate bottles L and R" during cleaning, and tap OK to start clean
the substrate tubes. The default execution times is 16. The instrument automatically starts
cleaning. Observe the bubble detection result below, which should become "No bubbles
detected". The instrument automatically exits the screen after completion.
Figure 13-5 Clean
5) Tap Continue to go to the fourth step. Tap the Empty button, operate as prompted in
"Leave the substrate bottles L and R blank" when emptying, and tap OK to start empty the
substrate tubes. The default execution times is 16. The instrument automatically starts
emptying. Observe the bubble detection result below, which should become "Bubbles
detected". Otherwise, it is considered that the tubes are not empty or the sensor is
617
abnormal, which needs to be checked and confirmed.
Figure 13-6 Empty
6) Go to the next step, follow the prompts to restore the substrate tubes. Confirm that the
substrate tube fixing seat nut has been tightened, and tighten the joint (try to loosen the
joint in the reverse direction, which fails), and verify that the tubes are not bent, the tubes
are not twisted with the joint;
Insertion depth of
substrate drain tube
must be over 2 mm
Confirm it is
tightened
Remove at last
Fix with cable tie
Fasten the screws.

Do not drop the
screws in the
dispersion carousel.
618
Note: Carefully install the screws, do not drop screws into the dispersion carousel, and finally
remove the protection cover for the IO port of the dispersion carousel; protect the substrate
tubes from bending; protect the substrate joint and the hose at the joint outlet from
contamination.
7) After completing the process, prepare two clean substrate bottle positions:
a) Use clean hoses to cover the two spikes.
b) Wipe the two substrate bottles with a damp, clean cloth, clean the surfaces, and finally
dry them;
c) Remove the hoses from the two spikes and load two clean substrate bottles from
delivery;
d) Cover the substrate bottles.
13.2.3 Empty Wash Buffer from Wash Buffer Tubes

Note: This step is to empty wash buffer from wash buffer tubes, leave the cap assemblies of
wash buffer 1 and wash buffer 2 vacant.
Because there are many overlapping parts of the wash buffer tubes, it is necessary to strictly
follow the procedures in the software screens. If a fault occurs midway, in order to ensure
thorough emptying, you are recommended to perform this process again from the beginning.
The specific process is as follows
Empty the drain tubes for
Clean and empty the inner Empty phase-1 dispersion
cleaning the inner and outer Empty dispersion carousel
and outer walls of sample carousel drain tubes - wash
walls of sample probe - wash drain tubes - wash solution 2
probe - wash solution 1 solution 1
solution 2
Empty phase-2 dispersion Empty phase-3 dispersion Empty phase-1 dispersion Empty phase-2 dispersion
carousel drain tubes - wash carousel drain tubes - wash dispensing tubes - wash dispensing tubes - wash
solution 1 solution 1 solution 1 solution 1
Empty phase-3 dispersion

Empty waste drainage wash
dispensing tubes - wash
tubes - wash buffer 1
solution 1
The execution times when emptying the wash buffer are set to the default value. If the
requirements of the emptying index cannot be met through visual inspection, as a small amount
of liquid is accumulated in the tubes, then you may increase the times of execution.
1) Select Alignment -> Fluidic Alignment -> 13. Clean or Empty wash buffer tubes;
2) Tap Continue, follow the prompts on the screens, place a clean cuvette in the lower right
corner of the left tray, and tap OK to automatically go to step 2;
619
3) Tap Continue; the following prompt is displayed. Leave the cap assemblies of wash buffer
1 and wash buffer 2 vacant. Tap OK to access the operation screen for cleaning and
emptying:
First, carry out "Sample probe wash tubes cleaning and emptying", empty the wash buffer in
the sample probe wash tubes of wash buffer 2, and confirm that the cap assembly of wash
buffer 2 is vacant. Set "Execution Times" to the default value, which is 1, tap Start to start
execution. At the end, observe that the prompt on the screen becomes "Bubbles detected".
620
Figure 13-7 Clean and empty sample probe wash tube
4) After emptying is completed, tap Exit to access "Dispersion wash tubes cleaning and
emptying". Continue to empty phase 1 dispersion wash tubes of wash buffer 2, and confirm
that the cap assembly of wash buffer 2 is vacant. Set "Execution Times" to the default
value, which is 6, tap Start to start execution. At the end, observe that the prompt on the
screen maintains "Bubbles detected".
621
Figure 13-8 Clean and empty dispersion wash tube
5) Tap Exit to automatically enter the "Sample probe wash tubes cleaning or emptying",
switch to the wash buffer in the sample probe wash tubes of wash buffer 1. The default
"Execution Times" is 2. Tap Start to start execution. At the end, the prompt on the screen
is switched to "Bubbles detected". Observe that the inner wall of the sample probe does
not eject liquid, the liquid in the outer wall has been drained, and there is no columnar
liquid in the dispensing tubes and the drain tubes. (You can carry out two more execution
processes to confirm and observe the status of the tubes).
The liquid in the

dispensing tube No liquid is sprayed
connected to the out of the inner wall
swab and in the drain of probe to the wash
tube has been well.
emptied, without
columnar liquid.
Figure 13-9 Sample probe wash tubes cleaning or emptying
622
Switch to the air

bubbles detected
status
Figure 13-10 Bubble detection statue
6) Tap Exit to automatically enter the "Phase-1 dispersion wash tube cleaning or emptying",
and empty the phase-1 dispersion wash tube of wash buffer 1, and continue to keep the
cap assembly of wash buffer 1 vacant. Set "Execution Times" to the default value, which
is 5. Tap Start to start execution. The screen prompts "Bubbles detected". Observe that
the inlet and outlet tubes of the wash tubes are empty, no columnar liquid remains. If there
is a small amount of residue, you can carry out five more execution processes, until the
requirements are met;
Phase-2
drain tubes
Phase-1
drain tubes
Phase-3
drain tubes
Figure 13-11 Inlet and outlet tubes
623
Visually inspect to ensure

that there is no residual
columnar liquid in the three
phases of drain tubes.
(Observe along the drain
tubes, including the inlet
and outlet tubes)
Figure 13-12 Three phases
Tap Exit to automatically enter the "Phase-2 dispersion wash tube cleaning or emptying", and
empty the phase-2 dispersion wash tube of wash buffer 1, and continue to keep the cap
assembly of wash buffer 1 vacant. Set "Execution Times" to the default value, which is 3. Tap
Start to start execution. Observe that the inlet and outlet tubes of the wash tubes are empty,
no columnar liquid remains. If there is a small amount of residue, you can carry out three more
execution processes, until the requirements are met;
7) Tap Exit to automatically enter the "Phase-3 dispersion wash tube cleaning or emptying",
and empty the phase-3 dispersion wash tube of wash buffer 1, and continue to keep the
cap assembly of wash buffer 1 vacant. Set "Execution Times" to the default value, which
is 3. Tap Start to start execution. Observe that the inlet and outlet tubes of the wash tubes
are empty, no columnar liquid remains. If there is a small amount of residue, you can carry
out three more execution processes, until the requirements are met;
8) Tap Exit to automatically enter the "Phase-1 dispensing probe cleaning or emptying", and
empty the phase-1 dispensing probe tube of wash buffer 1, and continue to keep the cap
assembly of wash buffer 1 vacant. Set "Execution Times" to the default value, which is 8.
Tap Start, the gripper grabs one cuvette from the lower right corner of the left cuvette box
to the dispersion carousel, and the instrument starts emptying the phase-1 dispensing
probe. The screen prompts "Bubbles detected". Observe that no columnar liquid remains
in the phase-1 dispensing probe tube. If there is a small amount of residue, you can carry
out eight more execution processes, until the requirements are met;
624
Phase 2
Phase 3
Phase 1
9) Tap Exit to automatically enter the "Phase-2 dispensing probe cleaning or emptying", and
empty the phase-2 dispensing probe tube of wash buffer 1, and continue to keep the cap
assembly of wash buffer 1 vacant. Set "Execution Times" to the default value, which is 8.
Tap Start to start emptying the phase-2 dispensing probe. The screen prompts "Bubbles
detected". Observe that no columnar liquid remains in the phase-2 dispensing probe tube.
If there is a small amount of residue, you can carry out eight more execution processes,
until the requirements are met;
10) Tap Exit to automatically enter "Phase-3 dispensing probe cleaning or emptying", and
empty the phase-3 dispensing tube of wash buffer 1, and continue to keep the cap
assembly of wash buffer 1 is vacant. Set the times to the default value, which is 13. Tap
Start to start emptying the phase-3 dispensing probe. The screen prompts Bubbles
detected. Observe that no columnar liquid remains in the phase-3 dispensing probe tube.
If there is a small amount of residue, you can increase 13 more execution times, until the
requirements are met;
11) Tap Exit to automatically enter "waste drain tube cleaning and emptying". Empty the waste
drain tube of wash buffer 1, and leave the cap assembly of wash buffer 1 vacant. Set
"Execution Times" to the default value, which is 2. Tap Start, the instrument grabs the
cuvette on the dispersion carousel to the waste drainage position, the waste drainage
probe moves to the bottom, and the instrument starts to empty the waste drain tube. The
prompt on the screen maintains "Bubbles detected".
12) Tap Exit to complete emptying the wash buffer tubes. Tap Continue to exit the screen.
625
13.2.4 Cleaning Wash Buffer Tubes with Ultra-Pure Water

Note: In this step, clean the tubes of wash buffer 1 and wash buffer 2 with ultra-pure water, and
place the cap assemblies of wash buffer 1 tube and wash buffer 2 tube in the ultra-pure water.
Because there are many overlapping parts in the wash buffer tubes, it is necessary to strictly
follow the procedure on the software screen. If a fault occurs midway, you need to restart the
procedure from beginning. For the steps that have completed cleaning, execute them according
to the “default times” only. For the tubes that have not been cleaned, you need to execute
cleaning according to the number of times required in the procedure. The specific procedure is
as follows.
Clean inner and outer walls of Clean dispersion carousel Clean inner and outer walls Clean phase-1 dispersion
the sample probe drain tubes - drain tubes - wash solution of sample probe - wash carousel drain tubes - wash
wash solution 2 (3 times) 2 (10 times) solution 1 (3 times) solution 1 (10 times)
Clean phase-2 dispersion Clean phase-3 dispersion Clean phase-1 dispersion Clean phase-2 dispersion
solution 1 (20 times) solution 1 (20 times) solution 1 (default times) solution 1 (default times)
Clean phase-3 dispersion Clean waste drainage wash

dispensing tubes - wash tubes - wash solution 1
solution 1 (default times) (default times)

1) Select Alignment -> Fluidics Alignment to enter the "13. Clean or Empty wash buffer
tubes" screen.
2) Tap Continue, follow the prompts on the screens, place a clean cuvette in the lower right
corner of the left tray, and tap OK to automatically go to step 2;
3) Tap Continue, the following prompt is displayed. Ensure that wash buffer 1 and wash
buffer 2 are connected to the ultra-pure water during the cleaning operation. Tap OK to
access the operation screen for cleaning and emptying:
626
First, perform "Sample probe wash tube cleaning and emptying", and prime and clean the
sample probe wash tube of wash buffer 2 with the ultra-pure water, and confirm that the cap
assembly of wash buffer 2 has been put into the ultra-pure water. Set "Execution Times" to 3.
Tap Start to start execution, and observe that the prompt on the screen becomes "No bubbles
detected". Fill the inner and outer walls of the sample probe wash tubes with liquid.
4) Tap Exit to access "dispersion wash tube cleaning and emptying", and prime and clean
the phase-1 dispersion wash tube of wash buffer 2, and keep the cap assembly of wash
buffer 2 in the ultra-pure water. Set "Execution Times" to 10. Tap Start to start execution,
and observe that the prompt on the screen maintains "Bubbles detected". Observe that
the phase-1 dispersion wash tubes are filled with liquid.
627
5) Tap Exit to access "sample probe wash tube cleaning and emptying" automatically, and
switch to the sample probe wash tube cleaning and priming of wash buffer 1 with ultra-
pure water Set "Execution Times" to 3. Tap Start to start execution, and observe that the
prompt on the screen becomes No bubbles detected.
6) Tap Exit to access "Phase-1 dispersion wash tube cleaning or emptying" automatically,
628
and clean the phase-1 dispersion wash tube of wash buffer 1 with ultra-pure water, and
keep the cap assembly of wash buffer 1 in the ultra-pure water. Set "Execution Times" to
10. Tap Start to start execution, and observe that the prompt on the screen becomes "No
bubbles detected" until execution is completed.
Phase-2
drain
tubes Phase-1
drain
tubes
Phase-3
drain
tubes
7) Tap Exit to access "Phase-2 dispersion wash tube cleaning or emptying automatically",
20. Tap Start to start execution, and observe that the prompt on the screen maintains "No
bubbles detected" and observe that the phase-2 dispersion wash tube is filled with liquid
until execution is completed.
8) Tap Exit to access "Phase-3 dispersion wash tube cleaning or emptying" automatically,
20. Tap Start to start execution, and observe that the prompt on the screen maintains "No
bubbles detected" and observe that the phase-2 dispersion wash tube is filled with liquid
until execution is completed.
9) Tap Exit to access "Phase-1 dispensing probe cleaning or emptying" automatically, and
clean the phase-1 dispensing tube of wash buffer 1 with ultra-pure water, and keep the
cap assembly of wash buffer 1 in the ultra-pure water. Set "Execution Times" to 8. Tap
Start. The gripper first grabs one cuvette from the lower right corner of the left cuvette box
to the dispersion carousel, and the instrument cleans and primes the phase-1 dispensing
probe. Observe that the prompt on the screen maintains "No bubbles detected" and
observe that the phase-1 dispensing probe tube is filled with liquid until execution is
completed.
629
Phase 2
Phase 3
Phase 1
10) Tap Exit to access "Phase-2 dispensing probe cleaning or emptying" automatically, clean
the phase-2 dispensing tube of wash buffer 1 with ultra-pure water, and keep the cap
assembly of wash buffer 1 in the ultra-pure water. "Execution Times" is set to 8 by default.
Tap Start to start phase-2 dispensing probe cleaning/priming, and observe that the prompt
on the screen maintains "No bubbles detected" and observe that the phase-2 dispensing
probe tube is filled with liquid until execution is completed.
11) Tap Exit to access "Phase-3 dispensing probe cleaning or emptying" automatically, clean
the phase-3 dispensing tube of wash buffer 1 with ultra-pure water, and keep the cap
assembly of wash buffer 1 in the ultra-pure water. "Execution Times" is set to 13 by default.
Tap Start to start phase-3 dispensing probe cleaning/priming, and observe that the prompt
on the screen maintains "No bubbles detected" and observe that the phase-3 dispensing
probe tube is filled with liquid until execution is completed.
12) Tap Exit to access "Waste drain tube cleaning or emptying" automatically, clean the waste
drain tube of wash buffer 1 with purified water, and keep the cap assembly of wash buffer
1 in the ultra-pure water. "Execution Times" is set to 2 by default. Tap Start. The instrument
grabs the cuvette in the dispersion carousel to the waste drainage position, the waste
drainage probe moves to the bottom, and the instrument starts waste drain tube
cleaning/priming, and observe that the prompt on the screen maintains "Bubbles detected".
13) Tap Exit to complete cleaning wash buffer tubes. Tap Continue to exit the screen.
13.2.5 Emptying Ultra-Pure Water from the Wash Waste Tubes

Note: This step requires to empty the ultra-pure water in the wash buffer tubes, keep the cap
assemblies of wash buffer 1 and wash buffer 2 vacant.
Because there are many overlapping parts of the wash buffer tubes, it is necessary to strictly
follow the procedures in the software screens. If a fault occurs midway, in order to ensure
thorough emptying, you are recommended to perform this procedure again from the beginning.
For the procedure that has been completed, execute the default times, and for the procedure
that has not been completed, execute it as required. The specific procedure is as follows
630
Empty inner and outer Clean and empty inner and
Empty dispersion carousel Empty phase-1 dispersion
walls of sample probe outer walls of sample
drain tubes - wash solution carousel drain tubes - wash
drain tubes - wash solution probe - wash solution 1
2 (default times) solution 1 (10 times)
2 (10 times) (10 times)
Empty phase-2 dispersion Empty phase-3 dispersion Empty phase-1 dispersion Empty phase-2 dispersion
solution 1 (10 times) solution 1 (10 times) solution 1 (10 times) solution 1 (10 times)
Empty phase-3 dispersion Empty waste drainage

dispensing tubes - wash wash tubes - wash solution
solution 1 (20 times) 1 (10 times)
The execution times when emptying the ultra-pure water are executed as the above figure. If
there is still a small amount of liquid accumulated in the tubes through visual inspection after
execution is completed, you may increase the execution times.
For specific execution procedure and requirements, see section 13.2.3 Empty Wash Buffer
from Wash Buffer Tubes . This section is not described here.
13.2.6 Cleaning and Emptying Waste Drain Tubes

Index: Clean and empty the condensate tube and waste drain tube of the reagent pot. After
emptying, there should be no columnar liquid in the tubes.
1) Select Alignment -> Fluidic Alignment -> 6. Detect Drain Tubes, and tap Continue to
go to the next step;
2) Tap Reagent Compartment Draining to access the operation screen. The Execution
Times is set to 10. Start execution. Observe that there is no columnar liquid remained in
the condensate tube and waste drain tube 2 of the reagent compartment. If there is,
increase execution times approximately, until the requirements are met. Also confirm that
631
there is no residual condensate in the refrigeration chamber. Exit the screen after
completing inspection, and proceed to the next step;
Observe the
tube status from
the right side on
the rear of
mixing
mechanism Observe the
status of the
two waste tubes
3) Tap Waste Drainage, and place the cuvette filled with water on the waste drainage position
according to the prompts, enter the operation interface, execute the waste drainage to
flush the waste drain tubes, and observe that there is no obvious discoloration and residual
color liquid in the tubes. Otherwise, repeat this step (place the cuvette with water) and
repeat flushing the tubes. After the flushing is completed, perform five additional emptying
operations. Finally, it is confirmed that the liquid in the tubes has been emptied, and there
is no residual columnar liquid. When exiting the screen, empty the cuvette according to
the prompt.
4) Select Continue to exit the procedure. Confirm that the cuvette in the waste drainage
position has been emptied.
632
13.2.7 Confirming Analyzer Model and SN

Select Alignment -> Others -> Common Functions. Enter the screen to confirm the system
Config Settings. Query [Analyzer Type] and [Analyzer SN], both of which should be consistent
with the label on the actual analyzer. If they are inconsistent, re-input and configure them if
necessary. If consistent, exit.
13.2.8 Emptying Cuvettes

Index: Empty the cuvettes on the dispersion carousel, mixing position, incubation position,
photometric position, and waste drainage position in the instrument.
1) Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Others
2) Enter the [5. Whole Unit Discarding Cuvette] procedure, tap Continue to empty the
cuvettes. The instrument automatically discards cuvettes, and empties the cuvettes in the
dispersion carousel, mixing position, incubation position, photometric position, and waste
drainage position.
3) Tap Continue and exit the procedure after resetting.
13.2.9 Checking Overflowing of the Dispersion Carousel

First confirm that the aspirate probe is in the high position (reset state), observe from the IO
633
port of the dispersion carousel (can be illuminated by flashlight), and rotate the dispersion
carousel (with gloves) to check whether there are dirty traces such as substrate or rust in the
hole of the dispersion carousel; if necessary, disassemble and clean the carousel. After
cleaning, you need to align the related mechanical position of the dispersion carousel.
Turn the dispersion

carousel and observe the
dispersion carousel holes
one by one
13.2.10 Checking the Dispersion Carousel Tubes and Moving
the Vertical Mechanism to the Bottom

Verify that the tubes and wires on the dispersion carousel have been snapped into the infusion
tubing clamps and the flat cable clamps. The tubes are not crushed or bent
634
The dispersion
carousel drain
tubes have been
snapped into the
infusion tubing
clamps
The tubes have been

placed into the flat cable
clamps, and the snaps
are in place
The dispersion carousel

drain tubes and
dispensing tubes have
been snapped into the
infusion tubing clamps
635
The dispersion carousel
drain tubes have been
snapped into the infusion
tubing clamps
The motor and sensor wires

are placed in two flat cable
clamps and the snaps are in
place
The tubes have been placed
into the flat cable clamps,
and the snaps are in place
Power on the instrument again, and select Alignment -> Dispersion System Alignment ->
Common Functions,. First tap Dispersion System Reset, the aspirate probe moves vertically
[to the bottom of the aspirate cuvette] (Note: Use the software to control the vertical mechanism
movement, and prohibit manually moving the vertical mechanism to the limit positions, thus
avoiding probe tip damaged by unsuitable probe position). Check that the dispersion carousel
tubes and wires are not pulled.
636
Immediately after the execution is completed, exit the operating software, and power off the
whole unit for subsequent cleaning;
Make sure that the position of the shielding cover should be in the shielding position. If not,
press it to the position by hand.
13.2.11 Empty and Clean

1) Empty the cuvette boxes
Pull out two cuvette box drawers and take out the cuvette boxes inside.
2) Dry the floater sensor assembly
a) Check the wash buffer,waste tank cover assembly, and waste floater assembly.
Check that the nuts are not loose. Then, clean and dry them.
b) Check the cap assemblies of wash buffer bottles: The tubes on the cap assembly of
wash buffer 1 bottle are marked with "1" on both ends, and the tubes on the cap
assembly of wash buffer 2 bottle are marked with "2" on both ends, and there is no
omission.
c) Make sure that the external waste sensor assembly, waste bottle cap assembly, and
wash buffer bottle cap assembly are dry before being packaged. If necessary, wipe
with a clean, dust-free cloth, dry them and place them into compact bags.
3) Clean the solid waste container
After emptying is completed, take out the solid waste container (carton) and the cuvettes
inside it, and check whether the five faces (up, down, left, right and back) inside the bracket
of the solid waste container are clean; if not, wipe them clean with a dust-free fiber cloth
(if necessary, you can wipe them with alcohol).
4) Clean the sample probe and swab
Move the sample probe to an easy-to-see position, and gently wipe the sample probe and
swab with a clean, dust-free fiber cloth. If there are stains, wipe them with a cotton swab
dipped in absolute alcohol.
637
13.2.12 Check the Incubation Module

Observe all the holes on the surface of the incubation module to check for signs of dirt or rust.
If there are signs of dirt or rust, wipe them off with a lint-free cloth.
13.2.13 Checking the Mixing Module

Observe the three cuvette holes on the mixing module to check for dirt and stains. If there are
stains and dirt, wipe them with a cotton swab dipped in absolute alcohol.
638
Figure 13-13 Wipe the mixing hole
Observe that there is no pigmentation and stains inside the wash well and the upper cover of
the wash well. If there is, wipe them with a cotton swab dipped in absolute alcohol.
13.2.14 Checking and Restoring after Emptying

1) Clean the water and wash buffer from the panel.
2) Open the sample tray cover and rotate the sample tray. Verify that all sample positions are
empty and free of dirt. If there is dirt, wipe it off with a lint-free cloth.
3) Open the reagent tray cover and rotate the reagent tray. Verify that all reagent positions
are empty and free of dirt or condensate. If there is dirt or condensate, wipe it off with a
lint-free cloth.
13.2.15 Check the Silk Screen of Sample Carousel

Open the sample carousel cover, manually rotate the sample rack, and visually inspect it. Start
from the intensive wash position counterclockwise. The silk screen of the sample carousel is 1-
10, 11-20, 21-30, 31-40, and 41-50, respectively. The silk screen of the sample carousel cannot
be misplaced or repeated.
13.2.16 Fixing the Dust Screen

The dust screen on the lower right side can be smoothly pulled out. Check there is no damage
or dust. If it is damaged, replace it. If there is dust, wash it with clean water and dry it, then put
it in the corresponding position and cover it with dust cover.
13.2.17 Sealing the Opening of Working Position

1) As shown in the figure below, seal the sample hole of the reagent pot with a TESA4298
tape (ivory white);
639
Seal the four

sampling ports
of carousel
2) Seal the IO port of the dispersion carousel with two TESA4298 tapes (ivory white), seal
the substrate mixing position with one piece of this tape, seal mixing positions 1 and 2 with
two tapes (the bottom notch is also sealed), seal the wash well with one piece of tape; as
shown below.
3) Cover the small hole on the incubation block with one opaque disk (048-007545-00) and
use one piece of TESA4298 tape (ivory white) to secure the sides of the PC sheet to the
incubation module. The sides are pulled and fixed on the Y-axis bottom plate of the gripper
and the motor of the incubation module, and the tape cannot be adhered to the foam of
the incubation module.
Seal the dispersion

IO port, three
mixing position
ports and wash
well port
Tighten and fix
two sides of
adhesive tape
Also seal the bottom

gaps of mixing
positions 1 and 2
Small hole cover plate
of incubation block
640
641
13.3 Packing Instrument

13.3.1 Checklist Before Packing
If the instrument needs to be packaged and transported, please confirm that the whole machine
has been exhausted and confirm that the contents in the table below have been completed and
the relevant accessories have been prepared.
Table 13-1 Checklist Before Packing
SN Check Item
The reagent carousel, sample carousel, and waste container assembly have been
1
emptied and cleaned.
The incubation module has been covered with a package, the dispersion IO port has
been sealed, three reaction cuvettes of the mixing mechanism have been sealed, the
2
wash wells have been sealed, and four aspirate probes of the reagent carousel have
been sealed.
3 The front door can be opened and closed flexibly and can be closed closely.
The drawer can be pushed and pulled smoothly, and there is no reaction cuvette box
4
in the drawer.
Open the small door and open the shielding cover, the places that can be seen are
5
clean, without stains and debris.
6 The perimeter of the shell is clean and free of paint-shedding.
The edges of the cover are chamfered without sharp edges and corners, and there
7
are no fingerprint marks inside and outside the cover.
8 The screws used on the shell are the same, without looseness
9 There are no scratches or paint-shedding over the shell.
10 The rubber cover of the operation table is installed
11 The network cable and tubes have been removed and packed.
12 The power switches are all off.
No high temperature adhesive tape in the solid waste container blocks the reflective
13
sensor
Are the excipients for instrument packing ready? Excipient List
Tape. TESA4298 tape ivory white, 18 mm X 50 (Self-provided)
Stretch film. Width 450 mm X Thickness 0.02 mm (Self-provided)
Roll foam. 53M*1M*8 mm (Self-provided)
Bubble film. Width 1m. Bubble diameter 10 mm (Self-provided)
14 Cable ties (Common tools, self-provided)
Transparent sealed bag (Self-provided)
Sealing transparent tape (Self-provided)
Computer box (Retained after the previous packing)
Accessory package box (Retained after the previous packing)
Fixing brackets for various components of the instrument (Retained after the previous
642
SN Check Item
packing)
Main unit packing box and fixing screws (Retained after the previous packing)
After the above items are confirmed correctly, follow the installation guide in reverse. The
specific steps are as follows:
13.3.2 Flowchart of Instrument Packing
The dispersion
Checking Before Fixing Gripper and
vertical mechanism Fixing Sample Probe
Packing Cuvette Box
moves to the bottom
Wrapping Main Unit

Fixing Waste Fixing Transparent
Fixing Main Unit with Stretch Film and
Drainage Assembly Cover and Desktop
Sealing
Packing Computer
Packing Whole Unit
Mainframe and
and Accessories
Display
Figure 13-14 Flowchart of Instrument Packing
13.3.3 Checking That the Dispersion Vertical Mechanism
Moves to the Bottom

Confirm that the dispersion aspirate vertical mechanism has moved to the bottom, and if it is
not at the lowest position, the aspirate probe is not lifted by pressure;
Figure 13-15 The Dispersion Vertical Mechanism Moves to the Bottom
13.3.4 Fixing Sample Probe

1) Loosen the screws on both sides of the top cover (Keep the rubber cover), manually press
643
the lock positions on both sides of the front cover and remove the front cover; take care
not to loosen the wiring on both sides, as shown below
2) Push the X-axis of the sample probe to the left side, first fix the horizontal fixing plate of
the probe assembly to the bottom plate of the probe assembly with two screws; do not
tighten the two screws; then fix the horizontal fixing plate of the probe assembly and the
Z-axis of the sample probe with one screw. (Be careful not to drop the screws into the
instrument during operation);
3) Take a 15 mm tape strip and paste it from the left side to the right of the feeding pin swab
installation plate to seal the swab;
4) Raise the Z-axis of the sample probe. First fix the vertical fixing plate of the probe assembly
to the Z-axis of the sample probe with two screws. Then fix the vertical fixing plate of the
assembly with one screw. The arm of the sample probe cannot be deformed by pulling.
5) Reinstall the front cover, confirm that the connectors at both sides are inserted, fix the
screws on both sides of the top cover, and cover the rubber cover.
Loosen the screws on

both sides of the top
cover and push the front
panel open. Note: Do not
loosen the wiring on
both sides
Horizontal fixing plate of

probe assembly
Three M4X8 cross screw

assemblies
644
Vertical fixing plate of
probe assembly
Two M4X8 cross One M4X12 cross

screw assemblies screw assembly
Figure 13-16 Schematic Diagram of Fixing Sample Probe
13.3.5 Fixing Gripper and Cuvette Box

1) Fix the Z-axis fixing sheet metal with 2 screws.
2) Fix the X-axis fixing block to the X-axis mounting plate; do not tighten the screws
temporarily; fix the X-axis fixing block to the Z-axis rack with screws; do not tighten the
screws temporarily. Note: Attach the X-axis fixing block to the Z-axis rack and the X-axis
mounting plate, and then tighten the screws.
3) Loosen the two screws in the middle of the lower part of the solid waste container welding
piece, place the cuvette box fixing plate, and use the two screws to fix the cuvette box
fixing plate and the solid waste container welding piece to the rack together.
4) Fix the lower part of the Y-axis fixing plate and the cuvette box fixing plate onto the bottom
plate of the cuvette box with one screw. Then, align the upper end of the Y-axis fixing block
with the screw hole of the X-axis beam and fix them with a screw (be careful not to deform
the X-axis of the gripper), and finally fix the left side of the cuvette box fixing plate with one
screw.
645
Cross recessed pan head

screw M2.5X12
Z-axis fixing
block
M3*8 screw assembly
X-axis X-axis Z-axis rack

mounting plate fixing plate
Fix the X-axis fixing block to the Z-axis rack with screws. The
screws are not tightened.
Secure the X-axis fixing block to the Note: Tighten the screws after attaching the X-axis fixing block
X-axis mounting plate with screws to the Z-axis rack and the X-axis mounting plate.
Figure 13-17 Schematic Diagram of Fixing Gripper
646
Cuvette box
fixing plate
Fix the cuvette box fixing plate and

the solid waste container welding
piece together onto the rack with two
screws.
Figure 13-18 Schematic Diagram of Fixing Cuvette Box
13.3.6 Fixing Waste Drainage Assembly

Place the protective pad over the waste position above the incubation module and press it with
the shielding cover of the waste drainage assembly. Use the waste drainage fixing plate to
press the shielding cover bracket above the waste drainage assembly, fix the waste drainage
fixing plate to the rack with two screws, and adjust the angle and upper and lower positions of
the waste drainage fixing plate to ensure that the shielding cover and the protective pad have
been pressed; then tighten the screws. The shielding cover and the bracket cannot be deformed
by pressure.
647
M4X8 cross screw Waste drainage

Protective pad (048-007619-00)
assembly fixing plate
Shielding Incubation
cover module
Figure 13-19 Schematic Diagram of Fixing Waste Discharge Assembly
13.3.7 Fixing Transparent Cover and Desktop

1) Use 3 tapes to secure the covers of reagent carousel, sample carousel and substrate bottle
with the desktop. See Figure 13-20.
2) Under the right side panel, remove the dust screen cover, make sure that the dust screen
can be pulled out smoothly, confirm that there is no dust, push it back and cover the cover,
and then seal the dust screen with two tapes. See Figure 13-21
3) Place bubble films (cut to a width of about 10 mm) on both sides of the transparent cover
in contact with the panel; then install the transparent cover in place, open the left front
small door, and screw the stainless steel hexagon socket head cap screws from bottom to
top.
4) Close the small door and use two tapes to glue the small door with the right side panel.
See Figure 13-22
5) Finally, fix the left transparent cover to the shell with 4 tapes and stick the small front door.
See Figure 13-22
648
Secure the covers of reagent carousel, sample carousel

and substrate bottle with 3 tapes
Figure 13-20 Fixing Covers of Reagent Carousel/Sample Carousel/Substrate Bottle
Pull out the dust screen smoothly

and confirm that there is no dust
Seal the dust screen with tape
Tighten the M3X12 hex socket screw with spring washer

from the bottom up
Figure 13-21 Fixing the Dust Screen
649
At the corner, the

bubble film separates
the transparent cover
and the panel
Place bubble films at the Place bubble films at the

bottoms of both sides of Secure the transparent cover
to the shell with 4 tapes bottoms of both sides of
transparent cover transparent cover
Figure 13-22 Fixing Shell Shielding Cover and Small Door
13.3.8 Fixing Main Unit

1) Place the pallet in the predetermined position: the F letter corresponds to the front of the
instrument.
2) Manually lift or put the instrument onto the bottom pallet of the wooden box by forklift; place
the instrument in the right position; the front of the instrument is on the F letter side; sink
the four feet of the main unit into the four grooves of the pallet.
3) Insert the door protection foam under the middle of the front of the instrument and plug it
in place against the small door.
4) To the inlet and outlet of the fluidic on the rear side of the instrument, use four plugs to
tighten the interfaces of wash buffer 1, wash buffer 2, waste 1, and waste 2, respectively.
5) Place the parameter configuration table and biochemical service mark into the plastic bag
of the operation manual, place them above the protective cover, and fix them with two
tapes.
650
There is an F letter in the front of
Plug the door protection foam in place
the instrument.
Figure 13-23 Schematic Diagram of Placing Main Unit
Tighten the four fluidic Fix the parameter configuration table and biochemical
interfaces with 4 joint plugs service identification package with two tapes
Figure 13-24 Fixing Fluidic Outlets and Parameter Configuration Table
13.3.9 Wrapping Main Unit with Stretch Film

1) Place the accessory foam on the work surface, and place the accessories into each
partition of the foam;
2) Wrap the main unit with a wrapping film, first from the lower side to the upper side, and
then wrap the shielding cover diagonally (The whole machine is wrapped around tightly
with 3 to 4 layers of stretch films) , and expose the handles.
3) Place the wrapping paper cardboard on the floor; do not place the cardboard in reverse;
distinguish between Chinese and English: the storage and transportation mark on the
Chinese/English wrapping paper cardboard is different, and the Chinese wrapping paper
cardboard has Chinese character description.
651
Stretch
film
Foam for
accessories
Figure 13-25 Install Accessory Foams and Wrap the Instrument with Stretch Films
Wrapping paper
card
Pay attention to the

storage and
transportation mark, and
distinguish between
Chinese and English.
Figure 13-26 Instrument Wrapping Paper Cardboard- Attention to Mark
13.3.10 Packaging Whole Unit and Accessories

Insert the side buffer foam into the left and right sides of the instrument, and make sure that the
cushioning material is inserted into the bottom to stuck the handles of the instrument.
652
Side cushion foam Stuck four handles.
Figure 13-27 Install Buffer Foam and Stuck Handles
13.3.11 Sealing and Labeling

1) Place a filling foam on top of the instrument.
2) After the top cover is packaged, bundle the instrument with straps, and the straps form a
"well" shape, and a total of four straps are used.
3) Fold the packing list in half crosswise and put it into the plastic bag of the packing list. Then
stick the plastic bag next to the main unit sticker of the small side plate.
Top foam
Figure 13-28 Place Top Foam and Pack and Seal the Packing Box
13.3.12 Packaging Computer Mainframe and Display

1) Attach a warning label to the hand hole on both sides of the box of the computer mainframe
to seal the hand hole.
2) After attaching the serial number label on the box, bundle the box with four straps, as
shown in the figure (Above).
653
3) Bundle the display box with two straps.
Figure 13-29 Packaging Computer Mainframe and Display
13.4 Instrument Relocation

13.4.1 Overview
In the daily operation of the clinical laboratory, the instrument may need to be relocated in any
of the following cases:
Instrument Relocation Outside a Hospital
 The clinical laboratory is relocated due to hospital relocation or the instrument is
transferred to another branch.
 The instrument is donated to a subordinate township health center.
Instrument Relocation Inside a Hospital
 The clinical laboratory needs refit and the instrument needs to be moved to a temporary
place.
 The clinical laboratory is moved to a new room or a new building.
Relocation goal: Relocation may affect the normal use and performance of the instrument. The
goal of instrument relocation is to ensure that the instrument performance meets requirements
via alignment and verification of engineers after the entire instrument is relocated.
13.4.2 Preparations
Figure 13-30 List of tools and fixtures
1 M8 socket wrench 5 Phillips screwdriver

2 Adjustable wrench 6 Flat-head screwdriver
3 Blade 7 Flashlight
4 Packing machine
Table 13-2 Check prior to packing and relocation
654
No. Check Item Requirement
Labels are attached and the
1 Check whether all labels are attached.
panel is clean.
The reagent carousel and waste
Check whether the reagent carousel and waste
2 container are emptied and
container are emptied and cleaned.
cleaned.
The substrate bottle position is
Check whether the substrate bottle position is
cleaned and an empty clean
3 cleaned and whether the pierce needle is
substrate bottle is used to protect
protected using a clean substrate bottle.
the pierce needle.
Whether the reaction carousel assembly and
4 the dispersion carousel assembly have been They are emptied.
emptied
Check whether the instrument is emptied. (For The instrument is already
5
the emptying process, emptied.
Check whether the front door can be opened It can be opened and closed
6
and closed smoothly. smoothly.
Check whether the drawer can be opened and The drawer can be opened and
7 closed smoothly and whether there is a tray closed smoothly and there is no
bracket inside the drawer. tray bracket inside the drawer.
Check whether places exposed after the front
8 Clean
door is removed are cleaned.
Check whether the shield cover is cleaned and The shield cover is cleaned and
9
whether the paint coating peels off. no paint coating peels off.
Check whether the rims of the shield have
There are no finger marks and
chamfers or sharp edges, and whether there are
10 no chamfers or sharp edges
finger marks on the interior and exterior of the
exist on the rims.
shield.
Check whether the shield can be closed It can be opened and closed
11
smoothly and whether it can remain open. smoothly, and can remain open.
Check whether screws used on the shield cover The screws are consistent and
12
are consistent and whether they are loose. are tightened.
Check whether there are scratches on the shield
13 N/A
cover and whether paint coating peels off.
Check whether rubber covers on the panel are
14 The rubber covers are installed.
installed.
Check whether network cables and fluidic tubes
15 They are taken down.
are taken down and packed.
Check whether the power switch is in the off
16 The switch is in the off position.
state.
Check whether the reflective sensors of the
17 waste container and shield cover are covered by They are not covered.
the high temperature tape.
655
No. Check Item Requirement
Check whether the liquid inlets of the fluidic
18 The inlets are sealed.
interfaces are sealed.
Check whether all sample holes, mixer holes,
19 gripping holes, cleaning holes on the panel are All holes are sealed.
all sealed.
13.4.3 Instrument Relocation Procedure
Instrument Relocation
ProcEdure
Empty the whole unit.
No Is it Yes
relocated inside the
hospital?
Pack the entire

Fasten moving parts.
instrument.
Transfer the
Transfer the
instrument to the
instrument to the new
unloading place of the
installation site.
target hospital.
Unload and unpack

the instrument, and Perform the
transfer it to the new installation procedure.
installation site.
Figure 13.1 Instrument Relocation Flowchart
656
14 Appendix
14.1 Prepare Installation Reagent Pack
Please prepare these consumables according to the following steps.
 The consumables and reagent are prepared by the agent.
 Service personnel prepare the AP enzyme and acid wash solution according to the Order
Number.
 Two clean substrate bottles accompanied with the instrument can be used directly.
 Use the cuvettes and solid waste container in the accessory kit.
The solution required for installation should be prepared first as follows:
No. Name Quantity Code Function Solutions Person iCharge

1 Wash buffer 2 tanks / Consumable, Notify the Distributor, Service
dispersion agent to personnel
2 Substrate 2 bottles / Consumable, purchase
Luminous before
reagent installation
3 Detergent C 1 bottle / Consumable,
wash solution
4 Reagent 1 / Clinic precision
5 Calibrator 1 / test
6 Control 1 /
7 Acid wash solution 2 bottles 105- Wash substrate Request it Service personnel
(System Wash 009143-00 tubes according
Solution) to PN
8 AP enzyme(5ml) 1 box 105- Basic
(System 009141-00 Performance
Detection Test
Solution)
10 Clean substrate 2 pieces 105- Wash substrate Shipped N/A
bottle 005389-00 tubes with
11 Cuvette 2 trays / Consumable, instrument N/A
reaction
12 Solid Waste 1 piece / Consumable, N/A
Container holding
discarded
cuvettes
13 Ultra Pure Water some / Wash substrate the user N/A
tubes prepared
657
A Service Reports and Tool List

A.1 CL-900i&CL-920i Error Information Feedback Form
CL-900i&CL-920i
Error Information Feedback Form (V1.0).doc
A.2 Tool list
Tool List.xlsx
P/N: 046-013105-00(8.0)
658

Manual de Servicio CLIA 900

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Servicio CLIA 900

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CL-900i Series

Thank you for purchasing the CL-900i/CL-920i/CL-960i/CL-980i chemiluminescence

Product name: chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzer

Intellectual Property Statement

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

 the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

 Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.

 Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.

 Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.

 Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or

 Others not caused by instrument or part itself.

Customer service department

SyncNavi, GQ-Ana, One-touchIP, Holo-IS, Opt-VRA, SuperVE-Cine, NFP-DSC, iTouch,

Warranty and Maintenance Service

After-sales Service Unit

 Personnel who carry out the daily operations of the system

Electric Shock Hazards

Moving Parts Hazards

Reagent and Wash Solution Hazards

 Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.

System Disposal Hazards

Removal of Analyzer from Use for Repair or Disposal

Changing Waste Tank

Electromagnetic Noise Precautions

 Operate the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate

 Do not uncover the reagent carousel when the system is in operation.

Maintenance and Servicing Precautions

 Load samples to correct positions on the sample carousel before the

 If liquids such as the reagent and sample are accidentally splashed

 Do not use a cleaning agent or disinfectant that may chemically react

Sample Handling System

Data Archiving Precautions

External Equipment Precautions

Tube and Liquid Container Precautions

Instrument Labels and Silkscreen

Non-Warning Labels and Silkscreen

In Vitro Diagnostic Equipment

Environment-friendly Use Period

Power supply requirements

Serial No.: RJ-36102421

Cloud Service Label

Mindray cloud service

Reagent Usage Description

Interfaces for fluid connection

Wash buffer 1 Waste sensor Waste 1

Wash buffer 2 Waste 2

Moving Parts Warning

Probe Collision Warning

Shielding Cover Warning

Electric Shock Warning

Electric Shock Warning (Wire Label)

Names and Content Identification of Hazardous Substances or

Lead Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Polybrominated Polybrominated

Figure 1-1 Analyzer

1.2 Analyzing Unit

Board Dispersion Mixing Sampling Power

Cuvette Gripper Substrate

Figure 1-2 Overview

1.3 Hardware structure

Table 1-1 Main Functions of Each Unit

Unit Name Function

1.4 System specification

System structure The chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzer consists of the

Sample type Serum, plasma and other body fluids.